The voyages and travells of the ambassadors sent by Frederick, Duke of Holstein, to the Great Duke of Muscovy and the King of Persia begun in the year M.DC.XXXIII. and finish'd in M.DC.XXXIX : containing a compleat history of Muscovy, Tartary, Persia, and other adjacent countries : with several publick transactions reaching near the present times : in VII. books. Whereto are added the Travels of John Albert de Mandelslo (a gentleman belonging to the embassy) from Persia into the East-Indies ... in III. books ... / written originally by Adam Olearius, secretary to the embassy ; faithfully rendered into English, by John Davies.

MANDELSLO's TRAVELS INTO THE INDIES. (Book 2)

The Second Book. (Book 2)

THe English President,* 1.1 Mr. Metwold, who had resign'd his charge in the Indies to his Successour, Mr. Fremling, having taken all requisite or∣der for our Voyage, went the first day of Ianuary, 1639. to take his leave of the Sulthan,* 1.2 who receiv'd him very kindly,* 1.3 and presented him with a Vestment of Brocadoe, the Collar whereof was made of two Martins Skins with Sables, which he then had about him; as also many other rare things, which he entreated him to keep for his sake. At our coming out of the Sulthans Palace, we were received into a Shallop, which brought us aboard the Mary, then lying in the Road, two Leagues from the mouth of the River. The new President, and the chiefest of the English Offi∣cers, accompanied us into the Ship, where they stayed three dayes, entertaining and treat∣ing one another, and drowning in good Wine the affliction which was to ensue upon so long a separation.

We set sail the fifth,* 1.4 two hours before day, and got at night in sight of the City of Da∣man, where we found one of our Ships which was gone before us, to take up a Portuguez Vessel that was to go along with us to Goa. The Governour sent us a Vessel of Wine, about the bigness of a Barrel, and some other refreshments, notwithstanding the siege which the King of Decam, his Neighbour, then maintain'd against the place, but with little good success, in regard the Haven being not block'd up, the Indians could not prevent the send∣ing in of relief into the City, even in the day time.

The Kingdom of Decam, or rather Cuncam, for so it is more commonly called, though from its Metropolis it sometimes gets the name of Visiapour, reaches all along that Coast, from Ingediva, which lies within twelve leagues of Goa, towards the South, to a place na∣med Siffarde. The Neighbouring Princes are, on the North-side, the King Nisamsa, who is possess'd of the Country which lies between the Province of Dolte babth, with∣in the Kingdom of Decam, and the Kingdom of Bailama on Daman side; and on the East, the King of Benghenal, whose residence is in the City of Golcanda, which is corruptly cal∣led Golconda.

The chief Maritime Cities of the Kingdom of Decam, are Geytapour, Rasapour, Cara∣patan, and Dabul; but the Metropolis of the Kingdom is Visiapour, eighty Leagues from Dabul, and eighty four from Goa.

The way from Goa to Visiapour lies according to the following direction, which we

thought fit to insert here, purposely to take occasion by that means to discover a good part of the Country.

As soon as you come out of Goa,* 1.5 you cross the River Madre de dios, to get into the Country of the King of Visiapour, in which the first place you come to is the City of Dit∣cauly, three Leagues from Goa. The Governour of this City is Governour also of the Fort of Ponda, which is upon the same River. From Ditcauly to Danda are counted six Leagues.

This City is of a competent largeness,* 1.6 and hath very fair Streets. It is seated upon the River Dery, which falls into the Sea near those Isles, which the Portuguez call Islas quemadas. Its Inhabitants are Decanins and Benjans, who traffick very much at Goa.

From Danda to the Mountain of Balagatta,* 1.7 are nine Leagues, and you pass through the Villages of Amby and Herpoli, and at the foot of the Mountain, through that of Amboly. This Mountain reaches along the Kingdom of Cuncam, as far as the Coasts of Coromandel; and there on the top of it Plains, whose fertility is equal to that of the most pleasant Valleys.

From Amboly, to the Village of Herenekassi,* 1.8 upon the River of the same name, there are eleven Leagues, and within Cannon shot of it, you pass through the Village of Berouly,* 1.9 which lies in a Valley between the Mountains of Balagatta. Two Leagues thence, you come to the Village of Werserée;* 1.10 three Leagues thence, to that of Outor;* 1.11 and six Leagues and a half further, to that of Berapour;* 1.12 half a League thence, to that of Matoura,* 1.13 and a League thence, to that of Calingra.* 1.14 About five hundred paces from Calingra, you come to the Village of Kangir, and ere you get much further, to a Hamlet, which hath no other name then that of Bary, which is given to all those places that have no particu∣lar name.

About a League thence is the Village of Worry,* 1.15 and half a League further that of At∣trowad,* 1.16 near which, upon an eminent place, there is a very magnificent Pagode, of the Countrey, or Mosquey, which may be seen at a very great distance. About two Leagues and a half from this Pagode, you turn upon the left hand, and go through the Village of Badaraly* 1.17 to Kerwes,* 1.18 which is also two Leagues and a half from Badaraly. From Kerwes to Skeokory are accounted two Leagues;* 1.19 and from Skeokory, to a very sumptuous Benjane Pagode, five Leagues.

From this Pagode may be discovered, at a great distance, the Castle of Mirsis, two leagues thence, upon the left hand, and you go thence to Rajebag,* 1.20 which is about a league distant from the said Pagode. Rajebag is a very great City, and drives a great trade in Pepper, which the Inhabitants transport to Bisnager, and elsewhere.

It is part of the Dowry of the Queen of Visepour, who hath there a Governour un∣der her.

About a League from Rajebag, you come to a very noble Well; about two Leagues thence, you cross the River Cugny; and about half a League further you come to the Ci∣ty of Gotteuy.* 1.21 You leave it on the left hand, yet go through one Gate of it, to pass through the Villages of Goetesi and Omgar, which are but about five hundred paces thence; and about half a League further, you come to the great River Corstena, which runs through the whole Kingdom of Decam, as far as Masulypatan. About a League and a half from the River, you go through the Village of Eynatour, and not far thence, through that of Ka∣terna, and thence to those of Tangly and Erary, and so to the River Agery, which is distant thence about a League and a half. About three Leagues further you come to the City of Atteny, which is so considerable as to be a common Market to all the adjacent Country, whence are daily brought to it abundance of all sorts of provisions. About four Leagues thence, you come to the Village of Bardgie, and at three and a half further, pass through the Village of Agger, which is within three Leagues of the City of Talsengbe, which is di∣stant from that of Homoware three other Leagues, and thence there are as many to the Ci∣ty of Ticota, which is within six Leagues of Visapour.

Before you come to the chief City, you pass through the Villages of Nouraspour and Sirrapour, which are in a manner its Suburbs, and whereof the former was heretofore the ordinary residence of the King Ibrahim Schach, who reign'd at the beginning of this last Age: but now it is wholly ruin'd, and the Materials of its Palace and great Houses are convey'd thence for the carrying on of those which are building at Visiapour.

The City of Visiapour is of such largeness, that it is above five Leagues in compass. The Walls, which are very high, are of Free-stone, encompass'd with a great Ditch, and several Fortifications, mounted with above a thousand great Pieces, of all sorts, Iron and Brass.

The Kings Palace is in the midst of the City, from which it is divided by a double Wall, and two Ditches, being above 3500. paces in compass. He who commanded there in the time of Sulthan Mamedh Idelshach, the Son of Ibrahim, was called Nammouth-chan, by Countrey an Italian, born at Rome. His command extended also over the City, and the 5000. men who kept Garrison therein, besides the 2000. who were the constant Garrison of the Castle. The City hath five distinct Suburbs, where the principal Merchants have their habitations, and particularly in that of Schanpour, where live most of the Jewellers. The other Suburbs are called Gurapour, Ibrahimpour, Alapour and Bomnenaly. The Inha∣bitants are Decanins, that is, of the Kingdom of Decam, or Benjans, Moguls, and Ientives, of whom an account hath been given before.

To go from Visiapour to Dabul, you return the same way as far as the City of Atteny, whence you go to the Village of Agelle, which is two Leagues distant from it, and thence to the City of Arecq, which is six Leagues and a half from Agelle. From Arecq to the City of Berce are three Leagues, and thence to Mirsie three Leagues. This City, which is called also Mirdsi, and Mirisgie, is large, but not very populous, having, on the North-side, a Castle, so well fortifi'd, that the Mogul, who sometime besieg'd it with all the Forces of his Kingdom, was forc'd to raise the Siege. In this place are also to be seen the Tombs of two Kings of Delly, who were enterr'd there above five hundred years since. The Inha∣bitants of the City, as also those of the Country thereabouts, have a great veneration for that place. From Mirdsi to the Village of Epour are two Leagues, and thence to the City of Graeen three.* 1.22 It is not easily decided, whether it be one City or two, inasmuch as it is divided only by the great River Corsena, the distance between both parts being about 800. paces; and there are so many houses on either side of the River, that they may be taken for two considerable Cities, though one be much less then the other From the River to the Village of Toncq, are counted two Leagues and a half; thence to that of Astava one, and thence to the City of Asta two Leagues. Between this last Village and the City, there is a Hamlet, which is called Barry; •• but it is to be observ'd, that this name is given to all those places which have not any in particular, as we said before. The City of Asta is very considerable for its trading, and hath a noble Market, where may be had all sorts of provisions. The Mogul, who sometime came as far as this place with his Army, hath left behind him sufficient marks of the devastation which attends the marches of such numer∣ous Armies.

Having left Asta, you come to the great City of Ballouwa,* 1.23 which is distant from it three Leagues; and three more thence to those O••ren and Isselampour,* 1.24 which lye distant one from the other not above a Cannon-shot. You leave the former on the right hand, and the other, which hath a strong Castle, and its particular Governour, on the left. Two Leagues from Isselampour, lies the Village of Taffet,* 1.25 and three thence, that of Cassegam,* 1.26 whence there are above two Leagues to the City of Calliar,* 1.27 which is wholly destroy'd. Two Leagues thence, there is a little Village called Galoure,* 1.28 whence you pass through the Village of Winge,* 1.29 and afterwards by the City of Qualampour,* 1.30 where much Linnen is made, and by that of Domo,* 1.31 to the City of Tamba,* 1.32 which is six Leagues from Galoure. The City of Tamba is consi∣derable both for its largeness, and its being very populous. It lies on the other side of a River, the name whereof I could not learn; for that of Coyna, which they give it, is a ge∣neral name, and signifies only a great River. The Inhabitants are Benjans and Ientives, who live by Commerce and Tillage.

From the City of Tamba to the Village of Morel are two Leagues, and thence to that of Suppero two Leagues; to Belour four; and thence to the Town of Werad two Leagues.* 1.33 This Town lies nine Leagues from the Mountains of Balagatta, and there is not far from it a Village, called Patan, which was sometime the retreat of a famous Robber named Hiewo∣gby, who made all he took pay a certain Ransome: and when ever notice was brought him of any design against his person, he got into the Mountain, whither it was impossible to pursue him. From Werad to the Village of Helewacko, and the River which runs by it, are counted above three Leagues. This River, which comes down from the City of Chau∣ry, which is thirty six L••agues distant from this Village, hath no other name then that of the Village, though they give it also that of Coyna, as being indeed the greatest of any in the Kingdom of Cuncam. From the River to the Village of Gattamatta, which is with∣in the Mountains of Balagatta, are three Leagues; and thence to the Village of Pory three more. This Village is seated at the foot of the Mountain, which is at that place very rough and craggy. Thence to the Village of Camburley are two Leagues, and thence to that of Chipolone two more: this last Village lies upon the River Ghoyhbeer, which falls into that which runs by Hel••wacko; whence it comes, that those who go to Dabul by wa∣ter embark at that place, Dabul being sixteen Leagues from it. At the same place they also

embark all the Merchandises which are transported to all parts of the Kingdom, paying a Larin and a half upon a Candy, which comes to four Quintals, or four hundred weight and a half carriage.

The City of Dabul is seated upon the River Kalewacko,* 1.34 at seventeen degrees, forty five minutes, on this side the Line, though Linschoten puts it at eighteen degrees. It is with∣out doubt one of the most ancient Cities of the whole Kingdom; but now it hath neither Gates nor Walls, and all its Fortifications consists in two Batteries, on the Rive-side, upon which there are four Iron Guns. The Wood, which lies on the left hand as you go into the River, represents a great Castle; and at the foot of the same Wood may be discover'd a white Tower, which serves for a Pagode or Mosquey, and is an infallible direction to Pi∣lots. The entrance into the River is somewhat difficult, there being at the mouth of it a Sand-bank, which at low-water is dry; so that as you go in, you must alwayes keep to∣wards the South, in regard that, even at low-water, you have on that side between five and six fathom water, unless it be at the very mouth of the River, where you have not above twelve or fourteen foot water at most. The Road is good within a League of the River, but it is incomparably better four Leagues thence, in the Bay of Zanquizara. Twelve Leagues thence lyes the Haven or Road of Ceitapour, which is within twenty Leagues of Goa, at seventeen degrees, ten minutes, and is no doubt the best on all the Coast; for casting Anchor behind the Island, which shelters it, you need not fear being expos'd to any wind. Three Leagues thence lyes the City of Rasapour,* 1.35 which is one of the chiefest maritime Cities of the Kingdom of Cuncam. The Bay of Wingurla, nineteen Leagues from Rasa∣pour, and three from Islas quemadas, is a convenient Haven, but we shall forbear any further description thereof, in regard it is not our design at present to afford materials for a Mari∣time Map of those parts.

The Inhabitants of Dabul are either Pagans or Mahumetans, whose principal trading is in Salt, which is brought thither from Oranubammara, as also in Pepper. Heretofore there were set forth thence several Vessels for the Gulf of Persia, and the Red-sea; but now their Commerce that way is so inconsiderable, that they hardly send out three or four wretched bottoms for Gamron. The Custom paid there is three and a half upon the hun∣dred; but the English pay only a moyety thereof.

The Inhabitants of the Kingdom of Cuncam or Decam, though they are for the most part Benjans, eat any kind of flesh, unless it be that of an Oxe, Cow, Buffle, or wild Oxe, and a Swine. They have a certain veneration for the Oxe and the Cow; but Swines∣flesh is an abomination to them. As to their manner of life, their Marriages, Entertain∣ments, Purifications and other Ceremonies, they imitate therein the Benjans of Guzuratta. Their Houses are of Straw, and the Doors so low, that a Man cannot get in without stoop∣ing. All that's to be seen within them is only a Mat, on which they lie in the night, and a pit in the ground, wherein they beat their Rice. Their habit is the same with that of the other Benjans, save that their Shooes, which they call Alparcas, are of wood, ty'd up over the Instep with straps of Leather. Their Children go naked till they come to seven or eight years of age, and they are for the most part by profession Gold-smiths: There are also among them some who work in Brass: they have Physitians, Barbers, Chirurge∣ons, Carpenters and Masons, who work for the Mahumetans, the other Benjans, and the Parsis, whereof there is a greater number in those parts, then there is of Decanins and Canarius. They make use of the same Armes as the Indosthans do, and they have this common with them, that they are not so good as either those of Turkey or Europe.

Their principal Commerce consists in Pepper, which is transported by Sea into Persia, to Surat, and into Europe; as also in provisions, wherewith all the neighbouring Provin∣ces are thence supply'd•• There are made also in those parts great quantities of Linnen∣cloath, which is transported by Sea out of the Kingdom; and they traffick much by land with the Inhabitants of Indosthan, Golcanda, and the Coasts of Coromandel, whither they carry Cotton-clothes, and Silk-stuffes. There are abundance of Jewellers at Visiapour, and there is found thereabouts great quantity of Pearls; but it is not there they are to be∣had cheapest, since they are brought thither from other places. There is also abun∣dance of Lacque made in the Mountains of Balagatta; but it is not so good as that of Gu∣zuratta.

The Portuguez drive a great trade there, especially with the Merchants of Ditcauly and Bauda, which lye but three or four Leagues from Goa, buying Pepper at seven Ryals the Quintal, or hundred weight, and at eight, when they pay for it in Stuffes, or some slight Commodities made of Iron, as Snuffers, Hinges, &c. made in Europe.

There is in the Kingdom of Cuncam a certain people called Venesars,* 1.36 who buy the

Wheat and Rice, which is brought to the Market, in Cities, once a week, and sell it again in the Country of Indosthan, and the other neighbouring Provinces, into which they go with Caffilas, or Caravans, of five or six, and sometimes nine hundred or a thousand Beasts loaden; with which they carry their Families, especially their Wives, who are as expert at their Bows and Arrows as the Men, and by that means becomes dreadful to the Rasboutes, who never durst set upon them, nor yet the Couliers, who exercise their robberies on all without any distinction, upon this encouragement, that the Rajas, who should punish them, protect and connive at them.

There are two sorts of money in the Kingdom of Cuncam,* 1.37 to wit, the Larims, or Laris, which come from Persia, and the Pagodes. Eight Persian Laris make a Pagode, which is worth ten Laris of Dabul, They have also a certain small brass Coin, which they call Ba∣saruiques, nine whereof make a P••ise, and eighteen Peyses a Laris. But in regard there is no City, nay indeed no Village, which hath not some Coin or other peeuliar thereto, it is impossible to assign the just value thereof. Besides, there is such abundance of counterfeit money, that though there be no payment made, but in the presence of the Xaraf, or Mo∣ney-changers, yet it is a very difficult matter to shun it; for the Changers themselves thrust in what is not current among that which is, notwithstanding the penalties appoint∣ed by the Laws to be inflicted on those, who either make or put off counterfeit money, which are very rigorously put in execution.

They make use of the same weights as they do in the Kingdom of Guzuratta,* 1.38 save that twenty Maons of Surat weight makes twenty seven of Cuncam; and the ordinary Maon, which consists of forty Ceeres, and sixteen Peyses, makes twenty seven pounds; each pound making two marks. They have a particular weight for the Pepper, which they call Goemy, and weighs twelve Maons, four Maons make a Quintal or hundred weight, and twenty make a Candy.

The King of Cuncam, or Visiapour, is a Tributary of the great Mogul's,* 1.39 especially ever since the disorders, which happened under the King Idal-Scach: which were occasion'd as you shall find in the ensuing relation.

In the time of Sulthan Ibrahim Schach, the Father of Idal-Schach, there was belonging to the service of the Master of the Chappel,* 1.40 or the Kings Musick, a certain Slave, named Chauas, a person of understanding and courage, of a pleasant humour, and so taking a Conversation, that the King, who had particular notice of him, begg'd him of his Master, and preferr'd him, after several other employments, to the oversight of that apartment, where his Wives and Concubines were lodg'd, But it prov'd his misfortune one day, that the King calling to him for drink, they gave him of a bottle that smelt of Oyl; upon which the King commanded him to leave his presence. Yet was not his disgrace so great, but that the King had yet somewhat of the ancient kindness for him, for he made him Captain of the Castle-gate, and bestow'd on him the Government of the City; which he manag'd with so much conduct, that the King being upon his death-bed, and Mustapha-Chan, his Favourite, refusing to undertake the Regency during the Princes Minority, who was then but ten years of age, that great and important charge was conferr'd on Chauas, who had the Dignity of Chan long before.* 1.41 His Regency, for the space of ten years, had the approbation of all the people, but Idal-scach, being come to the twentieth year of his age, began to think it irksome to be under the tuition of a revolted Slave, and openly to condemn the familiarity of his conversation with the Queen his Mother. He had also engag'd the State into a very unjust and extreamly destructive War; upon this account, that he paid yearly to the Mogul's Deputies, the tribute of thirty Millions of Pagodes, which the King ow'd him, yet afterwards he caus'd them to be robb'd at their return, by persons set on purpose to do it,* 1.42 who brought him back again all the money. The Mogul Scach Iahan, who was then living, made his complaints thereof at first, as of a disorder, which Idal-schach was oblig'd in justice to take some course to prevent: but finding him∣self abus'd and laugh'd at, he entred Cuncam with an Army of two hundred thousand fighting men, where he laid siege to the Castle of Perinda, which certain Hollanders, who had been sent prisoners thither, helpt to maintain for the space of two years, till such time as a peace was concluded with the Mogul, after the death of Chauas-chan, who was kill'd as followeth.

Idal-schach, not able any longer to suffer the extraordinary and unjust power of his Guardian to be exercised over him,* 1.43 as we said before, made his complaints against him to the Governours of Provinces and places of trust, intreating them to advise and assist him against the usurpation of Chauas-chan. They met together, and sent a Message to the Regent; that their King having attain'd an age fit to govern the Kingdom himself, it was time he return'd into his hands the administration of Affairs; to which end it were fit

he came out of the Castle, and liv'd in the City as the other Grandees of the Kingdom did; giving him withall to understand, that if he slighted these Remonstrances of theirs, they should be forc'd to employ some part of the Kingdoms Forces to oblige him thereto. But Chauas-chan being very unwilling to devest himself of an Authority which he had been possest of for so many years, and over-confident of the affection of his Creatures, as also of that of the people, which he had made it his main business to acquire, during the Re∣gency, by a liberality truly Royal, made no reflection on these Remonstrances, till he found some of the great Ones, with an Army of thirty thousand men at the City Gates. Being reduc'd to this extremity, he took a resolution which proved his ruine.

For,* 1.44 imagining that the people had so great an affection for him, as to proclaim him King, in case there were no other, he resolv'd to make away the Prince, and to kill him with his own hands. To that end, and full of this design, he goes out of his Chamber one night, while the Army was not yet come within five Leagues of the City, and being come to the door of the Kings Lodgings, the Guards having made no difficulty to let him pass, and finding it lock'd, contrary to the custom, he would have forc'd it: but the King awaken'd at the noise, asked who was there. He made answer that it was he, and that he had some Letters of great consequence to communicate to him, which he had just then received from some of the chief Commanders of his Army. The King made answer, that it was an unseasonable time of the night for the reading of Letters, and bid him come again the next morning, and thereupon immediately getting up, he went to the Mahael, or Queens Lodgings, to whom he gave an account of the presumptuous demeanour of Chauas-chan, in coming to his Chamber door ar such an hour. The Queen, who was a Woman of a solid judgment, made such reflections on his procedure, that it was presently resolv'd, that they should, with the soonest, make away that pernicious Minister. They employ'd to ef∣fect their design a Meldar, or Gentleman of the Kings Chamber, and one nam'd Chide∣ram, Grand Faulconer, and Overseer of the Rams and wild Oxen, which the King keeps for fighting.* 1.45 As soon as it was day, the King presented himself upon his Throne, accom∣pany'd by those two persons who were to be employ'd in the foresaid execution; and having sent for Chauas-Chan, he delivered him a seal'd Letter, and said to him; There Chauas-Chan, look into that Letter, which I have just now receiv'd from the Genera••s of my Army, give me an account of the Contents of it. But while Chauas was opening it, in or∣der to the reading of it, the Meldar run him into the Breast with a Ponyard, but with so much precipitation, that, not staying to see what effect the Wound he had given him would have, he went presently along with the King into the Womens Lodgings. Another Gen∣tleman, who was present at the blow, perceiving the Wound was not mortal, and pretend∣ing a kindness to Chauas, run immediately to him, embrac'd him, ask'd him what might be the occasion of his disgrace, and making as if he would have taken the Ponyard out of the Wound, wherein it still stuck, thrust it so much the further in, that he fell to the ground. The Eunuch, who was with him, got him convey'd to his own house. But the Queen having notice of what had past, as also of the disorder, wherein the King and the Meldar had drawn off, commanded Chideram to go and make an end of him. Chauas-Chan seeing Chideram coming into his Chamber, and imagining he came out of civility to give him a visit, said to him; Wo is me, Chideram, who is it that hath thus murthered me? But Chide∣ram, not suffering him to fall into further discourse,* 1.46 made answer, Traytor, 'tis I; with which word he run upon him and cut off his head. There were present at this daring acti∣on Chauas-chan's Brother, who was Captain of the Castle-gate, three Chirurgeons, two Captains, friends of Chauas, and some other of his Kindred who were present, yet they not only made not the least opposition, but suffered themselves to be all tamely kill'd, not one profferring to avoid that fatal destiny.

Chauas-Chan had among his Domesticks a certain Caffre, who coming to hear of his Masters death, run immediately to the Castle, with an intention to dispatch the King; but he met by the way with about thirty Souldiers, who stop'd him. He made a shift to kill ten of them with his own hands, and had dispatch'd the rest, had he not been over-power'd by number, which increas'd as the noise of the attempt spread more and more into the City. They cat off his head, and hung it up as a Trophey, upon one of the Towers of the Castle.

One of Chauas-chans Creatures,* 1.47 whose name was Morary, was advanc'd with ten thou∣sand Horse, within five Leagues of the City of Vis••apour; in so much that the King fear∣ing that General might assemble all the Friends of the deceased, caused him to be pro∣claim'd a Traitor against his Prince, and set his Head at a certain price. His own Army seiz'd his person, and receiving intelligence, that another Lord, named Rundelo, was coming up to the relief of Chauas-chan, and intended to joyn with Morary, they sent him a by∣way

to the City, whither he came about eight at night. He sent a Message to the King, proposing, that if his Majesty would pardon him, and bestow on him the Government of the Brammenes, he would pay him yearly twenty thousand Pagodes; but those Proposi∣tions were rejected, and the King ordered him to have his hands cut off, and his tongue cut out, and that in that posture he should be led all about the City; but he died by the way.

The only Action that had eclips'd the Ministry of Chauas-chan,* 1.48 was the disgrace of Mustafa-chan. This Mustafa was he, who of all the Lords about the Court, was most in credit with Ibrahim Schach, as being the person upon whom he had cast his eye for the Guardianship of the Prince his Son. But he, unwilling to accept of it, excus'd himself, and recommended the merit of Chauas-chan, who requited him with the greatest ingrati∣tude that ever was heard of. Chauas would needs have that Lord to countenance by his Authority whatever had been done during the time of the Regency, and finding it impos∣sible to corrupt him, he resolved to dispatch him out of the way, by perswading the King, that the honest old Man had some design upon his life. The young Prince implicitely crediting what was told him by his Favourite, resolved to secure his person, which oblig'd Mustafa-chan, who had notice thereof, to stand upon his guard, and to fortifie himself in his house, having about him 700. Horse, and 2000. Foot. The place was regularly besieg'd with ten Guns; and after he had held out six dayes, he was forc'd to render it and himself up at mercy; for most of his people, nay his very menial servants fell off from him. Idal-Schach hearing that Chauas-chan intended either to put Mustafa-chan to death, or at least to have his eyes out, prevented both, by representing to him, that the Mogul, to whom he was ally'd, would concern himself in the Fortunes of Mustafa-chan; and upon these con∣siderations, he was sent prisoner to the Castle of Bellagam-Chapour, being allow'd of all his vast Revenues, but five Pagodes to live upon.

Accordingly the Mogul,* 1.49 Schach-Iahan had no sooner intelligence brought him of the disgrace of Mustafa-chan, but he sent an Envoy to Idal-Schach, to require, that he might be set at liberty, and put into possession of all his estate, or that he should be oblig'd to de∣clare a War against him. Idal-Schach promis'd to do both, but Chaurs-chan eluded the performance of that promise, so that Mustafa got not out of prison, till after Chauas his death: upon which, he was restored to his former dignity, enjoying near ten millions of Pagodes of yearly revenue. He kept ordinarily a thousand Domesticks, and three thou∣sand Horse at his own charge abroad, besides those he maintained at his own Palace. Chi∣deram-chan, who had been very instrumental in the death of Chauas-chan, was next in credit to Mustafa; and next to him, Agu-rasa, who was Governour General of the Castles of Ponda, Perinda, Salpour and Bellegam-chapour. He was one of Chauas-chan's Crea∣tures: whence it came, that upon the death of his Patron, he was not so much in favour as he had been, but was continu'd in his employments, though he desir'd to be disburthen'd of the care of publick Affairs by reason of his age.

They say,* 1.50 the King of Cuncam is able in a short time to raise two hundred thousand Men; yet, as we said before, he is a Tributary to the Mogul. Adelham-Schach, great Grand-father of Idal-Schach, in the year 1586. took the City of Goa twice from the Por∣tuguez: but considering at last, that War destroyed his Countrey, he treated with them, and by the Treaty concluded between them, he lest them the Countrey of Salsette, with 67. Villages, that of Bardes, with 12. and that of Tisuary with 30. Villages, provided that the Inhabitants of Cuncam should enjoy freedom of Commerce all over the Indies; yet with this further proviso, that they should be oblig'd to sell all their Pepper to the Mer∣chants of Goa, who had made a general Treaty to that purpose, upon pain of Confiscation. But this Treaty hath not been so well observed, but that there were, on both sides, from time to time great dissatisfactions, which by an unhappy accident broke forth into some∣thing of Hostility in the year 1635. For, upon intelligence brought to the Portuguez, that four of the Kings Ships, bound for Meca, and some parts of Persia, were partly loaden with Pepper, they sent four Frigots to Sea after them, which set upon the Kings Ships, and after a vigorous resistance, wherein a Portuguez Captain was kill'd, took them, and having brought them to Goa, kill'd in cold bloud all the Indians that were aboard; so that it was not questioned, but that the King of Cuncam would declare War against the City of Goa.

There is not any Prince in all those parts so well stor'd with Artillery as the King of Cuncam.* 1.51 Among others, he had one Brass piece, which requir'd a Bullet weighing eight hun∣dred weight, with five hundred and forty pound of fine Powder; which did such executi∣on, as was reported, that at the siege of the Castle of Salapour, at the first firing, it made a breach in the wall of forty five foot in length. The Caster of it was a Roman born, and

the most wicked of mankind; since he had the inhumanity in cold bloud, to kill his own Son, to consecrate that monstrous Piece with his bloud, and to cast into the Fire, wherein he had melted his Metal, one of the Kings Treasures, who would call him to account for the charge he had been at therein. But it is time we prosecute our Voyage.

Ian. 7. We came betimes in the morning before the City of Bacim.* 1.52 Being come near the City, the Portuguez Governour gave us seven Pieces, and we answer'd his civility with three. We stay'd there above four hours expecting a Portuguez Jesuit, whom we had pro∣mis'd to carry to Goa; but finding he came not within the time he had promised, we kept on our course. Being got about a League thence, we perceiv'd coming out of the Port a Portuguez Frigot, which, as we imagin'd, came to bring the Jesuit aboard us; whereupon we struck some of our sail, to expect it: but the Captain told us, that it was the Gover∣nours desire to the President, that that Frigot might go to Goa under the English Colours, as fearing to meet some of the Dutch, who incessantly rove up and down that Coast. He brought us, as a Present from the Governour, three Oxen, some Sheep, Bread, several Bas∣kets of Citrons and Oranges, and divers other refreshments, wherewith we merrily pursu'd our Voyage.

Wednesday, Ian. 9. with a good North-wind, we pass'd by the Isles of Bandera and Bambay, which reach all along the Coast, from Bacim, as far as Rasiapour. That of Bambay is of a considerable bigness, and hath a very good Haven towards the Con∣tinent.

Ian. 10. We pass'd in sight of Rasiapour,* 1.53 which is but 21. Leagues from Goa. In the afternoon we pass'd by the City of Fingerla, within four Leagues of Goa, where the Hol∣landers have a Factory; and in the evening we discover'd the Isles about Goa, and after∣wards the two Castles which secure the entrance of that noble City.

Ian. 11. We cast Anchor under the Castle Deguard,* 1.54 about a quarter of a League from the City. We found in the Haven six Gallions and a Carrack, whom we saluted with our great Guns. The Mary fir'd twenty five, the other nine, and the third five. The General of the Gallions gave us a volley of his greatest pieces. The Castle fir'd three; we, in an∣swer thereto, five; the other two, eight between them. Immediately after, came aboard us a Portuguez Captain to complement the President from the Viceroy. Not long after, came the General of the Gallions aboard us in person, in a Gondole gilt and cover'd with Scarlet. At his coming into the Ship there were twenty Guns fired. After the first Com∣plements, he intreated the President to go along with him in his Gondole to the Gallion, to refresh himself for some hours: But the President excus'd himself, in regard he was then going to the City, and promis'd, at his return, to give him a visit aboard. The Gallions were there only to keep the Haven against the twelve Dutch Ships, which pretended to block up the City of Goa towards the Sea. At our coming thither, they were got off at some distance, to recover themselves after an Engagement, wherein they had lost two of their Ships, some few dayes before, which were burnt by the Fire-ships: but the next day they came up again, and cast Anchor in the Road, to hinder the Carrack from getting out, while the Frigots and little Vessels, which could go along the Coast, brought thither all sorts of Provisions and Commodities, so freely, that, one day, I saw coming in a Caravan of above three hundred Boats, loaden with Pepper, Ginger, Cardamomum, Sugar, Rice, Fruits, and Conserves.

The President, who as he went up the River had his Trumpets sounding before him, went strait to the house of the Fiador de la fasende, who is as it were the Overseer of the Exchequer, it being with him chiefly, that he was to negotiate the business, which had oc∣casion'd his calling at Goa. The Fiador was sick in bed, yet did he receive the President with all civility, and promis'd to do him all the good offices he could expect, from the friendship they had long before contracted together. Thence the President was carried in a Palanquin to the Lodgings which were assign'd him:* 1.55 whither as soon as he was come, he sent to demand audience of the Viceroy, which was immediately granted him. The Vice∣roy's Palace lies upon the River, so that we went thither by boat. We found upon the River-side, many Hidalgos, or Gentlemen, of the Viceroy's retinue, who conducted us into the Hall, where he was to give the President audience. The Guards, who were all clad-in the same livery, had taken their Armes, and stood in two files in the Anti-chamber, through which there was an entrance into the Hall, which was richly furnish'd, and full of the Pi∣ctures of several Princes of Europe. The Viceroy, who was all in black, as were also all his Courtiers, rose out of his Chair at the Presidents coming in, and sate not down again till the other was set. All the rest of the Company stood before the Viceroy, some only of the Gentlemen excepted, who carried us into one of the cross Rooms to entertain us.

The President, having dispatched his business, took leave of the Viceroy, who brought him to the Hall door, where he stood bare, till we were all got out. The same Gentlemen, who had receiv'd us at our coming out of the Boat, broughtus back to the River, shewing us, as we came a long, twelve excellent Horses, sumptuously cover'd and harness'd, which had been purposely brought thither, that we might take notice of the Viceroy's magnificence. We saw there also a Biggel, which is a Creature about the bigness, and much of the same colour as a Renne, but is headed like a Horse, main'd like an Ass, having black and cloven feet, and upon his head two black horns.

We had hardly dined, at our return to our Lodging, ere we were tir'd with Visitants. Most of the Portuguez Lords came to salute the President; and there was no Monastery but sent its Deputies to complement him. The ten dayes we stay'd at Goa were spent in reciprocal Visits and continual feasting. One of the noblest Entertainments we had, was that which was made us the 15. of Ianuary, by a Portuguez Lord, who had been Go∣vernour of Bacim, and was then newly come to the government of Mozambique. Every course consisted only of four dishes of Meat, but they were so often chang'd, and the Meat so excellently well dress'd, that I may truly say, I never was at the like. For with the Meat there was brought such variety of excellent Fruits, that by the continual change and intermixture of both, the appetite was sharpened and renew'd. But what was most re∣markable, was, that though the Portuguez Ladies are as seldom seen as those of the Musco∣vites and Persians, yet this Lord, knowing he could not any way more oblige the English, then by allowing them the sight of Women, we were serv'd at Table by four handsom young Maids of Malacca, while he himself was attended by two Pages and an Eunuch. These Maids brought in the Meat, and fill'd our Wine; and though he himself drunk not any, yet would he have the English treated after their own way, and drink to what height they pleas'd. Being risen from Table, he brought us into a spacious Chamber, where he again press'd us to drink; and when the President was to take leave of him, he presented him with a noble Coverlet of Watte, a quilted Covering for a Horse, a fair Table, and a rich Cabinet of Lacque.

The next day,* 1.56 being the 16. we dined at the Profess'd House of the Iesuits, who had invited us to a sumptuous Feast. There were in this House a hundred and fifty Fathers, and at least as many Scholars or Students, yet did not that great number near fill that no∣ble Structure, which was four stories high, and had the pleasantest prospect in the World, as well towards the Sea, as on the Land side. They first shew'd us all the conveniences of the House, their Wealth, and the order they observ'd in their Oeconomy. Then they brought us into a fair arched Hall, as big as an ordinary Church, which was beset with Ta∣bles placed all along the Walls. The Cloath was laid, with the Trenchers, the drinking Cups, and Earthen pots, and they had brought in Bread and Fruit. In the midst of the Hall, there was another little square Table, cover'd and furnish'd as the rest; for those who were to do pennance for their having done any thing contrary to the discipline of the Or∣der. In the midst of the Entry to this Hall, there was a Pillar, out of which issued a Spout of water for the washing of their hands. Then they carried us up to the third story, to another Hall, which was not as large as that below, but so richly furnish'd, as might become the Appartment of a very noble House, as well in point of Tapistry as other things. The Table prepared for us was very large, and plac'd in the midst of the Hall, cover'd with a noble Cloath, beset with Fruit, and Bread, and China dishes, which Persons of Quality in those parts do prefer before those of Silver.

The Father Provincial,* 1.57 having given the President the precedence, sate down by him, and afterward ordered all our company to be so plac'd, as that, between every two, there were two Iesuits to entertain and discourse with us; the rest standing behind to wait on us. The Meat was brought in little dishes of Porcelain, to every man his own dish; and this for several courses, both of Flesh and Fish, all excellently well dress'd. The desert was suitable to the rest of the entertainment, and consisted in Tarts, Florentines, Eggs drest af∣ter the Portuguez way, admirably well perfum'd, Marchpains, and Conserves, both dry and liquid.

At our rising from Table, they conducted us into several Chambers, where they left us, to take the ordinary repose, during the greatest heat of the day. There was in every Chamber three Beds, and in the midst upon a Table a great Vessel of Porcelane, full of fair Water. Then they came and carried us into a Hall, where we were to have the divertise∣ment of a Ball, which was danc'd by the Children of certain Indians, whom they had bap∣tiz'd and instructed in the Roman Catholick Religion. The Arch-bishop of Goa, who was Primate of all the Indies, was there also in person, as well to participate of the di∣vertisment, as to entertain the President, by order from the Viceroy. The Dancing-master

made the first entrance alone, and did pretty well for a Portuguez: The Habits of the Dancers were very rich, but they had no Visards on, nor any thing upon their Heads, but a Crown of Flowers. The noblest entrance, and that which discover'd the subject of the Ball, was that of fifteen persons who came in, bringing along with them, some pieces of a broken Pillar, some Garlands of divers Flowers, wherewith they adorn'd the Pillar after they had, after several turnings, absolutely set it together, all performed with obser∣vance of the Musick. At the upper end of this Pillar came out a Flower, made like a Tulip, which opened of it self, while they danc'd, till at last there came out of it an Image of the blessed Virgin, with her Child in her arms, and the Pillar it self opened in several places, to cast out perfum'd Waters like a Fountain. After they had danc'd a while, they took the Pillar asunder, after the same manner as they had put it together, and went out of the Room in very good order. The Iesuits told us, that by that invention they represented the pains they had taken, in planting among the Pagans and Mahumetans of those parts, the Church of God, whereof our Saviour is the only Pillar or Corner-stone. After this there was an entrance of twelve Youths, who sung and play'd every one upon a different Instru∣ment, all done in exact measure. There came in also some Morris-dancers, who danc'd to the Castagnets, and kept measure with the Musick so exactly, that I never saw any thing like it. There came in also one Man alone, who was covered with Birds-nests, and cloath'd and mask'd according to the Spanish mode, who began the farce of this Comedy, by ridiculous and fantastick postures, and the Ball was concluded with the coming in of twelve Boys, dress'd like Apes, which they imitated in their cries and postures. The Ball being over, we staid there a while to hear their Musick, which was altogether after the Portuguez way. As we took leave of our Entertainers, they told us, that they made use of those Divertise∣ments, as well to reduce the Pagans and Mahumetans of those parts to the embracing of Christian Religion, by that kind of modern Devotion, as to amuse the Children, and divert them after their studies.

The 18. of Ianuary,* 1.58 we were invited to dinner by the Iesuits of the Colledge, which they call the Bon-Iesus. We were receiv'd at the entrance by some of the most ancient Fathers, who shewed us in several Halls and Chambers the Pictures of several Princes and Persons of Quality, who had been of their Order; as also the Histories of those of their So∣ciety, who had suffer'd Martyrdom for Christian Religion; among whom the Authors of the Gun-powder plot in England were not the least. But they forbore giving us the Expli∣cation thereof; only they entertain'd us with a long relation of the cruelties, exercis'd some years before, upon those of their Society in Iapan, where the Emperour had made use of the most exquisite torments could be invented, upon the Christians, as well the Forreig∣ners, who had spent their endeavours in planting Religion in those parts, as upon the Iapon∣neses who had made profession thereof.

Having shew'd us whatever was worth the seeing in their Colledge, they brought us unto the Church, which is no question one of the most sumptuous the Iesuits have in all Asia. The Structure is vast and magnificent, and the Ornaments are so sutable to the greatness thereof, that it were not easie to imagine any thing more noble. The first thing we were shewed was the High-Altar; but though it were one of the noblest I ever saw, yet came it not, in wealth, near another lesser one, which had been built in honour of Saint Francis Xavier, whom they call the Apostle of the Indies. We were shewed his Image, which was upon wood, drawn according to the life, and we were told his body was still to be seen in that Church, in the same posture as it was at the time of his depar∣ture.

The Iesuits told us, that the body of the said Saint Francis Xavier was found in the Island of Ceylon, and that it was discovered only by a most delightful smell, which had brought those who found it many Leagues distance from the Sea, to the place where it was hidden. Which story does not agree very well with what others write of the same bo∣dy. For besides, that the scent which is carried from the Island of Ceylon so far into the Sea, proceeds from the Gro••e of Cinnamon, wherewith that Island is in a manner covered. Maphaeus,* 1.59 one of the gravest Authors that ever were of the Society, sayes in express terms, that Francis Xavier, not satisfied with the progress he had made in the Indies by the means of his preaching the Faith of Christ, would needs try whether it might have the like success in China: but that he died on the Sea-side, as soon as he landed. Whereto he adds, that the Master of the Ship, which had carried him thither, caused the Corps to be put into unslak'd Lime, to the end he might carry away the bones, after the flesh had been consumed; but that after certain dayes, that consuming matter had not made any impression upon it, and that the body, instead of being corrupted, smell'd very sweetly; and that thereupon they resolv'd to carry it to Goa, where it was received

with great Ceremonies. They related to us a great many Miracles wrought by that Saint; but I remember only two or three of the most considerable; to wit, that he had caused the Sun to come back an hour after it was set; that he commanded the Sea and the Winds with the same power, as our Saviour had sometimes done; and that he had rais'd up two Men, one whereof had been buried a whole day before.

Out of the Church they brought us into their Refectory, where the Tables were placed all along the walls, as we had seen them in the Professed House, and in so great a number, that there was room enough for two hundred persons. Yet were there only four of the chiefest among them that dined with us, while all the rest stood and waited on us. We were as well treated by these as we had been by the others: but I must confess these gave us the best Canary that ever I drunk. Of all the Moral Vertues, there is not any the Iesuits endeavour more to practise then Sobriety, in so much that Drunkenness is a Vice they can the least of any be charged withall; and yet at this time they often call'd to drink, I conceive, purposely to engage us, to make it appear that it was not out of pure Complement we commended their Wine. After dinner, they carried us up into the Stee∣ple, whence we could take a view of all the City, the Sea, the River, and all the adjacent Champion, as far as the Mountain, much better then we could have done from the fourth Story of the Professed House.

As we took leave of them,* 1.60 they promised to send two of their Fathers to our Lodgings the next morning, who should shew us the great Hospital, whereof the Iesuits have the oversight. It is a very noble Structure, consisting of Chambers, Halls and Galleries, able to lodge above a thousand sick persons, who are very carefully supplyed with all things. Every Bed is mark'd with a certain Figure; and those which are not taken up, are known by their mark, which is standing upright; whereas those which are, have the mark in some other posture. The noblest Appartments of the Hospital were the Kitchin and the Apo∣thecaries shop belonging to it, both well furnished with all things necessary for the accom∣modation of the sick, whereof there were a very great number; but most of the Pox, or Bloudy-flux. Those who are to look after them have this foresight, that they would not have the sick to be disheartened by seeing others dye; for as soon as they perceive the sick party so far spent as that there is no way but death for him, he is carried to a private room, whither a Priest is sent to him, who stirs not thence till he be dead.

Having view'd the Hospital,* 1.61 we went to see the Monastery of the Augustines, which they call the Convent of our Lady of Grace. It is seated upon a little eminency, so that, seeing it at a certain distance, a man would take it for one of the noblest Palaces in the World. The Friers carried us all about it, and shewed us particularly the rich Copes and other Priests Vestments, which they said were given them by Persons of Quality, who had spent some time among them. I deliver'd them the Letters of recommendation, which the Augustines at Ispahan had given me, directed to them: whence it came that their civi∣lities towards me were extraordinary. They proffer'd to shew me what was most remarka∣ble about the City; but in regard I had already seen as much as I desir'd, I thank'd them, and came away with the rest of the company.

As soon as the President had dispatch'd his business with the Viceroy, who paid him nine thousand pounds sterling, in ready Money, and promis'd him the rest should be paid, either in Money, or Commodities, to those English Merchants, whom, to that purpose, he had brought from Surat, he return'd their civilities, of whom he had received any, and took leave of all.* 1.62 The Viceroy, the General of the Gallions, and all the principal Lords about the Court, sent him very considerable Presents. The former presented him with several Skins of Cinnamon, a Biggel, some Butts of Sack, Sheep, and certain Baskets of Fruit, and other refreshments. The Iesuits sent him Aqua vitae, and good store of all sorts of Conserves, dry and liquid, with an intreaty, that he would take along with him, for England, certain Iesuits, and among the rest, one who had liv'd long enough in China to be throughly acquainted with the Country. Of all the Presents that were sent him, what the President esteemed most, was a Bottle of Oyl, which had been extracted out of the Flower of Cinnamon, and a Candle made of the Oyl extracted out of Cinnamon it self.

Ian. 20. We left Goa,* 1.63 and met upon the River with above a hundred small Vessels, loaden with all sorts of Provisions and Commodities, which came from Cananor, and the Coasts of Malabar, and had passed, notwithstanding the Block-house of Dutch Vessels, which could only hinder the Gallions and Carracks from getting thence, to go for Portugal, or towards the Moluccas. As soon as we were got out of the River, we made strait to the Generals Gallion, which was called the Bon-Iesus, and carried sixty four Brass Guns, all Cannons or Culverings. There were aboard her six hundred Men, Mariners and Souldi∣ers;

and it was one of the noblest Vessels I ever saw. The General receiv'd the Presi∣dent with much civility, and brought him into his Chamber, in and about which were an Anti-chamber, a Closet, and two Galleries: and after a Collation of Conserves and Sack, contrary to the custom of the Portuguez, who never proffer a Man drink, unless he ask for it, he shew'd us all the Ship, which had the name of a Gallion, but might very well be ac∣counted a Carrack by reason of the bigness of it. The other Vessels of the Fleet were also very noble ones, there being not any one among them, that had not fifty Guns at least. The General and President were in private discourse, for about half an hour, after which the President took his leave, and the General conducted him to a door which was in the Stern of the Ship, at which it was more commodious getting out, then it is in other Ships by Ladders of Ropes. As soon as the President was got into the Boat, all the Portuguez Fleet fir'd their Guns. The Governour of the Castle de Guarde, having saluted the Pre∣sident, who was his intimate Friend, with all the Guns he had, presented himself upon the Battery, put off his Hat, and took leave of us. The President being come aboard, ordered twenty Guns to be fired, which the General answered with twenty others; whereupon we went into the Road, and lay between the Portuguez and Dutch Fleets.

But,* 1.64 ere we leave Goa, it will not be amiss, to give yet a little further account of what we found most remarkable in that City, which no doubt is one of the noblest and greatest of those the Portuguez are Masters of in any part of the Indies. It lies in the Kingdom of Cuncam, or Decam, fifteen Degrees on this side the Line, in an Island, which the River divides from the Continent. Alfonso Albuquerque took it by Composition, on the 16. of February, 1510. from Zabaim Dalcam, Prince of Goa, who recovered it again from him on the 30th of May following; but on the 21. of November in the same year, Albuquer∣que receiving fresh Forces irom a Fleet, which Diego Mendez Vaseoncelos had then newly brought from Portugal, set upon the City and took it by storm. The City of Goa was, even at that time, very considerable for its Traffick, but much less then it is now, as may be seen by the Walls of the old City, which are yet standing, though the Gates be down, in so much that there is nothing between it and the new City, built by the Portuguez, since they established their main Trade there. It hath on the South-side the Island of Salsette, which is divided from the Continent only by a small Rivulet, as is also the Island of Bar∣des, which lies on the North-side, and under which Ships may cast Anchor with all safety, without fear of any Winds. The Castle de Guarde lies at the foot of a Rock, on which they have built a Tower, in form of a Redoubt, wherein, in the night time they make a Fire, for a direction to Ships, and it hath several Brass pieces placed even with the Water. From the mouth of the River to the Haven are about two Leagues, but it is equally broad all along, even at the place where it runs between the Island and the Continent, though in some places it be so shallow, that in Summer time there is not above two foot water.

The Island of Goa does not produce any thing, and is so barren, that some few Lambs and Goats excepted, it is not able to sustain any thing; and yet the Portuguez have some Gardens there, and in them some Fruit, but it is to be attributed rather to their industry, then to Nature. Palm-wine is there in abundance, and all other provisions are brought thither from the two forementioned Islands, or from the Continent, so plentifully, that they are so cheap there, that notwithstanding the Block-house of the Hollanders, a Hog might be had for a Crown, six sucking Pigs, ten Pullets, or eight wild Ducks, for as much; but there are very few Oxen there, then which Sheep are yet more scarce. They permit not the Indians to go over into the Continent, without leave obtain'd from those who keep the passages, who make a mark in their Armes, which they are oblig'd to shew as they come back: for the Portuguez would not have the Decanines and Canarines come into the City without a Pass-port. All the fresh-water they have within the City comes from a Fountain, which represents a Lucrece, out of whose Wound there comes Wa∣ter enough to supply the whole City: but the Ships take in fresh-water near the Castle, above which there comes out of the Rock a Rivulet, which there falls into the River.

The City hath now neither Gates nor Walls,* 1.65 but the River, which makes the Island, secures it against the attempts, which an open place might be exposed to. The publick Buildings are very fair, and the Palaces of great Persons very magnificent, especially in their Houshold-stuffe.

The Inhabitants are either Castizes, that is, Portuguez, born of Father and Mother Por∣tuguez;* 1.66 or Most zes, that is, born of a Portuguez Father, and Indian Mother. The Mesti∣zes are distinguished from the others by their colour, which inclines towards the Olive;

but those of the third Generation are as black as the Inhabitants of the Country; which happens also in the fourth Generation of the Castizes, though there were no mixture a∣mong them. The Portuguez are either Titulados, as those who are employed in the prin∣cipal charges; Fidalgos da casa del Rey, that is, Gentlemen in ordinary of the Kings House; Mocos Fidalgos, young Gentlemen, that is, the Sons of Titulados, or Cavalleros, or newly admitted to Gentility by the King, Cavalleros Fidalgos, Escuderes Fidalgos, or simply Gentlemen. There are also such as have the quality of Mocos da camra, or Grooms of the Kings Chamber, who pass also for Gentlemen. All the rest are Hombres, Honrados, and Soldados. The former are Merchants or Tradesmen, and appear publickly with the same gravity, and almost with the same retinue as Gentlemen; in as much as, some only excepted, who cut Leather for Shooes, and Stuffes for Clothes, all the rest have their business done by Slaves.

No Person of Quality goes abroad afoot; for some are carried by their Slaves in a Pa∣lanquin, and others ride on Horseback, or go in painted and gilty Gondoles; but not any without a Slave to carry an Umblello, or Fan.

The Portuguez have the reputation of being very highly conceited of themselves;* 1.67 but those of Goa are such in so high a degree, as well in their gate, as all their other actions, that they treat, as unacquainted with the World, such as are newly come from Portugal, and are not accustom'd to their manner of going and life. They are excessively civil one to another; nay, they are, in this, so ceremonious and exact, that he who should omit to render a person, that gives him a visit, the honour he conceives due to himself, whether it be in making him sit down otherwise then he would, or not bringing him to the street-door, must expect the effects of a deep resentment, whereof the least are cudgelling or ca∣ning, which they liberally bestow on persons of mean condition, who being below them, have omitted giving them the respect they look for from those that are not their Equals, though indeed they owe them not any.

Winter begins there towards the end of Iune,* 1.68 with a South-west Wind, which comes from the Sea, and reigns for the space of four moneths, all along that Coast, from Diu, as far as the Cape of Comory; and during all that time, the Sea is not only innavigable, but there are few Havens, where Ships can ride in safety, and unexpos'd to Storms, mixt with terrible Thunder and Lightning, which disturb the Air there in that season. Which is yet so much the more to be wondred at, inasmuch as, at the same time, the Coast of Coro∣mandel, which is in the same Peninsula, and at the same degree of elevation, and in some places is but twenty Leagues distant from that of Malabar, enjoyes a pleasant Spring, and the most divertive season of the year. Accordingly, those who go from Cochim to Saint Thome, by land, as they pass over the Mountain of Balagatta, which divides the whole Peninsula, as the Apennine does Italy, discover, from the top of the Mountain, on the one side, a clear and temperate Air, and on the other, a Country cover'd with a perpetual mist, and drown'd with the Rains that continually fall. The same observation may be also made in those Ships, which go from Ormus to the Cape of Rosalgate. Where, as they pass the Cape, they suddenly pass out of fair Weather, into dreadful Storms and Tempests. Whence it comes that, in those parts, there are but two Seasons, as there are also principally but two Winds that reign there in the Summer time, to wit, those of the East, which the Portuguez call Therentos, which come from the Land-side, and blow from mid-night till mid-day; but they are not felt above ten Leagues within the Sea; and those of the West, which they call Virasons, which come from the Sea, immediately after dinner, and blow all the rest of the day.

This change of Seasons from one extremity to another is the cause of many Diseases among the Portuguez;* 1.69 but the most common there are those which they call Mordexin, which kills immediately, burning Feavers, and bloudy Fluxes, against which they have in a manner no remedy but bleeding. The Plague is a Disease not known in the Indies; but, ••o make amends, they have the Pox, which destroyes every year a great number of Portu∣guez. For, though the Country produces present and topical Remedies against the Dis∣ease, yet so violent are their inclinations to Women, who, on the other side, are as mad for Men, that they will not take the time to be cur'd of a Disease, which is not got off by Re∣medies, if they be not accompany'd with a very regular diet. The Women of those parts ••ave an excessive affection for white Men, and, being kept very much in restraint, they are put to all imaginable inventions, to let them know how passionately they love them, and ••o get them into their Lodgings: where they many times prosecute their delights, even in ••he Husbands presence, by means of a Drug, which so stupifies his Senses, as that he seems ••ither to have lost them, or to sleep with his eyes open.

The Indians call this Herb Doutro, Doutry, or Datura, and the Turks and Persians Da••ula.

Garcias ab horto, and Christopher d' Acosta, affirm, that it is a kind of Stramonea; that the Herb grows abundantly all over the Indies, in the shade, and that it is somewhat like Bears∣foot. They extract the juyce of it, while it is green, or they beat the Seed to powder, and mix it in Conserves, or put it into his drink, whom they would reduce to that condition for twenty four hours: during which time he is depriv'd the use of all his Senses, so that he does not see what is done before him, though his eyes be open, unless some body moisten the soles of his seet with fair water, which revives and recovers him, much after the same manner as if he awoke out of a sound sleep.

There are few Portuguez Women, or Mestizes, seen going about the City; and when they go abroad,* 1.70 either to Church, or upon necessary Visits, they are carried in close Palan∣quins, or are attended and watch'd by so many Slaves, that it is impossible to speak to them. When they appear in publick, they are all very richly attir'd, in Velvet, Flower'd-Sattin, or Brocado, and adorn'd with abundance of Pearls and precious Stones; but at home, they go in their Hair, and have about them only a Smock, which reaches to the Navil; and thence downwards, they have Petticoats of painted Clothes falling down to the Feet, which are bare. They eat no Bread, as liking the Rice better, now that they are accustom∣ed to it; nor do they fare over-deliciously as to other things, their ordinary sustenance be∣ing Salt-fish, Mangas, or only Rice, soak'd in a little Flesh or Fish-broath. They make use of certain Bottles, made of a kind of black Earth, which they call Gorgolettes, and have a Pipe coming up to the brims, so as that they may suck up the Water without lifting up the Bottles to their mouths.

The Men there are so jealous of their Wives,* 1.71 that they permit not their nearest Rela∣tions to see them: for Chastity is so strange a Vertue in those parts, that there is no Wo∣man but contrives all the wayes imaginable to pursue her enjoyments, never minding the breach of those Laws which God and Nature hath imposed upon them, though the fre∣quent misfortunes which happen upon that occasion should engage them to be more cau∣tious and reserv'd. The perpetual idle life they lead makes them so high in their desires, for they do not any thing of business in the world, but spend the day in chewing of Bet∣tele, which adds fuel to the flames of their lewd inclinations, as do also the Cloves and Nut∣megs, which they eat, out of an imagination that they prevent the corruptions of the Teeth and Stomack, which commonly make the Breath stink.

The Indian Women, who conceive by an European, have so great an affection for their Children, that they would rather dye then part with them. Children are not cloath'd till they are of age to wear Breeches: and till that time they are brought up by Slaves, or other Indian Women.

The Souldiers live after another rate among them.* 1.72 For those who go in that quality from Portugal, do not list themselves under any particular Captain, nor will be engaged to continue in any one certain place to keep Garrison there: but when they come to the In∣dies, they do what they please themselves. Accordingly they have no pay, but when they are in actual service upon the Engagements they are forc'd to at Sea, against the Ma∣labars, or the Dutch. But the Captains, who have occasion for these people, treat them with much civility, and give them now and then somewhat towards their subsistence, that they may be assured of their persons and services, when they have any work for them: so that they have what to live upon, yet spend not much. For commonly they live ten or twelve in the same house, where they diet together, having but two or three Servants among them, and as many Suits of Clothes, for those who go abroad, either to beg, or upon some design, while the rest stay at home, till their turns come to march out.

The Marriages and Christenings of the Portuguez are celebrated with very great mag∣nificence.* 1.73 The Friends and Relations come on horseback to the Bridegrooms door, and thence march before him to Church, into which he enters, accompanied by two of his Friends, who are instead of God-fathers to him; and the Bride follows him in a Palanquin, accompanied also by her two God-fathers. After the benediction of the marriage, they reconduct the new married couple to their house, into which only the God-fathers enter with the young couple, who go into a Balcony, or stand at a Window, to give the company thanks, which in the mean time shew a thousand tricks in the Street. Their Chistenings are performed, in a manner, with the same Ceremonies, save that, at these there is carried an Ewer with a clean Napkin, a Salt-sellar, and in the midst a Silver Basin, in a heap of Ro∣ses, or other Flowers, a Wax-candle, into which they put a piece of Gold or Silver, for an Offering to the Priest. The God-father, and the Mid-wife, are carried with the Child in Palanquins.

Most of the Portuguez have many Slaves of both Sexes,* 1.74 whom they employ not only

about their persons, but also upon any other business they are capable of; for what they get comes in to the Master. Whence it comes that handsome Wenches are sought after, to be imploy'd in the selling of Fruits, and such Commodities as the Portuguez send to market; to the end their beauty might draw in Customers, and so they by a double way of trading, bring in double profit to their Masters. Their keeping, as to diet, stands them in very little; and all the cloathing they give them is only as much Linnen-cloath as will cover the privy parts. The Children born between Slaves belong to the Master, unless the Father will redeem them, within eight or ten dayes after they are born; which if they let slip, they are not afterwards admitted to do it, and the Master disposes of them; and when they are able to do any thing, makes use of them himself, or sells them in the Market, as we do Cattle.

The Inhabitants of the Country are Pagans,* 1.75 and for the most part Benjans. Their Hou∣ses are all of Straw, and very little, having no light but what comes in at a little low door. All their Houshold-stuffe consists principally in certain Mats made of Rushes, which serve them both for their lodging at night, and to lye down upon at meals. Their Dishes, Drinking-cups, and Napkins, are made of Fig-leaves, of which they also make Pitchers and Oyl-pots, and their ordinary sustenance is Rice, which they boyl in Earthen pots. They daub over their Houses with Cow-dung, out of an imagination that it drives away Fleas.

They are so superstitious, that they never go abroad till they have said their prayers; and if they chance to meet a Crow, where-ever they be, they immediately return home, and undertake no business of any consequence that day. When they travel, they do their de∣votions before their Pagodes; and the Portuguez tollerate their Idolatry, upon this account, that the Inquisition hath no power, but only over such as either are Christians, or have been such. They have also their particular ceremonies for their Marriages, their birth∣dayes, and other dayes, and seasons of the year: but they differ so little from those where∣of we have spoken already, that we shall need say nothing of them. There are among them some very able Physitians, who are so highly respected at Goa, that they are per∣mitted to have their Umbrellos carried with them; which is a Priviledge allowed only persons of quality: nay the Portuguez, even to the Vice-Roy himself and the Arch-Bishop, make use of them, rather then of those of their own Nation. They never eat but with those of their own Sect, though they were ready to starve. Nay, in this particular they are so scrupulous, that if, in their journey to Cochim, their provision should fall short, they would rather starve, then be oblig'd to eat what another had sown or made ready. Most of the Porters about Goa are Christians, as are also their Money-changes, whom they call Xaraffes, who make an external profession of Christianity, but, in their dealing, are Iews, apt to over-reach and deceive all that have to do with them. There are in Goa many De∣canins and Canarins, who have Shops there, and buy of the Portuguez, Porcelane, Velvet Damask, and other Stuffes of Silk and Cotton, as also some China Commodities, all by whole sale, and afterwards sell them again by retail. These also bring Provisions from the Continent, and trade therein, having to that end their Brokers and Factors, who mannage their business,* 1.76 while they go to Cambaya, and along the Coast to improve their Traffick. There are amongst them Goldsmiths, Jewellers, Gravers, and other Artizans, who do things incomparably better then any of ours. These also farm the Kings Demesne in the Islands of Bardes and Salsette; upon which account, having sometimes occasion to go to Law, they are so well vers'd in the Laws and Customs of Portugal, that they need no Advocates to plead their Causes.

Most of the Canarins are either Husband-men, or Fisher-men. There are some of them have no other employment then dressing the Cocos-trees, to get the Wine and Fruit they produce. Others only wash Linnen, or whiten Cloath. The Peasants bring in every day to the City,* 1.77 wild Fowl, Milk, Fruit, Eggs, and other provisions to be sold. Their Wives are deliver'd with the greatest easiness imaginable. They make no use of Midwives, but are deliver'd alone, wash their Children themselves as soon as they are born, put them un∣der a few Fig leaves, and return to their work, as if they had not been about any such thing.* 1.78 The Children brought up after this rate, grow so hardy and strong, that it is an ordinary thing to see Men among them of a hundred years of age, yet have not a Tooth missing, but all the time in perfect health. They are all excellent Swimmers, whence it comes, that they venture over to the Continent in their little Boats called Almadi••s, which indeed are so little, that they can hardly carry one person: in so much that they are frequently overturn'd, but they recover them again by swimming, cast out the Water, and prosecute their Voyage. Though in these parts they burn the dead bodies instead of burying of them, yet are not the Women oblig'd to burn themselves with

their Husbands Corps, but only to cut off their Hair, and make a Vow of perpetual Wi∣dowhood.

The Iews,* 1.79 who live at Goa, have there their Temples and Synagogues, and enjoy an absolute liberty of Conscience. They are either Indians born of, Father and Mother, Iews, or they come out of Palastine; these last, for the most part, speak the Spanish tongue.

The Mahumetans, who live there, trade for the most part to Meca, and other places upon the Red-sea, whither they carry Spices. The Portuguez and the Mestizes have their greatest Trade in Bengala, Pegu, Malacca, China, and in Guzuratta, at the City of Cambaya. No Person of Quality at Goa, but goes once a day to the Market, whither the Merchants, nay, most Gentlemen come, as well to hear what news there is, as to see what there is to be sold; for, from seven in the morning to nine, (after which the heat is such, as that a Man is not able to stay there) the publick Criers, whom they call Laylon, sell there by outcry, all sorts of Commodities, but especially Slaves of both Sexes, and Jewels. There you shall see the Crier loaden with Chains, Gold Rings, and precious Stones, and followed by a great number of Slaves, all to be sold. There are also to be sold there, Persian and Arabi∣an Horses, Spices, all sorts of Aromatick Gums, Alcatifs, Porcelane, Vessels of Agat, seve∣ral things made of Lacque, and whatever is thought precious or rare in any other part of the Indies. Merchants and Tradesmen are distinguished by Streets; so that Silk-men are not shuffled in among Linnen-Drapers; nor the Druggists among those who sell Porce∣lane. The greatest profit they make is in the exchange of Money. For when the Spanish Fleet comes in, they buy Ryals at ten or twelve in the hundred loss; and in April, when the Ships go away for the Molucca's and China, where the Ryals are much esteem'd, they fell them again at twenty five or thirty in the hundred profit, notwithstanding the Order there is to sell them at four hundred Reis. They make the same advantage by the change of the Laris, which they also sell at ten or twelve in the hundred profit.

They have several sorts of money.* 1.80 The least is that which hey call Basarucques, which on the one side have a Globe, on the other two Arrows cross'd. They are made of Tin and Lattin mixt together, and eight of these Basarucques make a Ventin, whereof five make a Tanghe. Five Tanghes make a Serafin of Silver, which, according to the King. Com∣mand, is set at three hundred Reis, and six Tanghes make a Pardai. The Serafin hath on the one side Saint Sebastian, on the other a sheaf of Arrows. There are also Serafins of Gold, coined heretofore at Ormus, of a more refin'd metal then any other Moneys of the Indies; whence it comes, that the Gold-smiths melt down all that fall into their hands of them. They have also Santemes of 16. Tanghes, and Pagodes of 14▪ 15. and 16. Tanghes.

Forreign Merchants pay at their coming in eight in the hundred for all Merchandises,* 1.81 and as much at their going out; but the Farmers of the Customs are so reasonable in their valuing of them, that the Merchants have no cause to complain. They have also this favour, that if a Merchant hath paid the Customs at his coming in, and hath not put off his Commodities, he may carry them to some other place, without paying ought at the Exportation. In like manner, a forreign Merchant that hath bought of a Portuguez, or other Citizen of Goa, Spices, or any other Commodities of Malacca or China, may enter them under the Sellers name, and so avoid paying the Customes due at exportation.

The Viceroy at the time of our being there,* 1.82 was D. Pedro de Silva. His person was not answerable to his quality, but he had about him above fifty Gentlemen, who gave him the same respect as they could have done the King himself. This charge is continued in the same person, but for three years, as well in regard it were dangerous, a Subject should longer be possess'd of a Dignity, which differs from the Soveraign only in time; as that the King of Spain hath many Lords to gratifie with an Employment, which enriches them sufficiently in that time. For, besides that his whole Court lies at the Kings charge, he hath the disposal of all his Revenue, and every year makes a Visit for sixty or eighty Leagues about, which is worth to him very much. But the Presents which the neighbouring Prin∣ces, and the Governours and under Officers make him, are not to be valued. He hath his Council of State, and his Courts of Law and Equity. He is absolute Judge in all civil Causes, the most important only excepted, wherein there may appeal be made to the King. Criminal Sentences are executed there, notwithstanding the Appeal; but it is not in the Viceroy's power to indict a Gentleman, but he is oblig'd to send him, with the Informati∣ons brought in against him, to Portugal, unless the King order some other course to be taken with him. The Viceroy at his arrival into the Indies, lands in the Island of Bar∣des, or some other Haven on that side, whence he immediately sends his Agents to Goa,

to take possession of his charge, and what ever depends on it. His Predecessour makes way for him, upon the first news he receives of his Arrival, unfurnishes the Palace, and leaves him only the Guards and the bare walls. Thus much we thought fit to say of the City of Goa.

Ianuary 22. about noon,* 1.83 the President sent away the two Ships which came along with us from Surat, and were to carry thither the money which had been received at Goa; and after he had dismiss'd certain Iesuits, and several other persons of quality of Goa, who were come to visit him aboard, we hoys'd sail, yet expecting to come aboard our Ship the General of the Dutch Fleet, whose name was Van Kenlen, who had intreated him to convey some Letters to his Superiours. But he came not. In the Evening we saw all the Dutch Fleet under sail, whence we imagin'd that the General intended to give us a vi∣sit, but with the night we lost sight of them, and having a reasonable good wind, kept on our course.

Ian. 23. At break of day, we had a sight of the Dutch Fleet again; and then we con∣ceiv'd they were going to relieve the King of Ceylon, who had intreated the General to assist him against the Portuguez, who had declar'd war against him. About noon, we were at thirteen degrees latitude, and out of sight of land. But in regard we intended to go towards the Coast of Malabar, upon intelligence brought us, that an English Ship, coming from Bantam, richly loaden with Spices, had been set upon and spoil'd by the Malabar Pyrates, the next day we chang'd our course, and took it more Eastward, so to get towards the land. The Malabars had taken their advantage of the condition that Ship was in, which was so over-burthen'd, that she could make use of but six Guns; they found indeed no great difficulty to enter her; but they were no sooner in, ere the English sent above six hundred of them, with the upper Deck into the Sea. They dispatch'd as many with the second; but afterwards being themselves forc'd to go to the Stern, to avoid the fire, they yielded to the Malabars, who, with the Ship, took the Captain, the Masters Mate, the Clark, and fourteen others, whom we intended to redeem.

About noon we pass'd in sight of Monteleone,* 1.84 a high mountain from which the Malabars discover, at a distance, the Vessels they conceive they may set upon with advantage, and at night we came to the Haven of Cananor, where we found three English Vessels, the Dra∣gon, the Catharine, and the Seymour, commanded by Captain Weddell, one of the most expe∣rienced Sea-Captains of his time, one that had been at the taking of Ormus, and was then entertain'd into the service of a new Company, erected not long before in England, for the trade of the Indies. Having fired some Guns to salute the Castle, we sent to Captain Wed∣dell, to know what condition the English prisoners were in; and hearing they were most of them set at liberty, we would stay no longer on that Coast.

The Portuguez have a Garrison in the Castle of Cananor,* 1.85 but the City is inhabited by Malabars. They call by that name all those people who live upon that Coast from the City of Goa, as far as the Cape of Comory, or Comorin. The Country is very fertile, and brings forth abundance of Spices, but particularly the best Pepper in the Indies, which is most esteem'd, because the grain of it is bigger then it is any where else, even then that which grows in Sumatra and Iava. The Inhabitants go stark naked, covering only those parts, which Nature would not have seen even in Beasts. They make holes in the tips of their Ears, and are black, but have not such great Lips as the Moors of Africk. They tye up their Hair together upon the Crown of the Head, and let their Beards grow to the full length, without any ordering or trimming, in so much that they are not un∣like those figures, under which we would represent the Devil. Nor is their disposition unsuitable to this pleasant external shape, for they understand nothing of civility, nor are capable of any Commerce or Conversation. They are for the most part Pyrates and Souldiers, who may be said to have rashness rather then courage, and are expert enough in the handling of their Armes, which are Sword and Buckler, Bows and Arrows. They make also a kind of Muskets themselves, and use them with advantage. They obey nei∣ther the King of Cuncam, nor the Viceroy of Goa, but they have their particular King or Prince, who also performs the functions of High-Priest, and is of the Sect of the Bra∣mans. These were the most considerable enemies the Portuguez met with, at the begin∣ning of their establishment in the Indies: but ever since they made a Treaty with them, they have liv'd in very good correspondence.* 1.86 Their Prince, whom they call Zamorin, is also King of Calicuth, upon the same Coast. In the year 1604. the Dutch made a Treaty with him, for the freedom of Trade; but the Portuguez coming to be more powerful in those parts, and the Dutch finding it easier to settle themselves in other places, where they continue their Trade with greater advantage, they have neglected the friendship of these

Barbarians. I observ'd at Cananor, that there were some men among them, who never par'd their Nails; and that there were others, who wore Bracelets and Rings about their Armes. These are the Gentry of the Country, whom they call Nayres, that they may be distinguish'd from Persons of meaner condition, whom they call Polyas. The Nayres are very proud, and conceited of themselves, and permit not the Polyas so much as to touch them. They alwayes go with their Sword and Buckler, wherewith they make a noise in the Streets as they go, and perpetually cry out Po, Po, that people should make way for them. As soon as they perceive them coming, they close on both sides, look down to the ground, and do them reverence. Some affirm, that this punctilio of Honour, whereby they pre∣tend to a respect due to them from all that are not of their race, was one of the things that most obstructed the Treaty which the Portuguez were ready to conclude with the King of Cochim, at their first establishment, in regard they would have the Portuguez do them the same submissions as the Polyas did. The Portuguez, on the other side, who are as highly conceited of themselves as any Nation in the World, refused to do it; so that to decide the difference, it was agreed, that a Portuguez and a Nayre should fight for the ho∣nour of the two Nations; upon condition, that the Conquerour should give the Law to the conquered. The Portuguez Champion had the advantage, and by that means obtain'd the precedence for his Nation; and ever since that time, the Portuguez have the same ho∣nour done them by the Nayres,* 1.87 as they have done them by the Polyas. Many of these Nayres never marry, in regard they have a certain priviledge to see the Wives and Daugh∣ters of their Camerades, and to that end, to go into their Houses at any time of the day. When they go into any House upon that score, they leave their Sword and Target at the Street-door, which mark prohibits entrance to all others whatsoever, nay the very Master of the House himself, finding those Armes at his Door, passes by, and gives his Camerade full liberty to do what he please. The Polyas are not so much honour••d as to have the Nayres visit their Wives, who must be content with their own Husbands; for it were a great crime in a Nayre to defile himself, by conversing with the Wife of a common person. The Nayres are all Souldiers, made use of by the King, both for his Guard and in his W••rs. On the contrary, the Polyas are forbidden the bearing of Armes, and so are either Trades∣men, Husbandmen, or Fishermen.

The Malabars write with a Bodkin upon the bark of the Cocos-tree,* 1.88 which they cut very thin, and in an oblong form like a Table-book, drawing a String through the middle, which hold the leaves together, and comes twice or thrice about the box or case, which is as it were a covering to it. Their Characters have nothing common with those of the other Indians, and are understood only by their Bramans, for most of the common people can neither write nor read.

The King of Calicuth doth not eat any thing,* 1.89 which had not been presented before to his Pagode; and it is to be particularly observed, that in this Kingdom it is not the Kings Son, but the Kings Sisters Son, who inherits the Crown, it being the common perswasion, that the Children born of the Queen, are begotten rather by their Bramans then by the King himself.

As concerning the City of Cochim,* 1.90 it is to be observed, that there are two Cities of the same name in the Kingdom of Cochim, one whereof lies upon a great River, and belongs to the King of Cochim, the other to the Portuguez. This last, whereof we now speak, is seated upon the same Coast, at ten degrees on this side the Line, having on the West-side of it the Sea, and on the Land-side a Forrest of black Trees, whereof the Inhabitants of the Country make their Boats called Almadies. These Trees they make hollow, and so their Boat is all of one piece, yet with these they make a shift to go along the Coast as far as Goa. The Port is very dangerous, by reason of the Rocks which make the entrance in∣to it very difficult.

At the beginning of Winter, there falls such abundance of Rain in the neighbouring Mountains, that several Brooks are of a sudden by that means overflown, and run with such violence, that the Earth which they carry along, and which is stopped by the Waves that are forc'd by the Wind against the Earth, makes in that place a kind of Bank, which so stops up the mouth of the Haven, that 'tis impossible to get into it or out of it, during that time, nor indeed till the Wind, which changes with the season, forces the Sea back again, which carries along with it the filth which the Rain had left in that place.

The Portuguez carry on a great Trade in this place in Pepper, which the King of Cochim sells them at a certain rate, agreed upon with the Viceroy at his first coming to Goa; but the Inhabitants of the Country, and other Forreigners, pay dearer for it.

The King of Cochim is one of the most powerful Princes of those parts; it being cer∣tain,* 1.91 that he is able to raise above a hundred thousand men; the most part Nayres, who are obliged to serve at their own charge, either with Horse or Elephants. As to their manner of life, it is not fully so brutish as that of the Malabars, but they observe the same Custom, for the succession of their Kings, and the Consummation of their Marriages, which work is performed by their Bramans.

This sort of people is so highly respected amongst them, that the Master of the House seeing a Braman coming into it, makes him way, retires, and leaves him alone to do what he please with his Wife. They make holes in their Ears, and hang little weights of Lead at them, which stretch them so much, that in time they reach down to their Shoul∣ders. The principal Commerce of this place consists in Pepper, Ginger, and Cin∣namon.

It is not long since all the Malabars had but one King;* 1.92 but Sarama Perymal, Monarch of all that Coast, from Goa, as far as the Cape of Comeri, having imbrac'd the Mahumetan Religion, and desirous to end his life in solitude, near the Sepulchre of his great Prophet, distributed his Territories amongst his Friends, upon condition that the Kings of Cananor, Cochim and Chaule, should acknowledge the Soveraignty of the King of Calicuth, on whom he bestowed the Dignity of Zamourin, or Emperour; but since the establishment of the Portuguez in those parts, the power of Zamourin is grown so low, that at the present, the King of Cochim is more powerful then he.

Ianuary the 26. We left Cananor, and saw going thence Captain Weddell, who would gladly have come along with us into England, had he not been obliged to go and dispatch some business he had to do at Cochim and Calicuth. Captain Weddell cast Anchor there, but we only fired some Guns, and pursued our Voyage.

The next day we discover'd,* 1.93 at a great distance, eighteen Sail of Ships, which coming directly towards us, easily discover'd what their design was. We had much ado to clear our Guns, for the Ship was so loaden that every hole was full. However we had the time to put our selves into a posture of receiving those Pyrats, who had not the confidence to come within Cannon-shot of us, while day-light might discover them; but presently after midnight, as soon as the Moon was up, they set upon us on all sides, though with little ad∣vantage, for they were so well receiv'd, that at the first firing of our Guns we sunk two of their Frigots, and made three or four others incapable of further ingaging. Our small Shot in the mean time playing upon those which came nearest our Ship, that they thought it their best course to let us alone.

The same night we pass'd by the Castle of Chochim,* 1.94 and the next day, the twenty eighth, we could discern no more then fourteen of the Malabar Frigats, which follow'd us a far off, whereupon we conceiv'd the other four were sunk. Mean while, we continued on our Voyage with a favourable Wind, discovering towards the East, a low Country planted with Cocoes, and something farther, towards South-east, the Cape of Comory,* 1.95 the most Southerly quarter of this part of the Indies, by the Ancients call'd India on this side Ganges.

The night following, the Malabars made as if they would again attaque us, and two of their Frigots came within our Cannon, we only gave them two Volleys without Bullets to draw them nearer, but they retreated.

On the morrow, the twenty ninth, we saw the Isle of Ceylon,* 1.96 at the head whereof we were fix'd as immoveable by a Calm, which lasted three weeks compleat. This Island lies ten Leagues from the Continent, extending from South-south-east to the North-east, be∣twixt the Capes of Comory and Nigapatam, which lies at eleven degrees, towards the Coast of Coromandel. 'Tis in length sixty Leagues, in breadth forty, and about two hundred and fifty in compass. They say, it was heretofore much larger then now at present, and that the flowings of the Sea, which in those quarters are exceeding violent, carried part of it away, on the side towards Comory. This, without dispute, is the richest and most fertile of all the Eastern Islands, if we may credit Maffeus, the most learned and grave Author that hath written of the Affairs of the Indies, or particularly the experienc'd and famous S. Bor∣hart in his Phaleg; this is without doubt the Ancients Taprobane,* 1.97 though Mercator, Ios. De l' Escale, Em. Osorius, and others, take the Isle of Sumatra to be it, of which we shall speak hereafter.

Howsoever,* 1.98 it is most certain, Ceylon, or Zeilon, is the most considerable of all the Indian Islands, for it produces not only all such things as the other Islands afford, but moreover, there shall you see whole Forrests of Orange and Lemmon-trees, as also of Cinnamon, which emits its odour very far upon the Sea, and great quantity of precious Stones, in so much as, except the Diamonds, there is no Stone which is not there found. They fish

likewise there for Pearls, but they are not so fair as those of Baharam: but in recompence it produces the best Ivory of the World.* 1.99 Laurence, Son of Francisco Almeida, discover'd it in the year 1506. who took possession of it in the name of Emanuel King of Portugal, erecting there a Column, with an Inscription, signifying, that it had no owner, though at the same time he had a Treaty with one of the Kings of the Island, wherein he promised him the King of Portugal's protection, for two thousand five hundred Quintals of Cin∣namon, in acknowledgment. The Portuguez have since fortified the Town of Colombo, which lies at seven degrees on this side the Line, and kept it, till the Hollanders, three years since, in the year 1657. took this important place from them; by this means dispossessing them of all they held in this Island.

The Hollanders began not their Commerce here till the year 1602. in the time of Fima∣la Derma suri Ada, King of Candy, who is the most puissant, and in a manner the soveraign of the Island, who succeeded to the Crown by wayes so extraordinary, that I perswade my self 'twill not be tedious to the Reader, to hear the particulars.

Mara Ragu, King of Settavacca, had three Sons legitimate, and one natural, called Derma.* 1.100 Some will have this Derma to be the Son of a Chyrurgion; but they are mistaken, it being certain, he was the Son of Mara Ragu, begotten on one of these Balladeiraes, or Dancers, such as almost all the Indian Princes keep for their divertisement. Mara Ragu had an af∣fection for this Child, and caus'd him to be brought up a Souldier, that one day he might command his Forces; wherein Derma improv'd so well, and acquir'd such reputation, that the Army, who conceiv'd it would be a happiness to be under a Martial Prince, established him in the Throne, this unnatural Child having first taken away the lives of his Father and his three legitimate Sons.* 1.101 The Cingales, who in this Island of Ceylon are as the Nayres amongst the Malabares, had some regret to admit this change, and be Subjects to a Ba∣stard: but he began his reign with such severity, and ordered so many executions, that they who murmur'd most were compell'd to entertain what they could not hinder, till such time as they found means to make him away by poyson.

The death of Derma, and that of the King of Candy, which happened much about a time, very much advanced the establishment of the Portuguez in this Island. For, allow∣ing to the Cingales their ancient Liberties and Priviledges, and without scruple of Reli∣gion, intermarrying with them, they stood fair to become Masters of the Island, had it not been for the opposition of one Lord of the Nation, of whom they had good reason to be confident. His name was Fimala Derma Suri Ada, and was grand Modeliar, that is, Constable of the Kingdom of Candy, when the King dyed. He was Son to one of the chief Princes of the Kingdom, and in his youth had his breeding amongst the Portuguez, who brought him to Colombo, where he was baptized, and named Don Iohn of Austria, in remembrance of the natural Brother of Philip the second King of Spain. Afterward they educated him at Goa, whither they brought him at such time as D. Emanuel de Sousa Coutinno was Viceroy; and he was there likewise while Matheo Albuquerque succeeded D. Emanuel in the same Dignity.* 1.102 The Portuguez observing him to be a graceful person, and being, as they thought, sure of his affection, made no difficulty to confer upon him the Office of Grand Modeliar of Candy, and by this means to set him in the first rank of the whole Kingdom, wherein D. Iohn of Austria made such use of his trust, that he gain'd the affe∣ction of all the Souldiery, so as that after the decease of the King, the Cingales promoted him to succeed in his place.

The first thing he did, was to put to death all the Portuguez in the Town of Candy, and to declare war against the rest. There was yet a Princess, Heir to the Cr••wn, whom the Portuguez had brought to Mannar, where they baptized her, and named her D. Katharina, with design to make use of her when occasion should require, as in the present Conjun∣cture it did. For Pedro Lopes de Sousa, Captain General of Malacca, conceiving he could raise the Inhabitants of Candy in favour of this Princess, enters the Kingdom with a powerful Army, and with him brings along D. Katharina with intention to marry her, by which means he would make himself King, having first caused her to be acknowledged Heir. He became Master of the capital Town without much difficulty, but that prov'd his ruine. For D. Iohn, who, with his Cingales, was retir'd to the Woods, did not only annoy him in cutting off all the Portuguez, who came out of the Town for forrage or other necessaries of livelihood; but he so cut off all Provisions, that Lopes, to maintain his Army, was constrain'd to betake himself to the Field, and leave the Town, to give D. Iohn battel.* 1.103 It was fought in the year 1590. upon a Sunday; and notwithstanding the ad∣vantage the Portuguez had of their Fire-arms, and above fourty Elephants arm'd for war; D. Iohn, who would now have no other name then Fimala Derma Suri Ada, routed and absolutely defeated them. Lopes was kill'd upon the place, and D. Katharina became pri∣soner

to Fimala, who afterwards married her, by this means acquiring a right to the Crown, which before he only held by the Sword.

Four years after this Victory, D. Ieronimo d' Azeuedo, General of the Conquests of Zei∣lon, having receiv'd Orders from the King of Spain for a new attempt on the Kingdom of Candy, raises a potent Army, which the Viceroy of Goa reinforc'd with all the Cavaliers and Hidalgos attendance:* 1.104 he advances to Ballene the place where the first Battle was fought, and thence sends defiance to the King of Candy.

The Portuguez were not more fortunate in this, then they had been in the former battle; for though the Portuguez Army receiv'd not a defeat, and D. Ieronimo got high honour by his retreat for five dayes together in fight of the Kings Army, that pursued him to the ve∣ry Gates of Colombo; they were notwithstanding so weakned, that from that time the Portuguez durst never attempt the Kingdom of Candy by force. Nevertheless they cease not to maintain a war by surprizes and incursions one upon another.

For not long before the Hollanders arrived in the Isle of Zeilon,* 1.105 the Portuguez were most basely trappan'd by the double intelligence, which one Ieronimo Dias kept with them. He was by birth a Portuguez, but as the rest of his Nation, who settle amongst the Indians, making no difficulty to plant themselves in places where there is no publick exercise of Religion, easily lose that whereof they had only a fleight and superficial knowledge; so this man having renounc'd his Religion, undertook to betray his Country-men, as I am about to tell you. This Ieronimo, being prisoner to the King, remain'd at Candy till he had contrived the means to betray the Portuguez. Afterwards he escaped, and returning to D. Ieronimo d' Azeuedo, told him, that if he thought fit, he would undertake to kill the King of Candy. Azeuedo supposing after the Kings death, 'twould not be hard for him to possess himself of the Kingdom, hearkens to the Proposition, raises to himself an assurance in a Man, who undertakes in cold bloud to murther a Soveraign Prince; allows him three Captains, Christoval Iacomo, Albert Primero, and Iean Pereina, with two Souldiers, to assist him in this enterprize, which he made appear very feasible: promising to make him King of Candy immediately upon the Kings expiration, and furnishing him with a good sum of money for the purpose, without which, he said, there was nothing to be done. Dias would go alone, as well that he might seem to have escaped from the Portuguez, as to dispose the King to put these five Portuguez, his Complices, into the Fort of Ballene; for that he was to perswade the King, that they came likewise to render themselves to him, to serve against the other Portuguez: but being come to the King, he discover'd the double dealing he had contriv'd, so as the night following, the King re-inforc'd the Garrison of Ballone Fort, and went in person thither, on design to surprize the Portuguez, who were ambuscado'd in the Woods, to affault the Fort upon notice of the Kings death.

These five Portuguez, Confederates in Dias's treason, being arrived at the Fort, were re∣ceived in; but as they entred were conveyed into private rooms, where they were dis∣arm'd and put into Irons: which could not be carried with so much secrecy, but some of those Cingales the Portuguez brought along with them discovered it, so as returning with speed they gave notice to the Portuguez in the Ambuscade, who otherwise had run the hazard to be cut in pieces through the ill success of the enterprize. Ieronimo Dias for his service was rewarded with the dignity of Grand Modeliar, which he enjoy'd at the time the Hollanders arriv'd in the Island of Zeilon,* 1.106 where they sped no better then the Portu∣guez. For the King of Candy, who in the year 1602. received their Admiral with civili∣ty, in the year following, caus'd their Vice-admiral, with fifty of his Men, to be put to death in cold bloud; in so much as for that time they were constrained to lay aside all thoughts of settling a trade there. But since they have found opportunity for a firm establishment, by gaining from the Portuguez the Fort de Punto de Gallo, and fortifying the Port de Ne∣gombo, where they drive a great trade, much augmented by their taking likewise the Town of Colombo from the Portuguez, where these last kept commonly a Garrison of eight hun∣dred men.

The King of Candy is the most puissant and most absolute of all the Kings of Zeilon.* 1.107 He delights in the Portuguez manner of building, and fortifies his Holds after the modern way. This Kingdom extends it self along that River, on which the City of Vintane is scituate, where the Kings Galleys and other Vessels have their retreat. It contains many fair and well-built Towns.* 1.108 The Inhabitants are like the Malabars, but not so black. They go naked as low as the Navel, but some use Coats or Dublets after the Portuguez fa∣shion. In their Ears they hang Pendants, and the greatest part have a Cris or Poniard by their sides.* 1.109 Women have likewise their Breasts bare, and go very decent in habit, and in their conversation with Men discover much of modesty. They dress their Heads much like the European Women, laying their Hair very close on their Head, and tying their

Tresses behind. They wear Collars of Gold or Silver, and Rings upon their Hands and Feet, and their Arms and Legs beset with abundance of precious Stones. Their houses are conveniently enough built, and the Women very skillful in Cookery. The Cingales addict themselves to nothing at all, nor are they fit for war, by reason they are accustomed to so idle a life they can indure no hardship.

Throughout the Indies there is no part so abounds in all sorts of Victuals,* 1.110 as this Isle Zeilon. Fowl, Fish, Venison, Poultry, Butter, Milk and Honey, are at extraordinary low rates, as well as Ananas, Bannanas, Cocos, Iacques, Mangas, Oranges, Lemmons, Citrons, and all other sorts of Fruits. They eat of all things in general, even of Pork, and all sort of Cattle, except the Oxe, Cow, or Buffle; Wine they drink not, no more then the Mahu∣metans,* 1.111 who dwell amongst them, and enjoy a full liberty of Religion. These Islanders are of the same Religion as other Pagans in these parts. They bear great reverence to their Bramans, who observe a more austere way of living, and eat not of any thing hath had life, by reason that for the whole day they adore the first Beast they meet with at their coming out of doors in a morning. Maids are here married at the age of ten or twelve years: And they burn their dead Corps.

Fimala Derma Suri Ada had gotten some tincture of Christian Religion, if at least it be to be found amongst the Portuguez; it was soon raz'd out by the compliance he had for the Cingales; and after his decease his Successors fell back to Paganism. There are some amongst them, who adore the head of an Elephant, wrought in wood or stone, and say, their intention is to obtain wisdom; for they are of opinion, the Elephants of Ceilon are not only more knowing then other Elephants, but further, that they out-go men in judg∣ment. In their houses they have a Basket, wherein they put such things as they design for an offering to their Pagodes, to whom they have a particular devotion in their sicknesses, because it is from them alone they look for remedy. They hold, as matter of faith, that the World shall not perish so long as their grand Mosquey, which may be seen at a great distance from the Sea, between Punto de Gallo and Monte Calo, shall be extant. Another particular opinion they have of a Mountain in this Island call'd Pico d' Adam, and say it was there that the first Man was fram'd; that the Spring on the top of this Mountain rose from the tears Eve shed for Abel; and that the Isle of Ceilon was part of the terre∣strial Paradise. To conclude, they are very docile, and willing to acknowledge the errours of their Idolatry; in so much that there were great likelihood of their conversion, if Christians would undertake these long Voyages, as much out of a religious zeal, as worldly concernments.

All the other Kings of Ceilon,* 1.112 except the King of Candy, pay tribute to the Portuguez: but 'tis so inconsiderable, that the Princes think it not worth while to take Arms to free themselves from a subjection, which consists but in a bare acknowledgment. For the King of Matecalo, who is not the least considerable amongst them, payes annually but fifty Duc∣kates.

The Island produces Pepper, but their chiefest Commodity is Cinnamon. They find here Mines of Brass and Iron; and certainly there is both Gold and Silver,* 1.113 especially in the Kingdom of Candy, but the King will not permit a search to be made for the discovery thereof. Their rich Stones they permit not likewise to be sold to Strangers, which are there found in great abundance; but there is so great plenty thereof, that it is impossible but some may be had under hand; for they are found in the heaps of Gravel, and in the Town of Candy; nay, after the Rain hath washed down the Earth of some neighbouring Mountains, the Inhabitants find them in the currents of Water, and though they are ob∣lig'd to bring them all to the King, 'tis impossible that Order should be exactly ob∣served.

The Island likewise yields Timber and Stone for building; the Soyl produces Corn, Oyl and Wine, if any Man will take the pains to plant the Vine, Cotton, several Roots for Dyers, Ginger, Cardamoms, Mirobalans, Corcoma, and divers other Medicinable Drugs, Nutmegs, &c. but particularly so great a quantity of Rice, that the whole Coast of Caro∣mandel is furnished from hence. Likewise here is so great a quantity of Cinnamon, that the Hollanders buy it for a hundred and twenty eight Livres, forty eight Souls the Quintal or Hundred weight.

The chief Maritime Towns of the Isle of Ceylon are scituated at this distance follow∣ing: that is, from Punto de Gallo Westward, Alican. 9. l. Verberin, 1 l. Calutre 3. l. and Colombo 6. l. Nogombo 5. l. le Gilan 5. l. Putalon 10. l. Maunar 18. l. Eastward to the Coast of Matecala, Bellingan 4. l. Mature 2. l. Du••dule 1. l. Tamnadar 1. l. Halpilana, two Leagues and a half. Attalle 3. l. Veleche 9. l. Tansilir 7. l, Trincoli, 12. l. Mateca∣lo 5. l. and thence to the River of Trinquamale 10. l. To go from Colombo to Candy;

the way lies through Tranquero grand, that is, the great Fort, or the great Rampier, 3. l. Maluana 2. l. Grouabley 3. l. Settavecca 3. l. Grouenelle 2. l. Mumera tuate 4. l. Duie∣ly 3. l. Matappety 2. l. Altonnar 1 l. Ganiattany 1. l. Ballene 1. l. Cady 1. l. From Matecalo to Candy, the Road is as follows, Aldea de Nore 1. l. Occato••y 2. l. Via∣dor 2. l. Neguritti 5 l. Niluale 2. l. Vegamme 4. l. Vintane 6. l. Vendro 5. l. Can∣dy 4. l.

The Calm staid our Ship hard by this Isle, for near upon three weeks, which I imploy'd in inquiring of our President and certain Iesuits, who were aboard our Vessels, into this pleasant part of the Indies, which I had never seen, and merits to be known by the De∣scription I shall make from the report of these persons, amongst whom there were some who had spent there the best part of their lives. I will then begin with the place where we were, and faithfully deliver you all I could learn of those Kingdoms and Provinces, which without question are the wealthiest of any in the World.

Towards the Cape of Comory, or Comorin, where we then were, are likewise those Islands the Portuguez call Maldivas,* 1.114 or Maldivar. They extend along the Coast of Ma∣labar, having the Cape upon the North, and taking up about sevenscore Leagues by Sea, which divides them into such small parcels, that they are esteem'd near upon a thousand. Some are inhabited, others not, by reason they lye so low the Sea often drowns them, as it doth likewise the Skirts of the Continent, near Cochim, and Crangonar. The Malabares say, that heretofore they were joyn'd to the Continent, and were separated by the Sea, which in some places hath left such narrow divisions, that an active man might leap from one side to the other. The Capital City, which consists of four Islands, and gives them the appellation of Maldives, or Naldive, is a place famous for trading, and the Residence for the King of all the Islands. Except Cocoes, which are there in great abundance, they produce little, notwithstanding the Inhabitants by industry make very neat Gar∣ments both of Silk and Thread brought from other places; in so much that set aside the Moguls, there are not amongst the Indians any that go more neatly apparrell'd then they.

As concerning Coromandel,* 1.115 the Eastern part of the Indies on this side Ganges is so called, a Coast divided from the Malabares by the Mountain Balagatta, extending from South to North, from the Cape of Comorin, or rather the point of Negapatam, to the River Nagund, and the Town of Masulepatam, containing all along the Coast, about a hundred Leagues. 'Tis the more commodious, for that it serves for a retreat to all Vessels which are con∣strain'd to quit the Coast of Gusuratta during the Winter season, and it hath many good Havens, and the best Roads of any in all the Indies.

The Portuguez there possess the Town of Saint Thomas,* 1.116 at thirteen degrees, thirty two minutes on this side the Line; and they say, that at the time when Vasco de Gama disco∣vered the Indies, and seiz'd on Cochim and Cranganor, the Inhabitants on this Coast, who called themselves Christians, crav'd protection of the King of Portugal; and that arriving at Saint Thomas they found Christians who made profession of the Greek Religion. For this purpose they tell a Story grounded on a Tradition, which nevertheless is not to be proved out of the Ecclesiastical History.* 1.117 Thus then they say, that Saint Thomas, one of our Saviours twelve Apostles, having long preach'd the Gospel in the Kingdom of Nor∣singia, notwithstanding the opposition of the Bramans, resolv'd to petition the King that he might build a Chappel for the doing of his Devotions, and that the Bramans engag'd the King to deny him the favour. But it happened that a huge piece of Timber was so lodg'd in the mouth of the Haven, belonging to the Town of Meliapour, then the Metro∣polis of the Kingdom, that not only great Vessels, but the smaller Barks, being not able to get in, the Trade of the Town was in a short time quite lost. There was a trial made with a company of Elephants to remove the Tree, but in vain; then the Magicians of those parts were imploy'd to try if their Art could do what strength could not effect, but to as little purpose; wherefore the King proclaim'd a considerable reward to him that could clear the Haven, which invited the Saint to offer his service, and this for no other reward, then the mere Timber it self. His proffer to draw it out himself made him at first appear ridiculous, and specially when they saw him tye his Girdle to it, to draw out a weight that many Elephants had not the strength to stir; but he pulling, the Beam followed, as easily as if it had been a little Boat, which when he had laid upon the Land, the King was amaz'd with admiration, and in honour of the Miracle, permitted him to build the Chap∣pel, as he had requested. The Bramans seeing their Doctrine disparag'd by this Miracle, and that if Christian Religion began to spread in those parts, there was little hope to sup∣port the Pagan; they resolve to free themselves of the Apostle, and cause certain Panyms to murther him while he was at his Devotions in his Chappel. Some there are who will have

the Church dedicated to this Saint in that place, to be built by a King of Narsinga, and that the door was made of that miraculous beam; but the Portuguez say they built it, of which indeed there is most probability.

Lentscholen saith, that in these parts there are certain people with one leg bigger then the other, and that they are held to be the Progeny of those that martyred the Apostle.

Maffeus, in the eighth Book of his Indian History, relates how Iohn the second King of Portugal made search for the bones of this Saint upon the Coasts of Coromandel, which he transported to Goa, where he built a fair Church in honour of him: but if credit may be given to Ruffinus and Socrates, in their Ecclesiastical History, the Apostle Saint Thomas suf∣fered his Martyrdom at Edessa in Mesopotamia,* 1.118 whither heretofore they made Pilgrimages to his Sepulchre; yet Marco Paulo Veneto sayes otherwise, though with some contradicti∣on to himself. Gasper Balbi a Venetian Jeweller, who hath made a very handsome relation of his Travels in the Indies, sayes, That, being at the Town of Saint Thomas, in the year 1582. there was a Church then building in the honour of Saint Iohn Baptist; and that the building almost finished, they found they wanted Timber to perfect it, when at the same time the Sea cast a Tree ashore of such a bulk, that looking on it as a thing extraordi∣nary, they would needs measure it; and finding it to be a just proportion for the Edifice, the people cryed out a Miracle, wherein they were confirm'd, when sawing it, it yielded just so many Beams as serv'd to finish the Church. Headds further, that the Tree came from some far distant place, because in cutting, it sent forth such a stinking smell, that it in∣fected the whole Country. The Town of Saint Thomas is not very great, but the greatest part of the Houses are of Stone, and well built. The Church there hath no Steeple, yet may be seen at a good distance. There live here about six hundred Portuguez, or Mestizes, besides some Armenian Merchants.

The Indians,* 1.119 Pagans, and Mahumetans, live in the Town of Meliapour, which is seated on a small River two Leagues from Saint Thomas Northward; but it is faln from the pristine glory it had, when it was the Capital Town of the Kingdom of Narsinga. The King of Portugal hath no Governour at Saint Thomas, nor so much as a Magistrate, nor any political Order; by reason whereof divers disorders are daily committed without punish∣ment.

The South and South-west Winds reign here from April to September, during which time the Road is very good; but all the rest of the year, small Barks are constrain'd to get into the River Palacatte, and greater Vessels into the Haven of Negupatam. You have five fathom water even within Cannon-shot of the Town; but the Sea is so rough at all times, there is no Landing without danger!

Upon this Coast the Hollanders have divers Plantations where they drive a great Trade; but principally at Potlapouli, otherwise call'd Nisapatam, where they have had their Ware-houses ever since the year 1606. and at Paleacatte, where they have built the Fort of Geldria.

This Country was heretofore divided into three Kingdoms, that is, Coromandel, Narsinga and Bisnagar; but at present 'tis all subject to one Prince, who resides sometimes at Bis∣nagar, sometimes at Narsinga.

Above the Town of Masulipatam, lyes the Country, or Kingdom rather, of Orixa,* 1.120 reaching from the River of Masulipatam to the River of Guenga; but the Hollanders would have it comprehended under the name of the Coast of Coromandel. The chief Towns of the Kingdom are Masulipatam and Golcanda,* 1.121 the one considerable for Com∣merce, the other for being the Kings Ordinary Residence. The Country yields plenty of Salt, and Diamonds are likewise there found; but all above five Caratts in weight apper∣tain to the King.

Next to Orixa,* 1.122 winding towards the North, lyes the Kingdom of Bengala, which gives name to the Gulph, by the Ancients called Sinus Gangeticus. They drive here a great trade in Rice, Sugar, and Cotton, but chiefly in Silks, which are esteem'd the best in all the Indies. The finest Canes we have are brought from Bengala, where there likewise grows a sort of Canes which are finer then the Osier, in so much as Vessels are made of them, which being glazed with Lacque on the inside, co••tain liquid matters, as long and as well as a Glass or Silver Bowl. There also grows a certain Herb, having on the top of its stalk, (which is about the compass of a mans thumb) a great button like a tassel: this tassel is spun out, and there are excellent Stuffs made of it. The Portuguez call it Herba de Bengala, and make of it Hangings, and Coverlets, in which they represent all sorts of Figures.

The people of the Country are all Pagans, and, in the manner of their living, exceeding brutish.* 1.123 Theft is here very common, and Adultery, though it be punished with severity by cutting off their Noses who are taken in it; they forbear not nevertheless to pollute themselves with all sort of uncleanness can be committed in that Vice. The bear re∣ligious worship to the River of Ganges, and hold the water hereof to be so holy, that who wash themselves therein are cleansed from all their sins; and this superstition reaches so far,* 1.124 that the King of Narsinga sends to the Ganges, for the water he uses for his purifi∣cations.

The Kingdom of Pegu joyns upon Bengala,* 1.125 upon the East-side, and takes its name from the capital City, where the King hath placed the Seat of his Monarchy. This is a very potent State, and as Gaspar Balbi sayes, (whom I follow in this Relation, because I saw not the Country) the Metropolis is divided into two parts; the one called the old, the other the new Town. The King, with all that relate to the Court, live in the latter, and Merchants and Tradesmen inhabit the other. For the greatest part, the dwelling-houses are built of Canes, but they are joyn'd to Ware-houses that are vaulted to prevent fire. The new Town is four-square, and the Flankers of it so streight, that from any Gate thereof one may discover both corners of the Wall. There are Bastions of Timber,* 1.126 and a large Moat, full of water, where they keep Crocodiles to secure the Town from surprizal. The Peguans hold this Creature to have something Divine about it, whence it comes they are so desirous to drink the water, though they fetch it not without danger of being de∣vour'd by the Crocodiles, as it often happens. Notwithstanding, they water their Ele∣phants there; but this is a Beast that strikes terrour in the Crocodiles, and would be too hard for them.

The Palace Royal stands in the middle of the City,* 1.127 and hath its peculiar Fortifications, Walls and Moats, whereby it is divided from the Town. The Castle is said to be much more spacious then the City of Venice; and that there is no entrance but on the Town∣side, by two Ports, and as many Draw-bridges. Within the first Port are the Houses of the Grandees, who enter not into the body of the Castle, without express Order from the King. His Guard consisting of a great number of Souldiers, with them called Bramas, is kept at the second Port,* 1.128 where they sit, having their Arms hanging before them on the Wall. In this place are the Stables for Elephants, as well such as are kept for the Princes service, as those design'd for War, being about eight hundred in number. The Kings Ap∣partment is exceeding rich, painted Azure, with Flowers of Gold; and when the King gives Audience, he appears in great magnificence. In his hand he holds a Fan, to Fan him∣self, and on his head he hath a quadruple Crown of Gold, enamell'd white. Near his per∣son stand four Youths, whom he makes use of in his brutalities; and before him all the Grandees of the Court, who whensoever they speak to him lift their hands above their head, and bow down to the ground. Being sate, they bring before him his fairest Elephants, and amongst the rest his white one, which is said to be the only one in all the Indies, nor ever is there more then one to be seen at Court, which was brought thither after the Victo∣ry he gain'd against the King of Siam, with whom he had not made War but to gain that Beast, as we shall tell you anon. These Beasts make their reverence to him, and testifie a Worship to his Person. If we may give credit to the fore-mentioned Balbi, this, next the King of China,* 1.129 is the most Potent Prince on Earth. He sayes, this Prince can bring into the Field fifteen hundred thousand Men, and above eight hundred Elephants, and that his Treasure is sufficient for so mighty an Army, by reason every Person of Qua∣lity is oblig'd to raise and maintain so many Men of War at his own proper charges.

He relates to this purpose, that, in his time, the King of Auva,* 1.130 his Fathers Brother, but Vassal to the King of Pegu, denying homage to his Nephew, and to pay such Diamonds and precious Stones as he stood oblig'd to in that consideration; the King of Pegu, who was well assured his Uncle held a very private intelligence with some Noble men of his King∣dom, against the security of his State and Person, to shew how mindful he was of his Fa∣thers request on his death-bed, and the recommendation he then made in favour of the King of Auva; sent him an Embassadour extraordinary to reduce him to his Duty, and perswade him to come in again to him: but his Uncle, instead of taking the advantage of his Nephews Nobleness, puts the Embassadour to death, and declares War against the King of Pegu. But he having raised an Army of three hundred thousand men, before he would march into the Field, purg'd his Court, and put to death those Traytors who had ingagede to deliver him into the hands of his Uncle. Assembling then all the Confederates of this Treason, under pretence of calling them to a Councel about this War; he caused them to be secured,* 1.131 and they, their Wives and Children, to be burnt alive. Then to free himself from the Odium of so horrid an Execution, he sends to the Judge, that he should defer the Execu∣tion,

till he receiv'd express Order under his Signet; but the Dogad gini, or Judge, who had other private instructions, proceeded according to them.

That done, the King of Pegu appeared in the head of his Army, mounted on an Ele∣phant, covered with trappings of Tissue, having by his side a Sword, that was presented him by D. Lewis of Atayda, Viceroy of Goa, resolving to march in few dayes against his Uncle, but he was hindred by the small Pox, which he had in extremity. As soon as he was recovered,* 1.132 he causes the Army to advance to the very Frontiers of Auva, where he accepts a Challenge sent him by his Uncle, that they two might decide the difference by a single Combat; and was so fortunate, as to kill his Adversary, in view of both Armies. This single Victory was of greater advantage, then a defeat of the Enemies whole Army could have brought him: for the whole Kingdom of Auva delivered it self up, at mercy: The Queen, who was his Sister, fell likewise into his hands, and was prisoner during life, though kept in a Princely Palace, and honoured and attended as a Queen.

The King of Pegu, in acknowledgment of the service his Elephant had done him in the Combate, where he fell dead under his Master, caused certain Pagodes to be made of his Tooth, and had them placed amongst the other Idols kept in a Varella, or Mosquee, which is within the Castle.* 1.133 Amongst these Idols there is the Figure of a Man, done to the life, in massy Gold, having on the Head a Crown enchas'd with precious Stones of divers kinds, on the Forehead a Ruby as big as a Plum, and on each side the Head Pendants as rich as can be imagined, about the Waste a Scarf, and over the right Shoulder, and under the left Arm, a Chain of Diamonds and other Stones inestimable. In the same Chappel are like∣wise three Statues of Silver, higher by two foot then the first; with Crowns set with Gems, and a fourth more massive and rich then all the rest, and besides these a Figure made of Ganza, which is a mixt metal of Copper and Brass, valued at as high a rate as the other four. The Kings Father, who lived in the year 1578. caused these Statues to be made in memory of that famous Victory he obtain'd over the King of Siam, in the War he made against him, for the white Elephant we spoke of.

The Forrests of Pegu have greater store of Elephants then all the Indies besides,* 1.134 and they are tam'd with very little trouble, in ten or twelve dayes after they are taken by the means of Females, who intice them out of the Woods, and make them follow into the very Stables, where there are Dens that hold but one of these Beasts only, where they shut them close in as soon as they are entred.

The Peguans have Fire-arms, but ordinarily they use half Pikes made of Canes, short and broad Swords, and long and narrow Bucklers made of boyl'd Leather doubled, and laid over with a certain black Gum call'd Achiran; their Salades or Helmets are made of the same stuff, and like ours in fashion.

They are generally Pagans,* 1.135 except some who contracting alliance with the Portuguez, have embrac'd their Religion. These Pagans believe that God, who hath under him many other Gods, is the Author of all good which arrives to Mankind; but the disposing of all evil he leaves to the Devil,* 1.136 to whom these wretches bear more veneration then they do to God; because the one will do them no hurt; and they must please the other, that he may not.

They do they Devotions ordinarily on the Munday,* 1.137 and have besides, five principal Feasts which they call Sapan. The first, which they call Sapan Giacchi, is chiefly cele∣brated by a Pilgrimage, made by the King and Queen, twelve Leagues out of Town, where they appear in triumphal Chariots, so set with precious Stones, that, without Hyperbole, it may be said they carry the worth of a Kingdom about them. They call the second, Sapan Carena, observ'd in honour of the Statue kept in the grand Varelle of the Castle, in honour of which the Noblemen of the Court erect Pyramides of Canes, which they co∣ver with several Stuffs artificially wrought of divers fashions, then have them put into Chariots drawn by above three hundred persons to the Kings view, that he may judge of their inventions. All the people come likewise, and bring their Offerings to him. The Sapan Giaimo Segienon, they celebrate also in honour of some of these Statues, where the King and Queen are both present in person; and the fourth Feast, which they call Sapan Daiche, is particularly celebrated in the old Town; at which the King and Queen cast Rose-water at one another. All the Grandees have likewise a pot of Rose-water in their hands, wherewith they so water themselves, that their bodies are as 'twere bath'd all over, nor can any one pass the Streets that day, without hazard of being wash'd with water thrown from the windows. At the fifth Feast, called Sapan Donon, the King and Queen go by water to the Town of Meccao, attended by above a hundred Boats, all which row for the fastest, to gain a Prize allow'd by the King.

The King dying, they prepare two Boats, which they cover with one gilt Covering, and in the middle of these Boats they place a Table,* 1.138 whereon they lay the dead Corps; and underneath the Table they make a fire of the Wood of Sandale, Beniouin, Storax, and other sweet-scented Woods and Drugs, then turn the Barks down the Stream, certain Talapoi or Priests mean while singing and rejoycing till the flesh be intirely consum'd. These Ashes they temper with Milk, so making a Paste, which they carry to the mouth of the River, where they cast it into the Sea. But the Bones they bear to another place, and bury them near a Chappel, where they build another in honour of the de∣ceased.

Their Talapoi carry a Bottle made of an empty Gourd at their girdle,* 1.139 and live by Alms, as our Mendicant Friars. They are in great esteem amongst them, and they very well pre∣serve their credit by their exemplary life. On Munday morning they go about with their Tin-basins, to awake the people and invite them to a Sermon. They treat not at all of points of Doctrine, but chiefly insist upon Morality, exhorting the Congregation to ab∣stain from Murther, Thefe, Fornication and Adultery, and to do to others as they would be done by. For this reason they are of opinion, that Men are sooner saved by good Works and innocency of Life, then by Faith. They have no Aversion for those that forsake their Religion to become Christans, so their Life be correspondent to the Profession they make.

They exclaim lowdly against the Offerings the Peguans make to the Devil, particularly when they perform any Vow they made in their sickness, or in any other unfortunate Acci∣dent, and endeavour to abolish this wicked custom, which is grown so inveterate, that hi∣therto they have lost their labour. These people ordinarily live in Woods, and to prevent the danger of wild Beasts, whereof these parts are full, they have their Couches hanging in the Air betwixt boughs of Trees. They eat but once a day, and are habited in red Vestures that reach to their heels, bare-footed, and over their Shoulders a short Coat or Mantle that comes to their hams. They shave their heads, nay cannot endure hair upon any part of their body; and to guard them from the Sun-beams they wear a Hat. Great honours are done to them after their death, and after their Corps hath been attended certain dayes, they are burnt with Sandale-wood, they cast the Ashes into the River, and inte••r the ••ones near the place they liv'd in.

Pegu yields no Corn at all,* 1.140 but in recompence, they have more Rice then they can spend; in so much that they can afford some to their Neighbours. They have a custom to make a Drug of certain little Fishes, which they pound in a Mortar, and being so brought to a Paste, they lay it in the Sun to putrifie, till it be quite corrupted, and grows moist, and then they use it in their Sauces, instead of Oyl or Butter, making a dainty of that, which it were not possible for us to endure the smell of.

Sodomy was heretofore so common in those parts,* 1.141 that to extirpate this Vice, which had near destroy'd the whole Species, one of the Queens of Pegu ordain'd by Edict; that eve∣ry Man should carry in his Yard a little Bell, which would make it swell in such sort, that he should not be able to do Nature any violence. And to the end the Women should not be frustrated of their due, their Virginity was to be taken away, while they were yet very young, by means of a Composition, of contrary operation to that used by common Wo∣men to heighten the pleasures of their Gallants. These little Bells are put in betwixt the skin and the flesh: and to effect the operation, they cast them into a sleep, with a cer∣tain Drink, to make them insensible of the pain they are put to by the Incision, whereof notwithstanding they are cur'd in few dayes. For their greater aversion from Sodomy, they paint the Boyes at seven or eight years of age with a certain blew, which extending with the skin as it grows, changes into another colour, and makes them look most horribly. The Women, on the contrary, do all they can to appear lovely, and attract the Men, covering their privy parts only with a thin piece of Linnen, which sits not so close, but the least wind shews all they have.

All of them in general make their Teeth black, and Men, when they ride on horseback, fill their Mouths with something that pu••fs out their Checks. They who marry buy their Wives of their Parents; and when they are cloy'd send them home again, but the money belongs to the Wife, who on her side is obliged to restitution, if sh•• part with her Hus∣band without cause.

The King is Heir to all that dye without Children,* 1.142 and they who have Children can leave them but two thirds of their Estate, the rest belongs to the King.

The best Commodities to be brought to Pegu, and which may be sold to greatest profit, are Stuffes and Linnen-clothes, from Saint Thomas, Musulipatam and Bengala; Pepper, Cinnamon, Nutmegs, Optum and Sandale-wood, &c. by reason they have no other Spices

then Ginger. At Pegu they take in no other Merchandizes then Silver and Rice, which they transport to Malacca. In bargaining they make no words at all, they do no more but give their Hand cover'd with a Handkerchief, and in grasping or moving their Fingers they make their meaning known. For borrowing of money they stick not to pawn their Wives and Children; but if the Creditour enjoyes them carnally during that time, he is then paid, and the Debtour acquitted.

Siam,* 1.143 one of the most considerable Kingdoms of the Indies, lying at eighteen degrees on this side the Line, hath on the North, the Kingdoms of Pegu and Auva; on the West, the Gulf of Bengala, from the Haven of Martanan to the Town of Tavaga; towards the East, Patana, whence the Coast runs first Northwards to thirteen degrees and a half, compre∣hending in this space, the Gulf of Siam: And lastly, Southward, to twelve degrees, lying more at a distance from the Sea; it joyns Eastward on the Desarts of Cambodia, and the Kingdoms of Iangoma, Tangou and Lansiaugh, to eighteen degrees towards the foremen∣tioned Kingdoms of Pegu and Auva, making as it were a semi-circle, containing near upon four hundred and fifty Leagues. The Country in some parts is rough and mountainous, in other parts covered with Woods, and to the Seawards 'tis low and marshy, and generally flat, good and fertile, yielding in abundance all necessaries for livelihood; and having on the Gulfes divers Isles, Rivers, Bayes, Harbours and Roads, commodious for the transpor∣tation of such things as they themselves can spare.

The River called Menam,* 1.144 that is, Mother of the waters, is one of the greatest India hath. The breadth of it is not great, but its length such, that hitherto no man hath discovered the head of it. It sends its Current from North to South, passing through the Kingdoms of Pegu and Auva; and at last, running through Siam, by three Streams it falls into the Gulf of Siam.* 1.145 One quality it hath common with the Nile and Ganges, that it yearly overflows the adjacent Country, for the space of five moneths together, destroying in that time all Worms and Insects, and leaving, when it retires, a slime or moist soil proper for the increase of Rice. That Channel of this River which is most commodious for Barks or Vessels, is that, which lies most Eastwards, at thirteen degrees and a half elevation, but what makes it almost useless, is, that there lies a Shelf a League in length, or bet∣ter, at the mouth of the River, which at low-water holds not above five or six foot water.

At high-water it holds fifteen or sixteen foot, and in September, October and November, seventeen or eighteen foot. Vessels of greater burthen ordinarily stay in the Road two Leagues from the Shelf, where having at no time less then five or six fathom water they ride secure. They who venture to come over the Shelf with the Tide, may go up along the River to the City of Banckock, six Leagues from the Sea, and thence may pass by boat in five or six dayes, as high as the City of India, twenty four Leagues within the Land, except in the moneths before mentioned, during which season the River is inna∣vigable.

The Provinces of this vast Kingdom are all very populous,* 1.146 though not equally; for such as have the Commodity of Rivers and Havens, far exceed those that lye more re∣mote. It would be very difficult to reckon all the Towns of this great Dominion: wherefore we will here give only an account of the principal and most considerable, either for greatness, or as the most considerable of the several Provinces. The chief of the Kingdom is India, by some called Odya; then Camboya, Campaa, Sincapura, Picelouck, Surkelouck, Capheng, Soucethay, Kephinpet, Conseywan, Pytsyay, Pitsedi, Lidure, Te∣nou, Mormelon, Martenoy, Lygor, Bordelong, Tanasserim, where the Portuguez drive a good Trade, Banckock, Pipry, Mergy, &c. Besides which, there are many more, which rather deserve a place in a Map, then in the Relation of a particular Mans Travels.

The City of India,* 1.147 the ordinary Residence of the Court, is seated on the River Menam, which makes an Island entirely taken up by that City, having on the River-side a strong sufficient wall, for about two Leagues in compass, and the Suburbs on both sides the River, as well built and adorn'd with Temples and Palaces as the Town it self. Here are divers very fair Streets, with Channels regularly cut; but withall there are some which are nei∣ther large nor fair, though the River crosses the Town in so many places, that there is scarce a house but may be gone to by boat.

The Houses here,* 1.148 as generally all over the Indies, are but of ordinary building, and for the most part covered with Tiles. There are within the Town above three hundred fair Mosqueys, or Chappels, with gilt Steeples, or Pyramides, which at a distance yield a glorious prospect, with abundance of Pagodes of all sorts of Metals. The Palace, which is as it were a City of it self within the other, hath its Towers and Pyramides gilt, so as the City

of India may be said to be as beautiful, as large, and as populous as any City in India; ne∣vertheless, I will not affirm what Fernando Mendez Pinto writes, that it contains within its Circuit four hundred thousand Families, whereof three quarters are Siamezes▪ but thus much I can add, that the City hath this advantage, that it is impregnable; for being of it self strong enough to indure any Siege for many moneths; it hath an infallible relief, which never fails at six moneths end, by reason that the River overflowing, no Line can withstand it, nor no Camp can be so strong but must dislodge.

The King of Siam that now reigns,* 1.149 and who amongst his other Titles, takes that of Pre∣cau Salcu, that is, Sacred Member of God, holds the Crown from his Ancestors, who have possessed it for many Ages; and next to the Mogul, this Prince can reckon more Kings of his Family, then any Prince of the Indies.

He is absolute Monarch in his Dominions,* 1.150 solely disposing, with an Independant Au∣thority, of all Affairs of his Kingdom. He makes War and Peace, imposes Taxes on his Subjects, creates Magistrates, sets value on Money, and makes Laws and Statutes, without the consent or advice either of States or Lords: He allows them to consider of such Affairs as come to their knowledge, and to offer him their Advice by way of Re∣monstrance; but he reserves to himself the Power to approve, or reject, what he pleases.

These Noble men are called Mandorins; and are there as the Privy Council, a quality the King bestows on whom he pleases, as he doth of all other Honours in the Kingdom, without regard either to birth or merit; because his Subjects are his Slaves, and the King is Master of all they possess, even their very lives, whereof he hath power to dispose to his service and advantage. 'Tis true that in this, as in deposing the Mandorins from their Dignities, and reducing them to the rank of their fellow Subjects, he observes some appear∣ance of Equity, by following in some measure the Laws of the Kingdom, but being above the Law, he explicates and executes it as he pleases.

The Prince is exceeding magnificent in his Apparel and Train,* 1.151 but his State appears in nothing more then his manner of living. For the people, who seldom see him, have a pe∣culiar Veneration for his Person, nor do the Grandees and Officers scarce ever come into his presence. When he gives Audience, he sits most gloriously habited on a Throne of Gold, with a Crown on his head, and at his feet the Officers and Gentlemen of the Houshold on their knees; and not far from him a Guard of three hundred Souldiers. No one speaks to him but on the knee, and they who come for audience present themselves in this sort, their hands being lifted above their head, and making to him ever and anon most low reverences: The continual inclinations that are made him, and the Titles given him, must likewise be accompanied with oblieging speeches, and attributions beyond what either greatness or goodness can deserve.

His Answers are receiv'd as Oracles, and his Orders executed without delay or dispute. He hath in every Province of his Kingdom his Palaces and Gardens: when he removes his Houshold, he hath with him a number of Elephants loaden with Tents, to be pitched when he comes to places fit to rest in.

He hath but one Wife.* 1.152 to whom they give the Title of Queen; but he hath an infinite number of Concubines, which are chosen for him out of the fairest Virgins of the King∣dom. He feeds very high, but drinks only Water, because the Laws both Civil and Eccle∣siastical prohibit the use of Wine to Persons of Quality; when he pleases to recreate him∣self upon the River, he goes in a splendid gilt Barge under a Canopy of Brocadoe, attended by some of his Domesticks, and a Guard of three or four hundred, in seven or eight other Barges, which have each of them fourscore or a hundred Slaves to row. The Noblemen who follow, and are sometimes to the number of a thousand or twelve hundred, have each their several Barge.

The like is done when the King goes from his Palace into the City; Then he sits in a Chair of Gold, born on the shoulders of ten or twelve Waiters, having marching before him many Elephants and Horses richly harnessed, in this sort marching with a slately and grave pace, while the people prostrate themselves to him, and render him the same honours they might do to God himself.

He appears particularly in his greatest Magnificence on a certain day in October, designed for this Ceremony.* 1.153 On this day, he appears both in the City, and upon the River, to make a procession to one of his chiefest Mosquees, whither he goes to sacrifice, and to do his De∣votions for the prosperity of the State. In the head of this procession march about two hundred Elephants, each of them carrying three arm'd Men▪ then comes the Musick, consisting of Hoboyes, Tabours, and Cimbals: next come about a thousand Men compleat∣ly arm'd, divided into several Companies that have their Colours and Banners. Next to

these follow many Noble men on horseback, and amongst them some with Crowns of Gold upon their Heads, with a Train of fourscore or a hundred persons on foot. Betwixt these Noble men and the Life-guard, march two hundred Souldiers, Iaponeses, all very well cloath'd, and go immediately before the Horses and Elephants, which are for the Kings par∣ticular use, their harness made with Buckles and Studs of Gold, set with Diamonds and other precious Stones. The Servants, who bear the Fruits and other things for the Sacri∣fice, march before certain Grandees of the Kingdom, whereof one bears the Kings Standard, the other the Scepter of Justice. These walk on foot immediately before the King, who sits, mounted on an Elephant, in a Chair of Gold. The Prince his Son, or some other Prince of the Bloud, follows next after him, and then comes the Queen and the Kings other Women on Elephants, but not to be seen, as being in certain wooden Closets gilt. The rest of the Houshold, and six hundred of the Guard, come in the Rear, which by this means consists of fifteen or sixteen thousand persons.

As to their Procession upon the River,* 1.154 they observe the order following. First, in the head of this Fleet march about two hundred Noble men, each in his several Barge, where they sit in a gilt Cabin, and each Barge row'd by three or fourscore Slaves. Then follow four Barges assign'd for the Musick, and next follow about fifty Barks of State, each having fourscore, or fourscore and ten Rowers; and after these come ten other gilt Barges, in one of which the King is seated in a Throne of Gold, attended by divers Noble men, all upon their knees before him, and amongst them, one of the chiefest Mandorins, who bears his Standard. The Prince follows after him in another Barge, and after him comes the Queen, and the Concubines; And lastly, in a great number of other Barges, the houshold Servants and the Guards, so as that this Procession consists of twenty five or thirty thou∣sand persons, who come either to see the magnificence of the Ceremony, or to adore their Prince.

Since the thirds of all real Estates fall to the King,* 1.155 we may well suppose his Revenue to be very great; but this advantage comes not near the profits accrewing to him by the Commerce, which by Factours he holds with Strangers for his Rice, Copper, Lead, and Salt-peter. He hath in his Country good store of Gold; and the Customs he hath of all Merchandizes, both coming in and going out, bring considerable sums, besides the Presents which Governours of Provinces are obliged to make him every year. A great profit like∣wise he raises by Commerce with ready Money into China, and along the Coast of Coro∣mandel, which yields him yearly two thousand Cattys of Silver advantage. He hath throughout his Kingdom abundance of Officers for managing of his Revenue, and re∣ceiving his Moneys, which as Mendez Pinto sayes, amounts annually to twelve Milli∣ons of Duccats; but principally in the City of India, whither they repair from all o∣ther parts,* 1.156 once a year, to make their accounts. The greatest charge the King is at, next his Houshold, is in building places and Mosquees, rewarding Services, and maintain∣ing his Guards, the rest comes into the Treasury, which by this means swells almost to infinity.

Most Cities have their particular Jurisdictions, and Judges for Administration of Ju∣stice, to take an account whereof there is a Council appointed in the City of India, consist∣ing of a President, and twelve Councellors, who give a definitive Sentence, and decide all differences brought before them by way of appeal: 'tis nevertheless allowed them some∣times to prevent these Sentences by a Review before the Privy Councel▪ but this happens not frequently, by reason, the Charges are so great, very few will undertake it. They plead by Councellors and Atturneys, both by word and writing, but in presence of both parties who are to enter a Summary of the Plea in the Recorders Register. But besides Counsellors and Atturneys, you have here the Pettifogger, who is inseparable; so as Suits sometimes last whole Ages here as well as in other places.

In Criminal matters, they have an extraordinary and summary way, but much after the same form and manner used in France.

First, They inform, then imprison, then examine; the Parties are brought face to face; and where evidence falls short, they are put to the Rack, upon pregnant presumptions, The Steward records the whole, and makes report to the Judges, who upon the criminal Confession, or Deposition of Witnesses, give Judgment, and cause the Sentence to be exe∣cuted immediately, without appeal, save that they never put any to death without the Kings express Order, in whose power it lyes to confirm the Sentence, or pardon the Party, as he pleaseth.

Their punishments are severe, rather cruel: The slightest Crime is punished with pecu∣niary Fines,* 1.157 Banishment, or Transportation: For Theft they suffer amputation of Hands or Feet, or are condemned to perpetual slavery. The ordinary punishments of these

Countries are unknown there; but condemned persons are cast alive into boyling Oyle, according to the atrocity of the Crime, but alwayes with Confiscation of Goods, for the benefit of the King, and the Judges.

In want of sufficient Testimony,* 1.158 they make use of certain extraordinary wayes for Conviction, or Justification of the Criminal, which they do by consent of all parties, with the Judges permission, who allows them to maintain what they say, by Water, by Fire, or by boyling Oyl. When they submit to the Tryal of Water, the Accuser, and the accu∣sed party are both let down along a great Pole, which is planted in the River, and he that stayes longest under water gains the day; as he that patiently holds his Hand longest in boyling Oyl. Others, who chuse the tryal of Fire, are to go five or six steps, very slowly, in a great Fire, and that betwixt two Men, who lean as hard as they can upon their shoulders. But the way they hold most infallible for their justification, is, to swallow a Pill of Rice, over which their Priests have pronounced some words of malediction, which he that swallows without spitting is so clearly justified, that his friends attend him in tri∣umph to his habitation.

The Kings Armies consist chiefly of his Subjects;* 1.159 for though besides five or six hun∣dred Iaponeses, who bear the reputation of Valour throughout the Indies; he hires some∣times both Rasboutes and Malayes; the number is notwithstanding so small, that 'tis in∣considerable. The King now reigning had taken so great an aversion for the Iaponeses, on suspition they had a design upon his person, that he put some to death, and expell'd the rest. Yet since that he hath given way for their return to their ancient trust; but, as I said, they exceed not the number of five or six hundred. His Subjects are obliged to go to the Wars at their own charges, so that according as occasion requires, he calls out the hundredth, the fiftieth, the twentieth, the tenth, and sometimes the fifth man; besides those, the Noble men, at their own charges, bring along with them a sufficient Guard of their persons: By this means he raises at a small charge a most puissant Army, wherein there shall be sometimes three or four thousand Elephants, though he seldom raise an Ar∣my of above fifty or threescore thousand men.

His Infantry are well enough disciplined,* 1.160 but very ill armed; only Bows and Arrows, Swords, Pikes and Bucklers, without Fire-armes. Nor are their Horse better appointed, as being but poorly mounted; so as his chiefest strength consists in his Elephants, which are train'd to the work, and carry each three arm'd men; but many which are brought out with the Army are employed about the Baggage. Great Artillery they have, but manage them ignorantly. Their Naval Forces are in as ill condition as their Land; con∣sisting in a multitude of Frigots and Gallies, well furnished with Artillery, but their Soul∣diers and Sea-men are inexpert. There is an infinite number of Barks for service against the Enemy upon the River, as advantagious to them as at Sea, by reason his Neighbours are rather worse provided then he; but all his Forces joyned together were not sufficient to oppose a Spanish, English, or Holland Fleet; yet this Princes Predecessors have often had great Victories over their Enemies, while Martial Princes have had the Conduct of their Armies.

The Kings of Pegu and Siam have at all times pretended to a sole Monarchy over all the Kingdoms in these parts,* 1.161 and without dispute Pegu had something the better, but the continual War they have held, as well for this as other differences, hath so wasted the Frontiers of both these Kingdoms, that the Armies are not able to subsist there any longer, and so necessity forced them to conclude a Peace; which since they break not, but by in∣cursions of some flying Army of twenty or thirty thousand, during the Summer Season. The last War the King of Siam made upon the Kings of Iangoma and Langsgaugh were purely out of ambition for the Soveraignty they pretended to over those Kingdoms. 'Tis not long likewise since the King of Cambrodia, a Tributary to the King of Siam, revolt∣ed; whereupon Siam enters his Territories with a potent Army, but was opposed so vi∣gorously, that he was forced to retire. The Kingdom after this enjoyed a long peace, till the deceased King having caused his Brother to be murthered to establish his Son upon the Throne, one of the Princes of the Bloud took occasion to usurp the Crown, as I shall immediately tell you.

This Usurper made shew as if he would espouse the interests of the State against the Kings of Pegu and Auva, and especially against the King of Cambodia, though he would not enter into open Hostility with them, because he might have enough to do to stand arm'd against the designs the right Heirs might have upon his person.

He continued likewise the same friendship for the Hollanders his Predecessour had testi∣fied to them,* 1.162 since he took their part against Fernando de Silva, Governour of the Manilles. This Portuguez taking the confidence to set upon a Holland Frigot upon the River of Me∣nam,

in the year 1624. the King seiz'd upon his Vessel, and forced Fernando to restore the Frigot. Since which time the Siameses have been continually vext by the Portuguez in their Traffick with China, though the Hollanders assist them effectually against their Ene∣mies, and declare highly for them; as they lately likewise assisted the King of Siam with six Ships, to chastise the Rebels of Patany.

For certain, the King of Siam keeps more Elephants then any other Prince of India, and herein consists his chiefest Forces. For though the Indians affect this Beast, of what part so ever he is, yet have they a particular esteem for those of Siam, for their make, their strength,* 1.163 and, as they call it, for their apprehension. They take them here as they do in Pegu, bringing into the Forrest fifteen or twenty tame Females, which being, as it were, Decoyes, suffer themselves to be led up and down, till some of the wild Elephants herd with them, and so are by little and little betrai'd into a large Court well wall'd about, to which you enter by a double walk of Trees, which as well as the Court is shut up with strong Rails: As soon as the Elephants are in, then are the Females let out one by one at another Gate, leaving the wild by themselves. Within this Court are two four-square Partitions, divided with Pallizadoes like Cages, the one in the middle, the other at the side of the wall. The posts whereof they are made, are set at such distance, that men may with ease pass in and out to vex and provoke the Beasts; but they must make a swift re∣treat within their Appartment, when this formidable Foe pursues them. This is the most acceptable divertisement can be presented to the King, who with the Nobility of his Court is ever present at this hunting. After the Elephants are by this kind of hunting sufficiently tired, they drive them into another close Pen no bigger then their bodies, made of strong beams, where they tye them by the legs to three or four tame Elephants; where∣upon hunger and acquaintance with the others, in three or four dayes bring them to live as they do. Sometimes they hunt them in the Forrest, and open Champion, with tame Elephants, till at last they fasten them by the legs together, and so by force drive them away, but this not without conflict and danger.

Sometimes in the Kingdom of Siam they meet with white Elephants.* 1.164 All over India they have a veneration for this Creature: but the Siameses, and the people of those parts, say, they are the Kings of the Elephants; in so much as the King of Siam, when he meets with one, causes him to be served in Vessels of Gold, to walk under a Canopy, and allows him a Princely train.

In the year 1568. the King of Pegu, understanding that the King of Siam had two white Elephants,* 1.165 sent a solemn Embassy to request he might buy one of them, and that he would set a price upon him; which the King of Siam refusing, the King of Pegu re∣solves to fetch him with a powerful Army. He found such slender resistance in Siam, that the King seeing his Kingdom and chief City in the hands of his Enemies, took poyson, whereof he dyed, though that Conquest cost the King of Pegu the lives of five hundred thousand men.

Raja Hapi,* 1.166 King of Siam, who lived about the year 1616. acknowledged at that time the Soveraignty of the King of Pegu, but this was only till he could find opportunity to free himself from this subjection, as he did few years after. For entering the King∣dom of Pegu with a powerful Army, he laid ••iege to the City of Aracam; resolved not to move thence till he had taken it. In effect he rais'd not the Siege, but not being able to force the City, and unwilling to break his Oath, he built a House near it, where he dyed. This Prince was so famous for his cruelty, that 'tis reported of him, that being sick, and hearing two of his Concubines laugh in an anti-chamber, he commanded they should be immediately cut to pieces. He had a Favourite, called Ochi Chronwi, whose ambition swell'd to that height, that he brought four or five hundred Iaponeses into the Kingdom, cloath'd like Merchants, to be imployed to murther the King, and settle him upon the Throne. This design took no effect during the Kings life, but he being dead, Ochi Chro∣nowi seiz'd on the Crown, and caused himself to be proclaimed King. The Son of Raja Hapi had friends sufficient to cast out this Usurper, but he was not fortunate enough to keep the Crown in his possession, for he was likewise slain, and left it to his younger Brother alive at this day. 'Tis not long since the King of Siam had the satisfaction to have two young white Elephants together, but they both dyed in a short time.

The Indians do believe that a white Elephant hath something in it of divine, and say, they respect it not only for the colour, but they observe in him that he looks to be treated as a Prince, and that he is troubled, when other Elephants render not him the honour due to him.

The King of Siam is a Pagan,* 1.167 nor do his Subjects know any other Religion. They have divers Mosquees, Monasteries and Chappels, where their Ecclesiasticks retire and as∣semble

to do their Devotions. They are discerned from other buildings by the gilt Tow∣ers and Pyramides. There are infinite Pagodes of Gold, Silver, Stone, Timber, and other materials, of all sizes; some of twenty, some thirty, fourty, fifty foot, and amongst the rest one which sits, which if it stood, would be sixscore foot in height.

Their ecclesiasticks are very exemplary in their life,* 1.168 having amongst them a kind of Hie∣rarchy, under the direction of the High-Priest of the Grand Mosquey of the City of India, to whom all the rest yield obedience. In matters of Religion his Authority is great, but in Temporals he acknowledges the King, and yields him the same respect as his other Sub∣jects do. In the City of India, there are above thirty thousand of these Ecclesiasticks; who are easily known by their habit, for they all wear Garments of a yellow Linnen-cloath, and have their Crowns shav'd. Amongst them they chuse the most learn'd and accom∣plish'd for Priests, and to take charge of the Mosqueys. These are as Parsons amongst them, who on Festival dayes preach to the people,* 1.169 and sacrifice to their Idols. They are prohi∣bited the company of Women on pain of being burnt alive: but their Vows are not so indispensible, but such as have not the gift of Continency are allowed to change their pro∣fession; every Mosquey hath a Convent belonging to it, for entertainment of Priests design'd for the service, which is regularly said, morning and evening. They live partly on the Revenue of the Mosqueys, and partly on Gratuities given them by the King and Nobility, in the way of Almes, but they have their chiefest livelihood at the peoples Charge, by beg∣ging every day through the City, like our Friars Mendicants. They have likewise Reli∣gious Women and Beguins,* 1.170 who are aged, devout Women, who inhabit near the Mosqueys, that they may be present at all the Church-Services; but these make no Vow, nor are ob∣liged to any particular rule of Discipline.

They believe there is one God,* 1.171 who created the Universe, and hath under him divers other Gods, by whom he governs the World. They believe the Soul is immortal, and that at its departure out of the Body, it goes either to injoy beatitude, or into eternal tor∣ments, having first passed through other Bodies. This is the ground of their Religion, which, they say, they have received from time immemorable by Tradition of Saints, whom they have exalted to Deities, and now do part of their Devotions to them. They hold likewise, that good works will save them, and in particular their Charity, which they di∣rect not to men alone, but to Beasts likewise. And hence it is, that on Festival dayes, the people bring Birds and Fish hard by the Mosqueys, which they buy on purpose to set them at liberty, because with the Benjans they believe a Metempsychosis, or transmigration of Souls.

In their Ceremonies they use abundance of lights,* 1.172 which they set up before their Pagodes, in time of Service. They likewise Incense them, and adorn them with Flowers and pre∣cious Stones. They have no certain day in the week design'd for their Devotions, but they have some in particular every quarter of the Moon, and observe moreover a sort of Lent for three moneths, during which they abstain from several sorts of Meat.

They pray for the dead,* 1.173 and bury them with many Ceremonies. They wash, shave, and perfume the Corps in the presence of the Ecclesiasticks; then they are brought near the Mosqueys, where the Corps is burnt, and the Ashes buried in the same place, under a rich Tomb or stately Pyramide, according to the degree and abilities of the deceased. The nearest Relations shave themselves, give Alms, procure the Priests to say Prayers, and attend the body with Musick, Theatrical Representations, and Fire-works, so as these Obsequies put them to great charges.

They never dispute with any of a contrary Religion, but believe, that by living well they may be saved in any Religion: though they are so fixt to their own, that there is no hope of ever introducing another. The Portuguez endeavoured to catechise some, but with as little effect as the Mahumetans, who would have brought in the Alcoran.

The inferiour people here invoke the Devil,* 1.174 contrary to the doctrine of their Ecclesi∣asticks, who incessantly preach against this abomination; but hitherto they cannot pluck up this rooted wickedness, which they sucked in with their first Milk.

The Siameses are comely,* 1.175 and well proportioned, but ill Souldiers, though cruel and in∣solent enough after Victory. They are rather black then brown, ingenious in Commerce, but they are cautious, dissident, dissemblers, unconstant, false, and lyars.

The Men are lazy,* 1.176 and care for no employment which requires labour, such they leave to their Women and Slaves, leaving affairs and husbandring of land to their charges, while they walk the Streets, or make their addresses at Court. They cover themselves with a painted Cloath from the Navel to the K••ces.* 1.177 Men wear short Shirts with sleeves hang∣ing to their Elbows, and Women hide their Breasts with a linnen Cloath, which is fastned about their Neck. All observe one fashion in Clothes, so as Persons of Quality are not

to be distinguished from others, but by their Train, which consists of about five and twenty or thirty Slaves.

Their Houses are made of Timber or Canes,* 1.178 of a fashion peculiar to the Country, and covered with Coco leaves, they are raised three or four foot from the ground, and in every partition have several windows, which is very commodious. They have no other movea∣bles then what are necessary for the Chamber and Kitchin, and their diet is Rice, Fish and Pulse, and they drink nothing but Water, but at Feasts they make better cheer, and are willing to be invited to be drunk with Arac or Strong-water.

Ecclesiasticks meddle not in the marriages of Persons of Quality,* 1.179 by reason the parties are content to confide in each other for the conditions agreed upon, and obtaining the consent of their Parents they consummate the marriage. But they ever reserve liberty of separation, with an equal division of Goods and Children, without License of any Magi∣strate, and to marry again, with whom, and as oft as they will. Their contract with their Concubines is of a different kind, for they are considered but as Slaves, and under the au∣thority of the Wife, who on her part is satisfied with this precedency, knowing her Chil∣dren, who are only esteemed legitimate, shall divide all, leaving to the natural but a very small share.

The Estates of Persons of Quality are ordinarily divided into three parts; one falls to the King; one to the Ecclesiasticks, they defraying the Funeral Charges, which there are great; and the third to the Children. People of middle condition buy their Wives, and consummate the Marriage, after payment of the sum accorded on; but have the same pri∣viledge of Divorce as the others.

Their Children divide the inheritance equally, except the eldest, who hath some advan∣tage.

Till they are five or six years of age,* 1.180 they bring up their children with little care; then they put them to the Ecclesiasticks to be taught to write and read and to be instructed in Religion; during which time they see their children but very seldom; but having learnt these first Rudiments, they put them to a Trade; or if they find them to be ingenious, they continue them in their Studies, to make them capable of the Priestly Function, or fit for some imployments, which among them are bestow'd according to merit, and not sold for money. Those who live in Cities subsist by Merchandize, turn Courtiers, or betake themselves to some Handy-craft, or else become Fisher-men, whereof there are very many along the Coast, as there are also in those Cities, which have the convenience of any River. The Peasantry is very wretched, living only on their labour, employing themselves in dres∣sing the Cocoes, and in breeding Cattle and Poultry, but Provisions are so exceeding cheap that they make very little advantage thereby.

In the City of India,* 1.181 the principal Commerce consists in Stuffs brought from Suratta, and the Coast of Coromandel, all sorts of Chinese commodities, precious Stones, Gold, Ben∣jamin, Wax, Copper, Lead, Indico, Calamba-wood, Brasil-wood, Cotton, Saphires, Ru∣bies, &c. but above all, Deer-skins, whereof they furnish the Iaponeses with above fifty thousand every year. It likewise yields a great trade of Rice, which they transport to all the neighbouring Islands. By reason of the abundance of these Commodities, there is scarce a Nation throughout Asia that have not their Merchants in India, besides the Portuguez and Hollanders, who have some years since settled themselves in those parts.

The King himself likewise trades amongst them,* 1.182 and for that purpose hath his Factors at Pegu, at Auva, at Iangoma, at Lansiaugh, upon the Coast of Coromandel, and prin∣cipally at China, where he hath those priviledges which are not allowed to any other Prince.

The Money of this Country is very good,* 1.183 by reason the King only hath power to stamp, and so prevents variation of the value; there are of it three sorts; Ticals, Ma∣ses, and Foangs. Two Foangs make a Mase, and four Mases make a Tical, worth about thirty Sols French money. Four Ticals make a Tayl, and twenty Tayls a Catly in Sil∣ver. In Silver their least money is a Foang,* 1.184 but they make use of a certain sort of Shells brought them from Manilles, from Borneo, and Lequeo, whereof eight or nine hundred amount to a Foang, without which they could not chaffer, by reason Victuals are so cheap, that a Man may buy more there for five of these Shells, then in any part of Europe for a Farthing.

The Portuguez finding of what consequence the King of Siam's friendship is to them, for supporting of their Trade with the Moluccas, the Philipine Islands, or Manilles, have still a particular care to preserve a good correspondence, by civilities from the Viccroys of Goa to the King at their arrival in the Indies, and by Persons of Quality

daily commission'd thither, confirming themselves by this means so well in the Princes fa∣vour, that he not only allows them to trade throughout his Dominions, but imploys them in his most important Affairs, permitted them to build a Church in his chief City, and maintains one of their Priests at his own charge. They enjoy'd all these priviledges, till such time as the King of Siam began to favour the Hollanders, whom he found less insolent and more sincere then the Portuguez, who jealous of the affection of the King shewed to the Hollanders, presently obstructed the Commerce the Siameses held at Saint Thomas and Negapatam, and proceeded so far, as at last, in the year 1624. they set upon a Dutch Frigot upon the River Menam, as we told you before: whereat the King was so offended, that the Bishop of Malacca, having a Vicar Resident at India, he forbad him to come to Court. The Portuguez instead of making amends for this first fault, in a conjucture when the Hollanders, their profess'd enemies, might have joyn'd with the King of Siam, continued still to obstruct the Commerce of the Siameses; in so much that the King perceiving their design was absolutely to destroy it, was out of all patience▪ and in the year 1631. stayed one of their Ships with all the Men; but they finding means to make an escape, contrary to their parole, he put an Imbargo upon all the Portuguez Ships, which were found in the Ports of Lygoar and Tanassary, and put all the Men in prison, out of which they were not set at liberty till two years after.

The Hollanders made their first establishment there,* 1.185 at the beginning of his age, though it is only since the year 1634. that they trade there with any profit: they have made great advantages of the friendship of that King, in order to the Commerce they have at Iava and Sumatra.

On the North-west side of the Kingdom of Siam, lies that of Cambodia, which on the other side hath nothing but the Sea. The Metropolis, from which it derives its name, lies sixty Leagues from the Sea, upon a pleasant River, which rises out of a great Lake, as do also all the other Rivers of the Kingdom. But in that of Cambodia, it is particularly observable, that it overflows every year as the Nile doth; and as doth also the River Me∣nam, in the Kingdom of Siam. It begins to rise at the beginning of Iune, and so rises by degrees to ten or twelve foot; but in Iuly and August 'tis not navigable, for that it drowns the whole Country. The City of Cambodia, to prevent these Deluges, is built upon an advantagious rising, having but onely one street, and is inhabited by Iaponeses, Portuguez, by Cochinchinez and Malayes. The Portuguez carry Malacca-Stuffs thi∣ther, and there load with Benjamin, Lacque, Wax, Rice, Brass, Vessels and Bars of China- Iron.

The King,* 1.186 who is but a Vassal of the King of Siam's, resides in the City of Cambodia, in a Place fortified with a good Pallisado instead of a Wall, where are some Pieces of China Artillery, and about twenty four or twenty five pieces of Cannon, which he reco∣vered out of two Holland Ships wrack'd on that Coast, all mounted on four-wheel'd-Car∣riages, only painted blew, except four which are mounted on ordinary Carriages, varnish'd black, with Ladles and other Utensils of Silver, or Iron, so polished they might be taken for Silver. The King of Cambodia is nothing so powerful as the two Kings whom we last mentioned; for an Army of twenty five or thirty thousand is the most he can draw into the Field, so as were the Siameses more Martial, they might with small trouble make Cam∣bodia subject to their King.

The Nobility of the Court are divided into Ockinas,* 1.187 Tomimas, Tonimnes, Nampras and Sabandars, each in his degree, but for the best part without any particular charge, except the first, who are most considerable in publick Assemblies, distinguished by little Cabinets of Gold carried after them, wherein are Cardamum and other Drugs to rub their Lips, Cissars to cut their Bettele, by them called Pynang, and for the Lime, Areca and Bettele, which they chew continually. In the presence of the King, whether it be for Councel or Comple∣ment, they stand in a semi-circle, and behind them the Tommaes, known from the others by their Bottles of Silver.

No address is made to the King, but by mediation of these Ockinas; for though the Priests are next his Person, between him and the Ockinas, and converse familiarly with him, they esteem it notwithstanding a king of Sacriledge for an Ecclesiastick to meddle in secu∣lar Affairs, so as none but the Ockinas communicate general or particular Affairs to him; of which 'tis their Office to take cognizance, as also of the Kings Orders upon their re∣port. In the whole Town there is but one Pagode or Mosquee, wherein there are three big∣ger, and three lesser Statues. It is supported with wooden Pillars, varnished black, with a folliage of Gold, and the floor covered with Mats. Their Priests have no houses near the Pagode, and when the chief of their Ecclesiasticks dyes, they build him a Monument of Stone, which at the bottom is four-square, and upwards to the top grows round like a Pear.

The Portuguez are so well settled here, that the Hollanders cannot hope to carry on any Trade,* 1.188 till they have first destroyed that of the Portuguez. At their first Arrival, in the year 1637. they committed the management of their Affairs to an adoptive Son of the Queen, to whom the King had given the name of Tisnecha, and the honour of Nampra, and they used the credit of the Chabandar of the Iaponeses, in hope by this means they might gain a small establishment. But the friendship they had contracted with the King of Siam, and the Artifices of the Portuguez, bred them difficulties they could not master, otherwise they might have laded there yearly eighty or a hundred thousand Deer-skins, besides Neat and Buffles hides, above a hundred Picols of black Lacque, at ten Thails the Picol, above three or four hundred Picols of Benjamin, at seventeen or eighteen Thales the Picol, and might have vented their Cotton-yarn, and Cloath, for above sixty or seventy in the hundred profit.

Provisions in these parts are so plentiful, that the Inhabitants having so much more then they have use for, sell them in a manner for nothing, specially Venison, Beef, Pork, Goats, Hares, Kids, Cranes, Herns, and all sorts of Poultry; as likewise Oranges, Ci∣trons, Mangas, Cocoes, &c. but to judge the better of the fertility of this Soyl, take notice, that the people of Quinam alone fetch yearly thence two thousand Coyangs of Rice, five Coyangs making four Lestes, or eight Tuns, at seventeen or eighteen Thails the Coyang. And so much by way of Account of the small Kingdom of Cam∣bodia.

That Tongue of Land is called Malacca,* 1.189 which in form of a Peninsula extends it self from the Kingdom of Siam, from the South-east towards the North-west, even to the Equinoctial Line, betwixt the Gulfs of Bengala and Siam, or Cambodia; and contains, besides the City of Malacca, (whence it derives its name) the Kingdom of Iahor and Patana.* 1.190 The Country was discovered by Alphonso d' Albuquerque, in the year 1511. since when the Portuguez have kept their ground there so firmly, that none yet can sup∣plant them. Malacca is scituate upon the strait that divides the Isle of Sumatra from the Continent, on this side the Line two Degrees and half, in a large Plain, where there is but only one Mountain, the foot whereof is almost wholly taken up with the Town, leaving only a small space open towards the North-east. About eighteen hundred paces may be the compass of it; for six hundred whereof it lies on the Sea-coast, enclosed with a good Wall, as likewise on the River-side, which bounds another third of the Town; and on the Land-side, 'tis fortified with four regular Bastions. The first, which is on the River∣side, is called the Bastion of Saint Domingo; another on the Sea-shore, Saint Iago; and two more betwixt these two, called Madre de Dios and Vnze mil Vergenes: from that of Saint Iago, to that of Madre de Dios, there is a good Pallisado of eighteen foot high▪ and between those of Madre de Dios to Saint Domingo, a sufficient Ditch. The Colledge of the Iesuits, also called Saint Pauls, which serves likewise for a Parish Church, stands on the top of the Hill, whence it commands the Town, and the Country near about it. There is likewise another rising ground about a Cannon shot from the City, where there is a Con∣vent of Iacobins. The River there, which runs North-west, is not very broad, and at high-water it mixes with the Sea, but is fresh at low-water. There is a Bridge over it, though one side is without comparison much higher then the other, by reason the Land, South-east, is so low and marshy, that it cannot be broken, but water comes in immedi∣ately, and in some places 'tis absolutely drown'd. No week passes but it rains two or three times, unless it be in Ianuary, February, and March. The Ebb there leaves open above two thousand paces of shore, which being nothing but a deep mud, affords no landing at low∣water.

Before the City lye two Islands; one the Portuguez call Ilha da Naos, about a Canon∣shot distant from the City, the other, Ilha de Pedra, for the Quarries where they get Free∣stone for their building, and lyes something more remote. The Caracks and Gallions cast Anchor betwixt these Islands at four or five fathom water, but Frigots and Barks enter the River, and Vessels of a middle rate shelter under the Ilha da Naos, between the River and the City.

In the City of Malacca, its Suburbs, and the neighbouring Towns, possessed by the Por∣tuguez, there may be about twelve thousand Inhabitants, thus accounted; in the Parish of Saint Thomas, in the place they call Camp clein, a thousand; in the Suburbs towards the River eighteen hundred: in the Parish of Saint Lawrence two thousand; and in Senhora Nossa de Pidaede as many; in Nossa Senhora da Guadalupe, five Leagues thence, about seven or eight hundred; and within the walls of the City, three thousand, making at most not above three thousand fighting men. Amongst them there are not above three hundred natural Portuguez, the greatest part are Mestizes or Mal••yans.

The City is so commodiously scituate for Commerce with China and the Moluques, whereof the Portuguez having experience, to hinder other Nations from footing there, gave out, that the Air was unwholsome, that it was not inhabitable, especially for Forraign∣ers, while they notwithstanding continued there, and followed their business.

They are possessed of no more then the City and Suburbs, and five Leagues off, upon the same River, the Town of Nostra Senhora de Guadalupe; for about half a League thence live the Manancambos, Subjects to the King of Iahor: but that would not have hindred the Portuguez from making it one of the most considerable places of the Indies, if the Hollanders did not disturb their Commerce, and find work for the King of Spain's Armies in that part of the Universe. At the request of the King of Iahor, in the year 1606. they came down into Malacca, and besieg'd the chief City, upon promise they should be possest of it; but the aid that King brought them was so inconsiderable, that they were constrain'd to raise the Siege; yet not till they had so ruin'd the place, that it could never since be repaired, six thousand lives being lost in the Siege. On the other side, since the Hollanders got such strong hold in Ceylon and Iava, the Portuguez trade with China and the Moluques is quite lost, by reason they are no more Masters of that Sea. But what more and more ruines the City, is the avatice of the Governours, who will not accept of that Government, but on condition to inrich themselves two hundred thousand Crowns in three years: to raise which sum they are forc'd to oppress the Inhabitants as well as Strangers; which oppressions will in time so ruine the Commerce of this place, that for the future the Portuguez must make no great account of it.

The Kingdom of Patana is not so great as that of Iahor,* 1.191 but without comparison more populous: for some that have dealt there for the Hollanders, and have staid there a suffici∣ent time, affirm, they have seen Records, that assert the King of Patana can raise an Army of an hundred and fourscore thousand men. True it is, the Patanans are bad Souldiers, and very improper for war; but we speak of the number, not the quality, and say, that the City of Patanan, the Metropolis of the Kingdom, can alone set forth at least ten thousand; that is, the Malayans four thousand, the Chineses three, and the Siameses as many.

The City of Patana stands upon the Sea-side,* 1.192 but the Haven is two thousand paces thence. The Houses are of Timber or Canes, and well and handsomly built. The Kings Palace is surrounded with a Pallisado, and the Mosquey is made of Brick.

As to the Inhabitants,* 1.193 they may be said rather brown then Olive-coloured; of body well proportioned, but they are haughty and proud; yet this rather in their Comport∣ment then Conversation, wherein they are very affable: for the Queen her self admitted the Hollanders to come into her Bark with her Noble men, and excused it, that the severity their Sex observe, neither permitted her to see them more often, nor to admit them to her Retirement, to which she was oblieged since here Widowhood.

The Chineses and Siameses, who have lived any time there, are ingenious, and understand Navigation; but the Malayans meddle only with Husbandry and Fishing, living misera∣bly, and drinking nothing but Water. They have no liking to Wine, and for Arac and Aquavitae they have an aversion: but Women they love, and prefer that pleasure before all others, wherefore there is not a Man, who, besides four or five lawful Wives, hath not as many Concubines.

Simple ••ornication they allow of, and hold it no sin; but Adultery they punish severely. This is a Crime unpardonable, and for which the Father, or Son, or one of the nearest Re∣lations, is obliged to be Executioner, the manner of death being left to the person guilty; yet is this Crime so common, that they would dispeople the Country, should they punish all that are guilty of it.

Their wealth consists in Land and Slaves, whom they feed with nothing but Rice, and a little Fish, yet make great profit out of their labour. Only the Chineses and the Mestizes betake themselves to any Trade, or apply themselves to Traffick, which they chiefly have in Siam, Burdelon, Lugor, Cambodia, Cochinchina, Macasser, Grece, Pahan, Iambi, Iohor, Bantam, Bandar, Malfin, Suchidanar, and other places upon the same Coast or Countrey, where they carry all sorts of China Commodities, Purcelane, Skins, Pots, Kettles, and other Iron Utensils; as likewise Flesh powder'd and smoak'd, Fish dry and salted, Cloath which they have from the Hollanders and Chineses. From their Neighbours they fetch Timber to build withall, Rottang, that is, Cordage of Cocoe, Oyle of the same, Fruits dry'd and preserv'd, Skins of Neat, Buffles, Goats, Pepper, and particularly a Drug they call Saroy∣boura.* 1.194 These are only Swallow-nests, which they find on Rocks by the Sea-side, and are of such esteem in China, that they sell them for three or four Crowns the pound. There are two sorts of them, the white, which are much in request, and are sold for six, seven,

or eight Campans the China Catti; but the grey are not so dear, and not worth three or four Campans the Catti, which amounts not to above eleven Sols, or a Mamide of Cambaya.

Though the Country lye not far from the Equinoctial,* 1.195 yet is the Air good and whol∣som, though the heats are exceeding great. Summer begins there in February, and lasts to the end of October; there falls continual Rains during November, December and Ianuary, with a North-west wind. They Till the Earth with Oxen and Buffles, and sow nothing but Rice, of which they get great abundance. They have for every moneth several Fruits, and Hens that lay twice a day, by reason whereof the Country abounds in all sorts of provisions for the belly, as Rice, Oxen, Goats, Geese, Ducks, Hens, Capons, Peacocks, Deer, Hares, Coneys, Fowl and Venison, and specially in Fruits, whereof they have above a hundred several sorts; as Durians, Mangosthans, Annas, Lanciats, Ramboutammas, Pis∣sans, Oranges and Lemmons, and above all Lemmons gibol, called in France China Oranges, bought there five or six hundred for a Campan; Mamplans, Batians, and Centals, &c. whereof more hereafter.

The Inhabitants breed no Swine,* 1.196 but the Forrests are so full of wild ones, that they are forc'd to hunt them to prevent the destruction of their Rice; which being taken, they bury them in the ground, as being Mahumetans, and eat none themselves, nor suffer others.

In the Forrest likewise there are abundance of Tygers and Apes, which are no less per∣nicious to the Fields then the wild Swine are; but the wild Elephants, of which there are likewise great numbers, are very harmless. They are taken by hunting, turning a tame Elephant amongst them, with whom they presently fight, and while they are in the fury they tye their hinder feet together; so as being not able to withstand any longer, they yield to be driven away, and are tam'd by hunger in a short time.

The Portuguez heretofore bought there fifteen or sixteen horned Beasts in a year, and carried them to Malacca, paying a Campan a head for the export. But the Hollanders pay nothing, neither for those they slaughter in the Country, nor for those they ship for Suma∣tra or Iava: for doubtless they win more on their affections then the Portuguez, or any other Strangers.

The King of Patana is Subject, or rather Vassal to the King of Siam, but payes him an∣nually a very inconsiderable Tribute. Not many years since there reign'd a Queen, that sent him no more then once a year a Flower of Gold, and some Silk-Stuffes and Scarlet; she was about that time fifty years of age, whereof she had been a Widow fifteen; when she appear'd abroad, which was seldom, to take the Air, she was attended by four thousand Persons of Quality, with the Armes and Equipage of her deceased Husband born before her.

The King of Iohor possesses all the utmost parts of the Penninsula,* 1.197 the Ancients called Aurea Chersonesus, to the Streight of Sincopura, the chief Towns are Linga, Bintam, Cary∣man, &c. but the chief City of all the Country is Batusabar, scituate six Leagues from the Sea, upon the River Iohor, divided into two Towns, one keeping the name of Batusa∣bar, the other called Cottasabrang, one being thirteen hundred paces about, the other about five hundred. They are both built with Free-stone, and all the Houses stand along the River-side, raised on piles eight or ten foot from the ground, which lies so low, that at high-water 'tis covered twice a day. In it are near four thousand Inhabitants able to bear Armes; and could they bring themselves to take pains in Fortification, with little labour might this River be brought about the Town, which might thus be made one of the strongest places in the Indies. The Hollanders have used all their Endeavour to bring them to it, and to secure themselves from the Portuguez, their irreconcileable Enemy: but their Houses in Cotta Zabrang, and thereabouts, being nothing but Straw, they care not much for burning, so they have but time to save themselves in Ba∣tusabar, where the building is of Timber, and they can defend themselves against fly∣ing parties.

The Country belongs intirely to the King,* 1.198 who gives Land to manure to any that desire it; but the Malayans are so slothful, that the Ground is all, as it were, overgrown with Moss, though by the Herbage and Trees it produces, it is easie to perceive, great profit might be raised, if the Soyl were cultivated. For further testimony of this, the Hollan∣ders, in their Relations, amongst other things observe, that at a time the King of Iohor presented their Admiral with Sugar Canes eighteen foot long, and seven inches about.

The Malacca or Malayan Language is held the most elegant of all the Indies, where it is at least as general as French in Europe, and is the easier to learn, because there are no infle∣ctions,

neither in Nounes nor Verbs. For the Readers curiosity I shall here insert some of their words, that he may spend his judgment, and begin with the numbers, which they thus count.

Satu one, dwa two, tyga three, eupat four, lyma five, nam six, tousion seven, de lapan eight, sambalan nine, sapalo ten, sabalas eleven, duabulas twelve, tyga balas thirteen, capat balas fourteen, lyma balas fifteen, nam balas sixteen, tousion balas seventeen, dela∣ban balas eighteen, sambalan balas nineteen, duo pola twenty, saratus a hundred, &c. Arys the day, Malam night, Zouson the stomack, leheer the neck, dangudo the mustachoes, Bat the tongue, Iargary the fingers, Toulang the leg, Goumo the foot, Tangam the arm, Capalla the head, Rambot the hair, Pourot the belly, Ianget the beard, Tangan the hand, Molot the mouth, Martye the eyes, Yrotdon the nose, Conet the skin; Babpa Father, Maa Mother, Ibou Grandfather and Grandmother, bewangdarnet to bleed, mackol to beat, mollay to begin, billy to buy, chiuy to pay, diem to be silent, ambel to take, toulong to assist, Manyte I, Pakanera you, andrior to melt, boday to deceive, dengaer to hear, battou to content, mansuiry to prick, Mus Gold, Salacha Silver, ada I have, Palla a Nutmeg, toy quitabo we, Lacky a Man, bilby to traffick, tidor to sleep, tavar to promise, britacot to menace, terran to clear, pang to cut, Negle Steel, Lada Pepper, minnon to drink tacka∣na to enchaunt, chium to kiss, bretoun to make, dousta to lye, banga to rise, suitsidana to wipe the Nose, tieda tau I understand it not, Sicke Cloves.

Leaving the firm Land and the Peninsula,* 1.199 by the Ancients called Aurea Chersonesus, on the Coast of Malacca; we find the Isle of Sumatra, not above ten Leagues distant. Some have said 'twas rent from the Continent by the Sea Currents, as Ceylon from that part of the Indies heretofore called India intra Gangem, but for this conjecture there is little ground in History, it being not to be affirmed more of this place, then it can of Sicily, or England, or any other Island in the World; except we shall presuppose, that at the Creation the Sea compassed the whole Earth, and that then there was no Islands, but that they were made by the Sea, which afterwards by degrees form'd them out of the firm Land. To enter into this dispute is not our design, no more then to decide whether Sumatra were the an∣cient Taprobane, as Ios. de l' Escale, Mercator, and divers others think; or Ophir, where King Solomon's Ships fetch'd the Gold and other precious things, as the Scripture sayes; but we shall recite only what we could gather out of these last Relations.

All conclude that Sumatra extends from the fifth degree on this side, to the sixth de∣gree beyond the Line; by which Rule it should contain a hundred and sixty, or a hundred sixty five Leagues in length, with a breadth of sixty; and so they who inhabit the middle of the Island, to have the Equinoctial Line perpendicularly over them. By the scituation we may judge the heats to be there extream; and herewithall there is so much Wood, and such a multitude of Lakes, that the Air, especially for Strangers, is exceeding unhealthful. Nevertheless it is abundantly fertile;* 1.200 and besides Gold, Silver, and divers other Metals, as Copper, Iron, Brass, whereof they have the Art to make as good Artillery as they do in Europe; it produces Rice and Millet, particularly Fruit, in such quantity, as the Forrests are loaden with it, and sufficiently furnish all the Inhabitants. In the middle of the Isle there is a burning Mountain, flaming by intermissions, as Vesuvius in the Kingdom of Na∣ples; and, they report, there is a Balsom Fountain running incessantly. 'Tis wealthy in Diamonds and other precious Stones, Silks, Spices, Wax, Honey, Camphire, Cassia, and di∣vers other Drugs used in Medicine. There are whole Woods of white Sandale, and Cot∣ton sufficient to cloath the Inhabitants.

This Island was heretofore divided into ten Kingdoms,* 1.201 but Men making this Voyage only for Traffick, they are contended to visit those only next the Sea, and omit to travel fur∣ther into the Country, where doubtless Riches are to be found unknown to the maritime Inhabitants. The Portuguez give us account only of two Mediterranean Kingdoms, which they call Andragidan and Arunau; as also those of Achim, Pedir, Pacem, Camparam, Z••nde and Mancabo, all on the Sea-side, and on this side the Line. The Hollanders, for advance of their Commerce in the Isle of Iava, have discovered the Kingdom of Polymbam beyond the Line, and have made there a most firm establishment, as may be seen in their Relations. The Portuguez have there nothing at all, but have freedom of Trade, except hindred by the Hollanders.

The King of Achim hath united to his Crown the Kingdoms of Pedir and Pacem,* 1.202 with almost all the Northern Coast of the Isle; but he that reigned there in 1596. when the Hollanders first sailed into those parts, was a Fisher-man that usurp'd the Crown, and, in the Siege of Polymbam, was slain, leaving only one Son of five moneths of age, under the

government of his Father in Law. Which young Prince dying, his Grandfather succeeded to the Crown; and that was he the Hollanders treated with in the year 1668.

The City of Achim stands in a wide Plain upon the side of a very broad River,* 1.203 but so shallow, that the least Boats get in with difficulty. It hath neither Gates nor Walls, the Houses all built on piles, and covered with Coco-leaves. The Castle, or Palace Royal, stands in the middle of the Town, which on two sides hath most excellent pleasant Forrests, well stored with Apes, Herns, and all manner of Birds.

The Natives are flat-fac'd,* 1.204 and of an Olive colour, they cover their body with a Cotton or Silk Shirt, and their head with a light Turbant of the same stuffe; Children go stark naked, only Girls have their secret parts hidden with a Silver-plate. The Inhabitants of Guzuratta, Malabar, Negupatam, Bengalan, and Pegu, and all Strangers that live among them, cloath themselves after the same manner.

The Castle is fortified with a good Wall and Pallisado, and well flanked, so as the Ar∣tillery commands all the Avenues and streets of the Town. The Houses in the Castle are built of the same matter and same form of those of the Town, by reason the River, which often overflows, drowns them sometimes to the first story. The piles that support them are gayly wrought, and the Houses covered with Canes. They enter into the Castle by seven Gates, one within another, which are neither curious nor strong. Without the Kings special Licence, none but the Life-guard and Women enter the Pallisado, all others must sue for Audience, or expect till the King sends for them. Such as present themselves to him, do him reverence, with their hands joyn'd and lifted above their head, crying, Daula tua••con, that is, Long live the King. He never recreates himself but with Women, or appears in publick, but either to see Cock-fighting, to bathe in the River, or hunt the Elephant. He is serv'd only by Women or Eunuchs. He uses his Subjects as slaves, and governs by four Sabanders, who are next in authority to him. His Laws are fevere, and punishments extreamly cruel; so as one shall there meet a multitude of people without either hands or feet, and have been so mutilated, for miscarriages not worth the name of Crimes.

The King of Achim,* 1.205 as almost all that inhabit the Coast of Sumatra, is a Mahumetan; for which reason I shall not need to say any more of their Religion; only, that they begin their Lent with the new Moon in the twelfth moneth, and end it, at the new of the next moneth, observing abstinence all day, during that time, till night. Whence it comes, that their impatience to see the end of their Lent, makes them still gaze in the West, fixing their eyes up to the Heavens, to find the new Moon; which is no sooner seen, but they fall to feasting and jollity for the remainder of that night.

In Sumatra they get no Corn,* 1.206 but Rice sufficient, of which the Inhabitants make good varieties, particularly Cakes with Oyl; they have plenty likewise of Beef and Buffles, Goat and Mutton, though none but the King hath priviledge to breed Sheep. Oranges▪ Lemmons, Bonana, Tamarindes, Batalas, Reddish, Sprinage, and Lettice in great abundance; they drink Water, or Arac made of Rice or Cocoes.

There is in Sumatra a Tree, in the Malayan Language called Singadi; in Arabia, Gurae; the Canarians call it Parizaticco;* 1.207 the Persians and Turks, Gul; the Decanins, Pul; and the Portuguez, Arbor triste de dia. It puts forth an infinite number of branches very small and full of knots, from every knot comes two leaves like a Plumb-leaf, save that they are as sweet as Sage, and are covered with a beautiful white. Every leaf hath its bud, which opening thrusts forth small heads, whereof each hath four round leaves, and from each head comes five flowers, composing as it were a Nosegay, in such manner as the fifth is seen in the middle of the rest. The flowers are white as Snow, and a little bigger then the Orange-flower; blows immediately as the Sun is set, so suddenly, that they are pro∣duced as 'twere in the cast of an eye. This fecundity lasts all night, till the return of the Sun makes both the flowers and leaves drop off, and so strips the tree that least green∣ness is not to be found upon it, nor any thing of that admirable odour which perfum'd the Air, and comprehended all that Asia affords of sweetness. The tree keeps in this conditi∣on, till the Sun hath left the Horizon; and then it begins to open its womb again, and deck it self with fresh flowers, as if in the shades of night it would recover it self out of the affliction which it is put into by that Planet, whose return enlivens the rest of the Uni∣verse.

There is not in the Island a Tree more common then the Cocoes,* 1.208 and in regard 'tis gene∣ral through the Indies, I will give here a brief description of it; and first tell you there are four sorts thereof. That which bears the fruit called Cocoes, which are the Nuts of the Country, is the most considerable, not only of any Tree in this Country, but indeed of any

other part of the world. This Tree, not above a foot diameter, grows in body exceeding high, having not a branch but at the top, where it spreads as the Date-tree. The fruit comes not out of the branches, but beneath out of the body, in bunches or clusters of ten or twelve Nuts: The flower is like that of a Chesnut, and it grows only near the Sea, or upon the River side in sandy ground, and nevertheless grows so lofty, that except the In∣dians, who by practice climb it with as much agility and quickness as an Ape, there is no Stranger will venture to do it. 'Tis as common in the Indies, as the Olive in Spain, or Willows in Holland; and though the wood be sappy, yet it serves for such variety of things, that there is no Tree of so general an use.* 1.209 In the Maldives Isles, they make Ships that cross the Sea, without any thing but what the Cocoe affords. Of the outer rind they make a kind of Hemp, which they call Cayro, whereof they make Cordage and Cables for their Ships. Of the leaves they make Sails, and cover Houses with them; they make of them likewise Umbrelloes, Fans, Tents, Mats and Hats, which for their lightness are very com∣modious in Summer.

These Trees are planted either for the Fruit, or the Terry which is got out of them. The Fruit is of the bigness of an Estridge egg; and the Husk, that is green, as of our ordinary Nuts, being dried, is converted into the Thread called Cayro, which I spoke of before. Sometimes they gather the Fruit before it comes to perfect maturity, and then it is called Lanbo, whence may be drawn two pints of refreshing Liquor pleasant to drink. This Juyce by degrees turns to a little Nut, in taste not much unlike our Hasel∣nut, but something sweeter. The shell of this Nut, while 'tis green, is good to eat, but being dry, they make Cups, Spoons, and other Utensils of it, or make Coal for Gold∣smiths. The Indians peel this Nut, and extract a Milk out of it, as useful to all purposes, as our Cows milk. None but the poor eat the Fruit, because ordinarily they dry it, to ex∣tract the Oyl, which is good to eat, useful in medicine, and to burn in Lamps. The fruit being kept in the shell, by degrees turns to a kind of Apple, which in time grows yellow, and is excellent to eat.

They extract Wine out of it, thus;* 1.210 pulling off the Flower, they fasten to it a pot of Earth they call Collao, well stop'd and luted with Potters earth, that it may not dye nor sharpen. They know in what time the pot will be filled with a certain Liquor, which they call Sura, that hath the taste and quality of Whey. This Liquor boyl'd makes Terry, which serves them for Wine, and being set in the Sun, makes excellent Vinegar, and stilling it in a Limbeck makes good Strong-water. They make likewise Sugar of it, which they call Iagra, but esteem it not, for that 'tis brown, having such plenty of white. The Portu∣guez, steeping Raisins of the Sun and some other Ingredients in Sura, make a Drink that hath the taste and quality of Sack.

The Indians esteem most the inside of this Tree,* 1.211 for the Pith is white, and as fine as any Paper we have, will hold in fifty or sixty folds, or as many leaves. They term it Olla, and use it in stead of Paper, so as Persons of Quality seek much after it, only for this use; of the Bark they make courser paper, to make up Merchandizes in.

The second Species of Cocoes, is the Tree that the Portuguez call Arrequeiro, for the Areca that comes of it, whereof we spoke in the precedent Book, and of which we shall have further occasion to speak more hereafter; as well as of the other two kinds, called Tamor and Lantor, in the description of the Isle of Iava, to which we shall come imme∣diately.

Bananas is not any where so common as in Sumatra:* 1.212 'tis a kind of Indian Fig-tree, which grows to a mans height, and produces Leaves six foot long, and a foot and half broad. We call it, with the Portuguez, the Fig-tree, in regard that though the Fruit be not altogether like other Figs, yet hath it the shape and colour. It may be called rather a Bush then a Tree, because it hath no body. The Leaves begin to break forth when the Sprout is but four foot high, and as some come forth, others wither and fall, till the Plant be at full growth, and the Fruit come to maturity. The bole of it is not above ten or twelve inches think, and so soft that it may with ease be cut with a Knife. In the middle of the Leaf there comes out a Flower as big as an Estridge Egg, inclining to a violet colour, out of which comes a branch which is not wood, but tender as a Cabbage-stalk, loaden with Figs. At first they are no bigger then a Bean, but in time they grow seven or eight inches long, and as big as a Cowcumber; not a sprig but shall have near a hundred Figs, which joyn to∣gether like a bunch of Grapes. They gather them before they are full ripe, which they know by their colour, which is of a yellowish green; then they hang them on a Nail till they ripen, which will be in four or five days. No stalk hath more then one bunch; they cut it close to the ground, whence it springs again with such vigout, that in a moneth it re∣covers its former condition; and at that rate fructifies the year throughout, which is a great

Ma••na to this Country, where a little sufficeth; and thus they live in a manner for nothing. The Cods or Husks, wherein the Figs are inclosed, are no less delicious and useful then the Fruit it self, and as nourishing as our finest Bread, and in taste much like a Cake, so as this Tree alone is sufficient to feed the whole Country.

The Pepper of Sumatra is without doubt the best in the Indies,* 1.213 except that of Cochim. Commonly they plant it at the root of another Tree, underset it with Canes or Poles, as Hop or French-beans. The Leaves resemble Orange-leaves, only they are a little less and more sharp; it grows in little branches as red Goosberries, or Juniper. While it hangs on the tree it is green, and turns not black till it be gathered and dry, which they do in Decem∣ber and Ianuary. The places which produce most of it are, Malabar, Onar, Barselor, Man∣galor, Calicut, Cranganor, Cochim, Conhon, Quida, Dampin, Dedir, Campir and Andragir, the Isles of Sumatra and Bantam, and certain places in the Isle of Iava. They bring forth likewise white Pepper, but not in so great abundance. The Malayans call Pepper Lauda; the Inhabitants of Iava, Sahargh; and the Malabars, Molanga. Long Pepper is not got∣ten but in Bengala, which is another sort of Fruit like the tag of a point, but something thicker and gray, containing a small white grain of the same taste and use as common Pep∣per. In Malabar and Goa there grows another sort of Pepper, which they call Canarius, but used only by poor people.

'Tis something strange, but very certain, that they spend more Pepper in the Indies then is brought into Europe; though in the Haven of Bantam only, 'tis known they have laded fourty eight thousand Bags in a year: for the Indians dress not any meat without hand∣fuls of it, but they never beat it, nor grind it.

Iava,* 1.214 an Island commonly called Iava Major, to distinguish it from another less of the same name, which lies hard by it, is South-East from the Isle of Sumatra, from which it is dis-joyned, only by a narrow Streight, called the Streight of Sunda. It lies seven Degrees beyond the Line, and is about fifty Leagues long: but hitherto no mans curiosity hath discovered the breadth of it, which makes some conceive that it is not an Island, but part of the Continent, known by the name of Terra Australis, near the Streight of Magellan. Iulius Scaliger, in his Exercitations against Cardan, calls it the Compendium of the World; because there is not Animal, Plant, Fruit, Metal, nor Drug, which is not here in greater abundance, then in any part of the Universe.

The Natives say,* 1.215 that originally they came from China, and that their Ancestors, weary of the yoak that King kept them under, removed to the Isle of Iava; certainly they are in face like the Chineses, their forehead and brows large, and eyes narrow; for which rea∣son divers Chineses settle in this Island.

There is scarce a Town in Iava but hath a particular King, who not above forty or fifty years since obeyed all one Emperour, but of late they have shaken off that Soveraign∣ty, and are all independent. The King of Bantam is the most puissant,* 1.216 and next him the King of Palambuam, from whom is denominated the Streight that divides the Isles Iava and Bali. Ten Leagues thence, towards the North-East, lyes the Town of Panaru∣can, where they drive a great trade with the Slaves they bring from Malacca, as also in long Pepper and Womens Garments.

Near Panarucan there is a Mountain of Sulphur, which began in the year 1586. to cast up fire in such violence,* 1.217 that at that first blazing above ten thousand persons perished by it. The Kings of Panarucan and Palambuam are Pagans, but the King of the City of Passa∣ruan, six Leagues from Panarucan, is a Mahumetan. At Passaruan they have a great traf∣fick in Garnitre, a fruit like a Raspberry, whereof the Merchants of Quilin make Beads and Bracelets, which they sell, and put off all over the Indies.

Ten Leagues thence Westward lies the City Ioartam,* 1.218 with an excellent Haven upon a fair River, where Ships, in their Voyage from the Moluccoes to Bantam, take in Provisions and fresh Water.

Upon the same River lies the City Gerrici,* 1.219 to whose King the other Kings of Iava ren∣der the same respect, they again exact from their own Slaves, and near to these two Cities it is they fetch the Salt that is brought to Bantam.

The City of Surabaia,* 1.220 that stands next in rank, hath likewise its proper King, who also reigns over the City of Brandam, six Leagues thence towards the West, and lives at Cidaye.* 1.221

This City is fortified with a good Wall well flanked; but the Haven is not safe, by reason there wants shelter against the Winds that come from Sea-wards.

Ten Leagues Westward lies the City of Tabaon,* 1.222 next Bantam, the most considerable of the Island, as we shall tell you anon.

Five Leagues further North-west is Cajam,* 1.223 a City of no traffick, no more then Mandali∣caon, which is inhabited by none but Fishermen.

Five Leagues onwaads West stands Iapara,* 1.224 upon a skirt of Land that thrusts it self three Leagues into the Sea. The scituation of this Town is upon a fair River, with a good Harbour that renders it very Merchantile. This hath likewise a peculiar King, and none of the meanest in the Island.

Twenty five Leagues from Iapara, and forty five from Bantam, lies Matram, or Ma∣tavam,* 1.225 a great City, with a King of its own; who heretofore was so powerful as that he pretended to Soveraignty over the whole Isle; and for this was the declared enemy of the King of Bantam.

Then five Leagues West from Iapara is the City of Pati,* 1.226 and three Leagues beyond that of Dauma, which acknowledges the King of Matavam; as doth also that of Taggal,* 1.227 scituate with the two others in the same Bay.

The next is the fair and strong City of Charabaon, upon a fresh-water River; and on∣wards the Cities of Dormago and Monucaon,* 1.228 whence they pass through the Village Gaccon, to the City of Iacatra,* 1.229 and so to Bantam.* 1.230

Without question this last is the Metropolis, and most considerable City of all Iava, scituate about twenty five Leagues from the Isle of Sumatra, at the foot of a Mountain, whence three Rivers rise, two whereof run by the walls, the other through the City, but all too shallow for Navigation. The Town is indifferent great, but rascally Houses; the walls, which are of Brick, and three foot in thickness, are not entirely lined with Earth, yet so flanked, that at every hundredth pace lies a Cannon, which would sufficiently secure the Curtain, were it in condition for service; but their Artillery is not mounted, and they have no other Ammunition then a little Powder brought from Malacca, where the Portu∣guez have a Mill. The City Gates are so wretched, that one might beat them down with a Club; but so vigilantly guarded, 'twould be hard to approach without notice; there are neither Bastions nor Towers, but in lieu thereof Scaffolds of three stories, which yield a strong defence.

In the whole City there are but three principal Streets,* 1.231 which all abut upon the Castle called Pacebam. The one goes from the Pacebam to the Haven; another, where the Slaves and the Kings Domesticks inhabit, leads to the Gate towards the Fields; and the third, to the Gate at the foot of the Mountain. The Streets are not pav'd, but are as com∣modious, by means of the Sand they are covered with. The Channels, which in divers places cross the City, are foul and stinking, by reason the Stream of the River not being strong enough to carry away the filth it brings it self, and what is thrown forth, the Water choaks and makes puddles that infect the whole City. No Person of Quality who hath not his private Chappel, or Mesquite, in his House; but one there is in common, near the Palace, on the Magazine and Stable side. The City is divided into several Posts, each of which is assign'd to some Person of Quality, who commands in time of War, and hath the direction in civil Affairs.* 1.232 They have a Drum as big as those Germane Casks, call'd Thunder-bolts, used instead of a Bell, which they beat with a wooden Bar as big as a Weavers-beam, morning and evening, as also on Alarms. Likewise they have Brass basins, which they beat musically and chime upon, as they do on Bells.

At every corner of the Streets there stands a Guard,* 1.233 and at Sun-set they draw up and make fast all Passage-boats, so as in the night there is no stirring in the Street. At the Prison gate, near the Palace, stands a Guard of fifty Men; nor is there a Person of Qua∣lity, who hath not one of ten or twelve at his House. The Town is full of Cocoe-trees, nor is there a Mansion without divers belonging to it. The housing is poorly built, of Straw or Reeds upon piles, made like those at Achim. They cover their Houses with Cocoe-leaves, and the sides of thier lodging Rooms have only Curtains for freedom of the Air, which is exceeding necessary in this hot Climate. For preservation of their Wares, they have Store-houses of Stone, but they are covered only with Straw, so that to secure them from fire, which is but too frequent amongst them, they lay great pieces of Timber over the Roof, and cover it with Sand, that the fire may not find passage. The Rooms in their Houses are only divided by partitions, made of Canes called Bambus, which they slit so thin, that a Horse-load serves for all the Rooms in a House. At the Houses of Persons of Quality, at the first entrance, you come into a square Court, where the Guard is, and where the Master of the House speaks with such as have business with him, under a little Shed, covered with Canes or Cocoe-leaves. In one of the corners of this Court stands the Mes∣quite, where at noon they do their Devotions, and not far thence the Cistern where they wash themselves. Being entred the House, you find on both sides of a narrow Gallery se∣veral little Niches, for Slaves to rest in, who watch for their Masters security; by reason they are all afraid of being surprized and killed by their Enemies in the night. All For∣raigners,

as the Inhabitants of Bengala, Guzuratta, Malayans, Abissins, Chineses, Portuguez and Hollanders, lye out of Town.

Here are three great Market places,* 1.234 where Merchants meet daily; The grand Bazar, or Exchange, is towards the East part of the Town, and is the meeting place of forreign Merchants; as Portuguez, Arabians, Turks, Chineses, Quilins, Peguans, Malayans, Ben∣galans, Gusurats, Malabars, and other Indians, who are there from the break of the day till nine of the clock, and then break up. The second Market place is before the great Mesquite, divided from it by a Pallisado. To this place Women resort with Sacks, and a weight of three pounds, they call Gantam, who buy Pepper of the Country people, at eight or nine hundred Caxas the Gantam. But the Chineses, who are very skilful in this Trade, forestall them sometimes; for they go to the Peasants and buy all they have by the lump before hand. Betwixt the Pallisado and the Mesquite stand Women that sell Bettele, Araca, Bananas, Melons, &c. and some there are sell fine Cakes to be eaten hot.

A little higher on the right hand are Armourers,* 1.235 who sell small pieces of Cannon, Pi∣stols, Sword-blades, Battle-axes, Knives, &c. Not far thence, there are others that sell Sandal-wood, white and yellow, and on the left hand are Confectioners, that sell Sugar, Honey, and all sorts of Sweet-meats liquid or dry. Near to that is the Bean-market, where are sold all sorts of Beans, black, white, red, yellow, green and grey, at three hundred Caxas the Gantam. Next to this is the Onyon-market, where Merchants that sell Cloath by whole-sale come, and such as deal in return of Money, and assurances of the return of Ves∣sels. Hard by this is the Poultry, where, besides tame Fowl, they sell also Kids, Geese, Pigeons, Parrats, &c. Coming thence you meet three wayes; one going to the Chineses Shops; another to the Herb and Pulse-market; and the third to the Shambles. By the way to the Chineses Shops, on the right hand, are some Jewellers, who for the greater part are Choroacones, that is, Persians, or Arabians, who sell Rubies, Hiacinths, Turquesses, Gra∣nats, &c. And on the left hand is the place for the Bengalians, with their Toyes and small Wares.

On the backside of this Street, the Chineses sell their Silks raw and colour••d, Damask, Velvet, Sattins, Brocadoes of Gold and Silver, Purcelane, and Cabinets, and works of Lacque, &c. By the way to the Hearb-market, upon the right hand upon the Strand, are the Bengalians with their small Wares. On the left hand Merchants of Linnen-cloath, and at the lower end of this Market married Women have Seamsters shops; but men are forbidden to come there under pain of a forfeiture. Then you come to the Hearb-market, where are a multitude of Simples unknown to us. Turning thence you see the Fish-mar∣ket, then the Shambles, with Stalls full of Beef, Buffles and Venison: then the Spice-mar∣ket, where Women sell Pepper, Cloves, Nutmegs, Mace, &c. and all sorts of Gums and Drugs, to Europeans unknown: and the Rice-market, where likewise they sell Earthen-Ware and Salt; whence they pass by the same way they came, to the place where Mer∣chants and Masters of Ships meet about their Affairs.

The sale of these Commodities lasts but till nine of the clock, and then opens the Mar∣ket before the Pacebam, or Palace Royal, where are sold all sorts of Victuals, as likewise some Pepper, which they truck with the Chineses. About noon the Market in the Chineses quarters begins, where nothing is sold but for the Table.

We told you before, that next Bantam, Tuban or Tubaon,* 1.236 is the chiefest Town in Iava, and in effect, is stronger then all the rest, and although not so great as Bantam, 'tis at least as handsome, and as well built. The Palace is exceeding spacious, and hath very fair Appartments, where Elephants and other Beasts have their several quarters. Each Ele∣phant hath his lodge built upon four pillars, with a post in the middle to tye him to. The rooms are filled with Chests and Hampers for the baggage, when the King goes his Pro∣gress. Near to his Lodgings is a place where his fighting Cocks are kept, every one his Pen apart, and every one his Keeper; as likewise the Parrots, which are much before those they bring into these parts. The greatest part of a beautiful flame colour, with a great golden spot on the back: the out-sides of their wings blew and red, and the in-side a love∣ly carnation. They are too tender to indure the inconveniences of a long Voyage; be∣sides the Indians highly esteem them, for that they love their owners, and delight to be made much of by them. The King of Tuban, whom the Hollanders saw, in their third Voyage to the Indies, delighted much in these Creatures, as likewise in Dogs, Horses and white Ducks, by much larger then ours. He had four legitimate Wives, six Sons, and two Daughters, besides natural Children a great number by Concubines, which he kept in several Appartments. His Bed was raised some distance from the ground, built like an Altar of great Stones, whereon lay a Quilt and certain Pillows of Sattin, filled with raw Silk.

The Chief Commerce they have at Tubaon consists in Pepper, which they carry to the Isle of Body, where they truck for Cloath, and Stuffs of Cotton and Silk, which afterwards they bring to Banda, Ternate, the Philippines, and other parts, to truck for Cloves, Mace and Nutmegs. The Inhabitants, for the greatest part live only on Fish. They wear no other Garment then a Linnen-cloath about the Loyns; only persons of Quality sometimes have loose Coats of Chamelot, which reach but to their Thighs. They are by this habit distin∣guished from other persons, and by their train of Slaves, without whom they never come abroad. They delight much in Horses, and to have their Saddles exceeding rich, which are made like our great Saddles, and their trappings studded with Gold and Silver, striving to appear well mounted at Assemblies, and to shew the King their horsemanship, and the nimbleness of their Horses.

The Inhabitants that live in the inner parts of the Isle of Iava are Pagans,* 1.237 and the great∣est part Pythagoreans, believing a transmigration of the Soul; for which reason they eat neither Fish nor Flesh. Towards the South part of the Isle, there are, though but few, some Mahumetans, as we said before, and they observe the Turkish Religion in all things, sending for Priests to Meca.

They observe two Fasts.* 1.238 The greater of the two begins the fifth of August, and at the beginning of this Lent it is, the Slaves renue their submission to their Master, with Cere∣monies extraordinary. For they take them by the feet, and rub them upward to the knees; then closing their hands, they rub the head, face and neck; and then unclose them again.

Leut being ended,* 1.239 they celebrate Easter, entertaining their Children and all their Dome∣sticks with a Dinner. There is scarce a Man in Bantam, who hath not three or four Wives, and some have ten or twelve, besides Concubines, who wait on their Wives especi∣ally when they go abroad. They make no difference betwixt legitimate and natural Children. A Father hath not power to sell his Child, though he had it by a Slave. Children go stark naked, only the Girls cover their Privities with a thin plate of Gold or Silver.* 1.240 They marry at the age of eight, nine, or ten years, not only to prevent the disor∣ders which in this hot Climate were inevitable, but because the King is Heir to all, who dying, leave their Children under age; whom he makes his Slaves, as he doth the Widow and Family of the deceased. The Dowry Persons of Quality give with their Daughters consists in Slaves of both Sexes, and in a sum of Coxas, which is very considerable, when it amounts to three hundred thousand, which is much about two Crowns and a half French money.

The Women appear with great decency at the marriage of their Relations, though they use no great ceremonies. One may know the day by certain Poles which are stuck in the Houses of the Bride and Bridegroom, with Tassels of red and white Cotton.

Dinner ended, they bring a Horse to the Bridegroom, whereon he rides about the Town till evening, expecting the slaves he is to have in marriage, who come commonly loaden with Presents. None but the nearest Kindred sup with them, and see the new married cou∣ple abed.

Women of Quality are kept in such restraint, that they suffer not their own Sons to come within their Chambers; and when they go abroad, which is very seldom, all give place and respect to them, even the King himself would do it: nor dares any man speak to a married Woman without the leave of her Husband. Women of Quality are known from others, only by their Train; for all are dressed after the same fashion, wearing a Pet∣ticoat of Cotton or Silk, which comes from the Breast to the mid-leg. Stockings they have none, and go all bare-headed, tying up their Hair together on the Crown of their Head; but when they come to Weddings, or other publick Assemblies, they wear a Coro∣net of Gold, and have on their Fingers and about their Arms Rings and Bracelets. They are so much addicted to cleanliness, that there passes not a day but they bathe themselves three or four times. They do not their natural necessities, nor receive their benevolences from their Husbands, but they go up to the Neck in Water to cleanse themselves: They do no work at all, which needs be no wonder, for the Husbands themselves having im∣ployed two or three hours about their Merchandize, all the day after do nothing but chew Bettele amongst their Wives, who are most sollicitous, by all the little kindnesses they can imagine, to court their love, washing and rubbing them till they are stirr'd up to voluptu∣ousness.

The Magistrate of the Town of Bantam sits in Judicature in the Court of the Pace∣bam,* 1.241 from four or five in the Evening till it be Night. The Plaintiff and Defendant ap∣pear both in person, and plead their own Cause. One only punishment of Criminals is, they tye them to a post, and stab them to death with a Poyniard: Strangers have this pri∣viledge,

that giving satisfaction to the party complaining, they may redeem themselves from death, except they have murthered in cold bloud, or upon advantage.

The Kings Council meets upon Affairs of State,* 1.242 under a broad spread Tree, by Moon∣light, where sometimes there come near five hundred persons, who part not till the Moon go down. When the Council is risen they go to bed, and there lye till dinner time: afterwards the Councellours of State give audience to all who have ought to propose to the Councel. When the King comes there in person, he sits in the midst of them; or else with the four principal Ministers of State, and propounds the point wherein he re∣quireth their advice, or causes the Governour of the Town to propound it. To a Coun∣cel of War they call the three hundred Captains, Commanders of the Troops the Ar∣mies consist of, which is raised in the Town it self. They have a particular course for quenching fire, which happens but too often among them; for the Women have this Of∣fice imposed upon them, while the Men stand in Arms to defend them in the mean time from pillage.

Persons of Quality,* 1.243 when they go to Court, or through the Town, have carried before them a Lance, and a Sword sheath'd in a black Velvet Scabbard, and by these Ensigns ob∣lige all the Street to make way for them, who retiring back, fit on their Heels till these Grandees are past. Their ordinary wear is of Stuff wrought with Silk, and they wear Turbants of a fine Bengalian Cloath. Some amongst them wear Mandillions of Velvet, black or crimson, and never forget the Dagger or Poyniard under their Girdle. They ever go with a numerous train of Slaves; one amongst them carrying the Bettele-bottle, ano∣ther the Chamber-pot, and a third the Umbrello. They all go bare-footed, it being thought a disparagement among them, to walk with Shooes through the Town. In their Houses many wear them; they are made at Achim, Malacca in China, and the Isle of Sumatra, where are also made most part of the Umbrello's used in the Indies.

The Iavians are haughty,* 1.244 self-conceited, perfidious, mischievous, and cruel; who never fail to make an end of such they once get advantage of; and having once committed a murther, they kill all in their power; for knowing death to be their inevitable reward, they discharge their fury indifferently on all they encounter, without consideration of sex or age; so as sometimes they are constrained to kill them in the place, instead of taking them to be delivered up into the hands of Justice.

They generally wear long hair, are of a Chesnut Complexion, having great Jaw-bones, flat Faces, great Eyebrows, little Eyes, thin Beards; and being of a middle stature, well set, and strongly limb'd. They are addicted naturally to theft, and so vindicative, that to be revenged of an Enemy, they stick not to run upon his Weapons, and hazard an assured death, to take away anothers life.

This bloudy disposition shews they have courage,* 1.245 and would make good Souldiers, were they but as dextrous at Fire-arms as they are at their usual Weapons; which are the Pike, the Battle-axe, and the broad Sword, but above all the Dagger, or Poyniard. Their Buck∣lers are of Wood, or boyled Leather stretcht upon a Hoop; and for their bodies they have Cuirasses, the pieces being fastned together with mails of Iron. Souldiers in time of peace have no pay, but in time of war they have Arms and Clothes, and Rice and Fish for provi∣sion. They are all Slaves, and not only such as belong to the King, but likewise to other Lords, who are obliged to enroll them for their Princes service. They are seldom or ne∣ver idle, but imploy themselves most commonly in making Sheaths for Ponyards of Sandal∣wood made hollow, or pollishing their Arms, which they generally poyson; keeping them so well, that no Raizor can be sharper then their Swords. The Iavaneses, as indeed all the rest of the Indians, hold their Daggers so dear to them, that they will not speak to any man without that by their side, not one Brother with another, and at night they lay it un∣der their Bolster. Some use Truncks, through which they blow little poysoned Arrows, so bearded, that pulling it out the head remains in the wound, which by this means be∣comes incurable and mortal. Amongst such a multitude of Villains, there are notwith∣standing some honest people, but the number is very small: for except some that inhabit near Bantam, upon the Streight of Sunda, at the foot of the mountain Gonon Besar, who were transplanted thither from Pasaruan, all the rest are depraved. The people not able to live under the tyranny of the King of Passaruan, put themselves on certain conditions un∣der the protection of the King of Bantam, and have built the Town of Sura, which hath a peculiar King, but subordinate notwithstanding to the King of Bantam. They live very peaceably, and persevere in the exercise of their Pagan Religion.

The soyl is cultivated,* 1.246 either by free people, who take it of the King, or other Lords, at a certain rent, and are not bound to labour longer then their bargain, and may after∣wards do what they please; or by Slaves, who cultivate the Pepper, Rice and Cocoes, breed

Poultry and Cattle for their Masters profit, and to supply his Kitchin. Some Slaves take the Cocoes at one thousand Caxaes the Tree. Others work by the day, and get eight hun∣dred Caxaes a day, which is to their Masters profit. Others are not maintain'd by ••heir Masters, but serve them six dayes, and the six dayes following work for themselves, and so get their livelyhood. The Woman slaves keep market, where they sell their Masters Pepper, and other Commodities; or else imploy themselves in sewing, or making Cloath, that they may not live unprofitably. When they have a mind to be eased of them, they lead them from Port to Port,* 1.247 and sell them to him will give most. The ordinary price for one of an able body is five Fardos, that is about a Pistol a-piece. The Children of a Slave belong to the Master, who disposes of them as he thinks best; but he hath not power over the life of his Slave, without the express consent of the King or Gover∣nour.

The Pepper which the Iavians sell to Strangers is usually mixt with Ordure, black Sand, or Gravel, or they adulterate it some other way, either in quality or weight, as they do all their other Commodities. They keep a trade with all the neighbouring Islands, with notable advantage. At the Towns of Macasser and Surubya they fetch Rice, which there they buy for one Sata de Caxa the Gantan, and sell it for double the price. At Ba∣lambuam they buy Cocoes, a thousand Caxes the hundred, and venting them by retail at Bantam, they sell eight Cocoes for two hundred Caxes. There they likewise buy the Oyl of the same Fruit. At Ioartam, Gerrici Pati, and Iuama, they fetch Salt at a hundred and fifty thousand Caxaes the eight hundred Gantans; and at Bantam, three Gantans are worth a thousand Caxaes. They carry Salt to Sumatra, where they truck for Lacque, Pepper, Benjamin, Cotton, Tortoise-shell, and divers others Commodities. From Iacatra, Iappara, Crauaon, Timor and Palimbaon, they fetch Honey, Wax, Sugar, &c. Salt-fish from Crauaon and Bendermassing; Iron from Crimata, in the Isle of Borneo; Copper and Lead from Pepa and Guselaen, upon the Coast of Malacca; from Bali and Cambaya, Cotton and Cotton-cloath, &c.

Rich Merchants make no Voyages themselves, but venture the greatest part of their money, for more or less profit, as the Voyages are long or dangerous, and near upon the like conditions we do here in Europe. Obligations, as all other Instruments, are written upon the bark of a Tree, the Letters ingrav'd with a Bodkin, and they make it up in a Roll, or fold it four-square betwixt two boards, which they tye together with a Pack-thread very neatly. Sometimes they use China Paper, which is very fine, and of all colours. As yet they know not the Art of Printing, but they paint their own Characters exactly well, which are rather Figures then Letters. The usual Language is peculiar to the Country; but the Malayan is more general; the Mahumetan Religion hath likewise brought in the Arabian Language.

The Persians,* 1.248 by the Iavians called Coracons, traffick here for precious Stones, and all sorts of Gums and Drugs, and are a people to be confided in, because they are open-hearted and civil. The Arabians and Beguians come thither for China-ware, and bring with them the Commodities of the neighbouring Islands. The Malayans and Quilins let their mo∣ney out at Interest, or upon change. The Guzurattans are poor, and commonly Sea-men: All these Forreigners are attired all of one fashion, in a Cotton Garment, and a Turbant of the same stuffe. At their coming to Bantam, they buy a Woman that is for all uses; and at their departure thence, they sell her again; but if they have Children by her, they are tied to provide for them.

The Chineses are they that bring the greatest trade hither,* 1.249 the most industrious to get wealth, and live the best. They are a self-ended people, that live by Usury, and have there the same repute as the Iews in Europe. They go into the Country, with a weight in hand, to buy all the Pepper they can meet with, and having weighed one parcel, so as they may have a near guess at the rest, pay them present money, or according as they have occasion for it, and by this means engross so great a quantity, that they have suffici∣ent to lade the China Fleet when it arrives, selling for fifty thousand Caxaes the Sack, what cost them but twelve thousand. This Fleet arrives at Bantam in the moneth of Ianuary, to the number of eight or ten, and are Vessels of fourty or fifty Tun.

By them likewise comes the money hither, which in the Malayan Language is called Cas,* 1.250 in Iavan, Pity, and is current, not only at Bantam, and all the Isle of Iava, but through all the neighbouring Islands. 'Tis a little thin plate made of Lead, and the Skum of Brass, so brittle, that letting fall a string of Caxaes, you shall break at least ten or twelve. They are made in the Town of Chincoa in China, and they are beholding to Wan••y, King of China, for them, who lived about the year 1590. and finding that the Caxaes made by

his Predecessour Huyien, King of China, went not off, by reason the Chineses had so filled the adjacent Islands with them, he contrived this brittle money, which his Successour Ha∣mendon put forth, as now it is corrupted. It hath a four-square hole through it, at which they string them on a Straw; a string of two hundred Caxaes, called Sata, is worth about three farthings sterling, and five Satas tyed together make a Sapocon. The Iavians, when this money came first amongst them, were so cheated with the Novelty, that they would give six bags of Pepper for ten Sapocons, thirteen whereof amount but to a Crown. But they have had leisure enough to see their error; for in a short time, the Island was so filled with this stuffe, that they were compelled absolutely to prohibit all trading, which so dis∣paraged this money, that at present two Sacks of Pepper will scarce come for one hundred thousand Caxaes.

Likewise from China they bring Purcelane, which they sell here at cheap rates; for at the first arrival of the China Fleet, six pieces of Purcelane may be bought for a thousand Caxaes. They bring their Country Silks, Sattins and Damask, and take away Pepper and Lacque, brought to Bantam from the City of Tabanbaon, Anil or Indico brought thi∣ther from the Town of Anier, Sandal-wood, Nutmegs, Cloves, Tortoise-shell, whereof they make Chests and Cabinets, Ivory, whereof they make Chairs for the Mandorins, who prefer this stuffe before Silver.

The Portuguez that deal at Bantam live out of Town,* 1.251 in the same Quarter with the Chi∣neses. They drive here a great trade in Pepper, Nutmegs, Cloves, Mace, Sandal-woods, Cubebs, long Pepper, and other Drugs; and sell here Cotton, Cloath, and other Stuffs, sent them from Malacca: for the greater part of them are Factors, and Commissioners of the Governour of Malacca, and the Arch-bishop of Goa. At Bantam they have neither Priest nor Chappel; but at Panarucan they have both.

In the Isle of Iava are all sorts of Beasts, both wild and tame: The Forrests are full of Elephants and Rhinocerots, Leopards and Tigers, which are more cruel and furious then those of any other place, and do so much mischief, that people go not without danger to gather Frankincense, Mastick, Myrrhe and Benjamin, which is there in its greatest perfecti∣on, and whereof there were great quantity to be gotten, if the Forrests were not almost inaccessible, by reason of the wild Beasts, as also for Serpents, Lizards, and Salamanders, exceeding dangerous, and of so extraordinary a growth, that there are Serpents have swallowed Children and Sheep intire. The Tigers and Leopards often come out of the Woods, and make great spoil amongst the Cattle, which for this reason are reared with great difficulty. Their Swine have no bristles, and are so fat their bellies trail on the ground.

The Rivers breed Fish in abundance;* 1.252 and Oysters have there been seen that have weigh∣ed three hundred pound; a thing would seem incredible, if Olearius in his Notes upon Mandelslo's Relation did not observe, that being in Holland in the year 1652. he ••ought at Encluysen, of the Wife of a certain Sea-Captain, who had made a Voyage to the Indies, two Oyster-shells, that weighed four hundred sixty seven pounds, yet to be seen in the Duke of Holstein's Cabinet at Gottorp; and he adds, That the woman affirm'd there was so much meat within them, that it sufficed all that were in the Ship, being an hundred and twenty persons.

'Tis very hard to hunt Deer, Goats, Boars, and other game, fallow or black, which abound there, by reason the Woods are so thick, that 'tis impossible to make any way through them; and the Iavians are so unskilful at their Fire-arms, that it hath been ob∣serv'd, That a Iavian, having shot at a wild Buffler, made a shift to kill the beast; but the Musket recoyling, he fell down, with his cheek all bruised, and the loss of two of his teeth; in so much that these creatures may be seen in whole herds, feeding up and down the fields. There are likewise abundance of Apes, Foins, Squirrels, wild Peacocks and Parrots, and infinite other birds, exceeding beautiful to the eye.

In the Rivers there is abundance of Crocodiles,* 1.253 which seize not only on men bathing, but attempt the Cannows, as they pass along, snatching men out of them, and dragging them to the bottom. The Chineses tame this Creature, and fatten it, to be afterwards eaten as a great dainty.* 1.254 Their Civet yields as much perfume as that of Guiny; but it is neither so white, nor so good.

They have two sorts of Poultry,* 1.255 one like ours, the other betwixt ours and the Indian kind; and these last, which are in a manner monsters, are so furious, they will fight till death decides the battel. Amongst the common sort there are some whose flesh is black, yet are they very good meat.

The Rhinocerot,* 1.256 by the Indians called Abadu, is not so ordinary in the Isle of Iava, as in Bengala, Patane, and other places, though there are some; and the Iavians make so great

account of this Beast, that there is nothing about him which they use not in medicine, not only the Flesh, the Bloud, the Horn, the Teeth, but even his very Dung: They hold there is no better Antidote against Poyson, and attribute the same qualities to this, that ancient Authors do to the Unicorn.

The Ants are exceeding troublesom in most of these places,* 1.257 but chiefly in the Isle of Iava: They are much bigger then in our parts, and so mischievous, that there is no Stuff they spoil not, nor Victuals they consume not, if they can get to it; wherefore they ordi∣narily set the feet of Tables and Cupboards in Tubs half filled with Water, to hinder the Ants from creeping up; and 'twere impossible to preserve any Birds, did they not set them on Pol••s planted in a Dish of Water; for should they put them in a Cage, the Ants would get up and kill them. There is besides another sort of Ants, about the length of a Mans finger, and red; but these are only in the Fields, where they live on the barks of Trees and Herbs.

As concerning the Trees and Fruits in the Isle of Iava, amongst others there is the Areca,* 1.258 whereof we spoke a word by the way in the precedent Book. The Portuguez call the Tree that bears it Arre quero, the Arabians, Faufell, and Malayans, Pynang. It is a kind of Cocoe, but not so great, nor the leaves so big and broad. The Fruit is like a Date; Na∣ture incloses it in a husk, which opens not till it flower, and when it ripens, the shell falls off, the fruit remaining at the branch. It hath scarce any taste, but it moistens the mouth, dyes the lips red, and the teeth black. The Indians lap it up in a Bettle-leaf, mix a little Chalk or Lime with it, and chew it rather out of custom then for any pleasure, though they hold that it strengthens the Stomach and Gums, and is a topical Medicine against the Scurvy; and in effect there is scarce an Indian that is subject to this Disease, or troubled with the Tooth-ach. This Drug will make some people to be drunk, that all things seem to turn round; but that dizziness is presently over.

The Mangas grow on Trees not much unlike our Nut-trees,* 1.259 but they have not so ma∣ny leaves. They are of the bigness of a Peach, but longer, and something bending like a Crescent, of a light green, drawing a little towards the red. It hath a great shell, that encloses an Almond of greater length then breadth, and eaten raw very distasteful, but roasted on the Coals not unpleasant. 'Tis useful in Physick, against the Worms, and the Diarrhaea. It ripens in October, November, and December, and being perfectly ripe, 'tis full as good as a Peach. They get them while they are green, and put them up in Salt, Vinegar, and Garlick, and then they call them Mangas d' Achar, and they serve in stead of Olives. There are likewise wild ones, which they call Mangas brauas, of a pale green too, but brighter then the other, and full of juyce, which is immediate death without a present Antidote.

The Ananas is one of the loveliest,* 1.260 pleasantest and wholsomest fruits of the Indies. It grows on a bush, and hath leaves like Semper-vivum. The fruit at first is green, but being ripe turns Orange, or Aurora coloured, drawing a little to a red, shap'd like a Pine-apple; for which reason the Portuguez, who met with this fruit first in Brasil, called it Pinas: but 'tis tender and easie to cut. They are yellow within, of a delicate scent, they are eaten in Wine, but the excess is dangerous for Feavers. The juyce is so sharp, that if one wipe not the Knife they are cut with, next morning it will be found eaten. The Tree is so apt to grow, that a sprig will take root in the earth, though it have not past two or three leaves, be half withered, and have been cut fifteen dayes before. The Canarins call this fruit Ana∣nasa; the Brasilians, Nava, and in Hispaniola, and the other Western Islands, they call it Iajama: 'tis as big as the larger sort of Lemmons, or the middle M••lons, excellent both in scent and taste. At distance they look like Hartichoaks, only they are not so picked as the leaves of that Plant. The stalk is like that of a Thistle, and every stalk bears but one, and that at the top of it; for though many times it puts forth at the side other stems, yet the fruit that comes of them is very small, and seldom comes to maturity. They have of them in March, and then they are very pleasant, for the juyce hath the taste of sweet or new Wine; and is exceeding easie of digestion, but it heats, and often brings a Fea∣ver.

In Iava there is another fruit called Samaca,* 1.261 'tis as big as a Citron, the colour green, something drawing to a red; full of juyce, that is tart and toothsom, and within hath divers black kernels: the leaves are like those of Lemmon-trees, but not so long. They put them up in Salt or Sugar, and use them as Tamarindes, against burning Feavers, Inflam∣mations of the Breast, and pains in the Stomack, and Fluxes.

Tamarinds grow on great Trees,* 1.262 full of branches, whereof the leaves are not bigger then, nor unlike to the leaves of Pimpernel, only something longer. The flower at first is like the Peaches, but at last turns white, and puts ••orth its fruit at the end of certain strings:

as soon as the Sun is set, the leaves close up the fruit, to preserve it from the Dew, and open as soon as that Planet appears again. The fruit at first is green, but ripening it becomes of a dark grey, drawing towards a red, inclosed in husks, brown or tawny, of taste a little bitter, like our Prunelloes. Every husk contains three or four little Beans in a certain skin, which is that the Portuguez call Tamarinho. The fruit is viscous, and sticks to the fingers, but of so good a taste, that the Indians use it almost in all Sawces, as we do Ver∣juyce; but 'twould turn a mans stomack to see them cook Meat with this Drug; for squeezing it between their hands, the juyce that runs through their fingers looks more like a Medicine then a Sawce. These Trees bear twice in the year, and grow every where without being planted, or otherwise looked after. Physitians use this Drug against burn∣ing Feavers, heat of the Liver, and Diseases in the Spleen, and infused a night in cold Wa∣ter, it purges gently. The Tamarinds brought to our parts, are either salted or preserved in Sugar. The Inhabitants of the Isle of Madagascar, where there grows plenty of it, call it Quille, and the Iavians, Sunda assu. The Portuguez gave it the name of Tamarin∣thes, for the resemblance the fruit holds with the Date in Arabia, called Tamar, as if they would say, Dates of India. The Malabars call it Puli, and the rest of the Indians, Am∣puli. The Tree is as big as a Walnut-tree, full of leaves, bearing its fruit at the bran∣ches, like the Sheath of a Knife, but not so straight, rather bent like a Bow. The In∣dians, when they would transport their Tamarinds, take them out of the husks, and make them up in Balls as big as a Mans fist, unhandsome to look on, and worse to handle.

We told you before,* 1.263 that 'tis common to plant Pepper near to a sort of Canes, by the Iavians called Mambu, in which the Tabaxir is found. 'Tis true, in the Isle of Iava there was never any of them found; but again 'tis certain, that on the Coast of Malabar, Co∣romandel, Bisnagar, and near to Malacca, this sort of Cane produces a Drug called Sacar Mambus, that is, Sugar of Mambu. The Arabians, the Persians, and the Moores call it Ta∣baxir, which in their Language signifies a white frozen liquor. These Canes are as big as the body of a Poplar, having straight branches, and leaves something longer then the Olive-tree. They are divided into divers knots, wherein there is a certain white matter like Starch, for which the Persians and Arabians give the weight in Silver, for the use they make of it in Physick, against burning Feavers, and bloudy Fluxes, but especially upon the first approaches of any Disease.

These Canes are so big,* 1.264 that the Indians cleave them to make Boats, leaving a knot at each end, whereon they sit to guide it; one before, another behind, and use this sort of Boat the rather, for that they are perswaded, Crocodiles bear a respect to the Mambu, and never hurt the Boats made of this Cane.

In the Isle of Iava there is another fruit,* 1.265 called, amongst the Malayans, Duriaon, not to be seen any where but in this place and the Malaccaes. The Tree that bears them, by the Malayans call'd Batan, is as big as our Apple-tree, the bark thick, plentiful of boughs, and wealthy in fruit: the blossom, which they call Buaa, is white, inclining to yellow, and the leaves half a foot in length, and two or three fingers broad, on the outside, of a pale green, drawing towards a grey; but on the in••ide the green is very delicate and lively; the fruit is as big as a Melon, covered with a thick rough rind, green, and hath ••ibs, as the Me∣lon; within 'tis divided into four quarters, which are again divided into two or three little cells, that contain the fruit, which is as big and white as a Pullets-egg, and of taste so de∣licious, that the Bianco Maugiares, which the Portuguez compound of Rice, Brawns of Capon, Cream, Sugar, and Rose-water, is not more dainty; each fruit hath a Stone as big and rough as that of the Peach: It will not keep; for when the white begins to turn, it must be thrown away, and must be eaten as soon as the husk begins to open. Such as are not used to this fruit will not like it at first, for that it hath the smell of a roasted Onyon; but the taste is so pleasing, that it may be reckoned amongst the prime and most excellent fruits of the Indies: One thing it is very remarkable for, that there is so great an antipa∣thy between it and the Bettele, that the least number of Bettele leaves laid near a Room full of Duriaons, they corrupt and rot immediately. Accordingly, when a man hath eaten too much of this fruit, let him but lay two or three Bettele leaves upon his breast, and he shall be eased; and the eating of but one of these leaves after the Duriaons causes speedy digestion; so as thus one may eat as much as he will, without the least inconve∣nience.

The Lantor-tree,* 1.266 which is another sort of Cocoe-tree, as we said before, is frequent in the Isle of Iava. The leaves are five or six foot long, and so smooth, that the Iavians write upon it with a Bodkin, and use it instead of Paper.

Of all the Indies, no part bears Cubebs but the Isle of Iava: the Iavians call it Cuci∣ombi, and Cumuc;* 1.267 the other Indians call it Cuba China, because the Chineses first fetch'd it thence to furnish other parts, before the Portuguez or Hollanders had any Commerce there. This Fruit grows up another Tree, like Pepper, and in bunches like Grapes. The Iavians knowing 'tis not any where but with them, esteem it so, as they will not suffer a Plant to go from amongst them, and sell it not unboyl'd, for fear it should be planted elsewhere, ••hough there is such plenty of it, that a Baruth, a weight of fifty six pounds, is worth but six, or, at the most, seven thousand Caxaes. The use of it is to fortifie the Stomach, and cleanse the Breast; but the Mahumetans take it with a little Areca, and are of opinion it re∣stores languishing and spent Nature.

The Mangosthan is a Fruit growing by the High-wayes in Iava,* 1.268 upon bushes, like our Sloes, and much of the same taste.

The Hearb the Iavians call Talasse,* 1.269 and which the Malayans call Lalade, bears neither Fruit nor Flower; but 'tis used in Sauces, and some eat it green, and assign it the same vir∣tues as they do the Cubebs.

In Iava they have another Fruit,* 1.270 which grows likewise in other places, call'd Iaca, in form and bigness like a Citrul, with a thick and rough rind: Within 'tis full of certrin Nuts, the Kernels whereof, being toasted on coals, are good to eat, and stay the Flux of the belly. The Tree is very great; but the boughs being not strong enough to bear the Fruit, it hangs all along the body of it, up from the very ground: Being full ripe, the rind grows hard and black, and emits a very sweet scent; the Fruit it self often changes taste, yielding one while that of the Melon, another that of the Peach, sometimes that of Honey, some∣times that of a sweet Lemmon; but is so hard of digestion, that 'tis never eaten, but vomit∣ed up again: The Nut of it is as big as a Date, and causes windiness in those that eat them green; but roasted after the manner we told you, they are very pleasant, and good for such as have a kindness for Women.

In the same Island,* 1.271 towards the Streight of Sunda, there grows also abundance of wild Cinnamon, which the Portuguez call Cantla de Mato, and the Malayans, Cajumanis. It is not near so good as the fine Cinnamon, whence it comes that there is but little of it bought, it being hardly worth the transportation.

The Carcapuli is a Fruit about the bigness of a Cherry,* 1.272 and much of the same taste, and the Trees which bear it are like our Cherry-trees. Of these there are several kinds, whereof some are white, some of a dark red, and some of a lively carnation colour.

The Costus Indicus,* 1.273 by the Malayans called Pucho; by the Arabians, Cost or Cast, is the wood and root of a Tree that resembles the Elder-tree, as well in height as in flower and scent: The Turks, Persians, and Arabians, make an extraordinary Traffick of it, as they likewise do of Calamus Aromaticus, which also grows on the Coast of the Streight of Sun∣da. That yellow and spungy matter, which Women use against pains in the Matrix, is pro∣perly in the Stalk of it. The Iavians give it to their Horses, compounding it with Gar∣lick, Cummin-seed, Salt, Sugar, and Butter; making it into a Paste, which they call Arata; and they hold it very soveraign for these beasts, to whom notwithstanding they never give it, till the extremity of the heats be over.

The Zerumbet,* 1.274 which the Iavians and Malayans call Canior, likewise grows in these parts, and is like to Ginger, only the Leaves something more long and broad. They use to dry it, or preserve in Sugar, as they do Ginger, but esteem it above Ginger.

There are two kinds of Galanga,* 1.275 by the Arabians called Caluegian. The lesser comes from China, and is much better then that which is brought out of the Isle of Iava, where they call it Lanquus. This Herb is neither sowed nor set, but grows naturally, and is about two foot high above the ground, the flower is white, and the leaves pointed, and as hard as the point of a Knife. The Iavians use it for a Sallad, as also in Physick; as they do the root, which is thick and long, and full of knots like a Cane, as biting in taste as Gin∣ger, and of a very sweet scent.

Benjamin is a Gum distilling from Trees not unlike Lemmon-trees.* 1.276 While they are young the Benjamin is black, which is the best; but as they grow old the Benjamin grows white, and loses strength, so as to put it off, they mingle it with black: The Moors call it Lovan Iavy, that is, Incense of Iava.

In the Forrest of Iava there grow Trees of red Sandale▪* 1.277 but the white and yellow Sandale, which is without comparison the better, comes from the Isles of Timor and So∣lor. This Tree is of the bigness of a Walnut-tree, and bears a fruit not unlike our Cherries, but is black and insipid. The Indians beat white and yellow Sandale, and

make a Concoction wherewith they rub their Bodies, not only for the scent, but for that they believe 'tis restroative. They value not red Sandale, but sell it at cheap rates to other parts.

They have likewise abundance of Ginger,* 1.278 by the Malayans called Aliaa, and by the Iavians, Ga••ti; but they either eat it green in Sauces, or preserve it, for they never dry it.

Anacardium,* 1.279 by the Portuguez called Fava de Malacca, by reason of its likeness to •• Bean, is very common here, and the Iavians take it in Milk against the Asthma, and against the Worms: some pickle them as they do Olives, and they are altogether as pleasant as the Olives.

That Wood,* 1.280 the Portuguez call Pala de cuebra, grows there in great abundance. It is white, inclining to yellow, hard and bitter. The Indians bruise it, and take it in Wine or Water against burning Feavers, and the stinging of Serpents. 'Tis said, that for this cure they are beholding to a Creature in size and shape like our Ferrets, by them called Quil or Quirpela, which they breed for recreation, and to catch Rats and Mice: this little Beast being a mortal enemy to Serpents, never meets with any of them, but it sets upon them, and being bitten runs immediately to this root, which is his present cure.

Palo d' Aguila,* 1.281 by Druggists called Lignum Aloes; by the Portuguez, Palo d' Aguila; and by the Indians, Calamba, grows in Iava, but not in such quantity as in Malacca, Su∣matra, Cambaya, and other places. The Tree is like the Olive-tree, only a little bigger. The Wood, while green, hath no scent, but as it dries its odour increases. The weightiest and brownest is the best; the perfection is known by the Oyl that issues out of it when 'tis held to the fire. They make Beads of it, and the Indians use it to imbellish their Ca∣binets, but the chiefest use of it is for Physick. For this Wood beaten to powder, and taken in broath or wine, fortifies the Stomack, stayes vomiting, and cures the Pleurisie and bloudy Flux. That the Portuguez call Aguila brava, or wild Calamba, is not so good as the other, and the Indians chiefly use it at the Funerals of their Bramans, making the fire of it that burns the Corps.

At Bantam likewise they sell store of Lacque,* 1.282 whereof they make Spanish wax, and the Varnish they lay over so many excellent works in China, Iapan, and other places. Iava produces of it; but the best comes from Pegu, where 'tis called Tieck, and where great and winged Ants get up the trees and suck the Gum, which afterwards they lay up∣on the boughs as Bees do Honey and Wax: when the boughs are full, the owners cut them, setting them to dry in the Sun, till the Lacque falls from the boughs, then they beat it to powder, and give it what colour and form they please.

The other Drugs gotten in Iava,* 1.283 are, Pody, a mealy kind of substance, which they use against Rhume and Wind; Carumba or Flors, a Root whereof they make Sauces, and wherewith they dye their Cotton-clothes. Conjuapi is a Wood wherewith they rub their bodies. Samparentam is a Root found near Sunda, stronger then Ginger, and very bitter. Pontiou they hold good against Feavers, but 'tis exceeding dear. Gatogamber is a Fruit like an Olive, good against the tooth-ach. Ganti a Root so like Ginger, that the Iavians have given it the same name; but 'tis dearer; and with it they rub their bodies. Sasam is Mu∣stard-seed. Doringi is a Drug they give Children as soon as they come into the world. Galam, a Root growing in the water, and is very refreshing. Tianco, a Fruit they beat and take in water as soon as they find themselves ill. Maidian, Maya and Corossani, are intoxicating Drugs they mix in their drinks. Spodium is the ashes of a Tree growing near Sunda, wherewith they rub their bodies, as they do with Sary, which is a Flower. The Targary, Surahan and Sedowaya, are Roots for the same use. Sambaya is the Fruit the Chineses call Geiduar, as big as an Acorn; of high price, by reason 'tis not ordinary, and is a sovereign Remedy against Poyson, and the biting of Venomous beasts. Ialave is like Sambaya, and of the same use in Medicine. Paravas is a very cooling Hearb, but very scarce, and very dear. Tomonpute is a Root like Galigan, used against Inflammations of the Spleen. The Conduri, which the Iavans call Saga, are red Berries, spotted with black, wherewith they weigh Gold and Silver, but are not to be eaten, they are so bitter, and, as some say, poysonous. There is likewise Azebar, the Sycomore, the Nux Indica, and divers other Trees, Plants and Drugs, to Europeans some known, some unknown, but 'twould re∣quire a peculiar Treatise to name them all, and would fill a large Volumn to describe their good and bad qualities.

The Iavians making their benefit of the Portuguez ingratitude to the Indian Princes, who entertain'd them, do constantly oppose the establishment of any Strangers in the Isle: But the profit ••he Kings of Bantam and Iacatra received, by venting their Spices to the English and Duch was so considerable, that at last they consented, that the people of those

two Nations should build a House for such Factors as they should have occasion to leave there, and for stowing up the Commodities they traffick'd in. The Dutch, by treaty with those Kings, regulated the Customs of Importation and Exportation; but those Articles were so ill kept by the Indian Kings, who raised their rates according as they discovered the Strangers necessity of Commerce, that the Dutch, to avoid this injustice, and secure themselves from the violences of the Barbarians,* 1.284 by degrees secretly fortified their Quar∣ters at Iacatra, and in a short time made it defensible. The Indians perceiv'd it not, till 'twas past their hopes of forcing it; so as in this despair of driving out the Dutch, they made use of the bad correspondence betwixt the English and them, which chiefly appear'd in a Sea-fight they had near Bantam and Iacatra, Ianuary 2. 1619. The Holland Fleet, which consisted but of seven Vessels, had the worst of the English, that were eleven. The Dutch being forced to retreat, the King of Iacatra, with the English Forces, besieg'd the Dutch Fort, now called Batavia; which Siege lasted six moneths, till the Holland General, having reinforced his Fleet with the Ships that lay in the Mol••cques, constrain'd the Eng∣lish to raise the Siege, to embark their Guns, and quit the Streight of Sunda, to get into the main Sea. The King of Iacatra would have cast the blame of all these disturbances up∣on the English; but the Dutch General would not be satisfied with such excuses, but landing his Forces, to the number of eleven hundren men, he assaulted the Town of Ia∣catra, which he took by force, and, having put all to the sword, fir'd it. That done, the Dutch compleated the fortification of their Quarters, and brought it to a regular form, with four Bastions of Free-stone, well trench'd and pallisado'd, with Half-moons, Re∣doubts, and other necessary Works. The King of Matram, who is as 'twere Emperour of Iava, in the year 1628. besieg'd this Fort, and, lying under the Cannon, storm'd it several times; but in the end was forc'd to raise the Siege, as hein like manner was the year following; and since that time the Dutch have established their Commerce joyntly with the Chineses, the Iaponeses, Siameses, Succadans, and other Neighbours, taking ten in the hundred Custom upon all Commodities, whether brought thither, or carried thence.

The City of Batavia is twelve Leagues from Bantam Eastward,* 1.285 in a Bay, which being sheltred with some small Islands on the Sea side, is one of the best Roads in all the Indies. Strangers that inhabit there pay a certain tax by the moneth, according to the profit they make, which is great: for a Porter, who will with ease get two Ryals a day, payes but one and a half in a moneth; a Fruiterer four Ryals; a Fisherman three Ryals; Distillers of Arack eight Ryals; Mechanicks, as Shoomakers, Taylors, &c. two Ryals so as at present the most important place and firm est establishment the Dutch have throughout the Indies.

Between the Isles of Iava and Borneo,* 1.286 North-east from the former, lies the Isle of Ma∣dura, governed by a particular Prince, that resides in the City of Arossabaya. In this Isle there is no Commerce at all, as well because the soil is barren of all Spices, as for that 'tis inaccessible, by reason of the Shelves of Sand that on all sides environ it. The Islanders, for the most part, live by Pyracy, and run up to the very Coasts of Pegu, which their Neighbours are forced to connive at, least they should hinder the exportation of Rice, which is there in great abundance. The Hollanders, who had been hardly used by the Iavians, near Tubam and Cidayo, Towns three Leagues from Ioartam in the Isle of Iava, coming in sight of the Isle of Madura, in the beginning of December, 1596. and appre∣hending some danger to be taken by certain Praus, or Ships equipped for War, where the Prince and Cherif, or High Priest of the Island, were in person; to prevent the Iavians, whose intent was to surprise them, fir'd some Guns at the great Pran, where the King, and Cherif, with divers others, lost their lives; for that Ship being three Tires high, and filled with Souldiers, there was not a Gun fired which destroyed not a great number; so as the Hollanders, who in the mean time got into their Shallops, with little difficulty became Ma∣sters of them. This done, they made no stay there, but fail'd from thence to the Isle of Baly, where they arrived Ianuary 30. 1597.

The Isle of Baly lyes towards the Oriental part of the Isle of Iava,* 1.287 being in circuit about twelve Leagues, towards the South, putting out a Cape or Promon••ory a long way into the Sea.* 1.288 The North point of it is eight degrees and a half beyond the Line, and the chief City, where the King hath a magnificent Palace, derives its name to the Island.

The Islanders are Pagans,* 1.289 and adore the first thing they meet with at their going out in the morning; they are black, and their Hair curling: In habit they differ nothing from their neighbour-Islanders, with whom they likewise correspond, in wearing no Beards; for when the Hair first begins to come, they pluck it up by the roots. Their Women,

who have an aversion to Beards, oblige them to do so, as also to squat down when they make water, because Dogs, held with them unclean beasts, piss standing. There is not a Man but hath several Wives, whence the Island grows so populous, that they reckon upon six hundred thousand Souls there, though they give way for abundance of Slaves to be bought from them. The greatest part are Husbandmen or Weavers; by reason the Land produces great store of Cotton,* 1.290 and is very proper for Rice; but they permit not any to be transported, lest some hard year should bring them to a necessity of being be∣holding to their Neighbours. They have store of Oxen, Buffles, Goats and Swine; likewise Horses, but they are so small, that none but the Country people use them; Per∣sons of Quality being carried in Sedans or Coaches. Their Forrests of Oranges, Lem∣mons and Pomecitrons,* 1.291 are stored with Feasants, Partridges, Peacocks and Turtles; thei•• back-Yards swarm with Poultry, and their Fens and Rivers with Ducks and other wild Fowl.

In the whole Island there is no other Spice then Ginger,* 1.292 which generally grows in all parts of the Indies, but here are found several other Drugs, as Galigan, Doringui, Canior, Bangue, &c. as likewise a certain Fruit, inclosed in a Shell, like a Chesnut, white within, of excellent taste, and sovereign against the Scurvy; also another Fruit as big as a Walnut, that grows in the ground, like the Saligots.

The Coasts of the Island,* 1.293 and the Rivers, so abound in Fish, that, next to Rice, 'tis the subsistence of the Inhabitants. They entertain in a manner no Commerce, only they set forth some small Barks to the Isle of Iava, for vending their Cotton-clothes. The Chi∣neses sometimes come hither to fetch it, and in exchange bring them Sword-blades and Purcelane. This is a common Road for all Ships bound from the Continent to the Mo∣lucques, which here take in water and refreshments, provisions being at exceeding cheap rates.* 1.294 Iron and Brass Mines there are, as likewise Gold, but the King will not suffer them to be wrought, for fear of attempting his Neighbours to an Invasion; he is well furnish∣ed with store of Gold-plate for his own service. Subjects render him the same respect, and speak to him with the same Ceremony, as the other Indians do to their King. He sel∣dom appears in publick, but all Addresses are made to a Noble man, in whom the direction of Affairs lies. He is intitled Quillor, which is the same as Constable, or Grand-Minister, in other places. He governs by divers other Persons of Quality, who have their Divisions and Provinces to regulate, according to Orders from him. The Kings name is in such ve∣neration amongst them, that all the Subjects unanimously joyn in a moment to oppose any disturbance to the peace of the State.

As appear'd in the end of the last preceding Age,* 1.295 in the person, a Prince of the bloud, who rising against the King, and having some design upon the life of his Prince, was im∣mediately taken and condemn'd to death: but the King in compassion chang'd his Sen∣tence, to perpetual exile in Pulo raza, that is, the desert Island, where he stood confined with all his Complices, who so well did cultivate it, that divers other families have been since transplanted thither. They retain the Pagan Religion they profess in the Isle of Baly, and quit not that accursed custom, for Women to burn themselves after the death of their Husbands.

The Isle of Borneo lyes more North then Iava,* 1.296 and is one of the greatest in those parts: 'tis scituate under the Equinoctial Line, but so, as the greater part is on this side of it, ex∣tending to six degrees towards the North. Some do assign it four hundred Leagues in circumference, as Bartholomew Leonardo de Argensola, who wrote the History of the Con∣quest of the Molucques, and others; but the Hollanders allow it but two hundred and fifty Leagues. The principal Towns are Borneo, S••ccidava, Landa, Sambas, and Benghe∣massin.

The City of Borneo,* 1.297 from which the Island derives its name, stands in a Marsh, as Venice doth; so as there is no passing from Street to Street but by boat. The same Argensola sayes, it contains 23000. Houses, but the Dutch allow it but two thousand. The best Camphire in the Indies is gotten in the Isle of Borneo:* 1.298 Here is also Gold and Bezoar. This Stone breeds in the Maw of a Sheep or Goat, about a knot of Grass that stayes in the Maw, and is often found within the Stone. The Persians call these Beasts Bazans, and the Stone Bazar, which is, a Market, as by excellence proper for a Market or Fair: and from the same word comes the Bazarucques, the least Money that is sent to the Market. The Stone is smooth and greenish, and the more substantial and weighty it is, the better it is, and of the greater vertue. In the Country of Pan, near Malacca, they find a Stone in the Gall of a certain Swine, more highly esteem'd then the Bazar. It is of a reddish co∣lour, as smooth and slippery in the feeling as Soap, and exceeding bitter; so that when it is to be used, they only steep it in cold water, and the water is a most soveraign Antidote

against all poyson, and an effectual cordial against all infectious Diseases. Here they have likewise Diamonds, Sapan-wood for dying, as also Brasile, Wax, and good store of Pepper, Frankincense, Mastick, and all other sorts of Gums.

The Island hath divers Havens and Roads,* 1.299 but its Cities are not very populous. Borneo is better then the rest, and the Haven upon the mouth of a fair River, is large and very commodious. The Spaniards were once Masters of the Haven, but they quitted it, be∣cause the Air was so unhealthful they could not subsist. Their Houses are of Timber, but so sleightly built, that they ordinarily pull them down to change their habitations, or pass over to the other side of the River. They are an ingenious and dexterous people, but addicted to theft, and great affecters of Pyracy, so as sometimes they will cruze up and down the Sea as far as the Coasts of Pegu, which is four hundred Leagues from that Island. They use all sorts of Arms, as Swords, and Gosos, which are Bucklers made of boyled Leather, Lances, Darts, and a sort of Pikes they call Selihes, the wood whereof is extream∣ly hard, but withall so small and brittle, that if it break in a Wound, it leaves Splinters, that render the part incurable. The King is a Mahumetan, as also the greatest part of the Islanders on the Sea coast; but they that live in the heart of the Island are Pagans. Their hue is rather black then tawny; they are of compact well proportioned bodies, and go habited near like the rest of the Indians, with a Linnen about their loins, and on their heads a little Turbant.

On the first of October,* 1.300 in the year 1609. the Hollanders treated with the King of Sam∣bas, for establishing a Commerce of Diamonds, which are to be found in the Mountains far within the Country; and since have made one for Pepper, with the King of Borneo, with exclusion of all other Forreigners; but the Borneans are no more faithful in the ob∣servance thereof then the other Indians.

Betwixt the Isle of Borneo and Molocques,* 1.301 under the Equinoctial Line, lies the Isle of Celebes; and if credit may be given to Mercator, this is one of the three Islands Ptolomy calls Sindas. The chief City here is called Macassar, and lies in the most Southerly part of the Island, five degrees, seventeen minutes, beyond the Line. It abounds in all sorts of Provisions, particularly Rice, wherewith in the moneths of March, April and May, the Territory is so entirely covered, that 'tis not to be imagined there is an inch untill'd: and in effect, besides what they convert to pasture for their Cattle, and what they assign for their Cocoes, there is not the least parcel lyes unsowed. In the face they are like the people of Pegu and Siam, and 'twas but in the beginning of the present Age they deserted Paga∣nisme, and imbraced the Mah••umetan Religion. 'Tis said, that in the time of Paganisme they were Anthropophagi, and that the Kings of the Molucques sent their Malefactors to them to be devoured. But it may be averr'd for truth, that at this day the Indies have not a people so tractable as they: yet they are couragious and irreconcileable where they once declare enmity. Their chief Armes is Bow and Arrow, whereof they impoyson the head to render the Wound mortal. The Men are of a comely make, carrying in their Prepuce a Ball or two of Ivory, or a Fish-bone, massie, and not hollow, like the Siameses and Peguans: but this custom by degrees wears out, as that amongst the Women, to cut their Hair off; for at present they let it grow, and coif themselves as the Malayans do. Wo∣men, when they walk the Streets, and Slaves, have their Breasts open, and wear Breeches that reach from the Navil to the Knee; but when they bathe in their Cisterns or Wells in the Street, they are stark naked. The Houses of Macassar are built upon Piles, and rais'd nine or ten foot above the ground, by reason of the Rains which fall with the West and North-west Winds from November till March, during which season the Road is exceeding dangerous, and almost useless, because 'tis impossible Vessels should get near the Shore, to lade their Rice.

Upon the same Island there is a King of Tello, and another of Battergoa, who are the most powerful next to that of Macasser. The Dutch Relations tell wonders of the pru∣dence of the former, and attest they met there with Barks and Frigots so artificially built, their most experienced Carpenters acknowledged, that they could not possibly have im∣prov'd their Art to that perfection. He had settled Granaries throughout his Dominions, to store up Rice, which was not to be stirred till a new recruit had furnisht him with suffi∣cient to replenish it; and did all he could to engross the Commerce to himself; for which purpose he had his Factors at Banda, to vend his Cotton-clothes, and lade, in exchange, Mace and other Spices.

The Isle of Gilolo, called by the Portuguez, Bato China de M••ro; by the Molucquez, Ale∣maera, is much larger then Celebes: it yields good store of Rice, of Sagu, whereof we shall have occasion to speak presently, in the description of the Molucques, wild Hens, and Tor∣toises of extraordinary size. The Natives are well proportioned, but savage, and not long since Anthropophagi, as the Celeb••ans were.

Amboyna is an Island ••o near adjoyning to the Molucques, that some have reckon'd it in the number of them,* 1.302 as well for the scituation, as for the production of Cloves, which are said to be kindly no where but in the Molucques. 'Tis scituate four degrees beyond the Line, two Leagues from the Isle of Ceiram, and is in circuit about twenty four. On the West-side of the Capital Town there is a Bay of six Leagues, composing a good Road, where Ships are well sheltered from all Winds. By reason of this Bay the Sea wants not much of cutting thorow the Island; for on the other side the Sea advances so far within the Land, that it leaves but a small Isthmus of about sixscore fathom over. The Island being thus, as 'twere, divided into two parts, the lesser, wherein is the Castle of Amboyna, contains twenty small Towns, or rather so many Villages, which can send forth about two thousand men, able to bear Arms. The greater part hath four Towns, which have each seven Villages substitute,* 1.303 and can arm about fifteen hundred men. The Natives were here∣tofore brutish, and, like their Neighbours, Anthropophagi, or Canibals, in so much that they would devour their Parents, when age made them decrepit, or when they were visited with any desperate Disease. The Land it self lay wild, and overgrown with Forrests; but at present 'tis exceeding fertile, and, besides Cloves, bears all other sorts of Fruits, as Lemmons, Oranges, Cocoes, Bonanas, Sugar-canes, &c. Oranges particularly are so plentiful, that one may buy fourscore for a Button. The Inhabitants are a sort of simple people, habited like the Bandayans, living meanly enough on what they get by the Clove-husbandry. They use no other Arms then the Dart, (which they cast so dexterously, that they will not miss the breadth of a Crown piece threescore paces distant) the Cimeter, and Buckler. They make a sort of Cakes of Rice, Almonds and Sugar, which they sell to their Neigh∣bours of the adjacent Islands, where they take them against Fluxes. They make likewise Rice-bread, in the form of Sugar-loaves. Their Galleys, which they call Caracoras, are well built; and they know how to manage them with such address, that ours come not near them for swiftness.

The Island was first discovered by the Portuguez,* 1.304 in the year 1515. under the conduct of Antonio Abreo, who there erected a Column, as well to record the possession he took of it for the King of Portugal, as to serve for a Trophy of his Adventures, in advancing far∣ther into the Indies then any of his Predecessors had done. These Portuguez, observing the Hollanders obstructed the advantageous Commerce they carried on here, in the year 1601. set forth a Fleet of thirty Ships, with a resolution not only to destroy the Hollanders Tra••fick, but withall, so to chastize the Inhabitants of Amboyna, who bore more affection to the Hollanders then to them, that they should change their opinion. D. Andres Furtado de Mendoza, Admiral of this Fleet, having intelligence of five Holland Vessels that were in the Port of Banda, resolv'd to fight them, but was worsted, and forced to retreat into the Port of Isou, the chief City of Amboyna.

The Hollanders, though victorious, were not in condition to pursue their good fortune, and much less to hinder the Portuguez from discharging their revenge upon the Inhabi∣tants, who were most rigorously used by these enraged people; nay, such was their spight, that they pull'd up their Clove-trees,* 1.305 meerly that the Hollanders might not make their pro∣fit of them. Hereupon Stephen Verhagen, the Holland Admiral, arriving February 21. 1603. in the Road of Amboyna, landed a party of Souldiers; with design to storm the Castle. The Portuguez Governour, perceiving his intention, sent forth two of the Gar∣rison Officers, to demand of him, how he durst approach a place committed to his charge by the High and mighty King of Spain; to whom the Holland Admiral made answer, He was come in the Name of the States of the United Provinces, and the Prince of Orange, with Order to take in the Castle, and expell the Enemy; so as he was to come to present Articles, or sustain the Assault he should make as soon as his Artil∣lery came on shore. This Bravado so daunted the Portuguez, that he rendred the place without so much as a Cannon shot. There march'd out six hundred Portuguez with their Arms. Such as were married, taking the Oath of Fidelity, were permitted to stay in Town.

The Inhabitants of all those Islands,* 1.306 Iav••, Amboyna, and the Mol••cquez, were all Pa∣gans, till their Commerce with the Persians and Arabians brought in Mahumetism, which, notwithstanding, hath not so extirpated their former Religion, but such as embrace Cir∣cumcision continue their Pagan Superstitious: Some make open profession therof, and adore the Devil, there being neither Town nor Village that hath not one peculiar thereto. Not that they understand in any sort what the Devil is, or that they have any knowledge of what the Scripture sayes of him; but they affirm, That what they adore comes out of the Air, whence some of them call one of their principal Demons Lanithe, that is, Air, who notwithstanding depends on another greater then he, called Lanthila, nay, is not so

considerable as their Taulay, who in power is next to Lanthila. The general name for them is Nito, which signifies evil Spirits, or Tuan, that is, Lord or Master.

They say their Nito appears often to them in the shape of an ordinary person,* 1.307 which the Spirit takes on him for this purpose, and by which he pronounces his Oracles, that his in∣tentions may be known. To have conference with him, they assemble, to the number of twenty or thirty, and call upon him with the beat of a little Drum, consecrated expresly to this use, called by them a Tyfa, lighting mean while divers Wax-candles, and pronoun∣cing certain words of conjuration, which they think very effectual. Before they propound their Affairs, either private, or publick, to him, they present him both meat and drink, and after he that personates the Daemon hath done eating, the Congregation make an end of the remainder.

They take in hand no business,* 1.308 be it never so mean, nay, not so much as piercing of a Tree to draw Terry, till they have done their devotions to the Devil, and engrav••d certain characters upon it, which in their opinion will preserve the Tree, and bless their labour. In their houses they have one place where they light a wax Candle, and where they wait on the Devil with meat and drink, who not coming, as it often happens, they eat that them∣selves which they had consecrated to him; but leaving some part of it, that, if he should come, he might find something to stay his stomack. There is not a Master of a Family that is not provided of a Vesture extraordinary, and a Ring, which he carefully preserv••s, and which is constantly kept in the house, for a p••rpetual testimony of his alliance made with the Devil. They are prepossessed with this opinion, that there comes no ill but from the Devil, for which reason they adore him, to avert mischiefs, or appease him, when they fall upon them.

They have their Circumcision,* 1.309 but much different from that of the Iews and Mahume∣tans; for they circumcise not Children till twelve or thirteen years of age, and in stead of cutting off the Prepuce, as the Iews do, they only slit it with a little Cane made expresly for this purpose.

At their Marriages they use no Ceremonies;* 1.310 for the parties being agreed, the Bride∣grooms Father carries a present of some toyes to the Bride, and the Brides Father makes a Feast, at which they have their 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Tabours and Logologo, or Dances in the honour of Nito, and so consummate the Marriage, which they break with the same facility they contracted it. For the Wives leave their Husbands upon the least discontent happens be∣tween them, and provided they are able to restore the Present given them by their Father in Law, pouring water on their Husbands feet, to shew that they cleanse themselves from all the impurity they may have contract••d together, they take their leave, and the next day may joyn again in marriage with some other, if they are so agreed.

Their Oaths for decision of differences,* 1.311 or other matters of importance, they make in the manner following. They put Water into a Dish, into which they cast in Gold, Earth, and a Bullet of Lead, then dip in it the end of a Musket barrel, the point of a Hal••ert, Sword, Knife, or some other Weapon; and they give of the Water to him who is to swear; the design of all these Ceremonies being to raise in him a fear, that all that is cast or dipt into the Water will conspire his ruine, if he make a false Oath.

There are amongst them certain people they call zwangi,* 1.312 whom they take for Sorcerers; though for the most part they busie themselves in doing mischief rather by poyson then enchantments; but if they can prove the least against them, so as there be but grounds for presumption only, they are undone; and commonly the whole Family suffers with them. The horrour they have of these people, is one cause they watch dead bodies, with Sword and Buckler, for fear the Zwangi should come and eat them.

The Amboynians are naturally timerous,* 1.313 gross and stupid, unfaithful, and so diffident, that they will not trust a man six pence without a good pawn. They bury their Goods and Money for fear of Rapine, for being themselves naturally inclined to theft, they think others would do to them as they would do to others.

They are not to be taught any thing,* 1.314 nor have they any Trades, in so much that the Stuffs made by them are like Sacks, open at both ends, wherewith the Women cloath themselves. They can neither write nor read, nor have Characters amongst them, so as they have no in∣telligence of former Ages, nor any light of Religion. Their business is fishing, or their Gardens, where they get some Fruits, to live on, but so slenderly, that 'tis a miracle they can subsist with so little; nevertheless, for the greatest part, they are of good proportion, and comely personage.

From the account we have given you of their Marriages, the small affection betwixt Man and Wife may easily be guessed at; as indeed there is little or none at all, yet they love their Children most exc••ssively, but so imprudently, that there is not a Father takes

care to correct them; and to this reason we may attribute the disorders that often hap∣pen, the Children out-raging Nature in the persons of those that brought them into the world.

The little knowledge they have of Religion causes a most remarkable humour of pro∣fanation amongst them,* 1.315 and so great a contempt of sacred things, that they would deride their Nito, were they not restrain'd by a sottish fear of some mischief he would do them. The Portuguez transported thither heretofore some families of free persons, call'd Maldecas, whom they had taken near Malacca, and who serving the Portuguez had gotten their lan∣guage, and in some measure their Religion; but these Families are lost by degrees, and the little instruction had been given them wearing out with time by conversing with Pagans; one may say, that except some Proselytes made by the Hollanders, who for the greatest part are Chineses, there is not a Christian in the Island.

The Hollanders have three Forts in the Isle of Amboyna,* 1.316 the Fort Cambella, otherwise called Victoria, (the Bastions whereof are built of stone) those of Hiten and Louw. The first hath in it sixty Pieces of Cannon, and a Garrison of six hundred men; so as that with∣out question, this, next Battavia, is the best establishment they have in the Indies.

Banda lies twenty four Leagues from Amboyna,* 1.317 and is about three Leagues in length, and one in breadth, reaching from North to South in form of a Horse-shooe. It contains some small Towns, whereof the chief is Nera, but Orsattan and Labbettacca are inconsiderable. The Inhabitants are all Mahumetans, and so zealous in their Religion, and so devout, they will not meddle in any business till they have said their Prayers. They enter not into their Mesquites till they have wash'd their feet; and being there, they pray with such vehemency, that they may be heard two hundred paces thence. Those Prayers ended, they rub their faces with both hands, lay a Matt on the ground and stand upon it, lift their eyes twice or thrice to Heaven, fall on their knees, and bow their head two or three times to the ground, pronouncing certain Prayers with a low voyce, only moving the lips. In their Mesquites they have many meetings, where they eat together of what is brought thither by every one. They have likewise some such Assemblies upon a Mountain, which is in a Wood in the middle of the Island, where the Inhabitants of Puldrim, Puloway, and Lantor, their Allies, meet them to consider of publick matters. After they have treated of publick Affairs, they sit down on the ground, and they serve to every one upon a Banana leaf, which serves them instead of a Trencher, a Morsel of Sagu, which is their Bread, and a little Rice steep'd in broath, which they eat by handfuls. During the Feast, the Gentlemen, to enter∣tain the Guests, have a kind of Skirmish. They are almost in continual war with their Neighbours, and keep constant Guards upon the Coast, as well to surprize others, as to prevent their being surprized themselves. Their Arms are the Cimetar,* 1.318 with them called a Phahang, and a Buckler of wood above four foot long. They handle their Weapons with much address, being train'd to it from their infancy. They have likewise Fire-arms, but in war they chiefly use a sort of Lance, of eight or ten foot long, made of an exceeding hard wood, which they cast with such force, that they will run a Man quite through with it. Having cast their Lances, for commonly they carry two, they fall to their Sword, which hangs at their left side under their Buckler, or to another sort of Weapon, which they dart and pull back with a string, whereto they tye a short Truncheon, having at the end a crook∣ed iron that is exceeding sharp and dangerous. Some use Corslets, but these are Persons of Quality; others contenting themselves with Casks of Steel, and made like Cocks-combs. Their Gallies are very light, having on both sides, in a manner even with the water, two Scaffolds like wings, where the Slaves are set to row. They are three to every seat, and every one hath an Oar, which is properly but a deep wooden Shovel, which they thrust as far as they can into the Sea, and when they draw it back, they bring it about their heads to cast out the water; which they do so fast, and with such sleight, that a Ship must be a good Sailor, that shall with a good wind take one of these Gallies.

In the Isle of Banda 'tis no rarity to meet with people of sixscore years of age,* 1.319 and above. They believe, that who fails to pray for the dead shall have no resurrection, whereas other∣wise, with the Mahumetans, they believe the resurrection of the dead. Women that are present at the death of a friend, cry out with all violence, as if by this means they would fetch the Soul back again, but seeing it comes not, they interr the Corps, which is born by ten or twelve persons on their Shoulders, in a Biere or Coffin covered with white Linnen, the Men going before, the Women behind. The Corps being laid in the ground, they re∣turn to the house of the deceased, where they dine together; then they burn Incense over the Grave for four and twenty hours, and at night set a burning Lamp over it, in a Hut made for that purpose.

The Men mind nothing but their recreation, and walking up and down, and leave all the work to be done by their Wives, whose chiefest business is to break the Nutmeg shell, and dry the Nut and Mace, wherein consists their greatest revenue. This excellent fruit, for ought I could ever learn, grows only in the Isle of Banda, which the Inhabitants call Bandan, or rather in the six Isles 'tis composed of, that is Gunaxi, Nera, and Lantor, (be∣twixt which lies the Road for the Vessels that are bound thither) Puloway, Pulorim, and Bassingin.

It is a thing to be admired, that these six little Islands should furnish the whole World with Nutmegs, if it were not certain, that except a few Duriaons, Nancan, Bananas, Oran∣ges and Cocoes that grow there, they produce not any thing else; and the Islands are so covered with Nutmeg-trees, that excluding only the fiery Mountain in the Isle of Gunapi, there is not a foot of Land but is employed, and the Trees at all times loaden with fruit and flowers green or ripe. They chiefly gather them thrice a year; that is, in April, August and December, but that which ripens in April is the best. The Tree is not unlike a Peach-tree,* 1.320 only the leaves are more short and round. The Fruit is covered with a husk, as thick as that of our Wallnuts, which being opened, there appears a very thin leaf upon a hard shell; yet does it not so cover it, but that the shell is to be seen in several places, and this is that they call the Nutmeg flower or Mace, and the shell must be broken to come at the fruit. The flower is of a lively carnation, while the Nut is green; but after∣wards it changes, and draws towards an Orange colour, especially when it parts from the shell. The Inhabitants preserve it in the shell, with Salt or Sugar, and make a very excel∣lent Preserve. The Natives call the Nutmeg Palla, and Mace Bunapalla.* 1.321 This Spice comforts the Brain, helps the Memory, expels Wind, cleanses the Reins, and stayes Loose∣ness. Mace hath almost the same vertues, but 'tis much more proper for Sauces. Oyl of Nutmegs strengthens the Sinews,* 1.322 procures Sleep, stayes Defluxions, and cures the pains in the Stomack; and of powder of Nutmeg or Mace mixt with the Oyl of Roses, they make an Unguent soveraign against such Griefs as proceed from Indi∣gestion.

The Hollanders have built here two Forts,* 1.323 which they call Nassau and Belgica, where the Road is so good, that Vessels come up within Musket-shot, and ride safely at nine or ten fathom water. The Island is inhabited with about ten or eleven thousand persons; yet would it be hard to draw out five hundred Men fit to bear Arms. Here they drive a good round trade in Garments brought from Coromandel, Rice, Purcelane, Velvet, Damask, Taffaty, Scarlet, Provisions and Ammunirion for the Forts. The Inhabitants are obstinate and mutinous, so as the Hollanders cannot assure the possession of this Isle, but by force alone.

In their Relations of the Isle of Nera,* 1.324 they report, there are Serpents so great, that one day, the Author of the twentieth Relation observing his Poultry dayly to decrease, and be∣ing told by the Natives there were Serpents that devoured them, he had then watch'd so carefully, that they took one, which about midnight was crept into the Hen-roost, and had made a strange havock. The Servants who kill'd it, found in the belly five Hens, one Duck, and a sucking Pig, which they made no difficulty to eat of, no more then they did of the Serpent it self.

Though some comprehend in the number of the Molucques,* 1.325 many of the Islands that fill up this Oriental Archipelago, yet properly there are called by the name of the Moluc∣caes, but the five following Islands, Ternate, Tidar, Motiel, Machiam and Bachiam, by the ancient Pagans called Cupe, Douco, Moutil, Mara, and Seque. This last is by several Arms of the Sea divided into divers Isles, which notwithstanding are not known but by the com∣mon name of Bachaiam, because they are subject to one Prince. They are all scituate un∣der the same Meridian, as 'twere within view of one another, and take not up above the space of twenty five Leagues, so as the utmost North hath but one degree of Latitude to∣wards the North, and the farthest South, but one degree toward the South. The Soyl is so dry and spungy, that it not only drinks immediately the Water that falls from Heaven, but dryes up the Torrents at their very rising out of the Mountains, and suffers them not to pay their tribute to the Ocean; and yet the Sun not being able either to penetrate the For∣rests, or consume the Exhalations arising out of the Earth, there remains sufficient moisture to furnish both Trees and Herbs with constant verdure.

These Islands, where no Fruit is wanting, and which yield, in great abundance, Bananas, Cocoes, Lemons, Oranges, Sandal, and Calam••••, and all sorts of Spices, produce neither Corn,* 1.326 nor Rice; but Nature makes sufficient recompence for this defect, in a sort of nou∣rishment, which might be accounted miraculous, were it not common in Amboyna, and other places. They have it from a Tree the Portuguez call Segueiro, and the Molucquez,

Laudan, which grows to twenty foot high, and hath leaves like Cocoes, only a little less▪ The Tree is a mans fathom about, nevertheless with a Knife it may be cut down, because 'tis only Bark and Pith: The Bark is about an inch thick, and the rest all Pith, which serves for Bread. It is somewhat like worm-eaten wood, save that it is white, and may be eaten as it comes from the Tree, taking away the strings of the wood which are mixed with it;* 1.327 but to make Bread they order it as follows. Having felled the Tree, they cut it Cylinder-wise, and beat the Pith to powder, which looks like Meal; then they put it in a Searce they make of the Bark of the same Tree, over a Tub made of the Leaves, and according as the Searce fills they pour in Water, which dividing the Meal from the Strings of wood that are mixt therewith, falls into the Tub, as white and thick as Milk, and leav∣ing a certain settling or consistency at the bottom, falls out at a little Spout at the top of the Tub; this settled consistency is that which they call Sagu, and serves them instead of Meal, and in effect is such, when it is dry. It is baked in certain Moulds of Earth, which they make red hot in the fire, so as putting in this substance, it becomes Paste, and bakes in a moment, so speedily, that one Man, in a morning, may bake Bread to suffice a hundred Men a whole day: From the same Tree they extract Thuack, which they drink, and is as pleasant as Wine.* 1.328 While the Leaves are young they are covered with a Cotton, where∣of they make Stuffs; and being at full growth, they cover Houses with them; and the bigger Veins are strong enough to make Rafters for their Houses; and of the lesser they make good Cordage.

They have store of Cattle; but they rather affect Fish, though Linschotten sayes they have neither. Mines of Silver or Gold they have not, and hitherto there are none discovered of any other Metals; but the Isle of Lambaco furnishes them with Iron and Steel, whereof they make their Campilans and their Cris, that is, their Swords and Daggers.

Their Men are rather black then tawny,* 1.329 but the Women not so much. Their Hair is black and smooth, either naturally, or for that they continually rub it with sweet Oyls▪ their Eyes great, their Eyebrows large, their Bodies strong and robustous, but fitter for war then work. They are dextrous and active, and live long, though they grow gray betimes. In conversation with Strangers they are civil and obliging; but a little too familiar and importunate in their demands, self-ended in Commerce, diffident, deceitful, and lyars, needy, and by consequence insolent. Men wear Turbants, after the Turkish fashion, of several colours, deckt with Plumes: The King only wears a Crown like a Miter, but in all things else is clad like his other Subjects, in a Iupo, and Drawers of China Sattin, blew, red, crimson, green, and yellow. Some there are wear close Coats, tied on the Shoulders, and cut below, like the ancient Romans military Coats. Women dress themselves in their Hair, which they lay smooth over their Heads, and tye it behind, and deck it with Plumes and Flowers, which well becomes them. They have Bracelets, Rings, Neck-laces of Pearl, Diamonds, Rubies, and Emralds, &c. apparelling themselves almost all in Silk, using the Stuffes they have from Persia, China, and the rest of the East, in truck for their Cloves.

The Chineses,* 1.330 by possessing a great part of the East, became likewise Masters of this Isle, and, after their example, the Persians and Arabians, who brought in the Mahometan su∣perstitions, admit the adoration of their Gods, from whom divers of their Families pretend to be descended. They know no written Law, and their Customs are barbarous enough; Polygamy is allowed amongst them, and Adultery passes unpunished; but Theft is severely punished, as a mortal and unpardonable Crime among them. They have Officers, who at break of day go about the Town,* 1.331 and with the beat of a Drum awake the people, and ex∣hort the Masters of Families to remember their Matrimonial Duties, by reason it concerns the publick, that the Inhabitants should multiply. Both Men and Women express their arrogancy in their carriage and gate. Every Island hath a peculiar Language, whence we may conjecture they are originally derived from several Nations, and that 'tis necessity for∣ces them to use the Malayan, for general Communication.

The Iavians were they that first brought Clo••es to these places,* 1.332 whence the Persians and Arabians might convey them to the Greeks and Roman••. The Kings of Egypt settled this Commerce, together with that of other Spices, in the Ports of the Red Sea; where the Romans having reduc'd that Kingdom to a Province, continued it till the dissolution of the Empire. The Genueses were long time Masters of it, by transferring it to Theodosia, now call'd Caffa, whither at length the Venetians sent their Consuls and Factors, taking the benefit of the Caspian Sea. The Turks spoil'd this Commerce by means of their Ca∣ravans, that brought Spices to divers places on the Mediterranean Sea, where the Europeans might fetch them with less charge and danger; but the Soldans of Egypt re-established it

at Alexandria and Cayro, by the way of the Nile, and doubtless had kept it still, had not the Portuguez found out a way to surround Africa,* 1.333 and fetch this precious Drug from the ut∣most parts of the East. Their Conquests in the Indies, and the Fleet they maintain upon the Persian and Arabian Coasts, towards Cape Guardafun, intirely bereaved the Soldans of their Commerce; and the Portuguez continued Masters of it, while they kept that Sea: but after the Hollanders appeared there,* 1.334 they were constrained to give place, and to lose an advantage, which no other durst have disputed with them.

In the year 1511. the Portuguez discovered the Molucques. Francisco Serano, who first set foot on shore, found so much simplicity there, that Boleyfe, King of Ternate, and Alman∣sor, King of Tidor, made it their earnest request to have the advantage of the Fort the Portuguez were about to build, to secure the possession of these Isles. 'Tis true, these two Princes were declared enemies, and thought to make use of these Strangers Forces in their particular quarrels: but 'tis to be believed their jealousie was grounded on other princi∣ples; for that Cachil Laudan, King of Bachiam, made the like request to Tristan de Meneses, who went to relieve Serrano.

'Twas now some time since Pope Alexander the sixth had divided the two Indies be∣twixt the Kings of Castile and Portugal;* 1.335 in so much that of the three hundred sixty de∣grees, which compose the Globe, the Spaniards were to possess what they conquered with∣in one hundred and eighty degrees, counting from the thirty sixth degree of Lisbone, West∣ward, and the Portuguez the other hundred and eighty degrees Eastward; by vertue of which division the Emperour, Charles the fifth, pretended the Molucques belonged to the Crown of Castile, by reason Ferdinand Magellanus, who had done very advantageous Ser∣vice in the Indies,* 1.336 under Alphonso Albuquerque, and had with little satisfaction deserted the Portuguez, to serve under Charles, computed by Ptolomies authority (upon a false sup∣posal, that between Indus and Ganges there were thirty degrees, whereas there are scarce ten) that the Molucques being distant six hundred Leagues, which make about thirty six degrees from Malacca Westward, they belonged to the Crown of Castile. He was commissioned by the Emperour to go take possession of them, and upon this design parted from Saint Lucars the 21. of September 1519. and having wrought to 53. degrees, and passed the Streight,* 1.337 called to this day by his name, the Streight of Magellan, he came almost to the height of the Molucques; but by contrary Winds, and the Sea-currents, he was forc'd down to the Manelles, where he was slain, with thirty five of his company; Gonza∣lo, Gomez d' Espinosa, and Sebastian del Cano, made afterwards some establishments for the Emperour, taking an Oath of Fidelity of Sutrau Carala, King of Ternate, Predecessour of Sultan Bongue, of Sultan Almanzor, King of Tidor, and Sultan Iusuff, King of Gilolo. But the possession of these Isles was of such importance to the Portuguez, for continuati∣on of their Spice trade, that they did what was possible to keep them, wherein they found the less trouble, because the Emperour had his hands full in Europe, and was but imper∣fectly informed of the Affairs in Asia, as well by reason the Portuguez hindred the Castili∣an Ships passing by the Cape of good hope, as that the passage by the West was so danger∣ous, that hitherto it is not used. Notwithstanding all Acts of Hostility passing between these two Nations in the Indies, 'twas thought convenient that Commissioners for both Kings should meet at Segovia, in the year 1525. but not agreeing, the meeting was re∣moved the year following to Sevil, where likewise they came to no result: so as the bu∣siness continued in this state, till the Treaty at Saragossa, in the year 1529. at which the Emperour engag'd these Islands to the King of Portugal, for three hundred and fifty thousand Ducates. Ever since the Portuguez have injoyed them, till by the union of the Kingdom of Castile, and Portugal, they were confounded in Philip the Second. After this the Hollanders ••ut in there, and the revolution that happened in Portugal in the year 1640. hath so changed the face of Affairs, that the Spaniards must first conquer that Kingdom, before they think of the Appendages belonging thereto.

Ternate is the first and largest Isle of the Molucques,* 1.338 scituate twenty eight Leagues from the Isle of Banda, and forty degrees on this side the Line. It is about eight Leagues in compass, and no bad Country, yet yields but little Provisions besides Poultry and Goats. It produces likewise Almonds, excellent good, and bigger then ordinary, though there be three or four in every shell, which is so hard, 'tis not easily to be broken with a Hammer, but they make so strong a fire, that Smiths and Forgemen use it instead of Coal. The In∣habitants likewise plant Tobacco, but 'tis far short of that comes from the West-Indies.

The chief Town, called Gamma lamma,* 1.339 stands on the Sea-side, and is but one Street, about 2500. paces long. Their Houses are built of Canes or Timber, as are also the Masquites and Palace Royal. The Road is of no use, for that the bottom being nothing

but Stone and Rock, an Anchor cannot fix. The Holland Vessels ride before a Village called Telingamma, between the Islands of Ternate and Tidor, within half a League of Malay.

The most precious thing in these Islands is the Clove;* 1.340 I know not if it be the same Pliny calls Garyophylla, though the Persians call it Calafur, and these two words seem to have the same Etymology. The Spaniards sometimes called it Girofe, but at present they call it Clavos, by reason of its likeness to an ordinary Nail. The Molucques call the Tree that bears them Siger, the Leaf Varaqua, and the Fruit Chamque. The Tree is much like the Laurel, only the Leaves something less and narrower, like the Almond-tree, and shoots forth its branches at the top as Myrtle doe. When 'tis in flower it persumes the Air round about it; and the Fruit is at first white, in time grows green, and so brown, but not black till it be gathered.

Some beat them down with Poles, but commonly they fasten a Rope to the branch a little above the boal, and drawing it to them force away the Fruit and leaves with much violence, and so it is when the Inhabitants sell it, and so the Chineses and Indians trans∣port it.

The Trees grow of themselves,* 1.341 as the Chesnut-trees do, without planting, or any cul∣tivation. In the eighth year they bear, and last a hundred years, bringing forth every two years: for besides the injury done the branches, in getting off the fruit, as we said before, the Inhabitants break off the young buds, which shoot forth the first year, that they may be sure of a better crop the next. It is at its full ripeness from August till Ianuary; and when it is gathered, it is laid in the Sun, and in two or three dayes it is sufficiently dried.

Avicenna affirms,* 1.342 that the Gum of this Tree is like Turpentine; but he is mistaken, it being certain, that it does not produce any at all. For it is so hot, that it does not only drink up all the Water Heaven is pleased to send it, but it also attracts all the moisture of the Earth lying about it; nay, its Fruit is so hot, that if a Pitcher of Water be set in a Chamber, within ten foot of a bag of Cloves, they will so suck up the Water, that within two or three dayes there shall not be a drop left: which that they have done shall not be perceivable any way, but by the weight. The Inhabitants know this well enough, and make their advantages thereof. The Chineses have the same experiment in their raw Silks, which do attract moysture in the same manner.

It is commonly affirmed,* 1.343 that the Cloves grow only in the Moluccaes: but this is said, either in regard some comprehend under that name many other Islands near them, or that the five we have named yield more then all the rest. It is generally granted, that they yield every year near six thousand barrels of Cloves, allowing five hundred weight and a half to every barrel, and it is certain withall, that the Islands of Ires, Meytarana, Cavaly, Sabugo, Marigoran, Gamoconora, and Amboyna, yield also very considerable quantities, especially that of Veranula; though they are not so fair as those of the neighbouring Islands.

In the middest of the Island of Ternate,* 1.344 there is one of the highest Mountains in those parts, covered all over with Palms and other Trees, having at the top a hole so deep, that it seems to reach the Center of the Earth. Some have had the curiosity to make trial of the depth of it, and have found that a Rope of five hundred fathom touched not the bot∣tom, but reach'd a fair Spring, the water whereof was very clear; yet hath there not yet been any that durst venture to taste of it. Out of this Mountain there issues a sulphu∣reous smell, and by certain intervals a thick smoak, and sometimes, especially at the two Equinoxes, it casts up flames, and red Stones, with such violence, that some are carried not only as far as the City, but even into the Islands of Meao, and Cafures, twenty Leagues di∣stant from Ternate. The smoak infects all the circum-ambient Air, and the excrements which the Mountain casts forth, do so corrupt the Springs and waters of those parts, that no use can be made thereof. The Mountain is green two third parts of its height, but from thence upward it is insupportably cold, and there is on the top of it a Spring of fair water, but so cold, that a man can drink but very little of it without taking breath. From the top of it may be seen the Sea, and all the Moluccas; upon it, a man hath a clear and serene Air, which is never troubled with Mists or Clouds; and there is a Lake of sweet water, set about with Trees, in which there is a great number of blew and yellow Li∣zards, bigger then a mans arm, which sink under the water as soon as any body comes near them.

There is no difference of Seasons in these Islands,* 1.345 nor any certain time for Rain, though it rains oftner with the North-west wind, then it does with the South. There are Ser∣pents there thirty foot long, and of a proportionable bigness; but they are neither dan∣gerous

nor venemous, no more then are those of Banda. Some affirm, that these Creatures, not finding any thing to feed upon, eat Grass, and going to the Sea-side vomit up what they had eaten, and by that means draw together a great many Fish, which being intoxicated with the chew'd Grass, flote upon the Water, and so become the prey and food of these Serpents.

There is in this Island a kind of Beasts they call Cusos,* 1.346 that keeps constantly in Trees, living on nothing but Fruit. They resemble our Rabbets, and have a thick, curling, and smooth hair, between gray and red, eyes round and fiery, little feet, and such strength in the tail, that they will hang by it, the better to reach the fruits. The Forrests are full of wild Birds, and, except the Parrot, there are few domestick, at least of those known to us. There are Crevisses that come ashore, and creep under certain Trees, the very shadow whereof is so virulent, that no Grass grows near them. I know not whether it be from that Tree they contract that venomous quality, which lies in one part of them, which is so dangerous, that it kills in four and twenty hours those that eat it. Others there are that resemble Grashoppers, and lye in Rocks, where they take them by night with fire∣light: near the tail, in a bag, they have a lump that is exceeding delicate, for which they take them.

In the Moluccaes there is a certain Wood,* 1.347 which, laid in the fire, burns, sparkles, and flames, yet consumes not, and yet a man may rub it to powder betwixt his fingers.

Near the Fort of Ternate grows a Plant,* 1.348 by the Inhabitants call'd Catopa, from which there falls a small Leaf, the Stalk whereof turns to the Head of a Worm, or Butterfly, the Strings to the body and feet, and the wings are made out of the finer part of the Leaf, so as at last there is a compleat Butterfly.

Tidor is an Island as fruitful as that of Ternate, but larger. In a Signet of the Kings of this Island, in Persian or Arabick Characters, it appears, this Island was called Tudura, not Tidor;* 1.349 and they say the word signifies Beauty and Fertility. These people have the in∣dustry to prune and water the Clove-tree, which by this means bears a fruit much fairer and stronger then that which owes its production only to nature. The white Sandal∣wood, that grows here, is doubtless the best of all the Indies. Here they have Birds,* 1.350 by the Inhabitants called Manu codiatas, by the Spaniards, Paxaros de l' Cielo; those we call Birds of Paradise. Many take them to have no feet; but they are deceived; for they that catch them cut off their feet so near the body, that the flesh beginning to dry, the skin and feathers joyn together, so that there scarce remains any scar.

The Dutch in Ternate possess the Town of Malaya, regularly fortified, and not far off the Fort of Taluco. In Tidor they have the Fort Marieco. In Motir again they have a Fort with Bastions of Stone. In Machiam they have made three Forts. At Taffaso, Tabillola, and Guoffiquia, and in Bachiam, the Fort Bar••eveldt.

The King of Bachiam owns neither the King of Ternate nor Tidor for Superiour;* 1.351 but is himself Soveraign, and independent as to any Forreign Power. His Territory is great, where there grows great store of Sagou, so as the Inhabitants subsist with little labour, which makes them so idle and lazy, that the Kingdom, which heretofore was one of the most considerable of the Molucques, is so sunk from that grandeur, that at present it can hardly raise five hundred fighting men.

The Isle of Machiam was brought under the jurisdiction of the Dutch by Admiral Paul van Carden,* 1.352 in the year 1601. The chiefest of the three Forts they are possessed of is that of Guoffiquia, which is built upon an Eminency, with four Bastions of stone, yet is it but a small one, and irregular, in regard that, for want of place, they could not make all the Bastions of the same bigness, nor extend the Curtain as far as it should have been. The Fort of Taffaso is also upon an ascent, and hath four Bastions; but it is bigger then the other, and distant from the Sea about a hundred and sixty paces. These two Forts have neither Wells nor Cisterns, save that near the top of the ascent on which Taffaso stands, there is a Well within a Half-moon, which serves for a fifth Bastion to the place. Tabillo∣la hath but two Bastions, so far one from the other, that they cannot command all the Cur∣tain, so that there is no great account to be made thereof. This Island is about seven Leagues in compass, and subject to the King of Ternate: It is very populous, able to raise two thousand and two hundred fighting Men; and it hath Sagu and other pro∣visions sufficient for the Inhabitants, and yields as much Cloves as any of the other Islands.

Besides the five Islands properly called the Molucques, there are others, to the number of seventy two, subject to the King of Ternate, scituate in the same Archipelago from Mindanao, on the North-side, and Bina and Corca, which are on the South, and between the Continent of New Guiny towards the East. The chiefest are Motir; Machiam, Cajoa,

Xula, Burra, Na, Noloa, Meao, Tufure, Doe, Saquite, Totole, Baol, Guadupa, Gorontano, Ili∣bato, Tamsne, Manado, Doudo, Labague, Iaqua, Gabe, Tobuquo, Buto, Sanguien, &c. amongst which some lye seventy Leagues from Ternate. The Kings of all these Islands are Tributaries to the King of Ternate, and tyed to find him such a number of Souldiers, which the Author of the History of the Molucquez, whom we mentioned before, raises to sixscore thousand.

North of the Molucques lye the Isles now call'd the Philippins,* 1.353 discovered by Ferdinand Magellanus, when he compass'd the World in the year 1520. and had doubtless given them his own name, had he lived till this new discovery: Sebastian del Cano, his Camerade in this stupendious Navigation, not daring to hazard an establishment after the death of Magellanus, who was slain in these Islands, as we said before, return'd for Spain. After this there was no mention of these Islands, till that in the year 1565. D. Lu•••• de Valasco, Vice∣roy of New Spain, sent the Adelantado; Michel de Laguaspe, into this Sea, where he put into haven in these Islands, which in honour of King Philip the Second, who then reigned in Spain, he called by the name of Philippines. His first Conquest was the Isle of Zebue, where he remain'd six years; after that he went to Luson, now cal∣led Manille,* 1.354 from its chief City, whereof Velasco, after a sleight opposition, became Master.

This City lies in a Canton of Land, incompassed all about with the Sea, fourteen De∣grees on this side the Line, in the most Southerly part of the Isle, which is in compass thee hundred and fifty Leagues. On the North, it hath China, from which it is distant seventy Leagues; on the North-East, the Isle of Iapan, which is two hundred and seven∣ty Leagues distant from it; Eastward, the Ocean, and towards the South the great Archi∣pelago, which is as it were divided into five Seas, filled with so many Islands, King∣doms and Provinces, that it may be said, they are in a manner innumerable. The Chi∣neses, who were heretofore possessed thereof, have now deserted them, but still trade thither.

The Inhabitants in their labour answer the fertility of the soyl, which produces Corn, Rice, all sorts of Fruits, and Drugs; and it breeds Neat, Buffler, Deer, Goats and Swine; so as they want nothing necessary to livelihood; and the Chineses take care they shall want nothing that is superfluous, as Silk, Purcelane, and Lacque. They have also Date-wine, but they make it of a different manner to other places: for they draw it from their Co∣coes, by cutting off one of the boughs, whence there distils a Liquor which they suffer to work till it grows as strong as Spanish wine. They have the best Lemmons and Oranges in the World, and the most excellent Figs and Pears, all sorts of Birds of prey, and dome∣stick, Falcons, Tercels, Parrots, Eagles, &c. but principally such abundance of Croco∣diles, that they are constrain'd to kill them, to extirpate the breed: for you have here Men of sufficient courage to encounter a Crocodile single, though as big as an Oxe. For the Combat they Gantlet their left Arm to the Elbow,* 1.355 taking in that hand a Truncheon of a foot long pik'd at both ends, and a Dagger in the other, and in this posture they go into the River up to the Waste. The Crocodile no sooner spies his Man, but he comes on with open mouth to swallow him; the Indian presents him his left hand, and thrusting it down his throat, hinders his jaws from shutting, and in the mean time gives him so many wounds in his throat with his Poniard, that he kills him. This Creature is in form like a Lizard, but covered with Scales, so hard, that he is invulnerable all over but in the throat and belly. It layes abundance of Eggs, which are so hard, that they will not break with throwing a∣gainst a Stone; and to hatch them they thrust them into the Sand, on a River side, that heat and moisture, the principles of Generation, may hatch them. These Islands breed more Tigers, Lions, Bears, and other wild Beasts, then Africk does, but especially the Algalias, which are the Creatures from which they get the Musks, and Civet-Cats.

All these Islands are very populous, and so rich, that not only the Chineses continue their trading thither, with great advantage, but also the Spaniards,* 1.356 who heretofore brought thi∣ther money from New Spain, by which they gain'd two Marks of Gold for eight of Silver, having given over that Trade, in regard they make far greater advantages by their other Merchandizes, the return whereof many times come to a thousand for a hundred, by the traffick they have there with the Chineses, who bring all sorts of Cottons and Silk-Stuffes, Purcelane, Gun-powder, Sulphur, Iron, Steel, Quicksilver, Copper, Meal, Nuts of several kinds, Bisket, Dates, Linnen-cloath, Cabinets, Ink-horns, and things made of Lacque: which the Spaniards come and snatch up to be carried into the West-Indies, where they have mo∣ney for nothing.

The Spaniards have in the City of Manilla an Arch-bishop, who hath spiritual Juris∣diction over all the Philippine Islands,* 1.357 which he exercises by three Suffragan Bishops, and some Priests. These are so highly respected by the Inhabitants, who have not shaken off their Original simplicity, that they govern the Country, and keep it in subjection to the Spaniards. They are indeed such absolute Masters of these Islands, that though in se∣veral of them there is not so much as one Spaniard, yet is there not one of the Inha∣bitants refuses to pay the Tax imposed upon him, which is by the Poll, at ten Ryals a Head. The same Arch-bishop hath also the Quality of Viceroy, and exercises all the Functions thereof, joyntly with the Kings Councel, which is established in the same Ci∣ty, as well for Affairs of general concernment, as for the Appeals of such differences as may arise in the other Cities.

The City and Houses of Manilla are of Stone,* 1.358 and built after the modern way; and the City it self is so great, that the Spaniards have been forc'd to divide some part of it from the rest, to serve them for a Cittadel, in case of necessity; by which means they avoid the charge of keeping so great a number of Souldiers as might be requisite for the defence of the place. The Haven, which is called Cavite, lies two leagues from the City, and is de∣fended by two wooden Forts. There live within the City of Manilla, and about it, above fifteen thousand Chineses, besides those who come thither every year, from December to April, and trade with above five hundred Ships. The Iaponeses come thither also, but not in so great a number, and yet the Spaniards are much more jealous of them, then they are of the Chineses.

IAPAN.

JAPAN is a collection of several Islands made there by the Sea, from the one and thirtieth degree of elevation to the thirty ninth, being in some places but ten leagues in breadth, in others, reaching to thirty. This Country, which was anciently called Chryses, or, if we may credit Mark Paulo Veneto, Zipangry, hath on the East New Spain, on the North Tartary, on the West China, and on the South the Sea, and that part of the World, which is called Terra Australis. It is divided into sixty six little Kingdoms, fifty three whereof depend on that part of this great Empire, which is properly called Iapon, or Iapan, and consists of two very powerful Kingdoms, called Meaco, and Amagunce, under which all the rest are comprehended. The other part is called Ximo, and comprehends nine Kingdomes or Provinces; the chiefest whereof are Bungo and Figen; and the third part called Xicoum, comprehends the other four Kingdoms.

The Iaponneses themselves acknowledge,* 1.359 that they cannot positively affirm, whether their Country be an Island, or part of the Continent; inasmuch as from the Province of Quanto, whereof the City and Castle of Iedo is the Metropolis, as it is also of the whole Territory, as far as the extremities of the Province of Tzungaa, it is seven and twenty dayes journey towards East and North-East. Then you cross an Arm of the Sea, about eleven leagues over, to get into the Province of Iesso, or Sesso, which is so covered with Woods, and checker'd up and down with Mountains, that the Emperour of Iapan hath not yet been able to search what may be had out of them. All they could ever learn, is, that there were seen in those parts a sort of people, who were hairy all over their bodies, and suffered the hair of their heads and beards to grow, so as that they seem'd rather beasts then men. Whereto they add, that they make use of that passage by Sea, to go into Sesso, whence they bring Furs, not out of this respect, that the Sea divides that Province from Iapan, but that it were a great way about to go over those inaccessible Mountains which joyn those two Provinces.

The Island which we call Iapan, and the Inhabitants name Nippon, is divided into six great Provinces, which are called Sayecock, Chickock, Iamaysoirt, Ietsengen, Quanto and Ochio, which are subdivided into several other lesser ones, which are governed and posses∣sed by Lords and Princes, whose names we shall here give, together with their Reve∣nues, that the Reader may thereby judge of the greatness of this Empire, whereof we have hitherto had no great knowledge, setting down the sums according to their way of accounting, by Cockiens, which are worth about four Crowns French money a∣piece.

• Cangano Tzium Angon,* 1.360 King, or Prince of the Provinces of Kanga, Ietcoui and Natta, who lives in the Castle of Canga, hath a yearly revenue, one million, one hundred and ninety thousand Kockiens. 1190000
• Surugano Daynangon, Prince of the Province of Suruga, Toto and Mikawa, who lives in the Castle of Fuytsui, seven hundred thousand Kockiens. 700000
• Ouwarmo Daynangan, Prince of the Provinces of Ouani and Mino, who lives in the Castle of Nangay, seven hundred thousand Kockiens. 700000
• Sendaino Tsuinangon, Prince of the Provinces of Massamme and Oysia, who lives in the Castle of Senday, which is an impregnable place, six hundred and forty thousand Kockiens. 640000
• Sutsumana Tsuinangon, Prince of the Provinces of Zatsuma, Osuny, Fionga and Lui∣••io, who lives in the Castle of Cangasinna, six hundred thousand Kockiens. 600000
• Kinokonny Dainangon, Prince of the Provinces of Kino and Iche, who lives in the Castle of Wakcjamma, five hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 550000
• Cotto Fingo Camy, Prince of Fingo, and the Neighbouring Provinces, who lives in the Castle of Koumanotte, five hundred and fifty four thousand Kockiens. 554000
• ...

• ... Matsendairo Ianonosk, Prince of the Provinces of Tsaikisen, and Faccatto, who lives in the Castle of Fonckosa, five hundred and ten thousand Kockiens. 510000
• Matsendairo Yonocami, Prince or King in the Great Province of Ietsegen, which lives in the Castle of Onde, five hundred thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Catto Skibo, King or Prince in the great Province of Ochio, who lives in the Castle of Ais, four hundred and twenty thousand Kockiens. 420000
• Matsendairo Nangato, Prince in the Province of Souo, who lives in the Castle of Fangi, three hundred and seventy thousand Kockiens. 370000
• Mitono Tzuinangon, Prince of the Province Fitayts, who lives in the Castle of Nito, three hundred and sixty thousand Kockiens. 360000
• Nabissima Sinano, King or Prince in the Province of Fisien, who lives in the City of Logioys, three hundred and sixty thousand Kockiens. 360000
• Matsendairo Sentaro, Prince of the Province of Inaba, who lives in the Castle of Tac∣kajano, three hundred and twenty thousand Kockiens. 320000
• Todo Isumi, Prince of the Province of Fuga Iche, who lives in the Castle of Tsou, three hundred and twenty thousand Kockiens. 320000
• Matsendairo Kuncy, Prince of the Province of Bisen, who lives in the Castle of Oka∣jamma, three hundred and ten thousand Kockiens. 310000
• Iuno Caemman, The most valiant of all the Gallant persons in the Country, and Prince of the Province of Totomy, who lives in the Castle of Sawajamma, three hundred thousand Kockiens. 300000
• Fossocawa Ietschui, Prince or King of the Province of Boysen, who lives in the Castle of Cocora, three hundred thousand Kockiens. 300000
• Ojesungi Daynsio, King in the great Province of Ietsengo, who lives in the Castle of Iany Samwa, three hundred thousand Kockiens. 300000
• Matsendairo Sensio, King also in the same Province of Ietsengo, who lives in the Castle of Formanda, three hundred thousand Kockiens. 300000
• Matsendairo Auwa, Prince of the Province of Awa, who lives in the Castle of Inots, two hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 250000
• Matsendairo Ietchigenocemy, Prince of the Province of Kange, who lives in the Castle of Takato, two hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 250000
• Matsendairo T••isio, Prince of the Province of Ie, who lives in the Castle of Matsiam∣ma, two hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 250000
• Ariuma Gamba, Prince of the Province of Tzickingo, who lives in the Castle of Cour∣cine, two hundred and forty thousand Kockiens. 240000
• Morino Imasa••k, Prince of the Province of Mymasacka, who lives in the Castle of Tzi∣amma, two hundred thousand Kockiens. 200000
• Toringanocami, Prince in the Province of Dewano, who lives in the Castle of Immagat∣ta, two hundred thousand Kockiens. 200000
• Matsendairo Tosa, Prince of the Province of Tosanocory, who lives in the Castle of Tokosianna, two hundred thousand Kockiens. 200000
• Satake Okion, Prince in the Province of Dewano, who lives in the Castle of Akia, two hundred thousand Kockiens. 200000
• Matsendairo Sunosano camy, Prince of the Province of Sunosa, who lives in the Castle of Tattebys, two hundred thousand Kockiens. 200000
• Forvuo Iamayssiro, Prince of the Province of Iusimo, who lives in the Castle of Matsdayts, a hundred and eighty thousand Kockiens. 180000
• Ikenocamy, Prince of the Province of Samke, who lives in the Castle of Coquan, a hundred and eighty thousand Kockiens. 180000
• Fondacaiuocamy, Lord of the Province of Farma, who lives in the Castle of Triatno, a hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 150000
• Sackay Connay, A Lord very considerable in the great Province of Dewano, who lives in the Castle of Fackeso, a hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 150000
• Terasawa Simadonne, a Lord in the great Province of Fisen, who lives in the Castle of Carats, sixscore thousand Kockiens. 120000
• Kion Gock Wackasa, Lord of the Province of Wackasa, who lives in the Castle of Of∣fano, sixscore thousand Kockiens. 120000
• Fori Tango, a Lord in the great Province of Ietsegen, who lives in the Castle of Fouc∣kiamma, sixscore thousand Kockiens. 120000
• Sackaybarra Schibon, Lord of the Country of Kooske, who lives in the Castle of Tat∣taiits, sixscore thousand Kockiens. 120009
• ...

• ... Minsno Fiongo, Lord of the Country of Bingo, who lives in the Castle of Foukyamma, sixscore thousand Kockiens. 120000
• Matsendairo Cawaits, Governour or Captain of the Castle which the Emperour hath in the Province of Quanto, hath a yearly revenue, a hundred and ten thousand Koc∣kiens. 110000
• Ockendeyro Imasacka, Lord of the Country of Simotoke, who lives in the Castle of Oetsnomio, a hundred and ten thousand Kockiens. 110000
• Sammada Ins, a Lord in the Province of Simago, who lives in the Castle of Koska, a hundred and ten thousand Kockiens. 110000
• Toytsisibayma Finda, a Lord in the Province of Tzickingo, who lives in the Castle of Iannangainua, a hundred and ten thousand Kockiens. 110000
• Ongasura Onckan, a Lord in the Country of Farima, who lives in the Castle of Akays, a hundred thousand Kockiens. 100000
• Indatii Toutomii, Lord of the Country of Iiio, who lives in the Castle of Itasima, a hundred thousand Kockiens. 100000
• Nambou Cinano, a Lord of great quality in the Province of Ochio, who lives in the Castle of Moriamma, a hundred thousand Kockiens. 100000
• Niwa Groseiman, another Lord of great quality in the said Province of Ochio, who lives in the Castle of Siracawa, a hundred thousand Kockiens. 100000
• Abono Bitchion, Governour or Captain of the Castle of Iwatsucki, which belongs to the Emperour, in the Country of Mousays, eighty thousand Kockiens. 80000
• Kiongock Onieme, Lord of the Country of Tanga, who lives in the Castle of Tanabe, seventy thousand Kockiens. 70000
• Makino Suruga, a Lord in the great Province of Ietsengo, who lives in the Castle of Nangaoecka, seventy thousand Kockiens. 70000
• Nackangamua Neysien, a Lord in the Province of Bongo, who lives in the City of Nan∣gona, seventy thousand Kockiens. 70000
• Matsendairo Tamba, a Lord in the Country of Cinano, who lives at a place called Matsmoutte, seventy thousand Kockiens. 70000
• Noeytosamma, a Lord in the Province of Fitaiits, who lives in the City of Iwayro, se∣venty thousand Kockiens. 70000
• Ieckenda Bitshiou, Captain of the Castle of Matsiamma, in the Province of Bitshiou, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Matsura Fetsennocamy, a Lord in the Province of Fesen, who lives in the Lordship of Firando, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Sengock Biofo, a Lord in the Province of Cinano, who livs in the Lordship of Oienda, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Catto Dewado, a Lord in the Province of Iyo, who lives in the Castle of Oets, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Tosawa Okiou, a Lord in the Province of Dewano, who lives in the Lordship of Cin∣chiro, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Matsendairo Iwamy, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Seigneiory of Chisogory, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Matskonra Boungo, a Lord in the Province of Fisen, who lives in the Lordship of Su∣nabarra, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Ietschawa Tonnomon, a Lord in the Province of Bongo, who lives in the Lordship of Fita, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Tzangaar Ietsi••, a Lord in the great Province of Ochio, who lives in the Lordship of Tzungaa, upon the Sea-side, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Ougasauwara Sinano, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Province of Sekays, sixty thousand Kockiens. 60000
• Itho Cuiri, a Lord in the Province of Fongo, who lives in the Castle of Orafi, fifty thou∣sand Kockiens. 50000
• Furtafiobo, a Lord in the Province of Iwamy, who lives in the Castle of Daysiro, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Wakibacca Aways, a Lord in the Province of Sinano, who lives in the Lordship of Ina, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Koncky Nargato, a Lord in the Province of Ische, who lives in the Lordship of Toba, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Arima Seymonose, a Lord in the Province of Nicke, who lives in the Lordship of Ac∣canda, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• ...

• ... Outafiaba, a Lord in the Province of Iamatta, who lives in the Lordship of Outa, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Matsendairo Dewadonne, a Lord in the great Province of Ietsenio, who lives in the Lordship of Chibatta, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Minoskyts Fokey, a Lord in the same great Province of Ietsenio, who hath also his Ha∣bitation in the said Lordship of Chibatte, fifty thousand Kockeins. 50000
• Inaba Minbou, a Lord in the Province of Boungo, who lives in the Lordship of Ousisiro, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Croda Caynocomy, a Lord in the Province of Sinano, who lives in the Lordship of Co∣niro, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Matsendairo Souodonne, a Lord in the Province of Isumy, who hath his Residence in the Lordship of Kisnowodda, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Touda Sammon, a Lord in the Province of Tsounocouny, who lives in the Castle of Amangasac, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Stotsijaganni Kennots, a Lord in the Province of Iche, who lives in the Castle of Kan∣gou, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Fonda Ichenochamy, a Lord in the Province of Mikawa, who lives in the Castle of Oc∣kasacka, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Matsendayro Iammayssiro, a Lord in the Province of Tamba, who lives in the Lordship of Sassejamma, fifty thousand Kockiens.
• Mory Cainocamy, a Lord in the Province of Inga, who lives in the Lordship of Souro∣sada, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Fonda Notanocamy, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Lordship of Fimoys, fifty thousand Kockiens. 50000
• Akito Chionoske, a Lord in the Province of Fitayts, who lives in the Lordship of Ci∣chindo, the like sum. 50000
• Assano Oevi••me, a Lord in the Province of Chiono, who lives in the Lordship of Cassa∣ma, the like sum. 50000
• Neyto Ceinocamy, a Lord in the same Province of Chiono, who lives in the Lordship of Acandate, the like sum. 50000
• Catto Skibbodonne, a Lord in the great Province of Ochio, who lives in the Lordship of Ains, the like sum. 50000
• Soma Daysiennocamy, a Lord in the same Province of Ochio, who lives in the Castle of Soma, the like sum. 50000
• Toyda Iamatta, a Lord in the Province of Toysima, who lives in the Lordship of Is••us, the like sum. 50000
• Ouckobo Cangato, a Lord in the Province of Mino, who lives in the Castle of Canuo, the like sum. 50000
• Neito Boysen, a Lord in the Province of Dewano, who lives in the Lord of Iodata, the like sum. 50000
• Inaba Aways, a Lord in the Province of Tainbo, who lives in the Lordship of Fo••c∣kuit Syamina, fourty thousand Kockiens. 40000
• Cammet Deirick, a Lord in the Province of Iwamy, who lives in the Lordship of Mongamy, the like sum. 40000
• Catnayngiri Ismou, a Lord in the Province of Iammatta, who lives in the Lordship of Tatsta, the like sum. 40000
• Fonda Findanocamy, a Lord in the great Province of Ietsegen, who lives in the Lord∣ship of Maroka, the like sum. 40000
• Itakoura Sovodome, Governour for his Majesty, in the great City of Miaco, hath of yearly revenue in the Province of Iamayssiro, fourty thousand Kockiens. 40000
• Matsendairo Bongo, a Lord in the Province of Iwamy, who lives in the Lordship of Nacksmia, the like sum. 40000
• Fonda Naykie, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Lordship of Fimeis, the like sum. 40000
• Matsendairo Tango, a Lord in the great Province of Ochio, who lives in the Lordship of Sucki, the like sum. 40000
• Canna morti Isoumo, a Lord in the Province of Finda, who lives in the Lordship of Oumory, the like sum. 40000
• Chiongock Chiury, a Lord in the Province of Tango, who lives in the Lordship of Tannabe, thirty six thousand Kockiens. 36000
• Outagiobo, a Lord in the Province of Mino, who lives in the Lordship of Istnoday, thirty thousand Kockiens. 30000
• ...

• ... Matsendairo Ietso, Governour of the Castle of Iondo, in the Province of Iamayssiro, thirty thousand Kockiens. 30000
• Matsendairo Ouckon, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Lordship of Ocko, the like sum. 30000
• Minsonija Ichenocamy, a Lord in the Province of Cooske, who lives in the Lordship of Chinotayins, the like sum. 30000
• Iammasacka Kainocami, a Lord in the Province of Bitchiou, who lives in the Lordship of Narse, the like sum. 30000
• Matsendayro Iamatto, a Lord in the Province of Ietsesen, who lives in the Lordship of Catsiamma, thirty thousand Kockiens. 30000
• Iunofiabo, a Lord in the Province of Cooske, who lives in the Lordship of Anna, the like sum. 30000
• Matsendairo Tonnemon, a Lord in the Province of Micamua, who lives in the Castle of Iussimda, the like sum. 30000
• Akysucky Nangato, a Lord in the Province of Nicco, who lives in the Lordship of Summino, the like sum. 30000
• Sua In••ba, a Lord in the Province of Sinano, who lives in the Lordship of Takaboys, the like sum. 30000
• Singamoma Ouribe, a Lord in the Province of Totomy, who lives in the Castle of Sese, the like sum. 30000
• Simaas Oemanosce, a Lord in the Province of Nicko, who lives in the Lordship of San∣dobarra, the like sum. 30000
• Kinostay Iemon, a Lord in the Province of Bongo, who lives in the Lordship of Fius, the like sum. 30000
• Sonotsiussima, Lord of the Island of Tziussina, the like sum. 30000
• Koynde Inuano, a Lord in the Province of Tonga, who lives in the Lordship of Okoda, the like sum. 30000
• Fonda Simosa, one of the most valiant persons of all that Empire, and Governour of the Castle of Nissewo, in the Province of Micauwa, the like sum. 30000
• Gorick Setsnocanny, a Lord in the Province of Micauwa, who lives at the Castle of Fammamats, the like sum. 30000
• Chinsio Surago, a Lord in the Province of Litaeits, who lives in the Lordship of Tsui∣toura, the like sum. 30000
• Sakuma Fisen, a Lord in the Province of Sinano, who lives in the Lordship of Irajam∣ma, the like sum. 30000
• Todo Toyisina, a Lord in the Province of Mino, who lives in the Lordship of Canna∣jamma, the like sum. 30000
• Fonda Isumi, a Lord in the Province of Fitaeyts, who lives in the Lordship of Mina••∣gaw, the like sum. 30000
• Tongauwa Tosa, a Lord in the Province of Bitchiou, who lives in the Lordship of Ni••∣kys, the like sum. 30000
• Matsendayro Tosa, a Lord in the Province of Ietsesen, who lives in the Lordship Cona∣matta, the like sum of thirty thousand Kockiens. 30000
• Sangii sarra Tokii, a Lord in the Province of Fitaytes, who lives in the Lordship of Oungouri, hath the yearly revenue of twenty thousand Kockiens. 20000
• Kinostay Counay, a Lord in the Province of Bitchiou, who lives in the Lordship of Courosi, the like sum 20000
• Matsendayro Koyssiro, a Lord in the Province of Farima, who lives in the Lordship of Firamma, the like sum. 20000
• Inasacka Tzounacamy, Governour of a Castle belonging to the King in the Province of Onosacka, the like sum. 20000
• Matsendaro Kennots, a Lord in the Province of Iamba, who lives in the Lordship of Comme-jamma, the like sum. 20000
• Mastay Saske, a Lord in the Province of Ochio, who lives in the Lordship of Sanbon∣maets, the like sum. 20000
• Oumoura Minbou, a Lord in the Province of Fisen, who lives in the Lordship of Day∣mats, the like sum. 20000
• Matsendayro Isumy, a Lord in the Province of Mino, who lives in the Lordship of Iwa∣moura, the like sum. 20000
• Matsendayro Conocamy, a Lord in the Province of Sonnocomy, who lives in the Lord∣ship of Fyannori, the like sum. 20000
• ...

• ... Minsnofaito, a Lord in the Province of Micauwa, who lives in the Castle of Ca∣ria, the like sum. 20000
• Nito Tatewakie, a Lord in the Province of Chiono, who lives in the Lordship of Iway∣stowa, the like sum. 20000
• Ongasaware Wakasa, a Lord in the Province of Simosa, who lives in the Lordship of Sekijada, the like sum. 20000
• Fischicatta Cammon, a Lord in the Province of Chiono, who lives in the Lordship of Mauwaro, the like sum. 20000
• Iwaky Sirrosy, a Lord in the Province of Chiono, who lives in the Lordship of Iedou∣ra, the like sum. 20000
• Reckongo Fingo, a Lord in the Province of Dewano, who lives in the Lordship of Iury, the like sum. 20000
• Tackenacke Oenieme, a Lord in the Province of Bongo, who lives in the Lordship of Fo••nay, the like sum. 20000
• Mouri Ichenocamy, a Lord in the Province of Boungo, who lives in the Lordship of Ounays, the like sum. 20000
• Wackebe Sacjow, a Lord in the Province of Totomy, who lives in the Lordship of Onuso, the like sum. 20000
• Itsifoys Insanocamy, another Lord in the same Province of Totomy, who lives in the Lordship of Cosioys, hath in like manner a yearly Revenue, of twenty thousand Kockiens. 20000
• There are, besides the forementioned, many other Lords, who have very considerable Re∣venues; as namely, Sangoro Saffioye, and Fory Mimasacka, who have each of them a Reve∣nue of twenty thousand Kockiens. 20000

There are also others, not much inferiour to these in point of Revenue, whom we sha••l not think much particularly to mention.

• Qua jamma Sammon, hath a yearly Revenue of fifteen thousand Kockiens. 15000
• Fossacauwa Gemba, as much. 15000
• Sackina Daysen, as much. 15000
• Matsendayro Daisien, the like. 15000
• Gotto Aways, Lord of the Island of Gotto, near Tirando, the like sum. 15000
• Cattaingiri Iwami, the like. 15000
• Crussima Ietsingo, the like 15000
• Coubori Totomy, the like. 15000
• Takangi Mondo. 15000
• Miake Ietsingo. 15000
• Sackay Ouckon. 15000
• Conda Iwamy. 15000
• Nasua Ieuts. 15000
• Oudaura Bisen, the like sum. 15000

Besides all these, there are yet some five or six and twenty, who have each of them ten thousand Kockiens of yearly Revenue. But we shall forbear the naming of them.

It remains then only, that we give an account of the Revenues of those Lords who are actually attendant on the Court, which are so considerable, that they may well deserve a place by themselves.

• Deyno Oiedonne,* 1.361 hath a yearly Revenue of a hundred and fifty thousand Kockiens. 150000
• Sackay Outandonne 120000
• Nangay Sinnanodonne. 100000
• Sackay Sannikodonne. 90000
• Audo Oukiondonne. 60000
• Inoie Cawaytdonne. 50000
• Inaba Tangodonne. 40000
• Sackay Auwadonne 30000
• Sackay Iamaissoradonne, the like. 30000
• Neyta Ingadonne. 20000
• ...

• ... Tsmitsia Nimbodonne, the like. 20000
• Nisiou Oukioudonne, the like. 20000
• Matsendayro Iemondonne, the like sum. 20000
• Immanguyts Taytemadonne, the like. 20000
• Matsendayro Insdonne. 15000
• Abobongodonne, the like. 15000
• Anwajamma Oukoradonne, the like. 15000
• Cio••gock Sensindonne, the like. 15000
• Itacoura Neyseindonne, the like. 15000
• Narsye Insdonne, the like. 15000
• Akiamonta Taysimadonne, the like. 15000
• Forita Cangadonne, ten thousand Kockiens. 10000
• Minra Simadonne, the like. 10000
• Maynda Gonoskadonne, the like. 10000
• Missona Iamatta, the like. 10000
• Fory Its••ocamy, the like. 10000
• Miury Omonaskadonne, the like. 10000
• Fonda Sanjandonne, the like sum. 10000

Now the Revenues of the Princes and Lords of whom we have given this account, consists altogether in Lordships and Demesnes: for some are rich in Corn and Cattle, others in several Mines, as Gold, Silver, Copper, Tin, Quick-silver, Iron, &c. Others are wealthy in Woods, Flax, Cotton, or Silk; of all which the Emperour hath a certain knowledge, by the secret informations sent him by those Secretaries whom he places about them to man∣nage their Affairs; for he recommends to every one of them a Secretary, with a Letter to this effect.* 1.362 Well-beloved, I know you have many Vassals and Servants, and that the occasions wherein you are to employ them are very great; therefore I send you a person, whose assistance may in some measure ease you of the burthen which lies upon you, and of whose fidelity you may be assur'd, in as much as I commend him to you, as one who hath been brought up at my own house: Make use of him, and take in good part the care I have of your person and affairs. These indeed, for the most part, are such as have serv'd the Emperour in their youth, in his three Chambers, and of whose abilities, prudence, and judgment he is satisfied, assuring himself of their fidelity, besides the expressions he might find thereof during the time of their service, by an act signed with their bloud: in so much that there is not ought done in the Provinces, whereof he hath not, by this means, a perfect account. For these Secre∣taries keep an exact Journal of whatever they observe in the life and actions of the Prin∣ces whom they are sent to, who undertake nothing without their advice, nor do any busi∣ness wherein they are not consulted, which gives them great authority in the Provinces, and makes the Princes themselves look on them as such, whose favour they stand in need of to keep a fair correspondence with the Court. On the other side, these Princes are glad to have able and understanding persons about them, such as may observe the miscarriages of their Government, and have the confidence to be their Remembrancers thereof; as chusing rather that a faithful Servant should acquaint them therewith, that so they may be seaso∣nably reform'd, then that they should become the discourse of the people, or any should take occasion thence to do them ill Offices about the Emperour.

The great Lords,* 1.363 who govern the chiefest Provinces, have three names; to wit, their own proper Name, that of the Family, and the Sirname, which they take from their Pro∣vince, and which they commonly give the Castle where they live; and they are the more willing to be called by the name of their Family,* 1.364 then their own, upon this account; that, as they say, the Family was before them. But it is withall to be observed, that there is not any man but hath his name changed thrice; for the name which had been given him in his Infancy, being not fit for him when he is become a man, at the age of twenty years there is another given him; and when he comes to that of fifty five or sixty, he receives a third name, such as was not fit for youth or a less advanc'd age.

The departure of great Lords is commonly attended by the voluntary execution of twenty or thirty Vassals or Slaves, who rip up their bellies and die with their Masters. These are oblig'd to this by an Oath, and it is done partly by way of acknowledgment of the particular kindness which their Lords had for them. Having acquainted their Lord, that they are willing to be oblig'd to sacrifice themselves in that manner when occasion shall require, they entertain him with a short discourse to this purpose; Most mighty Sir, you have many other slaves and servants, of whose affection and fidelity you are assur'd; who am I, or what have I deserv'd, that you should honour me with your favour above any of the

rest? I resign up this life to you, which is already yours, and promise you, I will keep it no lon∣ger then it shall be serviceable to yours. Then the Lord and the Vassal take off, each of them, a Bowl of Wine, which is the most Religious Ceremony they have among them, to confirm their Oaths, which thereby become inviolable.

To do this execution upon themselves,* 1.365 after the death of their Lord, they get together all the nearest of their Kindred, who conduct them to the Mesquite or Pagode, where they sit down upon Mats and Garments, wherewith they cover all the floor, and having spent some time in making good chear, they rip up their bellies, cutting them cross, so as that all the guts come out; and if that does not dispatch them, they thrust themselves into the throat, and so compleat the execution. Nay, there are some, who coming to hear that their Masters intend to build some Edifice, either for himself or the Emperour, will de∣sire him to do them the honour, that they may be laid under the Foundations, which they think are made immoveable by that voluntary Sacrifice; and if their request be granted, they chearfully lay themselves down at the Foundation, and have great Stones cast upon them, which soon put them out of all pain. But it is for the most part Despair which puts them upon this resolution; in as much as these are of that kind of Slaves, who are so cruelly treated, that death were more supportable to them then the wretched life they lead.

All their Pagodes or Mesquites are of Wood,* 1.366 rais'd three or four foot from the ground, and about seven or eight fathom square; They have on the outside many Turrets, having lights on all sides, and gilt all over, but very narrow, and set out with certain fantastick Fi∣gures, but wretchedly done, as to proportions. They have also Statues in their Pagodes, whereto they address their Prayers, and bestow on them, by way of Alms, a certain number of Caxias, which the Priests make their advantage of.

But their Castles are much better built.* 1.367 His Majesty hath belonging to him many spacious and fair ones, but the most considerable are those of Osacca and Iedo. The Princes and great Lords have also very handsome Castles, but those which are fortifi'd are oblig'd to receive a Garrison from the Soveraign. The Cities have not any Fortifi∣cations at all: for, some few only excepted, which lie between Firando and Iedo, and have only simple walls; the rest have not any at all, but the Streets are streight, and of the same breadth and length, that is, sixty Iekiens, which make about fourscore and ten fa∣thom. Every Street hath two Gates, which are shut up in the night, and a Watch kept at them: as also two Officers, who are accountable for the disorders committed in their Quarter, and speak to the Judge, about any thing wherein the Inhabitants of the Streets, whereof they have the oversight, are any way concern'd; there being, it seems, such order taken, that all persons are not permitted to present themselves indifferently before the Ma∣gistrate, but they would have it done by such as know what respect they owe to their Su∣periours.

The Cities or Towns have no particular Revenue,* 1.368 nor any sums of Money in bank, whereof they have the disposal; for all the Deme••ne belongs to the Soveraign, who be∣stows the Revenue thereof on the Princes and great Lords before mentioned, and permits not the raising of any Impositions or Taxes, of any nature whatsoever. Nor is it to be fear'd that the mildness of the Air of that Countrey should breed any of those Grashop∣pers, which consume, where-ever they come, all the Fruit which the Hail hath left on the Trees, in so much that they leave not any verdure on them. They only pay a small chief Rent for their Houses, which the great Lords receive yearly, but it amounts not to above thirty shillings for the greatest, those of the middle sort ten, and the ordinary ones twenty pence. The Inhabitants are, besides these, oblig'd to certain dayes works, and to find a man for their Lord, to do what business he hath to put him upon; but this happens not above twice or thrice a moneth, and is but for an hour or two, or at most but for half a day. By this means the Lord lives upon his Demes••e, the Souldier by his Pay, the Merchant by his Traffick, the Tradesman by his Trade, and the Husbandman by his Labour.

One of the most considerable parts of these Lords Revenues consists in Fishing, especial∣ly that of the Whale, which the Emperour gives them. There are taken every year about two or three hundred upon the Coasts of Iapan, but they are not so big as tho••e taken to∣wards the North, and have, at most, not above seven or eight inches of fat, but much flesh, or meat, which the Iaponneses feed upon.

There is no Lord,* 1.369 nor indeed any Citizen, or Merchant, but may put his Vassals and Do∣mesticks to death, and that by way of Justice, he himself being the Judge; but to others Justice is administred, all over the Country, in the Emperours name. Gentlemen and Souldiers have the priviledge to be their own Executioners, and to rip up their bellies themselves: but others are forc'd to receive their death from the hands of the common

Executioner. They alledge, as a reason for this proceeding of theirs, that Merchants are, in some respect, infamous, in as much as they are, for the most part, Lyars, and deceive those that trust them. Tradesmen they sleight, as being only but publick servants; and the Pea∣santry is contemptible, by reason of the wretched condition they live in, which is little better then that of Slaves. Only the Gentlemen and Souldiers are best respected, and live at the charge, and upon the labour of others.

No offence,* 1.370 though never so small, but is punish'd with death, but especially Theft, though it were but for a Penny. Gaming, whether that which depends upon chance, or requires skill, is capital among them, if it be for money; and he who kills another, though inno∣cently, and in his own defence, is to die without mercy; with this only difference, that such as kill in their own defence, as also they who commit such Faults or Offences, as would not here be punished with death, die only themselves, but other Offenders involve all their Kindred in their misfortune;* 1.371 so that for the Crime of one single person, the Father, Bre∣thren and Children are put to death, the Wives and Daughters are made Slaves, and the Estate of the whole Family is confiscated. And this happens so frequently, that there are Commissioners expresly appointed for the administration of what is so confiscated; yet does not the money raised thereby go to the King, but is imployed in the building of Pa∣godes, and the repairing of High-wayes and Bridges.

The torture Thieves are put to,* 1.372 for want of evidence, makes rather the unfortunate then the guilty to be condemned. They take a piece of Iron, about a finger thick, and a foot square, and make it red hot, and as soon as the redness is gone, and the Iron return'd to its own colour, they put it to the hands of the party accused, upon two sheets of Paper, which immediately flame, and if the accused person can cast the piece of Iron upon a lit∣tle Hurdle standing near him, without burning himself, he is dismissed; but if his hands are ever so little touched by the Fire, he is sentenc'd to die. This Crime is punish'd with a particular kind of death. The Criminal is tied with a Straw-rope, by the Neck, to a great Cane, overthwart which they put two other Canes, much after the manner of a Lor∣rain-Cross, whereto they fasten the Feet and the Hands, and then the Executioner runs him through with a Pike, from the right Side up to the left Shoulder, and from the left Side to the right Shoulder: so that being twice run through the heart, he is soon dis∣patch'd. Sometimes they only fasten the Malefactor with his Back to a Post, and they make him stretch forth his Hands, which are held out by two Men, and then the Executio∣ner, standing behind him, runs him in at the Neck, and so into the Heart, and dispatches him in a moment.

The Lords have such an absolute power over their menial Servants, that there needs but a pretence to put them to death. An example of this happened not long since; a Servant had the insolence to address himself to a Gentleman, to proffer his service to him, but ask'd greater Wages then he knew the other was able to give, purposely to abuse him. The Gen∣tleman, perceiving the impudence of the Raskal, was a little troubled at it, but smother'd his indignation, and only told him, that his demands were very great, but that he had so good an opinion of him, that he must needs be a good Servant. Accordingly he kept him a while; but one day charging him with some neglect, and reproaching him, that when he should have been about his business, he had been idling about the City, he put him to death. The Gentlemen and Souldi••rs are for the most part very poor, and live miserably; by be∣ing highly conceited of themselves, most of them keep Servants, though only to carry their Shoes after them, which are indeed but as it were a pair of Soles, made of Straw or Rushes, having a hole towards the toe, which keeps them on their feet.

The Crimes for which all of the Family or kindred are put to death,* 1.373 are Extortion, Coyning, setting of Houses on fire, ravithing of Women, premeditated murther, &c. If a Mans Wife be guilty of any Crime her Husband is convicted of, she dies with him, but if she be innocent, she is made a Slave. Their punishments bear no proportion to the Crimes committed, but are so cruel, that it were not easie to express the barbarism thereof. To consume with a gentle Fire, or only with a Candle, to crucifie with the Head downwards, to boyl Men in seething Oyl or Water, to quarter and draw with four Horses, are very or∣dinary punishments among them.

One who had undertaken to find Timber and Stones for the building of a Palace for the King, and had corrupted the Officers appointed by his Majesty to receive and register what he should send in, was crucified with his head downwards. The officers were condemn'd to rip up their bellies; but the Merchant was put to the foresaid death. He had the re∣pute of an honest man, and was one that had had occasion to obliege several Persons of Quality; in so much that some resolved to petition the Emperour for his pardon, though these intercessions for condemn'd persons be in some sort criminal; and indeed the Empe∣rour

took it so ill, that the Lords, who had presented their Petition for him, had no other answer thereto, but the reproaches he made to them of their imprudence.

It happened in the year 1638.* 1.374 That a Gentleman, on whom the King had bestowed the Government of a little Province, near Iedo, so oppressed the Country people, that they were forc'd to make their complaints thereof to the Court, where it was ordered, that the said Gentleman, and all his Relations, should all have their bellies ripp'd up on the same day, and as near as might be at the same hour. He had a Brother, who lived two hun∣dred fourty and seven Leagues from Iedo, in the service of the King of Fingo; an Un∣cle, who lived in Satsuma, twenty Leagues further; a Son, who serv'd the King of Ki∣nocuni; a Grand-son, who serv'd the King of Massamme, a hundred and ten Leagues from Iedo; and at three hundred and eighty Leagues from Satsuma, another Son, who serv'd the Governour of the Castle of Quanto; two Brothers, who were of the Regiment of the Emperours Guard; and another Son, who had married the only Daughter of a rich Merchant near Iedo; yet were all these persons to be executed precisely at the same hour. To do that, they cast up what time were requisite to send the Order to the farthest place, and having appointed the day for the execution there, Orders were sent to the Princes of all the forementioned places, that they should put to death all those persons upon the same day, just at noon, which was punctually done. The Merchant, who had bestowed his Daughter on that Gentlemans Son, died of grief, and the Widow starv'd her self.

Lying is also punished among them with death,* 1.375 especially that which is said in the pre∣sence of the Judge.

The forementioned punishments are only for Gentlemen, Souldiers, Merchants, and some other persons of mean quality: but Kings, Princes and great Lords are ordinarily punish∣ed more cruelly then if they were put to death. For they are banished into a little Island named Faitsensima, which lies fourteen Leagues from the Province of Iedo, and is but a League about. It hath neither Road nor Haven, and it is so steepy all about, that no doubt it was with the greatest danger imaginable, that the first who got up to it made a shift to do it. Those who first attempted to climb it up, found means to fasten great Poles in certain places, whereto they have tyed ropes, with which they draw up those that are sent thither, and make fast the boats, which otherwise would split against the Rocks with the first Wind. There grows nothing in all the Island, but a few Mulberry-trees, so that they are obliged to send in provisions for the subsistance of the Prisoners. They are re∣lieved every moneth, as is also the Garrison kept there, but they are dieted very sparingly, as being allow'd only a little Rice, some roots, and other wretched fare. They hardly af∣ford them a lodging over their heads, and with all these miseries, they oblige them to keep a certain number of Silk-worms, and to make a certain quantity of Stuffs every year.

The expence which the Emperour of Iapan is at every year in his Court,* 1.376 and what re∣lates thereto, to wit, the sallaries and allowances of the Officers and Counsellours, amounts yearly to four millions of Kockiens, and the sallaries of Governours of places and Military persons, together with the Pensions he gives, amount to five millions of Kockiens.

They who speak of the Soveraign Prince of all Iapan, give him the quality of Empe∣rour, in as much as all the other Lords of the Country, on whom they bestow that of King, depend on him and obey him, not only as Vassals, but as Subjects, since it is in his power to condemn them to death, to deprive them of their Dignities, to dispos∣sess them of their Territories, to banish or send them to some Island, for very petty Offences.

The Castle of Iedo,* 1.377 which is the place of his ordinary residence, is near two Leagues in compass, and is fortified with three Walls, and as many Moats, very deep, and built of Free-stone, but so irregular, that it is impossible to assign it any certain Figure. Within less then three hundred paces, a Man must pass through eight or nine Gates, not one of them standing opposite to another; for being come within the first, he must turn on the right hand to go to the second, and being come within that on the left hand to go to the third, and so alternately till he comes to the last. Just within the last Gate there is a Magazine of Arms, for three or four thousand men, on which about all the Streets, which are fair and broad, having on both sides many magnificent Palaces. The Gates are done over with great Iron bars, and over every Gate there is a House, wherein two or three hundred Souldiers may be lodg'd. The Emperours Palace stands in the midst of the Ca∣stle, and hath belonging to it many Appartments, Halls, Chambers, Closets, Galleries, Gar∣dens, Orchards, Groves, Ponds, Rivers, Fountains, Courts, &c. and several particular Hou∣ses, for his Wives and Concubines.

At your coming out of the Palace, you go into that quarter, where the Princes of the Bloud,* 1.378 and Counsellers of State live, and thence into another quarter, where are the Pala∣ces of the Kings and great Lords of Iapan, which are all gilt both within and without; and the more sumptuously built out of this respect; that there is a certain emulation a∣mongst them, who shall be at greatest expence to please the Emperour. In the next quar∣ter to this, there live other Princes and Lords, who are not so powerful as the former, yet have their Palaces gilt, and so richly furnish'd, that a Man would think, at his first com∣ing in, he met with Mountains of Gold. In this quarter there live some of the Wives and eldest Sons of those Princes, whom the Emperour hath brought up in the sight of the Court, as so many Hostages of their Fathers fidelity: so that this Castle, though as big as a considerable City, yet is so full of people, that the Streets can hardly contain them.

When the Emperour goes out of his Palace,* 1.379 he either rides on horse-back, or is carried in a Palanquin, open of all sides, and he is accompany'd by a great number of Lords, whom they call the Emperours Camarades. These Lords are of great quality, and very rich, yet do they not think it any dishonour, to apply themselves to such things as are either neces∣sary or delightful. Some are skill'd in Musick, some in Physick, some are excellent at Wri∣ting, or Painting, others study eloquence and the mannagement of Affairs. Next them there goes a part of the Guard, which consists altogether of persons cull'd out among the Children of younger Brothers, Cousins, or Kinsmen of great Lords, among whom there are also some natural Children of such as either actually are in employments, or may, upon presumption of their Birth, pretend thereto. Then follow the ordinary Guard, com∣manded by their Colonels and other Officers, who so dispose thereof, that two or three thousand march before the Emperour, and as many after him. Among so many Souldi∣ers, there is not one but there hath been some trial made of his courage, nor any that hath not gone through all the necessary exercises, in order to such a kind of life, and whose coun∣tenance and demeanour is not answerable to the employment they are put into. They leave a space between them and the Emperour for a great number of other great Lords, who are about his Majesties person, who must needs make a strange shew, among five or six hundred Men, all clad in black, some on horse-back, some afoot, all marching with such gra∣vity, and so orderly, that there is not only any one man to be seen out of his rank, but a man hears not so much as a word spoken. The Streets are swept, and strew'd with Sand or Gravel, and the doors of all the houses standing open: yet is there not a person to be seen, either in the shops, or at the windows; or if it happen there be, the Guard makes them kneel till such time as the Emperour is passed by.

Once every five year,* 1.380 the Emperour goes to Meaco, to do reverence to the Dayro, who is the true Prince of Iapan, and still hath the quality, but without any function. There is a whole year spent in making all things ready for that journey, whereof we shall hereafter give a particular description, and Orders are issued out to the Lords who are to follow, and who accordingly come at the day appointed to the places where they are to meet the King; dividing themselves so, as that some go before, to relieve such as come from the Court, so to prevent the disorder and confusion, which were unavoidable among so great a number of Princes, who are all oblig'd to make their appearance upon this occasion, with all the bravery and magnificence they can.

From the City of Iedo, to that of Meaco, there are a hundred and twenty five Leagues, and within every three or four Leagues there is a considerable City,* 1.381 able to lodge the whole Court; yet hath the Emperour caused to be built between those two places, at an equal distance one from the other, eight and twenty fair Houses, of which there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 twenty great Castles, and in every House there is a Retinue, and 〈…〉〈…〉 else befitting a Kings Court, as Gentlemen, Guards, Horses, Officers, and Servants, with Provisions necessary for the sub∣sistance of the whole Train. They who go along with the Emperour, from the City of Iedo, leave him to the care of those whom they find in the first House; These accompany and conduct him to the second; and so from one to another, till he comes to the City of Meaco; in his return from whence, he observes the same order, being attended from one House to another, till he comes to Iedo.

The Emperours of Iapan build many of these Castles, and have them finish'd in so short a time, that they will have a Structure compleated in six moneths, which in Europe would take up as many years. We have an Instance of it in the Castle which the Empe∣rour had built in the year 1636. in the Province of Nicko, four dayes journey from the City of Iedo. It is fortified with a double Moat, and a double Rampier, and both of Free-stone, and it is so spacious, and consists of so many particular Palaces, for the Grandees of the Court, and so many Appartments, Gardens and Fountains for the Emperour him∣self, that the best Architect in Europe would not have finish'd it in several years; yet

was this great building compleated in less than five months: there were so many Masons, Carpenters, Joyners, Stone-cutters, Gilders, Painters, &c. employ'd about it. This Castle is so far within the Countrey, that the Emperour lodges there but once a year, when he goes to do his Devotions at his Father's Sepulchre, which is thereabouts, upon which occasion he stays there two nights.

His Treasures are so great,* 1.382 that it is impossible to give any thing near an exact account of it, inasmuch as the Gold and Silver is lock'd up in Chests, and dispos'd into the Towers of the Castle, besides what is in several places, up and down the Countrey, where it increa∣ses almost to infinity, since the Revenue of two months, will defray the charges of a whole years expence. The late Emperour, Father to him who now reigns, lying on his death-bed, call'd for his Son, and told him, That the Kingdom, and all the Treasures would beere long at his disposal, but he recommended to his particular care certain Chests and Cabinets, where he should find the ancient Chronicles of the Kingdom, and several excel∣lent Books of Morality, as also the Crown-jewels, exhorting him highly to esteem them, as himself and his Predecessours had done, The pieces he had so much recommended to his Son, were, one kind of Cymitar, called Iejuky Massamme; another Cymitar, of a kind cal∣led Samoys; one other lesser Cymitar, called Bongo Doyssiro; A little Pot for Tsia, or The, called Naraissiba; another greater Tsia Pot, called Stengo, and a Manuscript, intituled AVC KOKI KINDOI. He left his elder Brother, the King of Ouwary, a Picture called Darma, which was to be look'd on only of the one side, and a Cymitar, called Massamme. To his second Brother, the King of Kino••onny, a Cymitar, called Iessa Massam∣me, and a Picture, wherein were represented a great number of Frogs; and to the third Brother, King of Mico, a Cymitar, called Sandame, and a Manuscript, named Sinche. And though his six Pieces are not to be compar'd to those he bequeath'd his Son, yet not any one of them but was valued at above a thousand Oebans of Gold, which amount to forty seven thousand Thayls, or crowns. The Legacies he gave several Princes and Princesses of the Blood, and other Lords and Ladies, as also to some of the Soldiery, and his Servants, amounted to thirty six millions.

The Emperour who now reigns,* 1.383 was not married when he came to the Crown upon the death of his Father, which proceeded from his detestable addiction to Sodomy; inso∣much that the Dayro, perceiving the aversion he had conceiv'd for women was such, that the State would in all likelihood come to be without a Governour, made choice, among his nearest kindred, and the best qualifi'd Princesses of the Kingdom, of two young La∣dies, of extraordinary beauty, whom he sent to the Emperour, i••treating him to take one of them, and honour her with the quality of Miday, which is that they give the Empe∣rours lawful wife. He was so compliant as to marry one of them; but his brutality had so debauch'd him, that he treated her with such indifference, that it brought her into a melancholy which had almost cost her her life. Her Nurse troubled to see her in that con∣dition, took one day the freedom to tell the King, that she could not comprehend, how he could slight one of the greatest beauties in the world, to pursue those irregular enjoy∣ments,* 1.384 which cannot be had without violence to nature. The Emperour, who before was merry and in a good humour, was so troubled at this discourse, that going immediately into another room, he sent for several Architects and Undertakers of Buildings, and com∣manded them to build a Castle fortifi'd with several Moats and Draw-bridges, and very high Walls, in which he confin'd his Wife, with her Nurse, and all the Women and Maids belonging to them. The Emperour's own Nurse, who had a greater influence upon him, then his Mother, perceiving that there would be a want of Heirs to inherit the Crown, bethought her of a course to remedy that inconvenience, which was, to get to Court all the handsomest young maids in the Kingdom, whom she produced, as often as the Emperour's good humour gave her occasion or encouragement to do it. Of all she brought, only the Daughter of an Armourer insinuated her self into his affection, and was got with child by him; but the other Ladies troubled to see a maid of so mean quality preferr'd before them, found means to corrupt the midwife, and to kill the child, so secretly, that the Emperour never had the least knowledge thereof.

We have it from the Chronicles of Iapan,* 1.385 that that great State hath always been govern'd by a Monarch, whom in their Language they call Dayro, and that his Subjects had so great a veneration for their Prince, that they thought it a crime to b•• wanting in point of respect towards him, so far were they from taking up Arms to disturb the Peace of the Countrey. His person was accounted so sacred, that they would not have it touch the ground, or that he should be uncover'd abroad. Whence it came, that when the other Princes were en∣gag'd in a war one against another, there was a General named, who acted in the Dayro's name, and reduc'd the Rebells to their duty. They have still the same respect for the

Dayro, insomuch, that they permit not that his hair or beard should be cut, or his nails par'd, nor his meat to be dress'd in Pots that had been used before. He hath twelve Wives, which are bestowed on him with extraordinary Ceremonies and Magnificence. When ever he goes abroad, his twelve Wives follow him in so many Coaches, which are gilt and en∣riched with their Arms and devises. They are lodg'd in twelve great Pallaces, built in the street which goes to the King's Palace, and having adjoyning to them several other fair hou∣ses for his Concubines. Not one of these Women, but hath a great Supper made every night at her Palace, at which there is Musick, and the Women-dancers; but assoon as the King is gone into that Palace where he intends to pass away the night, they all send in their suppers, and have their divertisements at that Ladies Lodgings, whom the King is pleas'd to honour with his presence.

One of the greatest Ceremonies and Magnificences to be seen in Iapan,* 1.386 is that perfor∣med at the birth of a Prince, who is to inherit the dignity of a Dayro For, to chuse a Nurse for the Child, they get together fourscore of the handsomest young Women in the Kingdom, whom they present to the Twelve VVives of the Dayro, and to nine of the great∣est Lords of the Countrey, and of nearest kin to the Dayro, who, for want of Issue male, might succeed him. These Princes and Ladies receive those designed for this employment, give them extraordinary Titles, and treat them a whole day together. The next day the foresaid number is reduc'd to the moyety, and one half is dismiss'd, with very great Pre∣sents. The next day, they add to the Titles of those who stay, with great Ceremonies, and their number is reduc'd to ten, and afterwards to three, the rest being still dismiss'd with Presents, and at the end of three days, they make choyce of one of these three, on whom they bestow, besides several other Titles, the quality of the Prince's Nurse. In order to her establishment in that Function, she is brought into the Prince's Chamber, whom she finds in the arms of one of the chiefest Ladies of the Countrey, by whom he had been kept from the time of his birth; and after the Nurse hath spurted a little of her milk into the Childes mouth, he is delivered up to her. All these Ceremonies, as also those performed at the ordinary Feasts, are very great, and they are at this day performed with the Dayro, who still enjoys a very considerable Revenue, sufficient to defray all the charge, and conti∣nues the same grandeur his Predecessours have been possess'd of, though the force of the Empire hath been devolv'd into other hands, as we shall now relate.

The charge of General of the Army was heretofore the greatest of any in the Kingdom,* 1.387 as is that of Constable, in France; and it was invested ordinarily, though contrary to the rules of good policy, in the second Son of the Dayro. About a hundred and twenty years since, it happened there was a Dayro, who having a son he exceedingly doted on, would needs out of an imprudent compliance he had for the Mother, consent that he should participate of the Royal Dignity; and it was ordered that it should pass alternately from one to the other, every three years. But the son willing to make his advantage of the occasion, found means so to insinuate himself into the affections of the great Lords and the Soldiery, during the three years of his Reign, that he resolv'd to continue it, contrary to the exhortations of his Father, who too late repented him of his devesting himself of an authority which indeed is not communicable. This was the first disturbance that ever had been seen in Iapan, inasmuch as both Father and Son being equally invested with the quality of Dayro, the people conceived they might, without any crime, take up Arms for either: However most of the Lords detesting the ingratitude of the Son, joyn'd with the General, whom the Father had appointed to reduce his Son to obedience, who was de∣feated and killed in that Civil warr. The General, finding himself well established in his charge, followed the example of the Prince, and abusing the lawful power, whereof he was seized, made his advantage of it to settle himself in the Throne, after the Dayro's death, yet leaving the lawful heir, with the quality of Dayro, all the outward appearance of his former greatness. This demeanour of the Generall's occasioned a second Civil warre, which was thought the more just, out of this respect, that in this the people took up Arms against an Usurper, who had not the quality of Dayro, nor consequently the Cha∣racter, for which the Iaponnesses have so great a veneration. Accordingly, this war had the same success with the former;* 1.388 for the Usurper was defeated and executed. But this second General took the same course as his Predecessour had done, so that by this second Usurpation, the Countrey was reduced to an absolute Anarchy, wherein all were Ma∣sters; there being no Prince, nor Lord, nay hardly a Village, but was engaged in war against some other. These disorders gave occasion to a Soldier of Fortune, named Tay∣cko, to appear at first, in the head only of fifty men, with whom he did such exploits, that he soon improved that handful to a very considerable Army.

His first adventures were the taking in of several Castles and small Cities; but with∣in

a while after, his thoughts flew much higher, and he proved so fortunate in his designs, that within less then three years,* 1.389 he became absolute Master of the whole State. He left the Dayro the external part of his former greatness, and thought it enough to be in effect, what the other was only in appearance. The Dayro, on the other side, perceiving it was impossible for him to prevent that establishment, comply'd therewith, and chang'd the qua∣lity of General of the Army to that of Emperour. Taycko, who could not expect much qui∣etness in his newly acquired fortune, if he removed not those Lords of whom he conceived any jealousie, resolved to keep them at a distance from the Court; and to that end, he sent the chiefest of them with an Army of sixty thousand men, into the Countrey of Corea, with order not to return thence till they had conquered that Province. They there met with such resistance, that they were near seven years reducing that Nation to obedience: Tay∣cko in the mean time feeding them with fair hopes, and animating them to prosecute a design of so great concernment to the State. They were forc'd to obey; but being impatient to return to their own habitations, they committed such exorbitances as made the Inhabitants of Corea desperate; insomuch, that not able any longer to endure the burn∣ing of their houses, the murthers, and other violences done them; they sent an Embassa∣dour to the Court,* 1.390 who to deliver his Country out of the miseries it had suffered for so many years, made a shift to poyson Taycko, who some days after dyed. The Army in Co∣rea was immediately disbanded, and the Lords who had the command of it, return'd to their several homes.

Taycko being on his death-bed,* 1.391 and considering with himself that he could not hope to derive the succession to his Son, who was but six years of age, if he made not some powerful Person Protector, during his Minority, sent to Ongosschio, one of the greatest Lords of the Country, desiring him to undertake the tuition of that young Prince. On∣gosschio accepted it, and to give Taycko the greatest assurance he could expect, that he would be faithful to him, promised him, by an act signed with his blood, that he would deliver up the Crown to Fidery, (so was the young Prince called) assoon as he were come to the fifteenth year of his age, and that he should be Crown'd Emperour, by the Dayro. The disorders of the late Civil Warrs were yet fresh in every mans memory, so that there was a general joy conceiv'd, to see the Regency in the hands of a person, excel∣lently qualified for the execution thereof. Ongosschio was indeed a person of very great en∣dowments, but he had withal too much spirit and ambition to be reduced to a private life, after he had been possessed of the Soveraign Power for so many years. He had obliged Fi∣dery to marry his Daughter, yet could not so near an alliance smother so that predomi∣nant passion in him. Whence it came that he immediately gave out, that Fidery was grown so distrustful of him, that he was forc'd to stand upon his guard, and to raise an Army to oppose that which Fidery was going to get together against him. He gave out also that Fidery would needs be treated as Emperour, and discharge the Functions there∣of, before the Dayro had acknowledged him to be such, or Crown'd him in that quality. Accordingly he took his march with a powerful Army, raised in the Kingdom of Suruga, towards the City of Ozacka, where Fidery lived, and after a siege of three months, redu∣ced him to so great extremities, that Fidery sent his Wife, who as we said before, was Ongosschio's daughter, to intreat her Father to grant him his life, and to sign him such Lands in any Province of the Kingdom as he should think fit, where he might live privately: But Ongosschio would not see his daughter, and continuing his siege, he be∣came at last Master of the Castle.

The unfortunate Fidery being got,* 1.392 with his wives, and several other persons of Quality, in one of the Palaces; Ongosschio ordered it to be compassed about with great piles of wood, which being set on fire, the Pallace and all within was reduced to ashes. He put to death all the Lords who had sided, or held any correspondency with Fidery, and by that means established himself the sole Monarch of that State, as Taycko, his Predecessour, had done before him. Ongosschio died the year following, and left the Empire in quiet, to his Son Combo, or Combosamme, the Father of Chiongon, who now Reigns.

It is no hard matter for the Emperour of Iapan to raise and keep an Army on foot,* 1.393 in regard all his Subjects are obliged to bring in and maintain a certain number of Soldiers, proportionably to their Revenue. For he who hath a thousand Kockiens, or four thousand Crowns per annum is obliged to maintain twenty foot and two horse-men; and according to this accompt, the Lord of Firando, (where the Dutch made their first establishment) who hath sixty thousand Kockiens of yearly Revenue, was tax'd at twelve hundred foot, and one hundred and twenty horse, besides the servants, slaves, and what else is consequent thereto. So that by this means, according to the Revenues of the Lords we mentioned be∣fore, which amount to eighteen millions, and four hundred thousand Kockiens, the Em∣perour

of Iapan may raise an Army of three hundred sixty eight thousand foot, and thirty eight thousand eight hundred horse,* 1.394 not accounting the hundred thousand foot and twen∣ty thousand horse, which he is able to maintain out of his own Revenue, and which he keeps as a standing Army, for the defence of his Castles and strong places, and for his Guards.

Most of these Lords find it no great trouble to make their Levies, for there are few of them but ordinarily maintain twice as many Soldiers, out of an humour they have to make great showes, especially upon those occasions wherein they expect to give some assurances of their courage or zeal they have for the service of their Prince.

Their Cavalry is armed with Corselets,* 1.395 but the Foot have only Head-pieces. The offen∣sive Arms of the Horse are a sort of Fire-locks, not much longer then our Pistols, half-pikes, Bowes, Arrows, and Cimitars. The foot wear every man two Cimitars, and have Muskets, Pikes, and Nanganets, or half-pikes, and every man hath about him a very broad Knife. Their Companies consist but of fifty Soldiers, who are commanded by a Captain, a Lieutenant,* 1.396 and ten Corporals, to wit, a Corporal for every five Soldiers. Five Compa∣nies make a Body, which is commanded by another Officer, and every fifty Companies have their Colonel. The Emperour of Iapan hath the same course taken, to know every year how many persons there is in his Kingdom. For every quarter of a City or Village is di∣vided into Cantons, consisting of five houses, which are commanded by a certain Officer, who keeps a Register or Catalogue of all those who die or are born within the five houses under his jurisdiction, and reports the same to his superiours, who give an account thereof to the Prince or Lord of the Province; and these last to two Counsellors of State, who are appointed for that purpose.

The Council of State consists of several Lords,* 1.397 who have each of them his particular function, excepting only the four chiefest, who are every day punctually at Court to give the Emperour an account of affairs. All the rest are so powerful and rich, that some among them have above two millions of yearly Revenue, others three or four hundred thousand Crowns, others but forty or fifty thousand. They are very reserv'd in the advice they give the Emperour, to whom they speak not, even of affairs, if they find him not in a good humour to hear them: but none will presume to speak to him twice of the same thing, or renew his intreaties, after a refusal. This Council consists of such Lords as the Empe∣rour may be the more confident of, in regard they have commonly their education at the Court. These have the management of all publick affairs, but with such dependance on the Soveraign's pleasure, that they do not only never resolve on any things of themselves, but indeed they never speak to the Prince, till he gives them some occasion to do it, and that they have first consulted his eyes, and studied his countenance, to find what his sen∣timents are. They ever approve what he says, though never so prejudicial to himself, even to the loss of a whole Province; for the least contestation would cost them their for∣tunes, if not their lives.

From what we said before,* 1.398 it is evident, that the Reyenues of these Lords are very great; but their Expences are as great. For, first, not one of them but is obliged to live one halfe of the year at Court, and, during that time, to keep house in the chief City of Iedo, where he who lives at the highest rate is most in favour with the Emperour. The first six months in the year, those Lords who have their Principalities and Lordships in the Easterly and Northerly Provinces of the Kingdom, continue at the Court, and the other six months, those that live in the Western and Southern Provinces. At their com∣ing to the Court, and their departure thence, they make very considerable Presents to the Emperour, and great Entertainments among themselves. Their Journeys and their Expences at Court, whither some Lords bring a Retinue of five or six thousand per∣sons, lie very heavy on the richest, and ruine the rest. The Lord of Firando, who, as we said, was one of the meanest, had in his Family, above three hundred men, and maintain'd in the two houses he had at Iedo, above a thousand persons, comprehending in that number the VVomen and Concubines he kept, as did also the other Lords, in one of his two houses.

Provisions are dear enough all over Iapan,* 1.399 but at an excessive rate about the Court, by reason of the abundance consumed by so great a number of persons of quality. Ano∣ther way to exhaust their Estates is, their magnificence in Building, there being still some∣what wanting in their appartments, either as to Painting or Gilding, or the like. Most of their Domesticks go in Silk, especially their Women, and those of their own sex that wait on them: so that there is hardly any Lord but spends more then his Revenue amounts to. But what helps to ruine them, is the Order they receive from the Emperour, to sup∣ply him, ever and anon, with men and mony, to carry on the publick Buildings, which he does rather to drain the Purses of these Lords, then out of any necessity obliging him there∣to.

The greatest Lords, when they build a Pallace, do ordinarily make two Gates thereto, one for their own use,* 1.400 and the other for the Emperours passage into it. The latter is much larger then the other, and made all of Joyner's work, excellently varnish'd, carv'd into branch-work, and gilt. Assoon as it is h••ish'd it is cover'd with boards, against the injury of the weather, and is not uncover'd, till near the time of the Emperour intends to honour the house with his presence, to dine there; and assoon as he is departed thence, it is shut up, and so kept ever after, out of this respect, that having serv'd for a passage to the Emperour's Sacred Majesty, it were a profanation, if any private person should pass through it after him. It is also to be observ'd that the Emperour never dines above once in any house belonging to another man, and that they are three whole years in making all things ready for his En∣tertainment. Accordingly he hath notice of it, three years before, and in the mean time all the furniture of the house is made and marked,* 1.401 as is also all the Plate, with the Arms and Characters of the Emperour; and after that time they are never more used, but kept very safe, as things not to be employed in any thing, after they have once served the Soveraigns person. So that this Expence, and that which they are at in the Entertain∣ment, which the Master of that House is obliged to make for the whole Court, for three months together, were enough to beggar an ordinary King.

Another thing lies heavy on these Lords, is, the Presents which the Emperour makes them. For upon his return from his ordinary Hunting, which is that of the Crane, a bird there very highly esteemed, he is wont to send some of those he hath taken, to such as he hath most kindness for. But that Present costs him at least half a years Revenue, in Feasts, Presents, and other publick Entertainments, which he is obliged to make in acknowledg∣ment of the favour done him by his Majesty, in sending him a Bird taken by a Hawk put off from his Sacred Hands. It is not long since, that the Lord of Zatiuma treated the Emperour at a Dinner, in a Palace which was then but newly finished; but he got well by the expence he had been at. For the Emperour made him a Present for his Horses, (so they call the Gratifications he makes his Favourites) by an addition to his former Revenue, of two hundred and fifty thousand Crowns per annum.

The Grandees never take any Wife,* 1.402 but what they have from the Emperours hands; and it is of her alone who is given by him, that the Children are to be born, who are to inherit their Estates. Accordingly, they look on her and respect her as the person from whom they expect Heirs for the propagation of their Family, and upon that account, re∣commended to them by the Emperour. He who expects to have this honour done him builds a Palace purposely for her reception, furnishes it very richly, and allows her a Re∣tinue consisting of a great number of Women and Maids, to accompany her, and wait on her.

Women go not abroad but once a year,* 1.403 to give their Relations a Visit, and then they are seen in the streets, with a Retinue of thirty, forty, or fifty close Palanquins, wherein are carried so many Maids of Honour, accompanied each of them by their Waiting Gen∣tlewomen, and other Women, marching in a File on both sides of the Palanquins, which are varnished over and gilt. All the remainder of the year, the women stir not out of their houses, into which there are not any men permitted to enter, save only some of the Wives nearest Relations, who sometimes have the freedom to see them, but very seldom, and that in their Husbands presence. It is his business on the other side to make the restraint as lit∣tle burthensom as may be to them, by allowing them all the divertisements and recreations, which honest women can take; finding them Gardens and Parks for walking, Ponds for fishing, keeping all sorts of living Creatures for their pleasure, and entertaining them every day with Musick and Plays. But they must expect to end their days in this restraint, and renounce the conversation of men, inasmuch as the least suspition is here as unpardo∣nably punished with death, as any other manifest crime; not only in the person of the Lady, but also in all about her. Her Attendants are commonly some of the handsomest young Gentlewomen in the Province, who always stand before the Master and Mistress with such respect, that they study to answer, laugh, and hold their peace, upon the least sign made them. They are ordinarily distinguished into Bands or Companies, consisting of sixteen Gentlewomen, who have each a Governess over them. They are clad in Silk, flower'd painted, or embroidered, of different colours or liveries. For one Band is in a red livery, with girdles and head-cloathes of a green colour; another, white, with girdles and head-cloathes red; another, yellow, with girdles and head-cloaths of a sky-colour, and so of the rest. The Gentlewomen, who are received into the service of these Princesses, at fifteen or twenty years of age, oblige themselves, most of them, for the remainder of their lives; but such as are taken into it while they are yet children, are sometimes after∣wards married to Gentlemen, Soldiers, or others of the menial Servants, who have some Office about the House, and whose Allowances are upon that Account augmented: but such as are not married at thirty, must not expect to change their condition, otherwise then by

being advanced to some more honourable Employments among the women.

It is the custom of the Countrey,* 1.404 that Women should be instructed betimes, not to meddle with any kind of business whatsoever, insomuch that they never speak of any such thing to their Husbands. These, on the otherside, make it their brag, that they are enabled with such a strength of parts and understanding, as to leave all serious thoughts behind them, at their own Lodgings, when they leave those to go into the appartment of their Wives, where their discourse is altogether of mirth and divertisement. If a Woman should trouble her Husband with the least discourse about business, she would immediate∣ly put him out of humour, make him change his countenance, and oblige him to retire, without so much as speaking to her. But this she will be sure to avoid, though out of no other motive then this, that another might not have those enjoyments of him, which she by her imprudence would deprive her self of. For they affirm, that a woman is be∣stow'd on man mearly to serve, and divert him, and to mind the education of his Children, and that herein consists all her duty, and that there are but too many Examples of the mis∣chiefs happening through the excessive freedom heretofore allowed to women.

The Wives of Iapan have the reputation of being extreamly faithful to their Husbands, and so modest and reserv'd, that none any where else come near them. Of this many in∣stances might be produced: but confining our selves to the relation of a particular man's Travels, wherein these digressions must needs be thought tedious, we shall here produce only two or three, of many others, that happend much about the time we speak of.

The King or Prince of the Province of Fingo,* 1.405 hearing that a Gentleman of the Coun∣try had a very handsom woman to his wife, got him dispatch'd out of the way, and having sent for the Widdow, some days after her Husband's death, acquainted her with his de∣sires. She told him, that though she had much reason to be glad, and think her self hap∣py, in being honour'd with the friendship of so great a Prince, yet was she resolved to bite off her Tongue, and murder her self, if he proffer'd her any violence; but if he would grant her but one favour, which was to spend one month in bewailing her Husband, and then give her the liberty to make an Entertainment for the relations of the deceased, to take her leave of them, he should find how much she was his Servant, and how far she would comply with his affection. The Prince, who thought himself sure enough of her, made no difficulty to do what the Gentlewoman desired of him, and having provided a very great dinner, at the place where she desired it might be, all the kindred of the deceased came thi∣ther, but it was only to be witnesses of the fidelity which she expressed to her husband after his death: For the Gentlewoman perceiving the King began to be warm in his wine, out of the hope he was in to enjoy what had been promised him, desired the liberty to withdraw into an adjoyning Gallery to take the Air; but assoon as she was come into it, she cast her self headlong down, in the presence of the King, and all her husbands Relations.

Much about the same time,* 1.406 it hapned that a young gentlewoman, being on her knees at the end of a Table, waiting on her Master, in the appartment of the Women, and over∣reaching her self to take a flaggon that stood a little too far from her, she chanced to let wind backwards, which she was so much asham'd of, that putting her Garment over her head, she would by no means shew her face after, but with an enrag'd violence taking one of her nibbles into her mouth, she bit it off with such fury, that she died in the place.

Another Lord,* 1.407 having had an exact search made for all the handsome young Damosels in his Province, to be dispos'd into his Ladies service, there was among the rest brought him one whom he was so much taken with, that he made her his Concubine. She was the Daughter of a poor Soldiers widdow, who hoping to make some advantage of her daugh∣ters good fortune, took occasion one day, to write her a large letter, wherein she express'd what a necessitous condition she was in, and how she was forc'd to sue to her for relief. While the Daughter was reading her Mother's Letter, her Lord comes into the room; but being asham'd to discover her Mothers poverty, she endeavours to hide the Letter from him, yet could she not convey it away so, as that the other did not perceive it. The dis∣order he observ'd in the Gentlewoman's countenance, made him suspect there might be some design in it, insomuch, that he pressed her to shew him the Letter; but the more importunate he was, the more unwilling she was to satisfie him; so perceiving there was no way to avoid it, she thrust it into her mouth, with so much precipitation that thinking to swallow it down, it choaked her. This so incensed the Lord; that he immediately com∣manded her throat to be cut, whereby they discovered only the Mothers Poverty, and the Daughters innocence. He was so moved thereat, that he could not forbear expressing it by tears; and it being not in his power to make any other Demonstrations of his affection to the deceased; he sent for the Mother, who was maintained among his other Ladies, at the time we speak of, with all imaginable respect.

They are generally so reserv'd in their conversation,* 1.408 that their discourses are not only far from being guilty of any obscene or impertinent expression, but also they will not so much as talk of marriage, or ought relating thereto, even in honourable terms, in the pre∣sence of young people, who, when there is any such thing spoken of, immediately rise and go out of the Room. The Children have a great tenderness and respect for their Parents, as being perswaded there is no sin more severely punished by the Gods, then the disobedi∣ence of Children. They have also a certain veneration for their memory after their de∣cease; for they religiously observe those fasting dayes they impose upon themselves of their own accord, abstaining from whatever hath had life, upon those dayes of the moneth, on which their Parents departed this World.

As they are very severe in restraining their Wives and Concubines of even the least li∣berty,* 1.409 so are they excessively cruel in punishing those which are not careful to preserve their honours, or give the least suspition of their inclinations to be dishonest. It is not long since that the Lord of Firando caused three Ladies to be put into so many Chests, through which there were Nails struck in of all sides, one, for having prostituted her self to a Gentleman, who ripp'd up his own belly as soon as their familiarity was discovered; and the other two, because they had been privy to their Loves, and had not acquainted him therewith. He who finds a Man lock'd up in the same Room with his Wife, may kill them both; and in the Husbands absence, the Father, Brother, or any other Kins∣man, nay, any one of the menial Servants may do as much: and by this means, they so avoid those scandals, which are but too frequent elsewhere, that a man seldom hears of Adultery among them; in so much that I do not remember I ever heard of any more then one Example, which being a remarkable one, I shall not think it much to insert it here.

A certain Merchant,* 1.410 who had some reason to suspect his Wife, pretended to go into the Country, but returning soon after, surpriz'd her in the very act. The Adulterer he kil∣led, and having ty'd his Wife to a Ladder, he left her in that half-hanging posture all night. The next day he invited all their Relations on both sides, as well Men as Women, to dine with him at his own house, sending them word, that the importance of the business he had to communicate to them, excused his not-observance of the custom they have, to make Entertainments for the Women, distinct from those of the Men. They all came, and wondered not much that the Mistress of the house was not to be seen, in regard her Hus∣band told them that she was busie in the Kitchin: but dinner being well-nigh past, and the Guests perceiving the Woman appear'd not, they intreated him to send for her, which he promised to do. Whereupon rising from the Table, and going into the Room, where she was ty'd to the Ladder, he unbound her, put a Shrowd about her, and put into her hands a Box of Lacque, wherein were the Privy-members of her Gallant, cover'd with Flowers, charging her not to open the Box, and saying to her, Go and present this Box to our common Relations, and see whether I may, upon their meditation, grant you your life. She came in that equipage into the Hall where they sate at dinner, and falling on her knees presented the Box, with the precious Reliques within it, to the Kindred: but as soon as they had opened it, she swounded. Her Husband perceiving it, went to her, and to pre∣vent her returning again, now that she was going, cut off her Head; which raised such an horror in the Friends, that they immediately left the Room, and went to their several homes.

To prevent these disorders,* 1.411 they have in their common Inns upon the Road, as also in certain places in Cities, the convenience of furnishing Travellers with a kind of Women, who are for the most part Slaves, but very well clad in Silk, and make no difficulty to prof∣fer themselves to keep men company all night. These have the Custom of Masters of Ships and common Sea-men that are Forreigners; but if they will bid at a little higher Game, and be more sure of their enjoyments, they may buy a concubine, with whom they con∣tract for the time they are to stay in the Country; allowing them five or six pence a day towards their diet, a Garment or two, certain pair of Shooes of Cordevant, and about eight or ten Crowns, for the Father, or Master, who lets her out.

We are so far from charging this Nation with being over-superstitious,* 1.412 that on the other side, we affirm, that there is no mark of Devotion to be observed among them. Those who are conceived to have very much, go once a moneth to their Pagodes, and pronounce seve∣ral times the word Nammanda, which is the name of one of their Gods; but they are never seen praying to God, neither morning nor evening, nor at any time of the day. There is a certain Sect among them, which hath Priests, who preach thrice a year, to which Ser∣mons all those of the same perswasion resort. There are also some who make use of ano∣ther kind of Ecclesiasticks, especially in their long diseases, wherein they have prayers

made, which last twenty four hours, with such a noise, that they stunne such as come near them, who yet cannot understand one word they say; not only in regard they pronounce ill and confusedly; but hence, that whatever they compose, as well in matter of Religion as Medicine, and the other Sciences, is couched in such high and obscure terms, that many times they understand them not themselves.

Notwithstanding this irreligion,* 1.413 there are in Iapan an incredible number of Pagodes or Mesquites, some of which have fifteen or twenty Priests belonging to them. They are distinguished from the Laicks in that their Heads are shaved, as also by their cloathing, in as much as they go in a kind of Cassock, made like the Frocks worn by some Country people: but upon Holidayes they go in a sort of long Garments, which they sold up un∣der the left Arm, like a Cloak. Their principal employment is to pray before their Gods, and to bury the dead, or at least the ashes of such bodies as have been burnt. They are divided into several Sects, and consequently have so many different wayes of doing their Devotions, especially on the Anniversary dayes of the deceased, which they call Bom, on which the Priests are employed in praying and singing Letanies, in making Processions a∣bout a Chappel set about with Wax-lights, much after the same manner as is done in some parts of Europe. Their Sepulchres are near their Pagodes, covered with great Stones, two or three foot high, on which such as go to do their Devotions there cast Flowers, or bran∣ches of Trees, and put into a little Pit, made in the ground, some fair Water and a little Rice, which is taken away thence by the poor. Persons of Quality erect a little Pillar near their Sepulchres, and grave thereon their names, with a certain Elogy, which serves for an Epitaph.

Their Ecclesiasticks are divided into twelve principal Sects,* 1.414 of which eleven eat not of any thing that hath had life, and make a Vow of Chastity, with so strict an Obligation for the observance thereof, that if they break it, though in never so small a point, they are put to the most cruel death that ever was heard of. For the Priest who hath broken his Vow is put into the ground up to the Waste,* 1.415 near the High-way; and all that pass by, who are not nobly descended, are obliged to give a little stroke upon his Neck with a wooden Saw, which being very blunt makes the Wretch languish three or four dayes together. This course is taken with them, upon this account, that being permitted to use Sodomy, they may forbear Women.

The Priests of the twelfth Sect live after another rate. For it is lawful for them to feed on any thing that Earth or Water affords, as also to marry: and yet this Sect, which they call Icko, whence the Priests, whereof it consists, are named Ickois, is accounted the holiest, and most perfect of them all. He who is Head of this Sect, is also Supream Head of all the Clergy of the Country, and is in so great veneration among his followers, that they do not only carry him in a Palanquin, but indeed do him such honours as are almost Di∣vine. All the Priests depend on the Dayro, who still hath the same power over the Ec∣clesiasticks, as he had heretofore, joyntly, with the secular power. Only such Pagodes as belong to these last have a settled Revenue, and enjoy many Priviledges and Immunities granted them by the Emperours. All the other Pagodes are maintain'd by what is given them, either by way of Alms, or the Gratifications that they get from those who imploy them about Prayers for the dead, wherein the main part of the exercise of their Religion consists.

Some among them believe,* 1.416 that the Soul is immortal, that the Body is reduced to its first Principle, and becomes Dust and Ashes, but that the Spirit is either raised to eternal joy, or condemn'd to an endless grief, and that at its return into this World, it shall find good or evil, according to what it had done during this life. Others make no distinction between the Souls of Men and those of Beasts, and as they have no knowledge of the Worlds Creation, so are they ignorant that there is a time appointed for its dissolution. The most zealous among them make no scruple to convert their Pagodes into Drinking-houses; for, as they make choice of the most delightful places of the Country, for the Pagodes, so they walk in them, and divert themselves, in the presence of their Gods, and have the com∣pany of their Priests, drinking and debauching themselves to that height, that it proves the occasion of many consequent disorders.

A man shall never,* 1.417 in this Country, meet with any Controversies about Religion, nor ever find that a Iapponese conceives himself any way obliged to instruct his Neighbour, or shew him his Errour: but on the contrary, their indifference for these concernments is generally so great, that some among them will not stick to change their Religion for a hun∣dred Crowns.

They have so irreconcilable an aversion for the Christians,* 1.418 that, perceiving they went chearfully to their deaths, when they only cut off their Heads, and crucified them after

their death, they have since found out such exquisite torments, to procure their more pain∣ful departure, that, though they had resolution and constancy enough to endure them; yet could they not express that insolence and insensibility, as to receive so greivous a death, with the same alacrity they had discover'd at the ordinary Executions. There were in∣deed some who sung amidst the Flames; but it would have been somewhat above huma∣nity, if they should not have groan'd in the torments they endured, when they were broild, with a gentle Fire, upon Gridirons, or suffer'd to languish ••or several dayes together. Yet did not all these courses much diminish the number of those Wretches; in so much that these Monsters of barbarisme, perceiving that Death little frighten'd those who look'd on it but as a passage to a better life,* 1.419 bethought themselves of other courses to be taken with them. Young Maids, of any Quality, they caused to be stripp'd stark naked, to be pub∣lickly violated, made them go on all four through the Streets, and dragg'd them through rugged and uneven places, till their hands and knees were cut, and their bodies torn in se∣veral places, and after all put them into Vats full of Serpents, which enter'd into their bo∣dies at all the open places, and so put them to a very painful death: yet was this done with less horrour, then when they fill'd the privy parts of a Mother or a Daughter with Match done over with Gun-powder, and bound about those of a Son or a Father with the same, and forced the Son to set fire to that of the Mother, and the Father to that of his Daughter. 'Twas a kind of favour shewn them, when they cover'd their bodies all over with Turfs, and incessantly pour'd ••eething Water into their privy parts, till they expi••'d amidst those torments, which commonly dispatch'd them not in less then three or four dayes. They drove great companies of them up and down the Country, and into Forrests, stigmatiz'd in the foreheads, with prohibitions, upon pain of death, that any should give them any sustenance or entertainment. Some were put into Cages upon the Sea-side, that the Tide might come up to their chins, and at the return of the water they might recover their spirits a little, to endure the greater torment at the next Floud. They bound the Fa∣thers and Mothers to a Post, and hood-winked them, while they put the Children to incon∣ceivable torments, which they being not able to endure, intreated their Parents with the most importunate expressions they could imagine at that age, to deliver them out of their pains, by renouncing. This was one of the most insupportable punishments of any they invented, and which brought many to death and abjuration. Another torment they had for those poor Children was, to pluck off their Nails, and to prick them with Bod∣kins in the tenderest parts of their bodies. To make a discovery of Christians, they or∣dered, that all the Inhabitants should once a year protest before their Pagodes, and sign a certain Instrument, whereby they renounced Christian Religion; and by this means there passed not a year, but a great number was discover'd. Such as were hung up by the feet, and were continued in that posture for ten or twelve dayes, endured the greatest torment of any, in regard the anguish of this punishment still increasing, there is no pain, not even that of fire it self, comes near it.

These persecutions must needs have much diminish'd the number of Christians in Ia∣pan; but what most contributes to the destruction of Christian Religion, is a course they have taken, to put the Christians to death, even though they proffer to renounce; so that there is no way for any to avoid death, but by discovering another Christian, who may endure it in their stead, and by that discovery they escape. However, there is an exact Register kept of these Renegadoes, out of a design, as it is conceiv'd, one time or other, to rid the Country of them, when the Executions must cease for want of Christians.

About the same time there was a search made for Christians in all the Hospitals for Le∣pers, where they found three hundred and eighty Christians, whom they sent away in two Ships, to the Philippine Islands, as a Present to the Portuguez. The Leprosie is so common a Disease in Iapan, that a man shall meet there with many, whose fingers and toes are so rotted, that they fall off.

The Christians, who are conducted to punishment, are tied; but the Priests, whether Castilians, Portuguez, or Iaponneses, are otherwise treated. They shave off one half of their Heads and Beards, which they paint over with a red colour, put a Gag into their Mouths, and a Halter about their Necks, which is tied to the Horse-tail, on which they are brought to the place appointed for their execution.

Most of their Houses are built of Wood,* 1.420 sleightly enough, in regard the Country is very much subject to Earthquakes. They are all raised three or four foot from the ground, boarded and matted, and very handsom within, especially those Rooms where they reveive their Visits. They are, for the most part, but one story high, in which they live, and the rest serve for Corn-lofts. They have places distinct from their Houses, where they keep

their Merchandises, and what else they most esteem, in regard their Houses are so apt to take fire, that they are forc'd to have Fats full of Water alwayes ready against such Acci∣dents, which are very frequent among them.

The Houses of Gentlemen and Souldiers are divided into two partitions, whereof one is taken up by the Wife, who is never seen, and the other by the Husband, who hath his Chambers and Halls for the reception of his friends and his business. The Wives of Ci∣tizens and Merchants appear in the Shops, and have a care of the House; but they are treat∣ed with so much respect, that none durst let fall a free or equivocal expression in their pre∣sence, nay, a licentious one were criminal. Instead of Tapistry, they have a kind of Scenes or Shutters, which serve them also for Pictures, whereof they cover the closures with Pa∣per painted and gilt, and so neatly pasted on, that the whole piece seems to consist but of one sheet. These Shutters are made of very thin boards, and fall one into another, so as that of two or three small Chambers, they can of a sudden make a very fair Hall. All these little Rooms make•• a kind of Gallery, which serves equally for both the Appartments of the Husband and Wife, and leads to a common Door to go into the Garden, which Door is ordinarily opposite to the Hall-windows. In the midst of the Room there commonly stands a Cabinet, on which they set a Pot of Flowers, which are there to be had all the year long. They are very curious about their Gardens, and make them as pleasant as may be, with Groves, Fountains, Orchards, and especially one kind of Tree, which is as green in Winter as in Summer.

There is not much Houshold-Stuff to be seen in their Houses, in regard they bestow on their Wives, the Trunks and Cabinets of Lacque, their rich Tapistry, and the like, or they dispose them into some private Rooms, into which they admit only their most intimate Friends. They are very expensive in their Pots for Cha, or Tsia, as also in Pictures, Pieces excellent for the writing, and in Arms.

They are civil,* 1.421 and entertain such as visit them with great Complements. Persons of Quality make such as come to see them sit down, and present them with Tobacco and Tsia. If the Master of the house hath a particular esteem for the Friend who visits him, he will treat him with Wine, which is brought in a varnish'd Cup; and it were an incivility in him, to whom this honour is done, to refuse it. They are not so reserv'd, but that sometimes they will take a little more then they are well able to carry away; but seldom to that height, as to do ought whereof they may repent the next day, or quarrel in their Drink; for the perpetual apprehension they have of the unavoidable Death that would follow, keeps them in, and sends them to bed with whole Skins.

In Cities, and upon the High-wayes, there are Inns, for the entertainment of Travellers and Passengers, but otherwise there is not a Tipling-house, or Cooks-shop, in all Iapan.* 1.422 For though there are great lovers of good chear, and company keeping, yet have they not any publick places for that purpose, but they meet at one anothers houses, and there spend the time in good fellowship and drinking, and have a kind of Musick, which is not very harmonious.* 1.423 They have but few Musical Instruments, and that most used among them, and which they are most taken with, is a kind of Lute, the belly whereof is above a foot∣square, with a long and narrow neck, as being made only for four strings, which are of Silk, and they strike them with a Peg of Ivory, about the bigness of a Mans singer. They sing to it, but the voyce is as immelodious as the sound of the Instrument.

Their Wine they make of Rice,* 1.424 putting thereto some Sugar or Honey, and they call it Moursack, or Saltse. It is a kind of Hydromel, rather then Wine, yet it is as strong as the best Sack, and makes a Man drunk much sooner.

As for Tsia,* 1.425 it is a kind of The or Tea; but the Plant is much more delicate, and more highly esteem'd then that of Thé. Persons of Quality keep it very carefully in Earthen-pots well stopp'd and luted, that it may not take wind: but the Iaponneses prepare it quite otherwise then is done in Europe. For, instead of infusing it into warm water, they beat it as small as powder, and take of it as much as will lye on the point of a Knife, and put it into a dish of Porcelane or Earth, full of seething Water, in which they stir it, till the Wa∣ter be all green, and then drink it as hot as they can endure it. It is excellent good after a debauch, it being certain there is not any thing that allayes the Vapours, and settles the Stomack better then this Herb doth. The Pots they make use of about this kind of Drink are the most precious of any of their Houshold-Stuffe, in as much as it is known, that there have been Tsia-pots, which had cost between six and seven thousand pound sterling.

Their Marriages are sollicited only the Relations,* 1.426 who have some superiority over those that contract them. The Father and Mother find out the party, and propose that alliance▪ and for want of them, others of the Kindred; so as that the young Couple know nothing

of what is done, in so much that the persons who are to be married never see one another till the Marriage is to be consummated. This is the more easily effected, in that it is in the Husbands power to keep what number he thinks fit of Concubines, nay, may prosecute his enjoyments among common Prostitutes, whereas the least suspition of the Womans disho∣nesty would cost her her life. They have also the convenience of Divorce, and may send their Wives back to their own Friends, yet conceive it no disparagement to them. True it is, that only Persons of mean condition use it, as Merchants, Tradesmen, and common Souldiers; and that Persons of Quality take another course, out of a respect to the Birth and Relations of the Woman; and in case of disagreement they still maintain them ac∣cording to their Quality. Which hinders not but that they also are most liberal of them∣selves among their Concubines, little it seems troubled at the discontent they give their Wives, whom they see but when they please themselves. For, certain it is, that the Wo∣men only are married, and that the Men are as much at liberty after, as they had been be∣fore marriage. Common Brothel-houses are allowed, and there are some Masters who buy Slaves only to drive that trade; it being their perswasion, that to avoid a greater scandal, this may be permitted.

They bring up their Children with extraordinary indulgence and mildness,* 1.427 never beat∣ing, and very seldom chiding them; out of this consideration, that knowing they are not come to the use of their reason, they conceive they are not to be made capable thereof be∣fore the time, and that things are to be instill'd into them, according to their weak capa∣city, with mildness, and that they ought to be instructed rather by good Examples then many Precepts. It is to be imagined that the little correction they give them in their Childhood, strengthens that obstinate disposition, which is remarkable in all the Iapponne∣ses: but it is to be confessed withall, that this noble and mild kind of education much heightens that vivacity of Understanding and Judgment, which is discernable in them, while they are yet very young; in so much that Children of seven, eight or nine years of age, have more piercing Wits, and are more searching and inquisitive, then our youth is at seventeen or eighteen years of age.

They are not sent to School till they are seven or eight years of age,* 1.428 upon this account, that, as they affirm, Children are not capable of instruction before that time, and that they are apt to learn only naughtiness and unhappy tricks one of another. The Masters, when they meet with dull Boys, never either chide or beat them for that, but teach them to read and write by degrees, by raising an emulation in them to do as well as others; and by this course they improve them much better, then if they treated them harshly, it being to be observ'd, that it is an incorrigible Nation, expecting to be mildly treated, and seldom to be bettered by soul means and blows.

They never swath the Children,* 1.429 but as soon as they are brought into the World, the Midwife having wash'd them in cold Water, thrusts them into the Sleeves of their Iapon∣neses, and by that means they so harden them against heat and cold, that many times such as scarce have the use of their legs, will crawl stark naked of all four about the House, and into the Fields.

The eldest Son being come to Mans estate, the Father resigns his charge to him; or, if he be a Merchant, makes over his Trade to him, with the better half of his Estate, assigns him the best Lodgings in the House, and goes with the rest of the Family to another part of it; or if he be a person of ability, he resigns the whole House to him, and takes ano∣ther, mannaging what he hath reserved of his Estate, for the advancement of his other Sons, if so be he hath any. The Daughters have no part of the Fathers Estate, no not even when they are married, in regard they would not have Wives to make any advan∣tage of their Dower; so that if the Brides Father should on the Wedding-day send a sum of Money to the Bridegroom, he returns it back again with great Complements, and sends word, that he would not have his Father-in-Law think, that his Addresses to his Daughter proceeded from any other motive then the desire he had of his alliance, and consequently that he expected not to make any advantage of his Estate.

They are so ambitious and highly conceited of themselves,* 1.430 that it is seldom seen a Ia∣ponnese does any thing wherewith he might be reproached: but on the contrary, they would rather lose their lives then betray their honour. Of this I shall here insert an illu∣strious Example.

In the time of the War between Fidery,* 1.431 and his Guardian, the King or Prince of Coco∣ra, who had discovered some inclination to the contrary party, was forc'd to leave his Wife and Children as Hostages with Fidery, who hearing that the Prince of Cocora had openly declar'd for his Adversary, sent word to his Wife, that his pleasure was, she should come and live within the Palace. She would have excused her self, by representing to Fidery,

that she was a Wife, and as such, ow'd the Prince her Husband the same obedience, as her Husband ow'd to the Emperour; so that if his Majesty expected she should do what he would have her, his best course were to apply himself to her Husband, that he might com∣mand her to do it. Fidery seeing her constancy, sent her word, that if she came not, he would have her brought thither by force. But the Princess considering with her self, that if she left her House, it would be a dishonour both to her and her Husband, withdrew her self with her Nurse and Children, and some of the menial Servants, who proffer'd to dye with her, to a Chamber, into which she caused Gun-powder and Wood to be brought, and having made her Will, and writ a Letter to her Husband, she put both into the hands of a trustly Person, with order to depart as soon as he had seen the Powder set on fire, and by this means gave an extraordinary Demonstration of her constancy.

They are also very punctual in the performance of what they had promised those,* 1.432 who desire their assistance or protection. For no Iaponnese but will promise it any one that de∣sires it of him, and spend his life for the person who hath desired him to do it; and this, without any consideration of his Family, or the misery whereto his Wife and Children may be thereby reduced. Hence it comes, that it is never seen a Malefactor will betray or disco∣ver his Complices; but on the contrary, there are infinite Examples of such as have chosen rather to die with the greatest torment imaginable, then bring their Complices into any inconvenience by their confession.

Iapan is so rich and abundant in all things,* 1.433 that, some few Merchants excepted, who trace into the Indies, there is hardly any Iaponnese, who meddles with the venting of any forreign Commodities. The greatest Commerce which is carried on there is that of the Chineses, who have continued theirs in this Country ever since the Island was first peopled. The Spaniards and Portuguez have traded thither these six or seven score years; and the English had no sooner begun, but they gave over their trading into those parts, by reason of the small advantage made thereby. Those of Siam and Cambodia were wont to send thither yearly two or three Ionques; but this is also given over, especi∣ally since the Dutch bring them the Commodities of Iapan at a lower rate, and with less danger then they could fetch them themselves. The chief Trade is at the City of Mea∣co, whither most of the Merchants, as well forreigners as those of the Country, bring all their Commodities, and where they have their Agents and Factors, to distribute them over all the Island.

The Commodities which Forreigners bring to Iapan are,* 1.434 about four or five thousand Picols of Silk, and abundance of Stuffs, of Silk, Cotton, Thread, &c. above two hundred thousand Deer skins, about a hundred thousand other Hides, Hemp, Linnen-clothes, Wooll, Garments, Cotton, Quicksilver, all sorts of Gums and Medicinal Drugs, Spices, Cloves, Pepper, Sugar, Musk, a sort of Wood called Sappan, and Calambac, Purcelan, Cam∣phir, Borax, 'Elephants Teeth, Coral, and all kind of Mercury, which the Chineses bring.

The Chineses and Iaponneses have heretofore lived in very good correspondence, in so much that there hardly passed a year, but the Kings of those two powerful States visited one another by reciprocal Embassies. This friendship continued till the Iaponneses, who lived in China, became so insolent, as to ransack a whole City, and to ravish all the Women and Maids that fell into their hands. The Chineses resented the affront as they ought, and killed all the Iaponneses they met withall. The King of China, considering of how dan∣gerous consequence it was to afford refuge to a sort of people, who had the insolence to com∣mit such an action in the time of peace, banished them his Kingdom for ever, ordering the Decree to be graven in golden Letters upon a Pillar, which to that purpose he caused to be erected upon the Sea-side, and forbidding his Subjects, upon pain of death, to trade into Iapan. These Prohibitions are still so strictly observ'd, that the Chineses, who go thither, give out, that they carry their Commodities to some of the neighbouring Islands of the Indies; in regard they are sure they would be confiscated, if it were known they carried them to Iapan; but the Iaponneses treat the Chineses otherwise, and give them the egress and regress of their Country.

It is haply from these Prohibitions of the King of China,* 1.435 that some have taken occasion to affirm, that Iapan was peopled by certain Exiles, whom the King of China had sent thither, upon a Conspiracy they were engaged in against his person; since the Histories of neither Iapan nor China speak of any such thing, and that otherwise there is so great a difference in their Cloathing, their Ceremonies, manner of Life, Language and writing, that it is impossible that the same Nation should have contracted, even in the sequel of many Ages, such contrary Habits. Some affirm, that the Iaponneses have made this change, in revenge for the ill treatment they received of the others; but besides the unlikelihood

there is, that a whole Nation should, of a sudden, conceive an aversion for what they lov'd before, there is yet a greater improbability, that it should so change its language and man∣ner of writing, as that there should be no rapport between the one and the other. The Chineses never cut their Hair, but tie it up together upon the Crown of the Head; the Ia∣ponneses, on the contrary, shave the fore-part of the Head down to the Ears, and tie up the rest of their Hair in their Neck behind, with a String made of Paper. The latter do also shave their Beards, whereas the Chineses suffer theirs to grow to their full length: whence it may be imagined, that they were rather Tartars, who first got into this Island, then Chineses.

The Iaponneses, being thus banished China, began to establish their Commerce at Tayou∣an, in the Island Fermosa, whither the Chineses came with their Commodities; but the King of China hearing of it, forbad his Subjects ••o trade thither, by which means the Ia∣ponneses were frustrated of that Navigation. W••ich so troubled the Emperour, that he would not permit his Subjects to trade out of the Kingdom without his express Commission and Pasports; as well out of this consideration, that he would not have any Arms transported out of the Country, as the experience he hath that the Iaponneses are a stout and daring People out of their own Country, and being extreamly conceited of himself, he would not have any affront done them, which it should not be in his power to resent, or that any other then himself should chastise their insolence, as it happened to them, not long since in the Kingdom of Siam, upon their Attempt against the Kings person there, and at Nayouan, upon their assaulting the Governour of the place.

There is no Custom or Duty paid upon any Commodities in Iapan,* 1.436 either to the Em∣perour, or any other Prince or Lord, so that the whole advantage comes in to the Mer∣chant; but in regard all drive some Trade or other, and that the Countrey is extreamly populous, the profits are very small.

Since the Rupture between the Chineses and Iaponneses, the Emperour of Iapan hath not held any correspondence with any forreign Prince.* 1.437 The King of Siam, the Pope, and the King of Spain, sent very considerable Embassies to him, which were all very kindly received by him; but the Emperour of Iapan never sent to visit or complement them.

There is, all over Iapan, but one Language, which is so different from that of China, Corea, and Tunking, that the Inhabitants of these four Countreys, understand one another no more then we do the Arabick. There is also the same difference between their Chara∣cters, and yet they have all four a sort of Characters, by which they understand one the other, so that those among them, who have studied, understand and express in their parti∣cular Language, what the others would have expressed in theirs, by means of these com∣mon Characters. They write with Pencils, and that so fast, that they spend very little time in writing the Notes, by which they do most of their Messages, rather then by word of mouth. They endeavour to express themselves in few words, especially when they either speak or write to Persons of great Quality; so that the Letters and Petitions they address to their Superiours are couched in few words, that it is no great trouble to afford them the reading.

They have not the way of keeping Accounts as the Merchants in our parts have;* 1.438 but they can count with certain little Bowls, which they thread upon little Sticks on a square Board, as fast as our ablest Accountans by all the Rules of Arithmetick, even that of Three.

They have many Books, and some great Libraries, but of these not so great a number as we have in Europe.

The Dayro is the person who keeps Memorial of whatever passes,* 1.439 and writes the Chro∣nicle of the Country. It is also only he, and the Lords and Gentlemen of his House, who are in number above eight hundred, as also the Lords and Ladies descended from him, who have the priviledge to write any Books. These only have all the Learning among themselves, and are so proud of it, that the advantages they make thereof are equal to those they derive from their Birth, which is no doubt more noble then that of the Emperour. Thence it comes that they sleight all others so far, that they shun their conversation, live in a quarter of the City distinct from the rest, and will have no communication with the ignorant.

There is but one kind of Measure all over the Country,* 1.440 and all the Money is at the same rate and value. The Gold is in its excellency, but the Silver not so good, so that to re∣duce it to the rate of that of France, there will be a loss of 22. or 23. in the 100. They have three sorts of Gold Coins, whereof one weighs six Spanish Ryals, and is worth forty eight Tayls, accounting every Tayl at about five Shilling Sterling. Ten of the second

kind weigh a Ryal and half a quarter, and are worth one Tayl, and a fifth part each of them: and ten of the third sort weigh a Ryal and a half and half a quarter, and are worth, each of them, the sixth part of Tayl. The Silver Coin, which is made in the form of a Lin∣got, is of no certain weight; but it is so ordered, that as much of it as amounts to fifty Tayls is to be of a just weight, which they dispose into Rolls of Paper, in each as much as comes to twenty Crowns, and so they dispatch their Payments with little trouble. They have besides this a lesser Coin of Silver, made much like French Beans, which also is not of any certain weight, save only in gross, or when it amounts to such a sum, from the value of seven pence to six shillings, or better. There is also a great difference in the value of the Caxias; for of some of them, a thousand are worth but Crown, whereas of others the same number may amount to three Crowns and a half. Much about the time of our Tra∣vels the Emperour had ordered them to be caried down, intending to have a new Money made of Brass, and that the poorer sort might not be ruined thereby, he caused the bad Money to be called in, and made good the value of it to such as brought it in.

This Country wants not any kind of Cattel,* 1.441 but is so much the more abundant therein, out of this respect, that they do not geld any Creature. Thence it comes they are well stor'd with Houses, Bulls, Kine, Swine, Deer, wild Boars, Bears, Dogs, &c. as also with all sorts of Fowl, as Swans, Geese, Ducks, Herns, Cranes, Eagles, Falcons, Pheasants, Pidgeons, Woodcoocks, Quails, and all the other sorts of small Birds, that we have in these parts.

There are also in this Country several sorts of Mineral Waters, very good against divers Diseases. Some have the taste and qualities of Copper, others that of Saltpeter, Iron, Tin, Salt; and there is, among others, a Source of hot water which hath the taste of Tin, and issues out of a Caye, which is about ten foot diameter at the mouth, and hath both above and below several picked Stones, like Elephants teeth, so that it somewhat resem∣bles that figure, by which some would represent the Jaws of Hell. The Water, which comes out of it in great bubbles day and night constantly, is not so hot, but that it may be endured as soon as it is out of the Source, so that there is no need of mixing any other water therewith.

There is in this Country, in a spacious Plain, at the foot of a Mountain, not far from the Sea-side, another Source, which gives Water but twice in four and twenty hours, and that during the space of an hour at each time, unless it be when the East-wind blows, for then it gives water four times a day. This water comes out of a hole, which Nature hath made in the ground, and which they have cover'd with several great Stones; but when the time of its floud, as I may call it, is come, the water is forced out with such violence amidst the Stones, that it shakes them all, and makes a cast twenty or twenty four foot high, with such noise as would drown that of a great Gun. It is so hot, that it is impossible fire should raise ordinary water to so high a degree of heat, as the earth gives this; for it im∣mediately burns the stuffes on which it falls, and keeps its heat much longer, then the wa∣ter that hath been boil'd over the fire. The Well is inclosed with a high Wall, having at the bottom thereof several holes, through which the water runs into certain Channels, and so is brought into the houses, where they bath themselves, reducing it to such a degree of warmth as may be endured.

Some affirm that their Physicians are so able,* 1.442 that there is no Disease which they cannot discover by the Pulse. They are perfectly well skill'd in the vertues of Simples and Drugs, especially those of the Radix Chinat, and Rhubarbe, whereof they make use in their Reci∣pe's, which for the most part consist in Pills, with very good success. They are also very fortunate in the curing of ordinary Diseases; but Chirurgery is not as yet known among them.

The Mineral Waters we spoke of before,* 1.443 are a sufficient demonstration, that there are in Iapan Mines of all sorts of Metals. Accordingly, there is found Gold, Silver, Copper, Tin, Iron and Lead. The Country brings forth also Cotton, Flax and Hemp, wherewith they make very fine Cloaths. It produces also Silk, and affords abundance of Goat and Deer skins, the richest Works of Wood and Lacque of any in the World, all sorts of Pro∣visions and medicinal Drugs. They have, among others, a particular Invention for the melting of Iron,* 1.444 without the using of any fire, casting it into a Tun done about on the in∣side with about half a foot of Earth, where they keep it with continual blowing, and take it out by Ladles full, to give it what form they please, much better, and more artificially then the Inhabitants of Liege are able to do. So that it may be said, Iapan may live with∣out its Neighbours, as being well furnish'd with all things requisite to life.

The Portuguez came to the knowledge of Iapan, by means of the Trade they drove in the Kingdom of Siam and Cambodia. They found it no hard matter to settle themselves

there, in as much as the Iaponneses had not, at first, any aversion for their Ecclesiastical Ce∣remonies,* 1.445 so that in a short time the Roman Catholick Religion got such footing there, that they were permitted to build Churches in several places of the Kingdom, and particularly at Nangasacky. But the Spaniards too soon discover'd the Design they had to establish themselves there, and had not the reservedness to smother that haughty homour, which would reign all over the World: which occasion'd the Iaponneses first to set upon, and afterwards,* 1.446 to burn their Ships, in so much that in the year 1636. they banish'd them the Country, with Prohibitions, upon pain of Death, not to return into it.

The Dutch have traded thither ever since the year 1611. and still continue it, so much to their advantage,* 1.447 that their Commerce to Iapan is worth what they carry on all over the rest of the Indies. They affirm in the Relation of the Voyage they made thither in the year 1598. that the City of Meaco is one and twenty Leagues about, but that it had been much ruined by the precedent Civil Wars. That Ossacks, and Boungo, are Cities, which, for Wealth, may be compared to any other in the Indies. That the Emperours of Iapan were ordinarily interr'd in the City of Coyo, of if they made choice of any other place for their Sepulture, yet were some of their Bones carried thither, though it were but a Tooth. That the City of Piongo, eighteen Leagues from Meaco, was in some part ruined during the Civil Wars of Nobananga, who was defeated by Faxiba, the Predecessour of Taicko, and that what remained of it was partly destroy'd by an Earthquake that happened in the year 1596. and partly by the fire which consumed the wretched remainders of it, some time after. The Cities of Sacay, Voluquin, Founay, Tosam, and several others, are also very con∣siderable ones.

The Air is good and healthy,* 1.448 though more inclin'd to cold then heat, and yet the Ia∣ponneses sow their Corn at the beginning of May, but cut not the Rice till September.

They have neither Butter nor Oyl, and have an aversion against Milk, out of an imagi∣nation, that the Souls of Beasts reside in it, and that it is bloud in effect, though of a diffe∣rent colour. They do not eat the flesh of either Bulls or Kine, nor that of any tame beast, but love wild Fowl and Venison, and are much addicted to the hunting thereof. They have Cedar-trees, which are so big, that they make Pillars of them for their greatest Edi∣sices, and Masts for their Ships.

Poverty is not so criminal or infamous in Iapan,* 1.449 as it is in several places of Europe, where the rich are only accounted vertuous. They hate Calumniators, Swearers and Gamesters; but they have also their Vices, which much eclipse their other good parts.

They are rather of a brownish Complexion then white, strong and well set, enduring paints taking, and the inconveniences of the Seasons, with incredible patience. They en∣dure hunger and thirst, heat and cold, without any trouble, and are no otherwise clad in Winter then they are in Summer.

The Iaponneses are distinguished into five Orders.* 1.450 The first, is that of Kings and Princes, and such as have civil or military Charges and Employments, who are all called by a com∣mon name Tones. The second is that of Ecclesiasticks, whom they call by a general name Bowzes. The third is that of Gentlemen and Merchants. The fourth that of Trades∣men, and such as relate to the Sea. And the fifth that of Labourers, and such as work by the day.

The general administration of Affairs is in the hands of three principal Ministers of State; the first whereof,* 1.451 superintendency is over Ecclesiastical affairs, hath the qua∣lity of Zazo; he who hath the disposal of Charges and Offices is called Veo, and he who hath the oversight of things relating to the War is called Cabacama.

There could not be hitherto had any true account of the Emperour of Iapan's Reve∣nue: but it is certain that he makes above two Millions of Gold of the Rice, which his own Demesne affords him every year. It is also certain, that the Emperour of Iapan is so powerful, that Taicko, whom we spoke of before, finding himself well settled upon the Throne, had a design to pass over into China, with a Fleet of two thousand Vessels, for the building whereof he had already cut down Timber, which he might have done with the more ease, upon this account, that the Iaponneses are incomparably a more warlike Nation then the Chineses.

But in regard there is not any thing makes a greater descovery of the greatness of this Monarch, then the Ceremonies of the Interview between him and the Dayro, whereof we promised before to give here a short description, we think fit to that purpose to insert in this place the Extract of a Relation made by the Director of the Dutch Commerce in Iapan, who was at Meaco in the year 1626. This Author sayes, that being at the Empe∣rours Court in the moneth of October, in the year aforesaid, with some others of the De∣puties of his Nation, he was desirous to see the Procession, which was made there on the

25. of the said moneth. To that end they went the 24. and with the retinue took up a house, which they had hired near the Dayro's Palace, in regard the next day it would have been impossible for them to pass the Streets.

On the said 25. of October,* 1.452 as soon as it was light, they found the Streets and tops of Houses full of people. The Streets were rail'd in on both sides, from the Dayro's Palace to the Emperours, having files of Souldiers all along, and the middle of the Street strew'd with white Sand, all laid so even, that nothing should retard the Procession, or disturb its Order. These Souldiers, who were part of the Dayro's Guards, part of the Emperours, were all clad in white, having on their Heads Casks of black Lacque, by their sides two Cymitars, and in their Hands a Nauganet, that is, a Iaponnese Pike.

The first appearance was that of a great number of the Domesticks of these two Prin∣ces,* 1.453 going to and fro, as also that of several Porters or Sedan-men, who carried in great square Chests, which were of black Lacque and gilt, the baggage of the Dayro to the Em∣perours Palace.

Then followed,* 1.454 in forty six Palanquins, carried each of them by four men, so many Maids of Honour belonging to the Dayro's Wives, who went in that equipage to the Emperours Palace. The Palanquins were of a fine white Wood, painted with Verdure, garnished with brass Plates, very neatly made, and five or six foot high.

After them there came one and twenty other Palanquines of a kind, which they call Norrimones, varnish'd with black and gilt.

Next them there came twenty seven other Norrimones,* 1.455 of the same bigness with the precedent, but made with Wickets and Windows, for so many Lords of the Dayro's Reti∣nue, who were carried in them to the Emperours Palace, having every one before him a gilt Umbrello, covered with very fine Cloth. They had about them a hundred and eight Pa∣ges clad in white,* 1.456 and behind them four and twenty Gentlemen, armed as if they were rea∣dy to engage in a fight. These had on their Heads a kind of Bonnets of black Lacque, with a little Plume of Feathers of the same colour, and under their Iaponnesses they had long and narrow Breeches of Satin, of several colours, embroidered with Gold and Silver, with Buskins varnished with black, and gilt at the extremities. By their Sides they had Cimitars, the Hilts whereof were gilt, and Bows and Arrows at their Waste, and over their Shoulders Scarfs richly embroidered, the ends whereof hung down on the Cruppers of their Horses. No doubt, they had cull'd out the goodliest persons in the Country of this Ceremony; for they were all the handsomest persons, both as to Body and Countenance, that could be seen. Their Saddles were varnish'd over and gilt, the Seats embroidered and covered with Tigers and Lynxes Skins; their Trappings were of Crimson Silk twined, and the Horses had their Mains tied up with Gold and Silver Thread, and they had on the Breast and Crupper a kind of Net-work of twined crimson Silk, and instead of Shooes their Hoofs were done about with plain crimson Silk. Every Horse was led by two Lac∣quies, and two other Lacquies carried two great Umbrelloes, covered with a very fine and transparent cloth, and upon that a covering of Scarlet fring'd with Gold. Another Lacquie carried a Nanganet, or Pike, the top whereof was also covered with a piece of red and black cloth. Every Horsman had eight Pages clad in white, and arm'd with two Cymitars, according to the mode of the Country.

This body of Horse serv'd for a Guard for the three chiefest of the Dayro's Wives,* 1.457 who followed it in three Coaches of so extraordinary a making, that we shall not think it much to afford them a short description. They were at least twenty or twenty five foot in height, ten or twelve in length, and five or six in breadth, having on each side three, and before, two Windows with embroydered Curtains. Before and behind they were made like the Front of a House, as was also the Door at which they went in, which was made behind at the back. The Wheels were of Iron, and the Coach was varnished all over with black, so that the Wheels might be seen turning as it were in a Looking-glass. The Roofs of them, which were built Arch-wise, had drawn thereon the Dayro's Arms, within a great Circle of Gold. The Pillars, as also the inside of the Coach, was inriched with Figures of beaten Gold and Mother of Pearl, and all the extremities were garnished with Gold. Two great black Bufflers, covered with a Net-work of Crimson Silk, drew each of them, and they were guided by four Halberteers clad in white. Every Coach was valued at seventy thousand Tayls, which amount to twenty thousand pounds Sterling.

These Coaches had also their Foot-guard, and many Pages marching on both sides of them.

Twenty three of the chiefest Servants belonging to these Ladies were carried next to them in so many black Norrimones,* 1.458 adorned with Brass plate, having each of them march∣ing before him a Halbertier, who carried an Umbrello, on each side two Pages, and behind

them sixty eight Gentlement of the Dayro's, clad and armed as those we mentioned be∣fore.* 1.459 These march'd two a breast, and were followed by a great number of Pages, Halber∣teers, and Slaves.

After them there were carried.

• Two gilt Stools, with Plates of Gold at the extremities.
• A great Fire-work.
• A great and very rich Sea-Compass.
• Two great Golden Candlesticks.
• Two Pillars of Ebony.
• Three Cabinets of Ebony, garnished with Gold plates.
• Four other Cabinets, bigger and richer then the three precedent.
• Two great Gold Basins carv'd.
• A pair of Pantofles varnish'd.

After these,* 1.460 there followed in two Coaches of the same making as the three first, the Emperour and his Ward, having before them a hundred and sixty Gentlemen, armed with two Cymitars and a Nanganet, serving for a particular Guard about their Majesties persons. These Guards they call Sambreys, and they are chosen out of the most valiant and most active persons in the Kingdom. Immediately before the Coaches there march'd four Men with Umbrelloes, four others with great Iron Rods to make way, two light Horses magnificently cover'd, and with very rich Trappings, accompanied each of them by eight Men, arm'd with Bows and Arrows, and two great Pikes.

The Emperours Brethren followed next on Horse-back, accompanied by all the Princes and Lords of Iapan, who were also on Horse-back▪ all armed, and sumptuously clad, 164. in number.

The Chiefest of these Lords were, * 1.461

• Owaruy Camny Samma, the Emperours Brother.
• Quiney Deymangon samma, another Brother of the Emperour.
• Mittot Chonango samma, a third Brother of the Emperour.
• Massummenamoet Nocammi samma, a fourth Brother of the Emperours.
• Matsendairo Thoy quese Nocammi samma, Lord of Canga.
• Matsendairo Moutsnocammy samma, Satsumadonne, that is, Lord of Satsuma.
• Matsendairo Iondonne.
• Mansendairo Symouts quedonne.
• Matsendairo Quonenoch, Wacchoo; and
• Turogan•• Deynangono Cammy samma.

These march'd all in a File, having each of them a long train of Pages, Lacqueys, Hal∣••erteers, Guards and Slaves.

The other Lords, among whom were Ouwaydonne; and Woutadonne, the ehiefest of the Emperous Councel, march'd two a breast, he of the greater quality taking the left hand, which among them is accounted the more honourable.

After them march'd four hundred of the Guards of the body, and in the same order, in white Liveries.

Next them,* 1.462 in six fair Coaches, came the Dayro's Concubines; but these Coaches were not so large as the former, and were drawn each of them by a single Buffer.

Then followed sixty eight Gentlemen on Horse-back, attended by a great number of Lacqueys and Slaves.

The Dayro's Secretary,* 1.463 accompaied by thirty seven Gentlemen on Horse-back, fol∣low'd next in a Coach, and immediately preceded forty six Lords of the Dayro's House, who were carried in Norimonnes, whereof fifteen were of Ebony, beautified with Ivo∣ry, thirteen varnished with black and gilt, and the other eighteen were only varnished with black. There were carried after them fourty six Umbrelloes suitable to their No∣rimonnes.

Then followed the Dayro's Musick,* 1.464 which consisted of fifty four Gentlemen, very odly, but very richly clad, who plaid on their Instruments, which were only Tabours, Timbrels, Copper Basins, Bells, and that kind of Lute we spoke of before, which was not heard by reason of the confused noise of the rest.

Yet was this distracted kind of Musick delightful to the Dayro, who immediately fol∣lowed it.* 1.465 He was sate in a little wooden Structure made like a Sedan, but much larger, as being about seven or eight foot high, and as many Diameter, having windows on all sides, with embroidered Curtains. The Roof of that little Structure was arch'd, and had in the midst, upon a great Button, a Cock of massie Gold, with his Wings spread in a Field Azure, with several Stars of beaten Gold about the Sun and Moon, which appeared there with a lustre coming near the natural. This Machine was carried by fifty Gentlemen of the Dayro's retinue, all clad in white, with Bonnets on their Heads. Fourty other Gen∣tlemen went before it, and represented the Guard for the Dayro's person. These were clad after a particular fashion, much like that of the ancient Romans, carrying each of them a gilt Nouganet. The Captain of the Guard marched alone on Horse-back, behind the Day∣ro's Chair, armed with a Target, stuck through with several Arrows, and had carried after him fourty Umbrelloes for the Guards.

Next were carried thirteen varnish'd Chests, and in the close of the Procession came four hundred Souldiers clad in white, who marched six a breast, and by that means hinder the crowds of people to interrupt that Order. This Ceremony took up the whole day, so that night coming on upon us at the place where we were, we thought it not safe to venture home at so unseasonable a time, by reason of the many Robberies, Murthers, and other Violences committed in the Streets during the disorder, which proved so great, that the next morning there were found a great number of dead persons, some whereof had been kill'd and robb'd, and others had been smother'd in the throng. The Dayro staid three dayes at the Emperours Palace, who during that time waited on him in person with his Brethren, and had the charge of his Table, for that time defray'd by Sugadonne, chief Judge of the City of Meaco, Ivocamosamma, Cob••ritot homy Samma, Macamora, Mockiemon samma, and Mannosa Fr••yemon samma. There were brought to his Table at every meal, a hundred and fourteen dishes of meat.

Ouwaydonne, the President of the Emperours Councel, Ivemondonne, one of the Coun∣sellors of State, Farimadonne, Quiniem Ondonne, Sioyserodonne, and Chirotadonne, provided for the Table of the Dayro's three chiefest Wives.

The Emperours Present to him were.

• Two hundred Marks of Gold.
• A hundred Garments of Watte, of the best.
• Two great Silver Pots, full of Honey.
• Five Catties of the Wood of Calambae.
• Two hundred pieces of Crimson Serge.
• Five Pots of Silver, full of Musk; and
• Five excellent Horses with very rich Trappings.

The young Emperour gave him.

• Three thousand pieces of Silver amounting each to four Tayls and three Mases.
• Two fair Cymitars set forth with Gold.
• Two hundred rich Garments after the Iaponnese fashion.
• Three hundred pieces of Satin.
• A piece of Calamba••-wood, three Ells and a half in length, and above two foot thick.
• Five great Vessels of Silver, full of Musk; and
• Ten excellent Horses with rich Trappings.

These shall suffice for an account of the Kingdom and people of Iapan.

The Island FERMOSA.

WE said elsewhere, that when the Iaponneses were banish'd China; there were also Prohibitions made, that none should trade with them, and that the Chi∣neses, to avoid the confiscation of their goods, which they might carry to Iapan, made choice of the Island of Tayovang, for the continuance of their Commerce.* 1.466 This example encouraged the Dutch, in the year 1632. to make use of the convenience of the same place, in regard the Chineses had depriv'd them of all hope of Commerce with them, if they came not out of their Country, and setled not themselves in a place where they might give no occasion of suspition.

There is not in all the East, a more convenient haven for the Trade of China, and for the establishment of a Communication with Iapan, and all the rest of the Indies, then this Island affords. For ships may come thither at all times of the year, so as that they need not stay for the Moussons, or convenience of the general winds, which in all other places last six moneths of the year.

About that time the Dutch built there a Fort,* 1.467 with four Bastions, all of freestone, upon a Down, or Sandy assent, within half a League of the great Island Fermosa. Within three hundred paces of the Fort, there passes a Channel, which serves for a Haven, though, even at high water, there be but thirteen or fourteen foot water; but the ships that An∣chor there may defie any wind. They have made a redoubt of Stone, very well flanck'd upon the Channel, where they have a little Garrison of twenty five or thirty men, which are enough to defend the entrance of it; and they have found the scituation of it so ad∣vantagious, that they have given it the name of new Zealand.

The Island Fermosa,* 1.468 that is, the Fair Island, called by the Chineses Paccande, lies at 21. Degrees on this side the line, within 32. Leagues of the River of Chineheu, and the Island of Quemoy in China, reaching in length from South-west to North-east, as far as 21. De∣grees and a half.

It is about a hundred and thirty Leagues in compass,* 1.469 and contains many Villages, and an infinite number of men, who acknowledg no King nor Soveraign, and have no other Superiours over them, then such as they create among themselves, after the manner we shall give an account of hereafter. Its Rivers are excellently well stor'd with Fish; Its Forrests well furnished with all sorts of wild-Fowls and Venison; and its Fields, which are for the most part Meddows, in a manner covered with Cattel. They have Deere, Wild-Goates, Hares, Conies, Pheasants, Partridges, Pidgeons, &c. and besides these a kind of horned Horse, by the Inhabitants called Olavang, whose horns are like those of Deere, and the flesh very delicate. They have also Tygers, and another kind of Animal, which they call Tirney, made like a Bear, but much stronger. The skin of this Beast, they account one of the most precious things that the Island produces.

The ground here is fat and fruitful, but so poorly cultivated, that there are very few Fruit-trees, and the little Fruit that is, so bad, that though the Islanders eat it in some delight, yet cannot other Nations so much as taste of it. There grows some Ginger and Cinnamon in this Island, which they say hath Gold and Silver Mines, whereof the Chi∣neses have sometimes made trial; but it is more then the Dutch could ever discover.

The parts thereof which these last mentioned have most frequented are,* 1.470 Sinkan, Man∣danw, Toulang, Taffacang, Tifulucang, Teosang, Tefurang, which are all within a small di∣stance of the Fort Tayouang; so that they may be all gone to in two days, save only the Village of Tefurang, which lies in the Mountains, at a day and a halfs journey at the least, from the habitation of the Dutch. The rest lies as it were upon the Sea-side, and have all the same manner of life, the same Religion, and almost the same Language.

A man would take the Inhabitants at the first sight,* 1.471 to be Barbarians, and Savages. For the men are strong and hardy, much bigger then any of the Europeans, and coming somwhat near the stature of the Gyants. Their bodies are hairy all over, and they are of a brown complexion, inclining to black, as most of the Indians are. The women are somewhat less, but fat enough, and, for the most part, well shaped. They make a greater discovery of shamefacedness then the men, in that they have somewhat of cloathing about them: but both men and women strip themselves, when they bath, which they do twice a day, in warm water▪ for then, the latter are not ashamed to be seen by men, nor care much whether they have ought about them.

This People, which in appearance seems to be so barbarous, is in effect, good natur'd, faithful and obliging,* 1.472 entertaining strangers with much kindness and civillity, and com∣municating to them such good chear as nature affords them. It hath never been found that they were desirous to get what belongs to any other by indirect ways, but on the contrary, they have often returned to the owners what they found mis-laid or lost; though the Inhabitants of the Village of Toulang have a very ill report, as to this particular. They are constant and faithful in their friendship, and religiously observe, as well the Treatises they make among themselves, as those made with Forreigners. Treachery is a thing they are so unacquainted withal,* 1.473 that there is no misfortune which they would not suffer rather then any reproach should be made them of unfaithfulness. They want neither ingenuity nor memory, but easily apprehend and retain what is said unto them. 'Tis true, they have an humour of impudently begging any thing they see; but they are denied with the same freedom, and are satisfied with a small matter.

They live altogether by the little Husbandry they carry on, and the Rice they get out of the ground. Not but that their Lands are very fruitful, and that the Cantons we named before might produce, what were able to sustain above ten thousand Families: but in regard they have no Ploughs, nor Creatures fit for Tillage, they have no other way of digging the ground, then that of the Spade, and that by the hands of Women; in∣asmuch as the men mind only War and Hunting, and so their increase cannot be so great as that of those places where they have better conveniences. Another employment of the women is, to transplant the Rice, when it grows thicker in one place then another; which work takes up much of their time, as does also their cutting of it when it is ripe. For in∣stead of reaping it by handfulls with a Hook, they cut it Corn by Corn, some four or five fingers below the Ear, so put it up in the house, and never beat it but when there is occasion, in order to their subsistance, that is, every day. The woman of the house sets over-night two or three little bundles of it a-drying in the Chimney-corner, and rising the next morning two hours before day, she beats it in a Morter, and makes as much clean Rice as is requisite for the Family that day, and no more. And thus they live all the year long.

They sow also two or three sort of Fruit,* 1.474 which they call Ptingh, Quach, and Taraun, which are somewhat like Millet, as also a kind of Pulse much like the French Bean. They 〈◊〉〈◊〉 also several sorts of Roots, which they may use instead of Bread, and which in effect 〈◊〉〈◊〉 able to sustain them, though they had no Rice nor any other kind of Fruit or Corn. They have Ginger, Cinamon, Sugar-canes, Bannanan's, Lemmons, abundance of Areea, and several other sorts of Fruits, Simples, and Pulse, not known in Europe, such as it would be no easie matter to describe.

Though they have no Cocos-wine,* 1.475 nor any other natural drink, yet have they found out a way to make a kind of Beverage, which is as strong, and intoxicates a mans brains assoon as the best Sack. Their way of ordering it is thus. They set a soaking in warm water a certain quantity of Rice, which they afterwards beat in a Morter till it be reduced to a Paste. Then they chew some Rice-meal in their mouths, which they spet into a Pot, till such time as they have got a Quart of Liquor, which they put to the Pas••e instead of Lea∣ven, and after they have kneaded all well together, till they have brought it to Dough, such as that of the Bakers, they put it into a great Earthen Pot, which they fill up with water, and so let it remain there for two months; and by this means they make one of the best and most pleasant Liquors that a man need drink. This is their Wine, which is stronger or weaker according to the time it remains in the Pot; and the older it is, the better and sweeter it is; insomuch that sometimes they keep it five and twenty or thirty years. VVhat is towards the mouth of the Pot is as clear as Rock-water, but at ••he bot∣tom there are only dregs, such as were able to turn a weak stomack; and yet the Islanders make it one of their delicacies, and eat it with Spoons, having first stirr'd at about, with a little water put to it. When they go into the Countrey, they carry along with them a Pot of this stuff, and a Gourd-bottle full of water, and so they are furnish'd as to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and drink. They make use of the upper part of this Beverage, as of Aqua-vi••ae, to com∣fort the heart, and they eat what's in the bottom, ordered as we said before; whence it comes that they spend most part of their Rice in this composition.

When the women have no work to do about their Grounds,* 1.476 and particularly to get Oysters, which the Islanders prefer before all meat whatsoever. They have a way of salting the Fish slightly assoon as it is taken, with the shell, and whatsoever is within it, and they eat them with all the filth, nay with the worms, which sometimes are bred within them for want of Salt.

The men,* 1.477 especially the younger sort, to the age of twenty four or twenty five years,

do nothing at all: but when they are come to forty, they help to do somewhat about the grounds, where they continue night and day with their Wives, in little Huts, and return not to the Village till some necessity or divertisement calls them thither.

They have several kinds of Hunting,* 1.478 and use, in their sport, Snares, slender Pikes, or Bows and Arrows. They spread their Snares or Nets in the Woods, cross those Paths, which the Deers and wild Boars are wont to make, and force those Creatures into them: or haply, they spread them in the open fields, with the convenience of a great Cane, one end whereof they plant in the ground, and the other is bowed down, and fastened to cer∣tain little sticks, upon which they lay a Suare cover'd with a little earth, which assoon as the wild Beast touches, the Carie is suddenly as it were unbent, and hath him by one of the feet. The Hunting with that kind of Pikes is thus. There met together, at a cer∣tain place appointed, the Inhabitants of two or three Villages, arm'd every one with two or three Pikes, and having divided themselves into several parties, they send their Dogs into the Woods, and they force out the Game into the Fields, where they meet, and make a great Ring, a League or more in compass, within which when they have once gotten the Deer and wild Boars, it seldom happens that any of them escape without being kill'd or hurt. The Pike it self is of Cane, six or seven foot in length, having an Iron at the top with several Hooks, so as that being entred into the beast, it is beyond any mans strength to get it out: but the Iron is not made so fast to the Wood but that it comes off at the first bush the beast runs into; and to the end it may still annoy the Deer, there is a Cord fastened thereto, which holds both, and at the top of the Iron there is a little Bell, where∣by the Beast is discover'd where-ever it goes. They destroy so great a number of Deer by these kinds of Hunting, that being not able to spend all they take themselves, they sell the flesh of them to the Chineses, for little Garments, Sweet Wood, and other Com∣modities, eating themselves only the Umbles and Paunch, which they salt with the filth in them, and indeed care not much for them, till when they are thus corrupted. Some∣times while they are hunting, they cut off a piece, and eat it immediately, so as that the bloud runs about their mouths; and if they find any young ones in the belly of the Fe∣male, whether come into any form or not, they eat them with the skin and hair, as a thing very delicate.

Their Military engagements are as followeth.* 1.479 They begin not any War till they have first declared it against the Village by which they conceive themselves injured, and then they go by small parties of five and twenty or thirty men, and hide themselves near the place they are to assault, till it be night, and then they run about the Fields, and if they find any in the Huts, where aged persons are wont to keep, as we said before they kill them, cut off their heads, and, if they have time enough, the hands and feet, and some∣times they cut the whole body to pieces, that every one may carry away his share, and shew the marks of his courage at his return. If the Country take the Alarm, so as they cannot quite cut off the Head, they think it enough to cut off the hair, which they car∣ry away as a noble Demonstration of their Victory; which is accounted among them a very considerable one, though that in an exploit of this nature there happens to be but one man kill'd. Sometimes they venture so far as to enter into the Village, and break open some house; but in regard that cannot be done without noise, they go upon such a Design with so much precipitation, that lest they should be intercepted in their return, they kill all they meet, and fly for it. They also use stratagems, and make Ambushes ac∣cording to their way, and sometimes they engage in the open field, where they fight with great animosity: but the death of one man passes among them for an absolute Defeat, and obliges those who have had that loss, to an immediate Retreat.

The Pikes they use in the Wars are made of a different manner from those they hunt withall:* 1.480 for the Iron at the top hath no Branches nor Hooks, and is made fast enough to the body of the Pike. Their Bucklers are so large, that they almost cover all the whole body, and their Swords on the contrary, are short, but broad. They use also Knives made like those of the Iaponneses, Bows and Arrows.

When several Villages make an Association among themselves to carry on a War jointly against some other Villages, the Command of their Forces is not bestow'd on one Chief, who hath Authority sufficient to force himself to be obey'd: but such among them as have been so fortunate as to cut off divers heads upon several occasions, find Volunteers enough to follow them in their military Exploits, out of no other Consideration, then that of partici∣pating of the Glory of their Commander. Sometimes they engage in a War out of a pure frolick, against the Inhabitants of the Island of Tugin, which the Dutch call the Island of the Golden Lyon,* 1.481 upon this account, that the Captain and Master of a Ship, of that name, were there killed by the Islanders. The Inhabitants of

this place permit not any strangers to come within their Island; nay they suffer not the Chineses, who come thither every year upon the account of their Commerce, to set foot on Land; but they force them to stay in the Road, whither the Islanders bring the Commo∣dities they would truck with them; with so much distrust on their side, that they never let go any thing out of one hand, till they have fast hold of what they would have in the other. The Inhabitants of Fermosa, especially those of the Village of Soulang, having a Design to surprize them, embarqu'd themselves not long since, to the number of sixty, dis∣guiz'd like China Merchants, and being come near the Island of Tugin, sent to some of the Islanders to come and meet them with the Commodities of the Countrey: but instead of receiving them from his hands, who presented them therewith, they laid hold of his arm, and drew him aboard their Vessel, where they cut him to pieces. This was a great Victo∣ry to them; for they think it enough to bring away the Hair, or haply a Pike of the Enemies, to make a solemn Triumph, and appoint a day of publick Thanksgiving. They carry the Heads in Procession all about the Village, singing Hymns to their Gods, and, in their way, visit their Friends, who make them drink of the best Arac, and accompany them to the Pagode, where they boil the Head, till there be nothing left but the Bones, on which they sprinkle some Wine, Sacrifice several Swine to their Gods, and feast it for fifteen days to∣gether. They do the like when they have brought home only the Hair, or a Pike, which, as also the Bones of their Enemies, they keep a•• ••••••fully as we do Gold, Silver, or Jewels, inasmuch as when a House is a-fire, they abandon all, to save their Relicks. They tender so great respect to those who have had the good fortune to bring home an Enemies Head, that no person comes near him, but with a certain veneration, for above fifteen days after his doing such an exploit, nor speak to him but with such extraordinay submissions, as that a Soveraign Prince could not expect greater.

There is no Lord in all that Island,* 1.482 that hath a Superiority or advantage over the rest. Their condition is equal, save that in every Village there is a kind of Senate, consisting of twelve persons, which are changed every two years. The two years being expir'd, they who are to quit their places pull of their Hair off their Eye brows, and on both sides of their Heads, to shew that they have been Magistrates. The Senators are chosen out of persons much about the same age, which is that of forty years: for though they have no Almanack, and cannot count their years, yet do they remember well enough the course of the Moon, and take particular notice of such as are born within the same Month, and about the same Year.

Not that this Magistrate hath any Authority to force himself to be obey'd,* 1.483 or to put his Commands in execution; for all the power they have, is only to give order for an Assem∣bly to be held, concerning such Affairs as they think of importance, to confer among them∣selves thereof, and to invite all the Heads of Families, to meet in one of their Pagodes, where they propose to them how things stand, discover what they think fit to be done, and endeavour to bring the rest to be of the same judgment with them. All the Senatours speak one after another, and use all the Eloquence they have to press their Reasons the more home: I say, Eloquence, for they really have of it. For they will speak half an hour together in such high expressions, with so much ease, and with such apt gestures, that what we are taught by Art comes not near what Nature hath bestow'd on these People, who can neither write nor read. While one speaks, all the rest are so exactly silent, that you shall not hear so much as a Cough, though their Assemblies many times consist of a thousand persons. When all the Senators have done speaking, the rest put the business to deliberation, with an absolute freedom of either complying with the judgment of the Senate, or oppo∣sing it, after they have considered the good or evil which may accrew to them thereby.

All the power they have consists in causing what their Priestesses command to be put in ex∣ecution,* 1.484 in preventing ought to be done which may offend the Gods, and in punishing such as do offend them. They also give reparations to private persons who have been injur'd by o∣thers: not by causing the offenders to be imprison'd or punish'd with death, or other corporal punishment; but in condemning them to pay a piece of cloth, a Deerskin, a certain quantity of Rice, or a pot of their Aracque, by way of satisfaction, according to the quality of the crime.

There is a certain season of the year, wherein they go stark naked, and say they do it out of this consideration, that were it not for that, the Gods would not cause it to rain, and the Rice would not grow: insomuch, that if during the said time, the Senators meet with any one that hath ought about his waste, the cloth or whatsoever it be, is confiscated, and he is adjudged to a penalty, which at most, is but two Deer-skins, or a certain quantity of Rice amounting to the same value. Whence it comes, that it is one of the principal Functi∣ons of the Senatours, to be during that time, morning and evening, about the avenues of the Village, and to punish such as they find Delinquent. There

are other seasons wherein they are permitted to cover that part of the body, (which is ne∣ver uncovered in other places,) but with this restriction; that the garment, or rather skarf, wherewith it is covered, must not be of Silk; whence it also comes, that the same Se∣natours are to take particular notice of it, confiscate those Silk Garments, and adjudge the offendours to pay a penalty; as they do also the women, who to make the greatest ostentation, upon days of publick Ceremonies, go otherwise then they are permitted to do.

The Senatours on the otherside, are obliged to observe a certain manner of life, about the time that the Rice grows ripe; for during that time, they are forbidden drinking to ex∣cess, the eating of sugar and fat, and chewing of Areca; out of a perswasion that the peo∣ple would not only slight them, but also that the gods would send the Deer and wild Boars into the Rice, to destroy it.

The Magistrate hath no power to punish murther,* 1.485 theft, or adultery; but such as are injured do themselves Justice. When the theft is discovered, he who hath been robb'd, goes accompanied by his Friends, to find out the person who hath robb'd him, and takes out of his house what he thinks sufficient to make him satisfaction, by an accommodati∣on he makes with the other; but if he finds any Opposition, he declares open hostility against him, till such time as he hath made him satisfaction. He who finds himself inju∣red in his reputation, by Adultery committed with his Wife, revenges himself another way; for he takes out of his house who hath had to do with his wife, two or three Piggs, as a satisfaction for the injury he hath received. The Friends and Relations on both sides com∣pose the differences arising between private persons, in the case of murther, and so regu∣late the civil concernment.

There is among them so great an equality of condition, that they are yet ignorant of the names of Master and Servant. Yet does not this hinder, but that they render great honour one to another,* 1.486 and express a great respect and submission one towards another: not out of any consideration of a more eminent dignity, or upon the accompt of wealth, but only upon that of Age; which is so considered among them, that a young man is obliged to go aside, to make way for an old man, and turn his back to him, by way of respect, till he be passed, by continuing in that posture, even though the old man should stand still to speak to him. No young man dares deny the doing of what the other commands him, though he should send him three or four Leagues upon some business of his. They are the an∣cient men who have the chiefest places, and are the first served at Feasts.

As to their Marriages;* 1.487 the men are not permitted to marry till they be twenty or twen∣ty one years of age, which they call Saat Cassiu wang. Till they are sixteen or seventeen they are forbidden to wear long hair, so that they cut it even with the tip of the Ear; and in regard they have neither Cisers nor Rasors, to do that work, they make use of a Parring, which is a kind of little chopping-knife, lay down the hair upon a piece of wood, and cut it as exactly as the most expert Barbers among us. They draw forth the hair of their faces with little Pincers of Brass or Iron, or with the string of a great Cane which they double, and getting the hair fast between it, they turn the string till the hair be taken out. Being come to the seventeenth year of their age, they let their hair grow, and when it is come to its ordinary length, they begin to think of marriage. Maids ne∣ver cut their hair, and they are married assoon as they are marriageable.

Their marriages are contracted and continued after a pleasant manner.* 1.488 The young gallant who hath an inclination to a Maid, sends his Mother, Sister, or some Kinswo∣man to the relations of the Maid, to shew them what he intends to bestow on his Mistress. If they receive his addresses ki••rdly, and are satisfied as to his estate, the marriage is im∣mediately concluded, insomuch that the young man may consummate it the night follow∣ing. The wealth which the most able among them send to their Brides, consists in seven or eight of these skarfs of Silk or Cotton, wherewith the women cover themselves about the waste, so many little wastcoats of the same stuffe, three or four hundred bracelets of Canes, ten or twelve Rings of Latten, or Deers horn, which are so broad that they hide half the Fingers, and so thick, that when the Ladies have them on, they are rather a trouble, then any ornament to them; four or five Girdles of course Cloth, ten or twelve little Vest∣ments, which they call Ethgrao, and are made of Dogs-hair, twenty or twenty five Can∣gas or China garments, a bag of Dogs-hair as big as a man can well carry, which they call in their Language Ayammamiang, a kind of head-gear, made like a Mitre, of straw and Dogs-hair; and lastly, in four or five pair of stockins of Deer-skin; so that all put toge∣ther may amount to about forty Crowns at most. Others who are not so rich, give only three or four Bracelets, and certain Garments, all not amounting to above two or three Crowns.

The marriage being thus concluded,* 1.489 the young Gallant goes in the Evening to his Bride at her Fathers house, and endeavours to get in by stealth, shunning both fire and light,

lest he should be seen, and so creeps into the bed, where the marriage is to be consummated. This he does for many years after his marriage, coming thence before day, and returning at night to his Wife▪ who still continues at her Fathers house, concealing himself so from those of the houshold, that to call to his Wife for Tobacco or ought else he stands in need of, he only hems, and permits her to return to the company she was in before, as soon as she hath done what he desired. Of this carriage the reason is, that it were a shame for her to leave her Relations, to go to her Husband. Their bed-steads are made of Bambus or Canes; a baven serves them for a bolster, and a Dear-skin for bed and all belonging three∣to.

The women living thus with their Fathers, till the ground belonging to the Family, while the Husband lives at his own house, and provides only for himself. They never see one another in the day time, unless they appoint it to be in some remote place, where they may not be seen speaking together; or unless the young man goes to the house, when he knows there is none but his Wife at home; yet will he not enter, till he hath sent one to know, whether it may be done without any inconvenience to her. If she think fit he should see her, she comes to the door, and makes him a sign to enter; but if she desires not his company, she sends him away. The children they have remain with the Mother till they are thirteen years of age,* 1.490 and then the Father takes them home. The Women bear no children till they are thirty-five or thirty six years of Age, but destroy in the womb such as they conceive before that time. To procure abortion, they have one of their Priestesses comes to them, who kneeling upon their bellies causes miscarriage, insomuch that the Fruit of the Womb, is forc'd out before they leave kneeding of them in that man∣ner, with greater pain to the Woman, then if she were naturally delivered. Not that they are wanting in point of kindness to their Children, but prepossessed and befotted with the lewd impression they receive from their Priestesses, that it were a great sin and shame for them to bear Children before that Age.

The men live not with their Wives till they are forty years of Age. Then they take their leave of the Pagodes of their quarter, forsake their own houses, and go and live in the VVives; but being come to that Age, they spend most of their time in the Fields, retireing in the night time into Huts, that they may be near their work.

Notwithstanding this liberty,* 1.491 which the men have to see their wives when they please themselves, and to divert themselves elsewhere all day long, yet would they have also the conveniency of Divorce. Assoon as a man is weary of his wife, he leaves her, and mar∣ries another; but with this difference, that if he puts her away without cause, the pre∣sents he sent her shall remain hers; but if she be convicted of Adultery, or chance to be so transported with passion, as to revile her husband in words, or affront him otherwise, she is bound to make restitution. Divorce is reciprocally free to both parties, so that Wedlock no more obliges the woman then it does the men; and it often happens that both of them change their conditions. They condemn Polygamy, though some of them marry two or three wives. But in regard there is neither Law nor Magistrate to punish any Crime wherein there is no Civil concernment, this remains unpunished, as well as Adul∣tery; for, provided they conceal it from their own Wives, and her Husband whom they abuse, they may confidently, and without any scandal seek their fortunes elsewhere. A man never finds any incestuous marriages among them, nor that a man takes a wife with∣in the fourth degree of Consanguity or Affinity. Nor do they care a man should aske af∣ter their Wives, as how they do, whether they be handsome or not, of what friends they come, &c.

Boyes, from four years of Age and upwards, nay married men, when they do not lodge with their Wives, lye not at their own houses, but in a Pagode or Mosquite, where the Males of fourteen or fifteen Families meet in the Evening, and lye there, upon little Cou∣ches or Bedsteds of Canes, made as we described before.

Their houses are spacious,* 1.492 and fairer then such as are ordinarily seen in the Indies. They are all raised five or six foot from the Ground, and have four doors, one towards every quarter of the Heavens. There are some have two of a side, and are three or four stories high. They have no other ornament then what they derive from the heads of Deer and wild-Boars, wherein they are covered both within and without. You find in them only certain stuffs, wherewith they cover themselves, and Deer-skins, which in their trade with the Chineses, is to them instead of mony. All the houshold-stuff they have in their houses are only Spades to digg the ground withall, Pikes, Bows, Arrows, and some other Arms. But what they account most precious, are the heads or other Trophies ta∣ken from their Enemies▪ Instead of dishes, they use little troughs of wood, such as among us are set before Swine. Their drinking-pots are of Earth or Cane, and they also boil their Rice in Earthen-pots.

Rice is their ordinary sustenance; and if they put thereto either fish, or flesh, they eat not of it, till it be corrupted and full of worms.* 1.493 Their drink is not ill, especially to such as have not over-weak stomacks, or know not how it is made; but on the contrary it is wholsome and very pleasant.

They have no set day for either rest or devotion,* 1.494 and celebrate no Festivals, yet do they meet on certain days to be merry, and make good chear; every quarter meeting, to that purpose, in its own Pagode, whither the women also come, dress'd in the richest things they have, and clad after▪ such a manner as we cannot well describe, our Language not having terms to express the odness of their habit. Their richest cloathing is made of Dogs-hair.* 1.495 For as we shear Sheep to make woollen stuffs of; so they have Dogs, whose hair they cut once a year, and dying it red, make stuffs thereof, which they esteem, as we hear do Velvet, or the best Scarlet.

The Ceremonies performed here upon the death of any one are haply as remarkable as any the Reader shall find in this relation.* 1.496 Immediately after the departure of any one, they beat a Drum before his door to acquaint the Village therewith. This Drum is made of the Trunk of a great tree, so that it may be heard at a great distance, and upon that noise all the people come to the door of the deceased. The women bring each of them a pot of their Arac, and having sufficiently drunk to the memory of the Deceased, they fall a dancing upon a great empty round Chest, so that their motion, which is not ve∣ry violent, makes a dull and doleful noise, suitable to the sorrow they would express. There get upon the Chest, eight or ten women at a time, in two ranks, who turn their backs one to another, and gently stirring their armes and feet, they go several times about the Chest, till such time as being weary, they think fit to make way for others; and this exercise lasts about two hours.* 1.497 The next day, or two days after, they begin to think of the body, not in order to burial, as we do, nor yet to burn it, as some of the fore-men∣tioned Nations are wont to do; but to dry it. To do that, they make in some part of the house, a Scaffold of Canes, raised five or six foot from the ground, whereto they fasten the body, by the hands and feet, and they make a great fire about it to dry it, killing in the mean time a great many Swine, and feasting it for nine days together. During which time they wash the body every day, yet does not that hinder, but that it infects the whole house, nay indeed the Neighbourhood. After nine days, it is taken thence, to be wrapt up in a Mat, being in which, they place it on another Scaffold, higher then the former, and compassed with several garments like a Pavilion, and then they reiterate their dancing and feasting. The body remains in the posture till the third year, and then they take the bones out of it, and bury them in some part of the house, with the same Cere∣monies of feasting and dancing.

At the Village of Theosang,* 1.498 they have a custom, which would hardly be observ'd else∣where. They fasten a Rope about their necks who suffer much pain in their sickness, raise them up by force to a great height, and let them fall down with as much violence, as if they intended to give them the strapado: by which means they are indeed put out of all further pain.

As to Religion,* 1.499 it may be said they have not any at all. Of all the Inhabitants, not one can write or read, and yet they have certain Traditions, upon which they have framed a certain shadow of Religion. For they believe the World hath been from all Eternity, and shall last Eternally. They believe the immortality of the Soul, and thence it comes, that when any one dies, they build before his door a little Hut of bows of trees, set Banners at the four corners, and within the Hut a wooden Vessel full of water, with a Cane-spoon, out of a perswasion, that the souls of the deceased return every day to the Hut, to purifie themselves. 'Tis true, most of them do it purely out of compliance with custome, and know not the reason thereof: but aged persons are not ignorant of it. They believe also, that Souls shall find good or evil in the other life, according to what they have done in this, and affirm, that to go out of this World into the other, they pass over a very narrow Bridge of Canes, under which runs a Channel full of all kind of filth and nastiness, into which the wicked being fallen do there languish eternally; but that the good Souls pass into a pleasant and delightful Countrey, of which they speak, much after the same rate the Poets speak of the Elysian fields. But there are very few comprehend these mysteries▪ or think of any other life then the present.

Their sins are much different from ours.* 1.500 Murther, Theft, Adultery, and other Crimes, are not so much as slight offences among them, and they make so little account of simple Fornication, that they only laugh at it, reprove it not 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their Children. They are for∣bidden marrying before Twenty, or twenty one years of age, yet it is lawful for them to cajol and debauch a neighbours Wife, so he know nothing of it. But it is a great Sin

among them, to have cover'd the privy parts at a certain season of the year; to wear seve∣ral Garments, or one only of Silk, at a time when they should have worn them of Cot∣ton; not to have destroyed Children in the Mothers womb; and to have born any before thirty five or thirty six years of Age. These are the sins, which in their judgment deserve eternal pains; all the rest is only foolery.

They adore several pretended Divinities,* 1.501 but among others two, one whereof is called Tamagisanhach, and the other Sariahsingh. The former hath his abode in the South, and contributes to the generation of man, who receives from this God, only what is excellent and acceptable, either in his body or mind. They affirm, that his Wife, whom they call Taxankpanda, lives in the East, whence she is heard, when it thunders towards that quarter, speaking to her Husband, Tamasgisanhach, and chiding him, for suffering the Earth to be too long without Rain, and that thereupon her Husband causes it immediately to Rain. The other God hath his retreat in the North, and destroys all the excellency which Tama∣gisanhach hath bestowed on man, by disfiguring his face with the Small Pox, and sending him several other Inconveniencies. Whence it comes they invoke them both, one, that they may not be injured by him, and the other that he may prevent Sariasingh from do∣ing them any mischief. Besides these, they have two other Gods, who have the over∣sight of War, named Talafula, and Tapaliape; but they are invocated only by men.

There is not any Nation,* 1.502 that falls within my knowledge at least, but makes use of Men in the Religious Service of their Divinity, only this we now speak of employs only Women. They call them Inibs, and all their Worship consists of Prayers and Sacrifices. The Sacrifices and Offerings which they make their Gods, are Swine, Rice, Areca, some of their kind of Drink, and Deer, and wild Boars heads. Having fed heartily upon them, the Priestesses rise, and make a long Prayer, during which, a man shall see their Eyes turn∣ing in their Heads, they fall to the ground, and make dreadful cries and shrieks. After these efforts, they lie down all along upon the ground, immoveable as Statues, and be∣come so heavy, that five or six persons can hardly raise them. 'Tis while they are in this posture, as they affirm, that their Gods communicate themselves to them, for an hour or better. Then they get up on the top of the Pagode, go from one end of it to the other, and there say their Prayers again; which being ended, they strip themselves stark naked, shew their privy parts to their Gods, smiting them with their hands, and call for water to wash themselves, in the presence of a great number of persons. 'Tis true, the men are not guilty of so much devotion as to come often to these Assemblies; and the women, who most frequent them, make a shift to get so drunk, that they hardly perceive what is done before their faces.

Every house hath a particular place appointed for the devotions of the Family,* 1.503 where they invocate the Gods, and where the women make their offerings of what is spent eve∣ry day in the house: but in case of sickness and some other misfortune, they call the Inibs to do that Service, which is performed with many extravigant Ceremonies. They also foretel good and ill fortune, rain and fair weather, and they have the power to drive away the Devil, after a very ridiculous manner. They pursue him with a great noise, having a Iaponnese Knife in their hand, and affirm, that by that means they drive him away so far, as that he is forc'd to cast himself into the Sea, or at least into some River, where he is drown'd. There are to be seen also at Cross-ways, and upon great Roads, a kind of Altars, loaden with Offerings for their Gods, and many other impertinent Devotions may be ob∣served among them; which the Dutch endeavour to abolish by degrees, by introducing Christianity into the Countrey, wherein they have had hitherto good success.

CHINA.

THe great and vast Kingdom,* 1.504 which we call China, takes up the most Easterly part of all Asia. Marc Paulo calls it Mangi; the Tartars term it Cathay, and there are some who name it also Singely, or Tame. The Chineses themselves give it the name of Chunghoa, or Chungque, whereof the former signifies the Middle Kingdom, in as much as they believe they inhabit the midst of the Universe; and the other, the Middle Flower, or Garden, and know not the names given it by Forreigners, save only that they know the Tartars call them Mangin, that is, Barbarians.

We affirm it to be the utmost Province of all Asia Eastward;* 1.505 for beyond it there is on∣ly the Sea, which the Chineses call Tung, that is, of the East. It hath towards the North great Tartary, from which it is divided by a Mountain of many Leagues extent, and where that fails, the defect is supplied by that admirable Wall, which reaches from the extremi∣ties of the Province of Leaotung, to the River Croceus, upon the Frontiers of the Kingdom of Tibet, being in length three hundred German Leagues. Towards the West, it hath the Kingdoms of Kiang, Vusucang, and Bengala; and towards the South and South-west, the Conchinchine, and the Sea.

The Kingdom extends it self from the Tropick of Cancer to the fifty third Degree of Latitude,* 1.506 and comprehends in its length all the Southern parts, which lie between the hun∣dred and thirtieth, and the hundred and sixtieth Degrees. But that we may speak more pertinently of it, we shall, with them, affirm, that China is sixty nine thousand five hundred and sixteen Diez, which make three thousand Spanish Leagues, in compass, and eighteen hundred in length. This account is made according to their Geometry and their Mea∣sures, which they distinguish into Ly, Pu, and Cham. They call Ly such a space of ground as is of the extent of a mans voice. Ten of these Ly's make a Pu, that is, about two Leagues, and ten Pu's make a Cham, that is, a good dayes journey; and accord∣ing to this Calculation, they find the number of the Diez, which we laid down be∣fore.

It is divided into fifteen great Provinces,* 1.507 six whereof, to wit, Peking, Xantung, Kiangnan, or Nanking, Chekian, Fokien, and Quangtung, are maritime, and the other nine are medi∣terranean. Of the nine last, those of Quangsi, Kiangsi, Huquang, Honan, and Xansi, are the more Northerly; and those of Xensi, Suchuen, Queicheu, and Iunnan, the more Westerly. It hath, besides these, towards the East, those of Leaotung and Corea; but these do not properly belong to China. There are accounted in it a hundred forty and five great prin∣cipal Cities, and twelve hundred sixty three of a middle sort, such as might pass elsewhere for great Cities; in as much as the difference of the Chinese names of Fu and Cheu, which they give their places, proceeds only from their qualities, who have the command of them. For they call Fu, such places as have a Governour in chief; and Cheu, or Hien, those, where there is only a simple Mandorin; though the places are many times of equal bigness.

The Cities are all built after the same manner, square, with good Brick-walls, plaister'd over with the same Earth as they make the Porcelane of, which in process of time grows so hard, that it will not be broken with a Hammer: which makes them last so long, that it hath been observ'd, some of them have stood above two thousand years; yet is there not the least appearance of any change to be seen in them. The Walls are very broad, and flank'd with Towers, built after the ancient way of Architecture, much resembling the Fortifications of the Romans.

Two spacious Streets commonly divide their Cities into a perfect Cross,* 1.508 and they are so straight, that though they reach the whole length of the City, how great soever it be, yet may a man see, from the middle, the four Gates of it. Several other Streets abut upon these in divers places of the City, where they are disposed into Market-places, and other publick conveniences. The Houses are fair and well built, especially those of Persons of Quality, which have their Gardens, Orchards, Groves, Fountains, Conduits, Ducking∣ponds, Aviaries and Warrens; and they are painted or whiten'd on the out-side. They have most of them three Doors all on the same side, whereof that which stands in the middle is bigger then the other two, and they are for the most part so neatly wrought, that

it must be confessed, all we know of Architecture comes not near their excellency in it: and they do all things the more magnificently, in that they want neither excellent Work∣men, nor Materials to embellish their Structures.

There is no Kingdom or Commonwealth in the World, where they are so careful, not only of repairing the High-wayes, but also in ordering all things so, as that Travellers may not want any convenience, in so much that a man shall find Mountains levell'd, and wayes cut through Rocks, yet more even and incomparably better paved then our Streets, nay then even those of the City of Xuntien, the Metropolis of this Monarchy, whereof we shall give a short account anon, when we come to the description of its Pro∣vinces.

The Province of Peking is so called,* 1.509 by reason of the City of Xuntien, where the Em∣perour of China ordinarily resides; for the word signifies, a Northerly Palace, as that of Nanking, a Southerly Palace, but the true name of it is Pecheli. It hath towards the East, the Gulf of Canghai, which divides it from Corea; towards the North-east the Pro∣vince of Leaotung; towards the North the Wall, which divides it from that of Tartary which lies beyond the Deserts of Xamo; towards the West, the Province of Xansi, from which it is divided by the Mountain of Heng; towards the North-west, the Province of Honan, and the River of Croceus; and towards the South and South-east, the Province of Xantung. It hath eight great Cities, to wit, Xuntien, Paoting, Hokien, Chinting, Xunte, Quanping,* 1.510 Taming, and Iungping, which might pass for so many Provinces, since there are under their jurisdiction a hundred twenty and seven Cities of a middle sort. But what most think very strange, is, that though the more Northerly part of this Province reaches not beyond the forty second degree, yet is it so cold there, that from the midst of Novem∣ber to March, all the Rivers are frozen up.

The Register which the Chineses keep of their Country,* 1.511 makes it appear that there are in this Province, a hundred and eighteen thousand, nine hundred eighty nine Families, con∣sisting of above three millions, four hundred and fifty thousand persons, and that it payes yearly to the Emperour, six hundred and one thousand, one hundred fifty and three Bags of Rice,* 1.512 Wheat and Millet; two hundred twenty five pounds of Raw Silk, at twenty ounces to the pound; forty five thousand, one hundred and thirty pieces of Silk-Stuffes; thirteen thousand, seven hundred forty eight pound of Cotton; eight millions, seven hun∣dred thirty seven thousand, two hundred eighty four Trusses of Hay and Straw for the Emperours Stables; and a hundred and eighty thousand, eight hundred and seventy Quintals of Salt, accounting a hundred twenty four pound to the Quintal; besides the Money which comes in by the Customs: and yet this is one of the less fruitful Provinces of China.

As to the City of Xuntien,* 1.513 it is situated at the extremity of the Kingdom, towards the North, about thirty Leagues from the great Wall. It owes its greatness, though in that particular it comes short of Nanking, to Taicung, who lived at the beginning of the fif∣teenth Age, and translated the Seat of the Empire from Nanking to this City. It is more populous then that of Nanking, and must needs be more sumptuous, by reason of the Court, and the great number of Souldiers which the King maintains there, as well for the safety of the City, as that of his own person. On the South-side it is encompassed with a dou∣ble Ditch, and a double Wall; on the North-side it hath but one. This Wall is much higher then those of any Cities in Europe, and so thick, that twelve Horse might ride a∣breast upon it without touching one another. There is a Guard kept upon it in the night∣time, with as much vigilance as if there were an open War; but in the day-time, the Gates are kept only by Eunuchs, who stand there rather to receive the Duties of Entrance, then for any safety of the City. This is the same City which Marc Paulo calls Cambalu, and whereof the Tartars were possessed at that time.

The Streets of it are not paved;* 1.514 so that in Winter a man goes up to the ankles in dirt; and in the Summer, he is cover'd all over with dust: but this inconvenience hath forced them to make use of an invention, whence they derive much greater conveniences. For they all cover themselves with a thin Lawn, from the head to the waste, and by that means, not being known, they are not obliged to salute any they meet; and so dressed they may ride undiscover'd on horse-back all about the City; which yet is not very ho∣nourable in Persons of Quality, who, by this convenience, save the charge it would be to them to be carried in Chairs, whereas they may have Horses and Mules to hire at the cor∣ner of every Street, at a very easie rate, three or four pence a day.

The Kings Palace is near a League in compass, and fortified with three good Walls, and so many Ditches. It hath four Gates, whereof that on the South-side, which opens upon the great Street of the City, is the fairest. Persons of Quality may go within the first

Wall, and Lords of the Councel go within the second; but within the third there go on∣ly Women and Eunuchs who attend about the Kings person. They say this Palace con∣sists, within, of near eighty Halls, and, of those, four, which are the richest in the World; besides the other Appartments, which are almost innumerable.

The Province of Xansi is not so great as that of Peking,* 1.515 but more delightful, fertile and populous. It bears not much Rice, but in requital, it affords the more Wheat and Millet, and breeds abundance of Cattle. The Word Xansi signifies, Towards the West of the Mountain.* 1.516 Accordingly, that of Heng divides it on the East-side from the Province of Peking, as the great Wall of the Kingdom of Tanyu in Tartary does towards the North. The River Croceus divides it, Westward, from the Province of Xensi, and, towards the South, and South-east, from that of Honan.

It comprehends five great Cities,* 1.517 to wit, Taiyuen, which is the Metropolis, Pingyang, Tay∣tung, Lugan, and Fuencheu, and fourscore and twelve of a middle rate, which contain, dis∣posed into 589959.* 1.518 Families, above five millions of persons. It pays in every year 2274022 Sacks of Grain, 50. pound of raw Silk, 4770. pieces of Silk-stuffs, 3544850. Trusses of Hay and Straw, and 420000. Quintals of Salt.

The Climate and Soil of this Province is fit for the Vine,* 1.519 and the Grape here is excel∣lent; but the Chineses make no Wine. And there is one thing particular here, not to be found elsewhere, which is, that as there are in other places Pits and Wells of Water, there are here some of Fire. They dam them up so, as that they leave only some Holes, on which they set their Pots with Meat to be dressed. There are here also good store of Pit-coal, and certain Minerals which serve for Firing.

The Province of Xensi is,* 1.520 no doubt, one of the greatest of all the Southern part of Asia. It hath on the North, the Deserts of Xamo; towards the West and North-west, the King∣doms of Cascar and Tebet;* 1.521 towards the East, the River Croceus, which divides it from the Province of Xansi; and towards the South, it is divided from the Provinces of Honan, Suchuen,* 1.522 and Huquang, by a high Mountain: It comprehends, in eight great Cities, and a hundred and seven of middle rate, 831051. Families, and near four millions of persons. The great Cities are Sigan, Fungciang, Hanchung, Pingleang, Cungehang, Linyao, Kingyang, and Iengan.* 1.523 It pays yearly 1929057. Sacks of Grain, 360. pounds of raw Silk, 9228. pieces of Silk-stuffs, ••7••72. pounds of Cotton, 128770. pieces of Cotton-cloath, and 1514749. Trusses of Hay and Straw.

There are in this Province some Gold Mines,* 1.524 but there is a Prohibition made by the Laws of this Country, that no search should be made into them, and yet there is abudance of it found in the Rivers and Torrents, especially when the Rain brings down the Earth from the neighbouring Mountains.* 1.525 Rhubarb. grows here in great quantities, and it is order∣ed with great care.

This Province affords also Musk,* 1.526 which is nothing but an Imposthume or Botch, fram'd at the Navil of a certain Beast, of the bigness of a wild Goat, which the Chineses call Xe; whence comes the word Xehiang (so they call the Musk) which signifies Scent of Musk. The Reader may take this for certain, whatever those may endeavour to perswade people, who have written concerning this Drug.

Though the Wall which divides China from Tartary enclose the three Provinces we named before,* 1.527 as also that of Leatoung, yet is it not of the length our Cosmographers as∣sign it; for from the Gulf, where the River Yalo falls into the Sea, and where the Wall begins, to the City Kin, where it ends, there are not above twenty Degrees, which make but three hundred German Leagues. This miraculous Structure is continued without any interruption, unless it be near the City of Siven, in the Province of Peking, where an inac∣cessible Mountain supplies its place, and defends the Kingdom against the invasion of the Tartars, as well as the Wall it self. It hath Gates and Sluces for the passage of the Rivers which come out of Tartary, and hath Houses, Redoubts and Forts, from place to place, for the quartering of the Souldiers appointed for the keeping of it; in which work the Em∣perour of China employs a million of men. It is about thirty Cubits high, and about twelve, and in some places fifteen thick. The Chineses call it Vanli Ching, that is, a Ram∣pier▪ or Wall of ten thousand Stadia, rather to express an extraordinary work, then assign the just greatness of it, by any certain measure: since that two hundred and fifty Stadia of that Country making a Degree, it would follow that the said Wall must take up forty Degrees, that is, more ground then all China does.

They say it was built by Xius,* 1.528 King or Emperour of China, chief of the Family of Cina, who having usurped the Kingdom from the Princes of the House of Cheva, caus••d that Wall to be made, as well to satisfie his own humour, which was to be magnificent in his Buildings, as to prevent the Incursions of the Tartars, over whom he had many Ad∣vantages.

He began it in the year 1215. which was the 22. of his Reign, and imploy'd so many men about it, that it was finished in less then five years.

The Province of Xantung,* 1.529 hath, towards the North, that of Peking, and the Gulf of Cang; towards the East, the Sea; towards the South, the Province of Nanking, from which it is divided by the River Croceus, and the Sea; and towards the West, the Channel of Iun, which joyns those two Rivers, and hath twenty Sluces, as also the River Guei. All these Rivers make this Province so fertile, that they say one year brings forth as much as will sustain it ten years afterwards, and that it may communicate to its Neighbours, the Wheat, Millet, Rice, Barley, and Pulse, which the Inhabitants cannot consume. Poultry and Eggs may be had there in a manner for nothing: Feasants, Partridges, Quails, and Hares, are very cheap; and for less then three pence a man may buy ten pound of fish.

But what this Province is most remarkable for, is Silk,* 1.530 which here is not got by the pains people take in other places in keeping Silk-worms, but it grows in the fields, upon Trees, where certain Worms, like Caterpillars, blow it, not in a Cod, but in white threads, which are found upon the Hedges, and may be used as advantageously as the ordinary Silk, though it be somewhat courser.

It hath six great Cities,* 1.531 to wit, Cinan, Yenchen, Fungchang, Cingcheu, Teugeheu, and Lai∣cheu, seventy two other considerable ones, and comprehends, in 770555. Families, near se∣ven millions of persons.

It contributes yearly 2812179. Sacks of Corn,* 1.532 54990. pieces of Silk-stuffs, 52449. pounds of Cotton, and 3824290. Trusses of Hay and Straw; besides the duties paid there, which amount to above ten millions of Gold.

The Province of Honan derives its name from its scituation,* 1.533 it being seated towards the South of the River Croceus, for the word Honan signifies, towards the South of the River.

It hath on the East,* 1.534 the Province of Nanking; North and North-east, those of Xan∣tung and Peking; North-west, that of Xansi; towards the West, that of Xensi; and to∣wards the South, the Province of Huquang.

This Province lies in the middle of this great Territory,* 1.535 and is so delightful, that the Chineses say, it is in China, what Italy is in Europe, and Tourain in France. It comprehends in eight great Cities, and a hundred less considerable ones, 589296. Families, consisting of above 5000000. of persons. The eight Cities are Caifang, Queite, Changte, Gueiho••i, Hoaiking,* 1.536 Honan, Nanyang, and Iuning. It contributes yearly 2414477. Sacks of Corn, 23509. pound of raw Silk, 9959. pieces of Silk-stuffs, 341. pieces of Cotton-stuffs, and 288744. Trusses of Hay and Straw.

The Province of Suchuen,* 1.537 that is, four waters, is one of the greatest of all China; and in regard it is a Frontier-Province towards the Indies, it thence comes, that the Inhabitants are somewhat of the humour of the Indians. It hath towards the East, the Province of Huquang; towards the South-east, that of Queicheu; South, that of Iunnan; West, the Kingdom of Tibet; and towards the North and North-west, the Province of Xensi, and the people whom they call Coning••angi, and Kiang.

It hath eight great Cities,* 1.538 which are, Chingiu, Paoning, Xunking, Siuscheu, Chun∣king, Queicheu, Lunggan, and Mabu, one hundred twenty four lesser Cities, be∣sides other four which are fortified, and contains in 464129. Families, above 2200000. men.

It pays 6106660. Sacks of Rice,* 1.539 6339. pound of Silk, 749117. Quintals of Salt.

The true Radix Sina,* 1.540 which the Chineses call Folin, as also the wild kind of it, is found only in the Province of Suchuen, and grows there under the Earth, much like Toad-stools, or rather as that fruit which the Indians call Patatas, or Potatoes. Some are of opinion, that it is bred of the Gum which falls from the Pine-trees, which taking root, forms a fruit of the bigness of the Indian Nut (or Cocos) having a white meat within, which the Chi∣neses use with good success in Medicine. This Province brings forth also the best Rhubarb, and great store of yellow Amber.

The Province of Huquang,* 1.541 that is, extended Lake, derives its name from the Lake of Tung∣ting, and hath towards the North, the Province of Honan; on the North, that of Nan∣king, towards the East, that of Kiangsi; towards the South, that of Quangsi; toward the South-west, that of Queicheu; and towards the West, that of Suchueu.

It comprehends in fifteen great, and a hundred and eight less considerable Cities, 531686 Families,* 1.542 and near five millions of persons. Its great Cities are, Vuchang, Hanyang, Sian∣gyang, Tegang, Hoangcheu, Kingcheu, Yocheu, Changxa, Paoking, Hengcheu, Changte, Xin∣cheu, Iuncheu, Chinthieu, Chingyang. It contributes yearly, 2167559. Sacks of Rice, and 17977.* 1.543 pieces of Silk-Stuffs.

The Province of Kiangsi,* 1.544 hath towards the East those of Nanking and Fokien, towards the South, part of the same Province of Fokien, and of that of Quantung; towards the West, the Province of Huquang; and towards the North, part of that of Nanking. This Province is so populous, and the people thereof multiplies so strangely, that it in a manner supplies all the Provinces of the Kingdom, for which reason the Chineses call them Kiang∣sois, Rats.

It hath twelve great Cities,* 1.545 and sixty seven lesser ones, wherein are numbred above 1136659. Families, and in them above 6550000. persons. Its chief Cities are called, Nanchang, Iocheu, Quangsin, Nankang, Kienkiang, Kienchang, Vucheu, Linkiang, Xuicheu, Iuvencheu, Cancheu and Nangan.

It contributes yearly 1616600. Sacks of Rice,* 1.546 8230. pound of raw Silk, and 10••516. pieces of Silk-Stuffs.

What is particular to this Province is,* 1.547 that here is made most of the Porcelane, which is carried all over the rest of the world. There is but one Village, and that under the jurisdiction of the City of Feuleang, where these Vessels are made, of a kind of Earth brought thither from the City of Hoeicheu, in the Province of Kiangnan, or Nanking, yet so, as that the Inhabitants of that place cannot make any Porcelane, or that any reason can be given, why the same Earth should receive, in a strange Province, the form which cannot be given it at home. It is white as Chalk, and it is laid a soaking certain dayes, to be redu∣ced to a Paste; and to give it a colour, they put thereto some Woad, which grows in abun∣dance, in most of the Provinces of China.

The Province of Nanking,* 1.548 which hath not been called Kiangnan, but since the Tartars became the Masters of it, is no doubt the chiefest of all the Provinces of China, though the Seat of the Empire was sometime since translated into Peking, by reason of the vicinity of the Tartars.

It hath towards the East and North-east,* 1.549 the Sea; towards the North, the Province of Xangtung; towards the North-west, that of Honan; towards the West, that of Huquang; towards the South-west, that of Kiangsi; and towards the South, that of Chekiang. It comprehends in its extent fourteen great Cities,* 1.550 to wit, Kianquing, which is the Metropo∣lis, Fungyan, Sucheu, Sungkiang, Chancheu, Chinkiang, Yangcheu, Hojaigan, Lucheu, Gan∣king, Taiping, Ninke, Chicheu, and Hoeicheu, and a hundred and ten less considerable ones, wherein there are 1969816. Families,* 1.551 out of which may be taken near ten millions of men. It contributes yearly 5995034. Sacks of Rice, 6863. pound of raw Silk, 28452. pieces of Silk-Stuffs, 2077. pieces of Linnen-cloth; (the Cotton is converted into mo∣ney) and 705100. Quintals of Salt, and 5804217. Trusses of Hay and Straw.

But what will startle the belief of the Reader,* 1.552 is, that besides all mentioned before, this Province pays in yearly into the Exchequer, above sixty millions of Crowns. This is the Province, if any in the Kingdom, which is most inclined to civility, and where there are most Learned men.

The Province of Chekiang,* 1.553 is the most considerable of all the Provinces of China, next the last named, and that of Peking. It hath eleven great Cities, to wit, Hancheu, Kiabing, Hucheu, Niencheu, Kinhoa, Kiucheu, Cheucheu, Xaoing, Ningpo, Taicheu, and Vencheu, and sixty three of a middle sort.

It hath towards the East, the Sea, and Iapan; towards the South and South-west, the Province of Fokien; and towards the North and North-west, the Province of Nanking. The number of its Families amounts to 1242135. and may comprehend 4525470. per∣sons.* 1.554

It pays yearly to the Emperour 2510299. Sacks of Rice,* 1.555 370299. pounds of raw Silk, 2574. pieces of Silk-stuffs, besides such Stuffs as are wrought with Gold and Silver, which are brought thence four times in the year by the Kings Ships, to be distributed among those, whom his Majesty permits by an express priviledge to wear thereof; 444769. Quintals of Salt, and 8704491, Trusses of Hay and Straw. Besides all this, it sends into the Exche∣quer, the yearly sum of above thirty millions.

There are in this Province whole Forrests of Mulberry trees,* 1.556 which maintain such a∣bundance of Silk worms, that it is only this Province, in a manner, which supplies the In∣dies, and all Europe, with that kind of Silk which is called China-Silk. They cut and or∣der the Mulberry-trees there, as the Vine is dressed in France; the Inhabitants hav∣ing found it by experience, that the least and tenderest Leaves produce the finest Silk. Nay, they can so well distinguish the Silk of these Worms that have been kept with the first Leaves, from that which comes from the second Leaves, that the price of the one is much below that of the other.

In this Province is the City,* 1.557 which Marc Paulo calls Quinsay. The name of it then was Lingan, and it is called in the Chinese Language Kingsu, that is, a Royal Seat, upon this account, that Koakungkin, Emperour of China, retreated thither, when he was pursued by the Tartars, who were entred his Kingdom. Now it is called Hangcheu, and if we cor∣rect in some things what the foresaid Author sayes of it, we shall find it comes not much short of the greatness he assigns it.

For what he sayes of the ten thousand Bridges that are to be seen there,* 1.558 is very certain, if we comprehend in that number those which are about the City; as also the triumphal Arches, which in regard of their being vaulted, are numbred among the Bridges. The Lake he speaks of is not properly within the City, but so near it, that there are so many Bridges built thereon, and the sides of it are covered with so many Pagodes, and other pub∣lick and private Structures, that it may well be accounted part of the City.

What the same Author sayes further of the Mountain of Chinghoangh, which is within the City; of the Tower, wherein the hours are measured by an Hour-glass, and are mark∣ed with Golden letters a foot and a half in length;* 1.559 of its Streets being paved with Free∣stone; of its scituation in a Fenny place; of the great number of its Rivulets, and of the River Cientang's, being a Germane League in breadth, is very certain; as also what he affirms of its compass, to wit, that it is above a hundred Italian Leagues about, taking in all its Suburbs; which included, it may be fifty Stadia in length, and so much at least in breadth.

There are numbred within the City at least fifteen thousand Priests, sixty thousand per∣sons, whose Profession it is to work in Silk, and so vast a number of people, that it is reported there are spent there every day ten thousand Sacks of Rice, and above a thousand Hogs, besides the Cows, Goats, Sheep, Dogs, Fowl, and other Creatures; though most of the In∣habitants believe the transmigration of Souls, and abstain from Flesh.

The Province of Fokien,* 1.560 which Marc Paulo calls Fugui, hath on the East and South, the Sea; on the South-west, the Province of Quantung; West and North-west, that of Kiang∣si; and North, that of Chekiang.

It hath nine great Cities,* 1.561 to wit, Focheu, which is the Metropolis, Civencheu, Cancheu, Kienning, Ienping, Tincheu, Hinghoa, Xaoun, and Foning, and fourty eight less conside∣rable ones; 509200. Families,* 1.562 and near two millions of men. It pays yearly 883115. Sacks of Rice, 194. pounds of raw Silk; 600. pieces of Silk-stuffs.

But its greatest Revenue consists in the Customs that are paid upon Commodities; it being certain, that excepting only Macao in the Province of Quantung, where the Portu∣guez drive a great Trade, all the Musk, Precious Stones, Silk, Quicksilver, Silk-stuffs, Linnen-cloth, Cottons, Iron and Steel, and all those other Commodities, which the Chine∣ses carry by Sea into Iapan, Fermosa, the Philippine Islands, Celebes, Iava, and other places in the Indies,* 1.563 come only out of this Province. There is such abundance of Ships in Fokien, that it is reported, that heretofore when the Emperour of China intended a war against the Iaponneses, the Inhabitants of this Province proffered to furnish him with as many Boats as would make a Bridge between that Island and the Continent of China. Every City al∣most of this Province hath its particular Language, and that so different from what is spo∣ken in any other City, that they can hardly understand one the other; nay they are igno∣rant of the common Language of the Country, which all persons of any quality speak in the other Provinces.

The Province of Quantung,* 1.564 is also one of the most Maritime Provinces of all China. It hath towards the West-north-west, the Kingdom of Tunking; North-west, the Province of Quangsi; North, those of Huquang and Kiangsi; and North-east, that of Fokien. All the rest of it lies upon the Sea.* 1.565 It hath ten great Cities,* 1.566 to wit, Quangcheu, Xaocheu, Nan∣biung, Hoeicheu, Chaocheu, Chaoking, Kaocheu, Kiencheu, Luicheu, and Kiuncheu, and se∣venty two lesser ones, and among the rest that of Macao, whereof we shall have somewhat to say elsewhere:* 1.567 There are numbred in it 443360. Families, and near two millions of per∣sons; and it contributes 1017772. Sacks of Rice, and 37380. Quintals of Salt, besides what it payes in ready money.

The Chineses affirm,* 1.568 that there are in this Province three things which are not to be seen elsewhere; to wit, Mountains without Snow, Trees perpetually green, and Men who spit bloud, in regard their Spittle is of a reddish colour, occasioned by their continuall chewing of Bettele and Areca.

To this may be added,* 1.569 that there is no other Province in all China so rich in Gold, Pearls, Precious Stones, Silk, Tin, Quicksilver, Sugar, Copper, Iron, Steel, Saltpeter, Calam∣bac-wood, &c. as this is. It hath this further particularity, that the Musket and Pistol barrels made in that Province, never break, though never so much over-charged, but only open, to make way for what cannot get out at the mouth.

The Inhabitants are more industrious in imitation then invention: but they are so ex∣cellent at the former, that no Manufacture or rarity can be brought thither out of these parts, which they will not do as well as the Europeans; and among others, they are so great Masters in all Gold-smiths work, that what is done in Europe comes not near theirs.

The City of Macao or Amagao, that is, Good Haven, is famous on this account, that only the Portuguez trade thither, excluding all others; and that it is the Episcopal Seat of all those parts. Their particular trading is with the City of Quancheu, whither they are permitted to come twice a year to the Fair, at which time they put off thirteen hun∣dred Chests of Silk-stuffs, Sattins, Damasks, &c. Every Chest containing a hundred and fifty pieces, and carry thence for them, two thousand five hundred Wedges of Gold, of ten Toels each, that is, a hundred and thirty Crowns; eight hundred pound of Musk, and abundance of Gold Thread, Silk, Pearls, precious Stones, and several other Com∣modities, which they carry to Malacca and Goa, to be thence distributed into other parts of the World.

The Province of Quangsi is not so large nor so fertile as the forementioned;* 1.570 yet hath it eleven great Cities;* 1.571 to wit, Queillen, the Metropolis, Lieuchou, Kingyen, Pinglo, Gucheu, Cincheu, Nanning, Taiping, Suming, Chingan, and Tienchen, which have under their ju∣risdiction ninety nine lesser ones.* 1.572 It hath East and North-east, the Province of Quan∣tung; North, that of Queicheu; South and South-west, the Kingdom of Tunking or Gu∣nan; and West, that of Iunnan. They number in it 186719. Families,* 1.573 and above 1500000. men; and contributes 431359 Sacks of Rice.

The Province of Queicheu is the least considerable of all the Provinces of China,* 1.574 as containing but eight ordinary Cities;* 1.575 to wit, Queiang, Sucheu, Sunan, Chiniven, Xecien, Tunggin, Liping and Tucho, which have four other lesser Cities under them. It hath but 45305. Families, and about 200000. men. The Country is hilly and uneven; so that it yielding but little Corn,* 1.576 it contributes but 47658. Sacks of Rice, and 5900 pieces of Lin∣nen-cloth. But there is not any Province affords more Quicksilver, or breeds better Hor∣ses, then this doth.

Heretofore this made not a Province by it self,* 1.577 but depended partly on that of Suchuen, partly on that of Huguang; whereof the one is towards the North and North-west of it, and the other, North-east. The Province of Quangsi is its Frontier towards the South and South-east; and that of Iunnan towards the West.

The Province of Iunnan is the most Westerly Province of all China;* 1.578 for it hath East and North-east, the Provinces of Quangsi and Quincheu; North, that of Suchuen; North-west,* 1.579 the Kingdom of Tibet; South-west, that of Mien; and South and South-east, that of Laos,* 1.580 and part of Tunking. This is, no doubt, one of the richest Provinces of the King∣dom, and there would be more Gold found in it, if the Veins of the Earth were a little more opened. It affords also yellow Amber, Rubies, Saphirs, Agats, Musk, Silk, Benjamin, excellent Horses,* 1.581 Elephants, &c. It hath eleven great Cities, to wit, Iunnan, Tali, Lingan, Cubiung, Chinkiang, Munghoa, Quangnan, Quanst, Chinisien, Iungning, and Xunning, un∣der which are eighty four lesser Cities.* 1.582 There are number'd in it 132958. Families, and about 1433000. men, and it contributes 1400568. Sacks of Rice, and 56965. Quintals of Salt.

By the vast extent we have assign'd the Kingdom of China,* 1.583 it may be judg'd, that its Provinces lying in so different Climates, it must follow, that the Qualities of its Air and Soil are also different. Accordingly, there is so vast a difference between the Inhabitants of the Island of Hainan, which is in the Torrid Zone, and part of the Province of Quan∣tung, which comes near it, and those of the Province of Peking, which is the more Norther∣ly of all China, that a man might take the one for the Moors of Fez in Barbary, and the others for Germans or Suedes. I speak as to their colour; for these are white, those black; and there are some more or less swarthy, according as the Provinces they live in are more or less Southerly and Northerly.

The same difference is to be observed in the Fruits.* 1.584 For the more Southerly Provinces bring forth Cocoes, Bannana's, and such other Fruits as grow only in hot Countreys; and others bring forth Figs, Apples, Pears, Chesnuts, and such Fruits as are common in Europe. But it may be said in general of China, that there is not any other Country more pleasant or more fertile then it. 'Tis true, it is much obliged to Nature, from whose liberality it hath Gold, Silver, precious Stones, Musk, Silk, Salt, and all sorts of precious Gums and Drugs; but it must be confessed withall, that it is the labour and industry of the Inhabi∣tants, and the mildness of its Government, which occasions this abundance of provisions, and consummates the felicity wherein they live.

The Country is so populous, that to maintain so strange a number of people, it is but necessary,* 1.585 that all the Ground it takes up should produce somewhat or other. They have a natural aversion for idleness; but if they had not, the Laws have made such provision, in this particular, that there is not any Crime punished with greater infamy then this Vice. Another humour of theirs is, that they are lovers of good Chear, and pride it much in wearing good Clothes, and having their Houses well furnished, so that, to live handsomly, they are obliged to take pains. Hence comes it, that a man shall not see a Mountain but is planted, not a Hill but is cultivated; no Plain, but is sown; no Fen, but some advantage is made thereof; nay, to use the common expression, not an inch of Ground, but brings forth somewhat or other, to requite their labour, who bestow their pains on it.

This Country breeds all sort of living Creatures,* 1.586 and brings forth all the Fruits and Simples we have in Europe, but all much better in their several kinds then any we have; as may be seen by those Oranges, the Plant whereof was brought thence into Portugal, and the Fruit whereof is so highly esteem'd every where. The like may be said of Me∣lons, and other Fruits, especially Plums, which are most excellent there, and so wholsome, that they never burden the Stomack, though a man eat never so many of them. There is such abundance of Honey and Wax,* 1.587 that whole Fleets come thence loaden therewith; and Sugar is so cheap that when it is dearest,* 1.588 the Quintal, that is, a hundred twenty four pound, may be bought between twenty four and thirty shillings sterling. A man may judge of the quantities of Silk it produces, by the Stuffs which the Provinces pay in yearly to the King, besides the Stuffs and raw Silk which are carried into all other parts of the World. The high Grounds bring forth Wheat, Barly, Oats; and the low Grounds, Rice, but in such abundance, that, when most dear, it is sold at a Crown the Coom, or four Winchesters.

Fowl are sold there by the pound,* 1.589 and when the Feathers are off, the ordinary rate is three half pence a pound, and all other Flesh proportionably: for there is so much Cattel, that a fat Cow is not worth above ten shillings; a Buffer a Crown; a Hog, the flesh whereof is very delicate,* 1.590 twenty pence. Nay, even Spices are so cheap there, that under a Crown a man may buy four hundred Nutmegs, and for half a Crown two pound of Cloves; which proceeds hence, that Provisions yielding in a manner nothing in the Coun∣try, the Chineses truck them with so much profit to the Moluccas and the other neighbour∣ing Islands, that they can afford these Drugs cheaper then they may be had at the places where they grew. The Sea, which encompasses a great part of this vast Territory, and the Rivers which are as it were so many Veins and Arteries to this vast Body, supply it with such abundance of Fish, that it is to be had in a manner for nothing.

For there is hardly any City that hath the convenience of a River, but the Inhabitants keep a great number of Cormorants,* 1.591 which they make use of in order to fishing. They are kept fasting one day, and the next they carry them to the water-side, near several Boats half full of water, whereto they are fastened with a Cord tied under their Wings, and having bound them about their Necks a little above the Stomack, they let them go into the River, where they fill, with Fish, that Skin which stretches like a bag under the Throat, and come and disburden themselves, of what they had taken, in the Boat whereto they are fastened. This they do several times, at least till such time as the Master thinks they have taken enough; and then he unties the String which ties up their Necks, and per∣mits them to go a fishing for themselves, and to feast themselves for two dayes: and by this means they take more Fish then they are able to consume.

There is no Creature so common all over China as the Duck,* 1.592 in regard they have a way for the breeding of them, not known in other parts. They are kept in great Cages, made of Canes, and set at the Sterns of great Boats, the Cages being so large, as they are able to contain three or four thousand of them,* 1.593 and they hatch the Eggs, in the Summer time, in Cow-dung, or haply in the Dung of the Ducks themselves, which is very hot, leaving them therein, till the generation be compleated, and then they break the Shells one against ano∣ther, to make way for their young ones to come out, with such a sleight, that it seldom hap∣pens that any one of them miscarries.

In the Winter, they heighten the natural heat of the Dung by Fire, making a Bed of Canes, raised three or four foot from the ground, upon which they set the Eggs between two layers of Dung, and there is a Fire made under, to give them that degree of heat which is requisite for the hatching of them. As soon as they are hatched, they dispose them into the Cages, where they keep old Ducks, which receive them under their Wings, and breed them up. When they are grown big enough to shift for themselves, they give them in the morning a little Rice, but only so much as rather sharpens then satisfies the

Appetite, and then they open the Cages, to let them go over a kind of Hurdle of Canes to the shore, where they suffer them to feed among the Rice, out of which they pick the Weeds with so much ease and advantage to the Owner, that he who breeds the Ducks is sufficiently recompenced for his pains. In the evening, he gets all his Ducks together, and makes them return into the Boat, with the noise of a Whistle or little Bell, which they ob∣serve so exactly, that, though there are many times twenty or five and twenty thousand of them together, yet will they all get very orderly into their Cages: and by this kind of breeding, they are so cheap, that a man may have two or three for a penny.

As to the Inhabitants,* 1.594 they are well shaped, and for the most part of a good stature. The Men have large Faces, are small Ey'd, and flat Nosed, wearing little or no Beard. They never cut their Hair, nor pare the Nails of the left Hand, out of a perswasion, that their Nails may be serviceable to them in climbing, when they shall be taken up into Heaven by the Hair.

They are all clad after the same fashion,* 1.595 save that in the more Northerly Provinces, they use Furs, and in the more Southerly, they go for the most part in Silk. Persons of great quality have their Cassocks embroidered up to the Waste, but others have only a little Gold or Silver about the extremities: and there is this distinction between married Men and Batchelors, that the latter part their Hair upon the Forehead, and wear higher Caps then the others.

The Women are very sumptuously clad,* 1.596 having about them a great many Pearls and precious Stones. They also paint, and dress their Heads with as much curiosity and ad∣vantage as in any other place of the World. They have a particular affection of having little feet; whence it comes, that the Mothers make it their business, so to straiten their Daughters Feet, from their Infancy, that they are hardly able to go. Some are of opinion, that this Custom was introduced by those who were desirous to accustom Women to a se∣dentary life, whereto they are as it were condemned even from their birth. They are never seen in the House; and it is very seldom they go abroad, which when they do, it is to visit some of their nearest Relations; and then, they are so attended, and shut up in Palan∣quins, that they cannot be seen.

The Men are ingenious enough,* 1.597 and discover, by their Works, that they are not inferi∣our to the Europeans. It is no easie matter for a Man to avoid the circumventions of their Merchants, who make use of all imaginable Advantages in their Dealings. At every Door there hangs a Table, containing a Catalogue of all the Commodities that are in the Shop: and in regard all the Merchants of the same Body have their habitations in the same quarter, a man finds, as soon as he comes into it, what is to be sold in all the Street.

They use Brass-money in no Province but that of Chekiang;* 1.598 in all other parts of the Kingdom, only Gold and Silver is current, which yet is received only by weight, without any regard of the mark. Whence it comes, that no China Merchant but hath his Weights about him, and such pieces of Money as are full weight, by which that which he receives is to be weighed.

I am of opinion,* 1.599 that the provision, which is made in several parts of Europe, for the sub∣sistance of the Poor, was derived from China. Beggary, which is infamous in those who are reduced thereto, and a shame to such as suffer it, in as much as it is a reproach of their want of Charity, whose care it should be to remedy that inconvenience, is there very se∣verely forbidden; and there is in all Cities a particular Judge appointed for the Poor, who, in order to their relief, takes the following course.

The very day he comes into that Employment, he publishes an Order, whereby he com∣mands all those who have any Children, either born weak or imperfect, or become such, through sickness or any other accident, to come and make their cases known, that he may examine whether they are capable of learning any Trade or not; and in case they are not, whether the Parents are able to maintain them. If they are Orphans, and have no other Friends able to keep them, they are disposed into Hospitals, where they are brought up at the Kings charge. The same course is taken with maimed or decrepit Souldiers. They are all lock'd up, and not permitted to go any more abroad. The Houses, where they put up the Poor, have Gardens and Courts belonging to them, where they are permitted to keep Poultry and Swine, as well for their divertisement as advantage, and the King ap∣points a certain Overseer, who, joyntly with the ordinary Judge, makes a Visitation of the Hospitals twice a year.

They do not put the blind into the number of those Poor who are accounted unable to work; but they are employed in pulling the Bell•••••• at Smiths Forges, and other things which do not much require the help of the fight. Maids that are blind are forced to a Trade, which may be as gainful, but not so honest as some others.

I conceive I may also presume to affirm, that it is to China we are obliged for the Myste∣ry of Printing.* 1.600 For it is certain, we have it but since the year 1450. and that the Chine∣ses have some Books printed above seven hundred years since.

They have a way of Writing particular to themselves, not only upon this account, that they make use of Figures rather then Characters,* 1.601 in as much as they signifie entire words, and do not represent the Letters; but also upon this, that, in their Writing they observe an order wholly different from that of all other Nations. For these write either from the left hand to the right, as all the Europeans do, or from the right to the left, as the Hebrews, Arabians, and most of the other Nations of Asia do; but the Chineses write from the top downwards, and in their Writing observe such equal distances, that there cannot be any thing more exact. And to shew, that these Figures stand not for any word that hath any particular signification in their Language, but that they express the same things, it is to be noted, that the Chineses, who, when they speak, cannot understand one the other, by reason of the diversity of the Idioms and Dialects that is among the Inhabitants of several Pro∣vinces, make use of these Characters, not only to render themselves intelligible one to ano∣ther, all over the Kingdom, but also in their Commerce with the Iaponneses, and the Inha∣bitants of Corea and Conchinchine, between whose Languages there is no more rapport, then the English hath to the Greek or Arabian.

They make their Paper of the Bark of Bambus,* 1.602 or Canes, but so thin, that it will bear writing but on one side, though they do not use Pens, but Pencils, as the Iaponneses do, which only slide along the Paper, so that they write as fast, and cut their Characters so neatly, that the best Pen-men in Europe are not to be preferred before them.

The King is at a vast charge, as well in the maintenance of the Schools, where they are taught to read and write, as also the other Elements and Sciences, as in that of the Univer∣sities, where are taught Philosophy, natural and moral, Astrology, and the other Sciences. There passes not a year, but there is a Visitation made, at which the Professors and Scholars are examined; and they who express an inclination to study are recompenced; such as ap∣ply not themselves thereto as they ought, are punished.

The Visitor having ended the general Examen,* 1.603 makes another particular one for those who aspire to the quality of Loytia, a Dignity there like that of our Doctors. True it is, that they give this Title to all nobly descended; but in matter of Learning, it is a Degree, conferr'd, by giving the Graduate a permission to wear a Girdle, by which he is distinguished from others. For the King bestows this quality, as the Princes of our parts confer Honours on those who have deserved them by their services, or are so much in favour, either with them or such as are about them, as to get them by Letters Patents. This promotion of Doctors is done with as great Ceremonies, as in any European Uni∣versity.

But indeed this Nation is so punctual in point of Ceremony,* 1.604 that it goes beyond any other, even to importunity. The first Lectures they make to Youth are those of Comple∣ments, whereof there are whole Books, that they may be sure to have them upon all occa∣sions. If a man hath but once seen a person, he is obliged to salute him, and this is not done with the Hat, but closing the left hand, they put it into the right, and so both to the breast, with a low inclination of the head, accompanied with protestations to confirm what they would express by their gestures.

Persons of Quality meeting in the Street, make a stand, joyn their hands by putting the fingers one within another, and stretching out the arms bow-wise, they do their reverences with low inclinations, and continue a good while in that posture, proffering one another the way. When there is no equality between the persons who meet, the inferiour gives way to the other, does him reverence, and lets him pass by. He who goes to speak about any business to a Loytia at his own Lodgings, kneels down as soon as he comes into the Room, and advances, and continues in that posture till he hath done speaking, or delivered his Petition, and having done his business, he retires still kneeling, without turning his back on the Loytia.

If a man standing at his own Door, or in the Street, espy a Kinsman, or Friend, coming out of the Country, if he who lives in the City thinks not himself well enough clad to welcome his Friend as he would, he will pretend not to have seen him, go into his Lodg∣ing, put on his best Clothes, and then will come and meet his Friend, and salute him, as if he had not seen him before. If he meet him in the Street at some distance from his own House, the first question he makes is, whether he hath din'd or supp'd, if not, he will carry him to the next Tavern, and treat him magnificently with Fish and Flesh; if he hath din'd, he will give him only a Collation of Fruits and Conserves.

They are very sumptuous in their Treatments, and have a custom different from what is done in all other places.* 1.605 They set up as many Tables as there are guests; but instead of cloths, which would hide the beauty of the gilding and painting, wherewith they are en∣riched, they have only carpets of Damask, Taffata, or some other Silk stuff, which cover∣ing only the edges thereof, hang down to the ground. At the four corners of the Table they set a paper of Fruits and Conserves for the Desert, and several figures of Sugar, made and painted to the life, and flowers for the divertisement of the Eye, and they set the meat in the midst.

They use either Silver-plate or Porcelane,* 1.606 and have no Napkins, in regard they make use of their forks so neatly, that they never have any occasion to wipe either their hands or mouths. They drink often, but little at a time, whence it comes their drinking cups are very small; and whereas they serve up many dishes, they are very long at meals: but that the guests might not be weary, they give them all manner of divertisements, as Musick, Plays, tricks of Legerdemain, and Puppet-showes. If it be a person of quality that is invited, they set up in the Hall where the treat∣ment is made, several other Tables, on which are all sorts of tame and wild Fowl, all which are carried away by several servants marching in a file before him, when he returns home, whither having brought them, they, with great Com∣plements, oblige him to suffer them to leave at his own house what he had not consumed at their Masters. The treatments they make for a Governour of a Province lasts sometimes fifteen days or three weeks, and costs them a years Reve∣nue who undertake any such thing, what ever their Estates may be. Their entertainments are commonly in the night, making choice of some time about the change of the Moon, especially that of March, with which they begin their year.

That day they all spend in merriment, put on their best clothes, hang their houses with the richest stuffs they have,* 1.607 cover the streets with Roses and other flowers, adorn their tri∣umphal Arches with branch'd works, Damask and silk Tapestry, beset with Torches, and plant before the door a tree so enlightned, that though there were but one in a whole street, it might give light to the whole quarter. Their Priests are present at these pub∣lick rejoycings, and adde to the solemnities of the day by the Sacrifices they make to their Gods.

Speaking of their civility, I shall here give an accompt of that which they have particularly for the Embassadours of Forreign Princes,* 1.608 for whom the Chineses have the same veneration and respect, as they might express to their own Ma∣sters.

They do not look on the occasion of the Embassie, but the quality of the Prince who sends the Embassadour, who is received at the entrance of the Kingdom, by the Governour of the first Frontier City, who meets him with all the persons of Quality within his Government. They suffer him not to set his foot on the ground; but assoon as he comes out of the Ship, he is put into an Ivory Chair, and carried by eight men to a house appointed for that purpose, which is furnished at the Kings charge, and so spacious, that several Embassadours may be lodg'd therein at the same time without any inconvenience. The next day, the Governour of the City goes to wait on him, and endeavours to learn of him the occasion of his Embassie, to be communicated to the Governour of the Province, who immediately sends to the Embassadour, to desire his Credentials, that he may dispatch them to the Court, and get thence the Pass-port requisite for the prosecution of his journey. This Pass-port is upon Parchment, with the Kings Seal in Gold, which is carried before the Embassadour, with the Credentials writ∣ten upon a board, having over head in Golden letters the name of the Prince who sends him. The Governours of Provinces make provision for his expence by the way, and when he is come near the Metropolis, there meets him the President of the Privy-Councel, who receives him in the head of all the Councellors, and most of the Courtiers, and conducts the Embassadour to his Lodgings, and as he takes leave of him, he empowers him to create a certain number of Loytias, and to set at liberty some Condemn'd persons, the number whereof is regulated sutably to the greatness of the Prince who sends him. They allow him a certain time to repose himself, and then the same persons, who met him at his entrance, conduct him to his Audience, which the King gives him as often as he desires it, and is present at all the Propositions he makes.

The entertainments they make at Weddings, are very great, for the Brides Father

gives her no other Portion then what he spends the first day, in treating the relations and friends of his Son in Law;* 1.609 and the next day, those of the Bride. The Feasting being over, the Husband delivers to his Wife, in the presence of her kindred, the Portion he promi∣sed her, and she gives it her Father or Mother, as a requital of the pains they had taken in her Education; so that by this means such as have most Daughters are the happi∣est, especially if they be handsom. Maids are married very young, and the Father may dispose of the Dower given his Daughter, if any necessity oblige him thereto; but if he keep it, it is due to the Daughter, all the other Children being excluded from having any benefit thereof.

Polygamy is lawful among them,* 1.610 but incest severely forbidden, in a direct line, to in∣finitie; and in a collateral, to Sisters and Nieces. The first is the only lawful Wife, the rest Concubines, insomuch that they do not only not live in the same Lodgings with the first, but also her eldest Son Inherits as much of the Estate himself, as all the rest put together. If the first wife have no Son, or having any, if he die before the Father, the eldest by the other wives succeeds him in his right, and represents the heir apparent of the Family.

A man seldom hears of any Adulteries committed among them; for the women are kept in such restraint, that they are in a manner inaccessible. The Husband hath the same power, as in other places, to kill the Adulteress and her Gallant, if he take them in the Act: but in regard it is a self-ended and self-conceited Nation, they choose rather to make their advantage otherwise of such an accident, then defame themselves by a severity, which saves their reputation only in appearance.

The Government of the King,* 1.611 the Emperour of China, is Monarchical, and it may be said to be in some respect despotical, in as much as the Soveraign is so absolute, that no Law checks his Power; and yet his Government is so mild, that there is not any Democracy, where the Inhabitants are less burthen'd then they are in China. Nothing is more destructive to a State, and more obliges Princes to have recourse to extraordinary wayes, to the cost of their Subjects,* 1.612 then War. Whence it comes, that the Kings of China, considering that no forreign War can be carried on but at the cost of the people, and that by that means the foundations of a House are dig'd up to cover the roof of it, have made it a Fundamen∣tal Law, that no War should be made to extend the Frontiers of the Kingdoms. And to the end, their Subjects may give forreigners no occasion of making any War against their Countrey, they are forbidden upon pain of Death to go out of it, without express permissi∣on from the Prince, or Governour of the Frontiers.

They call their Emperour Tie'neu,* 1.613 that is, Son of Heaven, or Son of God; not that they believe him descended from Heaven, but being the chiefest of men, they look on him as a gift of Heaven, and a person dear to the Gods. He assumes to himself the quality of Ho∣ang, which signifies Emperour of dirt or earth, so to be distinguished, from Xanhi, who is the great Emperour of the Universe. They say, that he who first took the name of Hoangthir lived many ages before the birth of our Saviour, and that his successours were desirous to continue the same name, as they did who succeeded Iulius Caesar in the Empire.

That dignity is hereditary in the Family of him who now Reigns,* 1.614 so as that the eldest Son only succeeds him, the younger brothers being wholly excluded, who yet have the Title of King, and a Royal retinue, with some City of their demean, where they are lodg'd and treated as Kings, but have so little Authority, that the Governour who hath it whol∣ly himself, suffers them not so much as to go out of the City, nay, lets them have their allowance but quarterly, lest having it paid in altogether, they might employ it in making friends, to the disturbance of the Publick.

The Councel of State consists of twelve Councellours and a President,* 1.615 who next the King, hath most Authority. Besides this, there are in the City of Xuntien six other Coun∣cellours, to wit, one for the administration of Justice, which they call Lyp'u. The second, for the Revenue, which they call Hup'u. The third, for Ceremonies, which are essential in that Kingdom, and is also called Lyp'u. The fourth for Military Affairs, and is called Pingp'u. The fifth for publick Structures, called Cungp'u. And the sixth for criminal affairs, called Hingp'u. The Councellours employed in these Counsels, deliberate about those things whereof they are to take Cognizance, and come to some resolution; but they neither publish nor execute any thing without the Emperours express permission, who reserves the decision thereof to himself, as indeed he doth that of all other affairs of the Kingdom.

Once in three years he sends Visitors into all the Provinces, who particularly inquire in∣to the lives and actions of the Governours, and the state of the Provinces; whereof they make him a faithful report; and by this means he perfectly knows what is done all over the Kingdom, though he never stirs out of his place.

The members of that Councel of State which they call Colao,* 1.616 or Caisiang, that is, Auxi∣liary Governours, or Ministers of State, are all Philosophers, and most of them well skil'd in Astrology, inasmuch as it is expected they should fore-see the Events of things, not only by the help of civil Prudence, but also by the course of the Stars, which they think more infallible, then those of reason grounded on experience. The President of this Councel, and in his absence, the most ancient Councellour, reports to the King the de∣bates of the Councel, speaking to him on his knees, and looking down to the ground, never lifting up his eyes, though the audience should last two hours.

All the Provinces of China have a Viceroy,* 1.617 whom they call Comon, only Peking and Nanking excepted, which are Royal Provinces, and have only Governours, whom they call Insuanto's, and are as King's Lieutenants, inasmuch as they have the chief Authority in the Province next the Viceroy, yet each within his own jurisdiction, which extends only over the great Cities, where they reside, and the lesser ones which depend on them. These last have also their Governours, whom they call Tutuam, and the Portuguez, Man∣dorines.

They call him who is receiver of the King's Revenue in a Province,* 1.618 Ponchasi; him who commands the Soldiery thereof, Toloc; The President for the Administration of Justice, Anchasi, and the chief of a Councel of War Aytao. All these Officers have their several Counsels, who all meet in the Vice-roys Palace, who takes Cognizance of all Affairs passed therein; and if they be of importance, he sends an Express to give notice there∣of to the President of the Councel of State.

The most eminent persons next the President,* 1.619 whom they call Colao, are the Cautoc, that is, the chief Standard-bearer; the Pochin, or receiver of the Kings Revenue; the Pochinsy, or Lord-keeper of the Great-Seal; and the Autzat, who is the chief Judge of the City.

Under this last,* 1.620 there are three Lieutenants, whereof one is called Hutay, another, Tzi••, and the third, Toutoy, who sit in Judgment once a week at their own houses, and ap∣point Commissioners, who have their setled quarters, consisting each of a thousand 〈◊〉〈◊〉. This is particularly observable, that the Commissioner hath no Authority in the street where he lives, lest he should be byassed in his Judgment by any 〈…〉〈…〉 on of neighbour-hood, whence it also comes, that no man is made Vice-roy, 〈…〉〈…〉 Judge in his own Country, but he is sent to remote Provinces, where he hath no relations.

The Officers are changed every three years, and from the day of their departure from Court, or the place of their ordinary Habitation, the King defrayes all their Charges, leaving it to their choice, whether they will take their allowance in provision or mony. While they continue in their employment, they are lodg'd and treated at the Kings charge, and there are lodg'd neer the Judges in the same house, the Clerks, Door-keepers, and all the other Officers belonging to their charge, who are also maintain'd and paid by the King, that they may take no bribes or gratifications from the parties.

They are so circumspect in all their proceedings,* 1.621 that there is no Judge but so strictly examines all particulars, as not to fear any reproach of neglect. Debtours are treated with so great rigour, that such as are not able to satisfie their Creditors, had rather be sold to them then endure the cruel fustigations, in the middest whereof, some, who are of a more delicate Constitution, many times expire.

The course taken for the discovery of Crimes,* 1.622 and to prevent several other disorders, is admirable. The Judges coming to the place of their residence, cause a List to be taken of all the houses within their jurisdiction, and having distributed them into Decads, they set a bill on every tenth house, injoyning the Inhabitants to discover such of their Decad as they know hath committed any crimes, upon pain of being responsible for the same them∣selves; as also to give notice of such of their Decad, as remove from their houses, or intend any great journey, that they may be oblig'd to pay their debts, before they leave the quarter.

They have no mercy on Criminals, yet is there not any person Executed, till the crime be made so apparent, that the criminal can alledge nothing for himself. They endeavour to get out the truth by fair means, and never order any to be tortured, but upon very great presumptions; but then they do it cruelly.

They put their fingers between two sticks,* 1.623 two fingers broad and better, through the ends whereof they draw a strong pack-thred, which they bind so hard, that they break the bones, and make the nailes come off. Another torture they have is, to put the feet between

two boards, much after the same manner, as in some parts of Europe, they put the Leggs into boots full of hot oyle, save that, there the feet are tormented, and here the leggs.

Every great City hath several Prisons,* 1.624 which are very strictly kept, but have belonging to them Courts, Gardens, Ponds, and Walks for the divertisement of such as are detained there for slight offences. They have also drinking-houses, for the convenience of the Pri∣soners, and Shops, wherein are sold such things as the Prisoners make, in order to their better subsistance.

The Sentence of death is not executed till the King hath confirmed it; nay, even that had, it is done with so many Ceremonies, that unless the heynousness of the Crime cry for Vengeance very loud, there are more Condemn'd persons languish in the Prisons, then die by the hand of the Executioner. For there is no Execution, but in presence of the chief Judge of the Province, or Visitor, who being come to the place, calls for the Indictments of such as stand condemned to die, and examine them, and thereupon either confirms or repeals the sentence of the ordinary Judge. Of those whose Sentence is confirm'd, he takes fifty of the greatest offenders, and orders the Goaler to prepare them for their execu∣tion. Yet are they not brought out of the Prison, till they are once more examined; and if they can alledge any receivable excuse, they are shut up again, and then they dis∣charge the great Guns, to shew that they are going to Execution. But before they are brought to the place of punishment, they are examined once more, and the Judge presses them to think of themselves, and to find out some pretence that might oblige him to de∣fer it. If they have nothing to alledge, he orders so many Guns to be fired, as there are persons to be executed. Being come to the place of execution, they are set upon heaps of Ashes, where they have somewhat given them to eat, and then begins the last examination: but if, that over, they have no excuse, the Guns are discharged the third time, and the execution is compleated.

Their punishments are,* 1.625 to hang up, to empale, to burn; but this last is only for such as are guilty of high Treason.

They have a particular punishment for Thieves.* 1.626 For as they detest Theft above all Crimes, so is its punishment attended with more infamy then the others. They lay the Malefactor upon his belly, with his hands ti'd behind him, and in that posture, two ex∣ecutioners beat him with all their might upon the calf of the Leg, with great Canes moystned in water, which is so painful a chastisement, that most of the wretches die under their hands. The Judges are present at these executions; but that they may not be moved to compassion, which the Condemned would never be the better for, they spend their time in gaming and drinking, and stop their ears against their cries.

But that Governours and Judges may not abuse their power,* 1.627 they are obliged not on∣ly to give an account of their actions, at the expiration of their Commissions, before Judges appointed for that purpose, whom they call Chenes; but also the King sends into the Provinces a Visitor, whom they call Leaches. He goes into the Province incognito, takes an exact and secret information of the Actions of the Officers, and having gone round the Province, comes up near the Metropolis of it, towards the time that all the Officers of the Province meet there, which is once a month; he sends to the Viceroy and the Assembly to open the Gate to him, that he may come and acquaint them with the King's pleasure. This message discovers his quality, and yet when he goes into the Assembly, he hath his Commission carried open before him; and assoon as it is read, the Viceroy comes out of his place, and the other Judges out of their seats, and do reverence to the Visitor, who having taken the Viceroys place, commends those who have done their duty, and tells them, he shall not fail to report the same to his Majesty.

Then turning to those whom he hath found Delinquent, he reproves them, deprives them of the Marks of Magistracy, which are the Hat and Girdle, suspends, or abso∣lutely dispossesses them of their charges, and puts others into them. It is in his power to advance to the greatest dignities such as he judges capable thereof, to brand with in∣famy those who have neglected their duty, nay, to punish them, but not with death; in∣asmuch as the Emperour only is Master of the lives of his Subjects.

As to the Religion of the Chineses,* 1.628 it may be said to be Pagan, though from the figure of one of their principal Divinities, it might be imagined that they have heretofore had some apprehensions of Christianity, and some would infer, that three Heads, which they make coming out of the Body of one of their Idols, represent the blessed Trinity, which makes the first and greatest Mistery of Christian Religion. They adde hereto, that St. Thomas the Apostle Preached the Gospel in China, and that there are some Pictures to be found there, wherein may be seen men dressed and shaped as the Apostles are painted among us, and that some have seen their Images representing the blessed Virgin, holding

the Saviour of the World in her Armes. But the se are only chimerical imaginations, since that, setting aside the establishments which the Portuguez and Spaniards have made there some years since, there is not the least track to be seen of the Ancient Christian Religi∣on.

They affirm that all things,* 1.629 visible and invisible, were made by Heaven. And this they express by the first Letter of their Alphabet. They also believe that the Heaven governs the Universe by a Vicegerent, whom they call Laocon Tzautey. For him it is they have the greatest veneration next the Sun, and say, it is an eternal Spirit, who was not created. They have the same opinion of another Divinity, whom they call Cansay, and to whom they Attribute an absolute power over all Sublunary things. To these three Spirits, they add three principal Ministers, whom they call Tanquam, Teiquam, and Tzu∣iquam, whereof the first presides over the Air, and makes it rain; another, over the ge∣neration of Men and other Animals, and the production of Fruits; and the third hath the government of the Sea. They also canonize some, whose lives have been eminent for Sanctity, or otherwise, and call them Pausaos, that is, Saints; but they do not ren∣der them the same Honours they do the Gods before mentioned, or yet the three follow∣ing Saints, who are also in great veneration among them.

The first they call Sichia,* 1.630 who came into China out of the Kingdom of Toungking, and is Founder of all the Religious Orders of both Sexes, which are at present in the King∣dom, and whereof there are very great numbers, living in perpetual celebate, and inha∣biting in Monasteries.

The second is called Quanina,* 1.631 a Female Saint, and, as they affirm, was the third Daugh∣ter of King Tzonton, who having married his two elder Daughters, would also have this embrace the same kind of life. But this Princess having made a Vow of Chastity, would not hear of Marriage, and upon that account lost her Fathers favour, who shut her up in a place, where her employment was, to carry Wood and Water, and to weed a great Garden whereof she had the keeping. They have great Legends of the Life of this Saint, and relate several stories of her; among others, that the Apes of the neighbouring Forrest came thither, and carried Water for her; that the Birds weeded the Garden for her; and that several other Creatures brought the wood she was obliged to fetch. The Fa∣ther imagining this was done by his Daughter's witchcraft, caused the house to be fired, which the Princess seeing, and considering that it was for her sake, would have cut her own throat, with a string of hair; but she immediately found the fire put out by a great shower which then fell, whereupon she went thence and retired into the Deserts of the neighbouring Mountain. The King's impiety was punished with the Leprosie, which spread it self over all his body, wherein it bred so many Worms, that he had been de∣voured by them, if the Daughter, upon notice given her of it by a voice from Heaven, had not relieved him. The misery he endured had raised in him a great remorse of Con∣science; so that finding himself recovered by his Daughter's intercession, he fell down on his knees before her, begg'd her pardon for what was past, and would have adored her, but she refused those honours: yet so as that, it not being in her power to avoid them, she set an Idol before her, and returned to the Desert, whence she came only to cure her Father. She dyed there, and, by an extraordinary austerity of life, acquired so great a reputation of sanctity, that they still honour her with a Religious worship, invo∣cate her, and beg her intercession for the remission of sins.

They have yet a third Saint,* 1.632 of the same Sex, whom they call Neoma; and affirm, she was a Daughter of a Prince of the City of Yocheu, in the Province of Huquang. The aversion she had conceived against Marriage, obliged her to retire into the Island of Ingoa, where they say she wrought many Miracles. They relate, among others, that a Lord named Compo, having received orders from the King to go along with a Fleet which lay ready to set sail, it was not in the power of the Mariners to weigh the Anchors. Compo was so surprised at the accident, that he would needs see himself what might be the cause of it. He found Neoma sitting on the Anchor belonging to the Admiral. He told her, the King had commanded him to go and make a War in one of the neighbour∣ing Provinces, and entreated her not to oppose his Design. She made answer, that she would contribute to his gaining the Victory he promised himself in that Expedition, if he would take her along with him: which he was the more inclinable to do, in regard he already knew her by reputation. Accordingly, the Army was no sooner come in sight of the Enemies Countrey, but she dissolved the Charm, whereby the Inhabitants had made all the Sea look as if it had been on fire, and forced the Enemies to render themselves up at mercy. Compo thought at first it had been an illusion; whereupon he would have a stronger assurance of Neoma's power, and told her; he should make no further question

of her sanctity, if she could make the stick he had in his hand to flourish, and wax green again; which she did. Compo planted his stick at the stern of his Ship, and openly ac∣knowledged, that all the success of his Arms was to be attributed to Neoma; and thence it comes, they say, that the Chineses set this Neoma at the Sterns of their Ships, and make their Addresses to her, for the prosperity of their Voyages.

They express little Devotion and respect for their Idol's.* 1.633 For being extreamly ad∣dicted to consult Incantations and Charms, in all their affairs of great Importance, in so much that they will not undertake a journey, nor marry, nor indeed do any business of con∣sequence, till they have consulted them. If they prove not according to their expectations, they raile at their Gods, call them Dogs, and reproach them with all baseness. But when their indignation is a little over, they change their reproaches into flattery and kindness, ask them pardon, promise them what they least intend to perform, and then return to their Incantations again. If they are otherwise answered then before, they flat∣ter and praise their Gods; but if they are still threatned with misfortune, they give them both ill words and blows, throw them down, tread upon them, beat them, drag them into the dirt, burn them with a candle, or whip them, till the Spell favours them, and then they offer to them Ducks, Geese, Poultry, boild Rice, &c. Their great Sacrifices consist of offering to their Gods the head of a boil'd Hog, adorn'd with flowers and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and a Jar of Wine.

Their way of Incantation is performed by two pieces of Wood,* 1.634 about the bigness of a Wall-nut, whereof one side is flat, the other round, like a half bowl. These they cast up∣on the ground, and if it happen that both, or one fall so as that the round side be down∣wards, they take it for a very ill omen; but they cast them so often, that they must at last fall as they would have them. Another way they have, and that is, by casting into a Pot several pieces of Wood, each whereof hath a certain Character upon it, and they have them drawn out by a Child; and as they are taken out, they turn over a Book, till they come to a Page that begins with the Character drawn out of the Pot, and they ac∣commodate the words they find in the Page, to the thing whereof they would know the event by the said drawing out of the Characters.

They also invoke the Devil;* 1.635 and the gestures of those who are employed in these In∣vocations are such, as a man would say they were really possessed; nay there have been some Christians so simple as to believe it.

The Chineses believe,* 1.636 that the Heavens, the Earth, and Water, have been from all eter∣nity, but that heretofore they were so confounded together, that it must be the work of a Divinity to reduce them into order. They call the God who did this, Tayn, and affirm that, in the beginning, he, of nothing, created a man whom he called Panzon, and a wo∣man, whom he namen Panzona; That Panzon, in like manner, of nothing, created ano∣ther man, named Tanhom, and his thirteen brethren, and that this Tanhom was so learned, that he gave names to all things that were Created: That Tanhom and his brethren had diverse Children, but particularly that the second, whom they call Teyencom, had twelve sons, and that his eldest, whose name was Tubucom, had nine: That their Race hath lived upon the Earth above ninety thousand years; but that, at last, Tayn kill'd all the Males for their Rebellion: That at that time, the heaven fell, but that Tayn raised it again, and created another man, named Lotzitzen, who had two horns in his forehead, ou•• of which came forth a pleasant scent, from whence were begotten males and females, and that all now alive are descended from Lotzitzan, who, as they affirm, lived nine hun∣dred years: That the Heaven begot also another man, named Atzion, by a very extraor∣dinary production, inasmuch as his Mother, whom they call Lutim, was got with child, by looking on the head of the Lyon in the Zodiack, and that she was brought to bed in the City of Tengcheu, in the Province of Xantung: That many Ages afterwards, one named Vsao taught Architecture, and began to build houses, and make cloathes: That Huntzui, his successor, found out fire, and taught people how to boil and roast meat, as also how to buy, and sell, and make contracts: That a woman named Hautzibon, had con∣ceived, by setting her foot in the step of a man, and brought forth Ocheutey, who first made marriages, and invented several musical instruments: That Ezonlom, his Son, was the first Teacher of Medicine and Judiciary Astrology, and the first who made use of the Plough and the Spade. They affirm also, that he was wont to feed on a Sallad of seven of the most venemous Herbs could be found, and that instead of receiving any harm there∣by, it kept him alive four hundred years, and that he left a son, from whom are descended all the ancient Kings of China.

They believe the Immortality of the Soul,* 1.637 and affirm that the Heaven communicates its Eternity thereto, and that, after this Life, it shall enjoy eternal bliss, or be eternally tormen∣ted, according to the good or evil done in this World,

They believe also a kind of Purgatory, and that there is a certain place, where Souls are to be cleansed from the impurities they derived from the bodies which they had informed; and that, as to this particular, the Suffrages of their Friends and Relations may procure them some refreshment. Whence it comes, that, in August, they have a Day appointed for Prayers and supplications to be made for the Deceased: but instead of performing these Ceremonies in their Pagodes, they do them in the private Houses of such as are incli∣ned to this kind of Devotion: To that end, three of their Religious men go to the House appointed, and exhort the Family to make the Prayers requisite for the purging of those sins which obstruct the Beatitude of their deceased Relations. Of these three Religious men, one carries a little Drum; another certain Images; and the third, a small Bell. Having set the Images upon the Altar, they Incense them, while in the mean time some others are busied in setting, on five or six Tables, certain Dishes of Meat, for the Saints and Souls of the Deceased, and that done, they fall a-dancing, and singing certain Hymns, which the younger of the Religious men writes down on Paper, and afterwards lays on the Altar. Assoon as he is returned to his place, they fall a-singing again, till such time as he who says the Service strikes his Image against the Table, whereto the others answer with their heads, and that done, they burn the Images before the Altar. Having spent the night in this kind of Devotion, which is not begun till after Sun set, the Religious men, and those of the House make good chear with what they find on the Tables, and had been set there for the spirits of the other World: and thus they procure the purgation of the Souls departed.

Most of them do also believe the Transmigration of Souls,* 1.638 but few speak of it with any rational ground.

They have four Orders of Religious men, whereof some are clad in black, some in white,* 1.639 and some in a dark grey. Every Order hath its General, whom they call Tricon, who lives in the City of Xuntien. He hath under him Provincials, who make Visitations within their several Jurisdictions, to see that there be an observance of Discipline, and that there be no remission of the rigour required by the Rules of the Order. These have also the nomination of Superiours and Guardians in the several Monasteries. The General continues in that dignity as long as he lives, and when he dies, the King names his successour, making choice of him among those who are most deserving. He is cloth'd in Silk, but of the same colour as is worn by the Religious men of the Order, and never goes out of his own house, without a retinue of four Religious men, who carry him in an Ivory Chair, upon their shoulders. He hath a particular Seal for such affairs as concern his Order, and his Religious men never speak to him but on their knees. The King allows him what may keep a plentiful house, and contributes also to the subsistance of the Monks in the Monasteries; and if they want any thing, it is supplied by the liberality of private persons. The Religious men are all clad in serge, and all after the same fashion, save that they are distinguished by the colour.* 1.640 They all shave their heads and beards. They use beads, and say their Mattens and other Offices, much after the same manner as our Monks in Europe do. Those who enter into the Monastery make a feast for all the Monks; but the eldest Son of a Family is not permitted to take the habit; in regard the Laws of the Kingdom forbid it, and would have him to be the comfort and support of the weak and decrepit age of his Father. Their vows are not indispensable, but they may quit the Mo∣nastery, and marry.

The Chineses observe at their Funerals the following Ceremonies.* 1.641 Assoon as any per∣son is deceased, they wash the body, put about him his best cloathes well perfum'd, and set him in the biggest Chair they can find in the house: That done, the Wife, Children, Brothers, Sisters, and afterwards all the Relations, kneel down before him, and take their leave of him. That Ceremony over, they put him into a Coffin of sweet-wood well closed, and set him upon a Table, or two tressels, and they cover him with a Hearse∣cloath, reaching down to the ground, upon which they draw the Picture of the deceased. They leave him in that posture fifteen days, during which time, in some other Chamber or Hall, there stand constantly set on a Table, Wine, Fruit, and two wax Torches light∣ed, for the Priests, who spend the night there in singing and praying, according to their way; but especially in making divers inchantme••ts against the evill Spirits, and in burn∣ing several Images and fastning others to the Hearse-cloath, which covers the Coffin, which Images they ever and anon move with their hands, thinking they by that means force the Soul to Heaven. The fifteen days being over, the body is carryed into the Country, where the Priests interr it, and commonly plant a Pine-tree neer the Sepulchre; whence it comes, that they have a particular ven••ration for that Tree.

Their mourning is austere enough. Sons continue it for a whole year, and some∣times two,* 1.642 during which time, they are clad in a course cloth, cover their heads with a Hat of the same, and tie about their upper Garment with a cord. Nay, some quit the publick employments they have, with the Kings consent, and ever after live pri∣vately. Remote kindred go in mourning for some months; and friends put it not off till the body be laid in the ground.

From what we said before concerning the Wall which divides China,* 1.643 from Tartary, it may well be inferr'd that the Chineses have a dreadful enemy beyond it. It must indeed be acknowledged, that though we have not any Author that hath given a pertinent ac∣count of the Eastern part of Tartary, which reaches from little Tartary, and the King∣dom of Cascar, to the Eastern Sea, and the Streights of Anian above Iapan, yet have we it for certain, that out of those parts, and the Kingdoms of Samahania, Taniulth, Niuche, Niulhan, &c. came those Nations who over-ran several Provinces of Eu••ope, and in a manner all Asia, under Tamerlaine; and under other Chiefs, possessed themselves of the Kingdom of China.

For in the year 1206,* 1.644 the Tartars, whom the Chineses called Tata, because they do not pronounce the Letter R. entred China with a powerful Army, and after a War of seventy two years became Masters of it, forc'd thence the Princes of the house of Sun∣ga, which then Reign'd, and were peaceably possest of the whole Countrey, for the space of near seventy years; till a certain Priest's servant named Chu, considering that the sa∣vageness of the Tartars was much abated by the delights of China, undertook a War against them,* 1.645 and forc'd them out of China in the year, 1368. The aversion the Chine∣ses had to be governed by a forreign power soon prevail'd with them to become subject to Chu, who assumed the quality of Hugnus, that is, Great Warriour; and was the first of the Royal Family of Teiming,* 1.646 which reign'd in China even to our days.

Chu not thinking it enough to have forced the Tartars out of the Kingdom of Chi••a, entred with an Army into that of Niuche, whither the Tartars were retreated, and forc'd them to acknowledge the Soveraignty of the Emperour of China, and to pay him Tribute.

The Tartars divided themselves into seven Colonies, which warred one against the other, till they were reduced into one State, under the name of the Kingdom of Niuche, about the year 1600.

About that time Raigned in China,* 1.647 Vanlie, who had succeeded his Father in the Em∣pire, in the year 1573. and lived in an absolute peace, when the Governours of the Frontiers, conceiving some jealousie at the great powerfulness of the Tartars, would needs hinder their Merchants from trading into China, opposed the match, which the King of N••uche would have made between his Daughter, and the King of Tanyu, took him and killed him. The King of Nyuche's son, desirous to revenge his Fathers Death, raised an Army, passed over the great wall, entred China in the year 1616. and took the City of Gayven, whence he writ, in very respectful terms, to Vanlie, who was then living, and represented to him the injury had been done him by the Governours of the Frontiers, proffering to deliver up the City, and go out of the Kingdom upon condi∣tion his complaints might be heard, and Justice done him. Vanlie, instead of reflecting on the Justice of this demand, returned the business to the Councel of State, where it was not thought fit so much as to answer his Letters. The Tartar, on the other side, was so incensed at this slighting of his Proposals, that he vowed to sacr••fice two hun∣dred Thousand Chineses to the Manes of his Father.

Accordingly,* 1.648 having taken the City of Leaoyang by assault, though the Metropolis of the Province of Leaotung, he put all the Chineses to death. He afterwards took the City of Quan••ning, and entred with his Army into the Province of Peking. But fear∣ing to be shut up there by the Chineses, who had got a vast Army together, he re∣turned to Leaoyang, where he caused new Fortifications to be made, and there assumed the quality of Thienming, and was called Emperour of China, though he were possessed only of Leaotung; which is so inconsiderable a place, as that it is not so much as num∣bred among the Provinces of that Kingdom.

This happened in the year 1618. The year following, 1619. the Chineses, who had got together an Army of six hundred thousand fighting men, gave battel to the Tartars; but they were defeated, and lost, besides the fifty thousand men kill'd upon the place, most of their best Commanders. Upon this Victory, the Tartars entred the Province of Peking, where they took and ransack'd all; n••y would have set upon the City of Xuntien, where the Emperour was then in person, had they not been prevented by the Garrison, which consisted of twen••y thousand men.

Amidst these distractions, Vanlie dies, in the year 1620. Tayohang, his Son, succeeded

him; but he reigning only four moneths, left the Scepter to Thienki, who proved so fortu∣nate,* 1.649 as to force away the Tartars, not only out of the Cities they had taken in Peking, but also out of Leaotung, and all the Province of Leaoyang, where their cruelties had made their Government very odious and burthensom. But he injoyed not long the fruits of that Victory. For the Tartar having set all things in order at home, sent into China an Army of eighty thousand Horse, which he followed with another Body, and retook the City of Leaoyang by assault,* 1.650 there having been before an Engagement between them, wherein both sides had fought very resolutely, for the space of fourty hours.

There were killed in the said Engagement 20000. of the Tartars,* 1.651 who were so startled at that resistance, that having fighting work elsewhere, cut them out by Maovenlung, Ge∣neral of the Chinese Army, even in Leaotung, things continued in that posture till the year 1625.

In the said year 1625. they assaulted the City of Ningiven, which the Chineses had for∣tified, but were forc'd back, with the loss of ten thousand men, and among others the King of Tartary's Son,* 1.652 who to express his resentment of that misfortune, pass'd over with his Army into the Island of Thaoyven, where the Tartars put all the Garrison to the Sword, but made no further progress.

In the year 1627. died Thienki,* 1.653 Emperour of China, and Thienning, King of the Tartars. The former was succeeded by Zungchini his Brother; the other, by Thienzung, his Son, who taking a different course from his Fathers, and changing his cruelty into mildness, en∣deavoured by that means to prevail with the Chineses, whom he could not overcome by force. Yet was it not either the prudence of Thienzung, or the courage of the Tartars, but the disloyalty of the Chineses, and the treachery of their Commanders, which proved the final ruine of the Kingdom.

For Zunchini,* 1.654 perceiving that the Army which he had sent into Corea had been defeat∣ed, though the Tartars had lost on their side above fifty thousand men, and that he had some ground to fear a Civil War, bestowed the command of an Army on one named Yuen, empowring him withall to make a peace with the Tartars. This Traytor having received money from the Enemy, took off Maovenlung by poyson, and concluded so disadvantagious a Treaty with them, that the Emperour refused to ratifie it. This pretended affront pro∣ved the destruction of Yuen, who still continued his intelligence with the Tartars; but Zungchini, having discovered his Treachery, ordered him to be cut in pieces, which was done in the year 1630.

Ever after that time,* 1.655 the Tartars only made incursions into the neighbouring Provinces: but Thienzung, King of Tartary, dying in the year 1636. Zungte, his Son, (who had been brought up in his infancy in China, where the manner of living of that Country had been instill'd into him) succeeded him, and by his liberality corrupted most of the Governours and Chinese Commanders, who thereupon sided with him; especially when they saw that the distractions which then shook the State, wherein there were eight Armies of Tories, or common Rogues, at the same time, were absolutely contrary to the preservation of the Kingdom.

These Armies were disposed, in the year 1641. under two Generals, whereof one was called Licungzo, the other Chanchienchung, who divided the Provinces between them, so as that the former had the command in Xensi and Honan, and the other, in Suchuen and Huquang. Licungzo having taken in the chief Cities of these two Provinces, assumed the quality of King, and would be called Xunuang, that is, the fortunate King; and ho∣ping to become Master of the whole Empire, would needs have the Title of Emperour, and that his Family should have the name of Thienxun, that is, obedient to Heaven. And indeed Heaven seem'd to comply with his perfidiousness, by the intrigues which in the mean time were carried on at Court, where all the Grandees were divided into Facti∣ons, through the means of a Favourite, of whom we shall here take occasion to say some∣what.

Under the Reign of Thienki, there was, at Court, an Eunuch, named Guei: who was so much in favour with the Emperour, that the latter call'd the other Father. This man, who had been raised to that greatness, in a manner from the Dunghill, abused his Autho∣rity, and made his Ministry odious, by the ill treatment they received from him, who had too much courage to become his Courtiers and Adorers. He was so ••mpudent, as to de∣clare himself against the Prince, who was looked upon as Heir apparent to the Crown, in as much as Thienki had no Children, and to oppose his establishment after the Emperours death. This Prince was Zungchini, whom we spoke of before, and of whom we shall have occasion to speak hereafter. He prov'd so fortunate as to elude the Artifices of the Eu∣nuch, and got the Crown on his Head, without much contestation, but he had not so

much power as to smother the Factions, into which the Court was divided by the intri∣gues of the Favourite. As soon as he came to the Crown, he gave the Eunuch a Com∣mission, very honourable in appearance, but in effect very fatal to him; for he commanded him to go and visit the Sepulchres of his Ancestors, and to give order there should be no∣thing amiss about them: but as soon as he was gone from Peking, Zunchini sent after him a Messenger, who presented him with a gilt Box, wherein there was a Silken Halter, and told him, that the Emperour had commanded him to bring an account of his death. But this Execution reconciled not those who had engaged either for or against him, during his life, and the aversion which the Emperour openly expressed towards his Abettors, only augmented the number of discontented and treacherous persons, which were on both sides; in so much that most of the Grandees, minding only their private Affairs, they either neg∣lected sending the relief which the Governours of the Provinces required against the Tar∣tars, or maliciously dissembled the need they stood in thereof: and by that means, the Re∣bels had time to make sure work on their side.

Lizungzo so well knew how to make his Advantages of these Distractions,* 1.656 that, hav∣ing settled all things relating to the Province of Xensi, he without any obstruction crossed the River Hoangh, or Croceus, and entred the Province of Xansi, where he took the great and rich City of Kiangcheu. The other Cities of the same Province afterwards came in, save only that of Thaiyuen, which was taken by storm, and plunder'd. The Emperour, hearing that the Rebels had passed the River Hoangh, and fearing they might beset him in the City of Xuntien, would have retreated to Nanking; but he was perswaded to the contrary by his Council, it being the intention of some by that means to keep up the reputation of his Armes, of others, to deliver him up to Lizungzo; so that he sent a∣gainst the Rebels a powerful Army, under the Command of the Colao, or President of the Council, who prov'd so unfortunate in his business, that, out of despair, he hung him∣self.

Lizungzo,* 1.657 who had his Correspondents in the City of Peking, or Xuntien, understanding how things stood at Court, sent some of his people into the City, who, under pretence of keeping a Tavern, or opening Shops for Mercery, were to make a Rising, when they heard the Army was advanced near the City. Some affirm, he had corrupted him who had the Command of the City, and that by his Order he found one of the Gates open, at which he entred it, in April 1644. and afterwards became Master of the Palace, before the Em∣perour had any notice of his coming. The Traitors, who had kept him from hearing of it, prevented him also from getting away: so that perceiving Lizungzo was possessed of all the Avenues of the Castle, and thinking it too great a dishonour to submit to the Commander of a sort of Robbers, he with his own hands kill'd an only Daughter he had, so to secure her honour, which she could not have kept with her life; and going into the Garden, he took off one of his Garters, and hung himself at a Plum-tree. The Colao, the Queen, and some of his Eunuchs, followed his example, and hung themselves in the same Garden. Zunchini left three Sons, whereof the two youngest had their Heads cut off, three dayes after the Fathers death, but the eldest vanish'd, and could not be found, notwithstanding all the diligence Lizungzo used to get some account of him.

I shall forbear giving a relation of all the executions which this barbarous person or∣dered in the City, where he put all the Officers to death; only this I cannot omit, that, among others Persons of Quality, there was an ancient man named Vs, whose Son com∣manded the Chinese Army upon the Frontiers of Leaotung. Lizungzo sent order to this Vs, that he should write to his Son, to this effect, That if he with his Army would ac∣knowledge him Emperour of China, he would divide Fortunes with him; threatning, if he did it not,* 1.658 to put him to death. The Father writ to Vsanguei, so was his Son called, in such terms, as he might infer from them what condition he was in: but the Son gene∣rously made him answer, that he could not own him for a Father, who had been unfaithful to his King; and that if he had so base a Soul as to advise him to be a Traitor, he, for his part, had one so loyal, as to persist in the resolution he had taken, rather to die, then obey a Highway-man. Whereupon Vsanguei immediately sent to the Tartars, to desire them to joyn, and march along with him against that Usurper. The Tartar thought it not amiss to make his advantage of the opportunity he then had, to get into the Heart of the King∣dom, and so marched with his Forces against Lizungzo.

This lewd Villain,* 1.659 who had put so many innocent persons to death, trembled at the first notice he received of the March of the Tartars, left the City of Xuntien, and retreats into the Province of Xensi, intending to establish the Seat of his pretended Empire at the City of Sigan. The Tartars pursued him to the River Croceus, or Hoangh, defeated

part of the Rear-guard, and had the Plunder of some part of the Baggage, in which were all the Riches which the Emperours of China, of the House of Tayming, had been two hundred and eighty years getting together.

The Tartars would not cross the River, as well because they would secure the Conquest of the Province of Peking, as for that they were without any Prince, ever since the death of Zungte, who died when the Army began to march out of the Province of Leaotung. He had left only one Son, about six years of age, whom he had recommended to the tuition of the eldest of his three Brethren, who proved so faithful to his trust, that the Tartars gave him the name of Amaban, that is, Father-King.

Vsanguei,* 1.660 finding the Province of Peking and the Metropolis thereof deliver'd of those Robbers, would have requited the service the Tartars had done China, and obliged the For∣reigners to leave the Kingdom. But he who commanded the Tartarian Army told him, that it was too soon to talk of any such thing as yet; that Lizungzo was still alive, and might re-enter Peking, that there was a necessity of ruining him, so as that it should be impossible for him to recover himself; and that Vsanguei should go himself with his Ar∣my, and some of the Tartarian Force, against the Usurper, and put the Rebels to an absolute Defeat.

As soon as the Tartars were intreated by Vsanguei to come into China, they sent to in∣vite all the other Tartars, from the Eastern Sea to the River Wolga, to come and participate of their Conquests; in so much that no Colony of them but sent in some Forces, which coming into China, brought along with them that young Tartar King, the Son of Zungte. As soon as he was come,* 1.661 the Tartars discover'd what their intentions were; for they settled him upon the Throne, and caused him to be proclaimed Emperour of China, under the Re∣gency of the eldest of his Uncles. He took the name of Xunchi, and ordered his Family to be called Taicing; and they say, that young Prince made so sensible a discourse at his inauguration, as very much startled those who heard it, and expected no such thing from one so young.

The same day that these Ceremonies were performed at Peking,* 1.662 they sent away some Tartarian Regiments, with Orders to establish Vsanguei King, to give him the quality of Pingsi, that is, Pacifier of the West, and that he should reside in the Province of Xensi. He was the more inclinable to accept what was proffer'd him since there was no other choice to make; for as to Lizungzo, it could never be known, what became of that Villain.

Vsanguei's declaring himself satisfied with what had been proffer'd him by the Tartars, facilitated their Conquest of the Provinces of Peking, Xansi, and Xantung, which they possessed themselves of in less then a years time, and settled themselves therein, allow∣ing the Inhabitants their Laws, Magistrates, and manner of life, and reserving only to them∣selves military employments, and the defence of places.

In the interim, the Southerly Provinces had raised a powerful Army, which they sent to the Emperours relief: but upon the first news brought them of the reduction of Peking, and the death of Zungchini,* 1.663 they remanded their Army, with all the Boats, which carried the yearly Provisions and Contributions to the Court; and hearing of the Invasion of the Tartars, they proceeded to the election of another Emperour, of the House of Tai∣ming, whom they called Hungquang, Nephew to Vanlie, and Cousin to Zungehini. This man began his Reign with a solemn Embassie which he sent to the Tartars, to demand a Peace, and to proffer them the Northerly Provinces of the Kingdom. Amahan, whom the Chineses call Amauang, made answer, that the Tartars never received from any one what they were already possessed of; that if the Chineses had made choice of an Empe∣rour, it was their business to protect him; and that, for their parts, they would have all or nothing.

During the time of this Negotiation,* 1.664 there came into play a Prince, who gave himself out to be the eldest Son of the Emperour Zungehini, and was acknowledged to be the same person, by several Grandees of the Court: But Hungquang imprisoned him, with an intention to have him strangled, to the great dissatisfaction of those who thence took oc∣casion to revolt:* 1.665 so that the Tartars made their advantage of him to get into the Pro∣vince of Nanking. Hungquang sent against them a powerful Army, but it ran away, with∣out ever engaging, upon the first sight of the Tartars, getting into the Boats to cross the River. Upon that defeat, all the Cities of the Province, on this side the River Kiang, sub∣mitted, save only that of Yangcheu, into which Zu Coloa was got with some Forces, who made a vigorous resistance, but such as prov'd the destruction of the City, which was burnt, purposely, to bury, in its ashes, their bodies who had been kill'd, for fear of infecting the Air.

The Metropolis was yet in the power of Hungquan, who kept the Tartars from crossing the Kiang, by a good Fleet he had under the Command of Hoangchoang, who had already gaind many advantages over the Tartars, and put them out of all hope of crossing the Ri∣ver, when he was kill'd with an Arrow by one of his own people, named Thien, who had been corrupted by the Tartars. This may be said to have been China's fatal blow, since that upon the Generals death, the Army fled, and the Tartars passing the River, immediate∣ly pursued Hungquang,* 1.666 and having taken him, by the treachery of the said Thien, they sent him to Peking, where they strangled him in Iune 1644. They also put to death the young man, who pretended himself Zunchini's Son, whom they found in prison, and with him all the other Princes of the Royal house of Tayning, that fell into their hands.

Most of the Lords,* 1.667 who escaped these defeats, met together in the City of Hangcheu, in the Province of Chekiang, the greatest of any in the whole Country, with a design to give the utmost expression they could of their fidelity and courage. They had chosen Empe∣rour one of the Royal Family, named Louang; but ere he had reign'd three dayes, the Tartarian Army was come to the Gates of the City; and the Garrison, which was 〈◊〉〈◊〉 much inclined to fight, demanded their pay; so that Louang, out of all hope to prevent the taking of the City, would preserve it and the Inhabitants, by a voluntary delivery of himself to the Tartars, who strangled him, and suffered not that noble City to be plun∣dered. They took in the same Province, the great City of Xoaking, and were likely to have made a powerful settlement there, had they not been so imprudent, as to oblige the Chineses to shave themselves: but they found them so resolutely bent on the contrary, that the Chineses, who had taken the loss of their Country with so much indifference, chose rather to lose their Lives then their Hair. They beat the Tartars out of the City of Xoaking,* 1.668 forc'd them to repass the River C'enthaeng, and no doubt had retaken the City of Hangcheu, had they had the courage to pursue them. They thought it enough to en∣trench themselves on the River side, and own'd the Authority of a Lord of the House of Tayming, named Lu, who assumed the Quality of Restaurator of the County, and refused that of the Emperour.

About this time,* 1.669 the Officers and Souldiers, who retired out of the Province of Cheki∣ang into that of Fokien, chose another Emperour, named Thang, who writ to Lu, that he should own him for his Soveraign, in regard he was the nearer of Kin to the deceased Emperour.* 1.670 This division brought the Tartars to be absolute Masters of all China: for these two Princes refusing to joyn their Forces together against the common Enemy, the Tartars set upon Lu, and forc'd him to retire into the Island of Cheuxan, over against the City of Ningpo, which had hardly been peopled, had it not been for that Defeat.

They found it no harder matter to conquer the Province of Fokien,* 1.671 though it be divi∣ded from those of Quantung, Kiangsi, and Chekiang, by Mountains, which six thousand men have kept against all the Forces of Tartary. The Emperour himself, who had assum'd the name of Longuu, that is, warlike Dragon, fled, and was kill'd, as is conceiv'd, by the Tar∣tars, who pursued him.

They had divided their Army into two Bodies, whereof one was got into Fokien, as we said before; the other had passed through the Provinces of Hungquang and Kiangsi, so that they met, much about the same time in that of Quantung, where they again divided, one part being commanded into Peking,* 1.672 the other into the Province of Quangsi. Their easie conquest of Fokien proceeded, partly from the good success that attended their de∣signs, where-ever they went, but particularly from the correspondence they held with Chincilug, who had the command of Longuu's Army in that Country. He had sometime been an Interpreter, and a kind of Broker, to the Portuguez, Castilians, and Dutch, at Ma∣cao, the Philippine Islands, and that of Fermosa, under the name of Iquon. Giving over that employment, he turned Pyrat, and by that means became so powerful, that having obtained, or rather extorted, an Act of Oblivion from the Emperour of China, he forced him to suffer him to carry on the Trade of the whole Kingdom, keeping the Sea with a Fleet of above three thousand Vessels. His design was to get himself proclaim'd Empe∣rour of China; but knowing he should find too much opposition in the inclinations of the people, as long as there were Princes to be chosen out of the Family of Tayming, he was not sorry to see it extirpated by the Tartars, with whom he held correspondence, as we said before. Upon the reduction of the Province of Fokien, they gave him the Title of King, under the name of Pingnam, that is, Pacifier of the South, treating him highly, and putting him in hopes, that they would leave him the command of the two Provinces of Fokien and Quantung. But the Prince, who commanded the Tartarian Army in the Province, being upon his departure towards the Court, Chincilung, who had left his Fleet

in the Haven of Focheu, desirous to accompany him to the place where he was to take leave of all the Officers; the Tartar took his advantage of the opportunity, pressed him to go along to Peking; and finding him unwilling to do it, secured him, and brought him away by force; and had it not been for his Brothers, who were Masters of the Fleet, the Tartars would have put him to death.

The other Army,* 1.673 which was got into the Province of Quangsi, met with so much re∣sistance there, that it was forced to dislodge thence, and retreat into that of Quantung, into which the Viceroy and Governour of the Province pursued them; and to give the greater reputation to their designs, they created an Emperour of the Royal Progeny, who assum'd the name of Iunglie. After their example, several other Provinces revolted, but all their attempts only confirmed the settlement of the Tartars, who after the death of Kiang, Governour of the City of Taitung in the Province of Xansi, who took up Arms against them in the year 1649. and their reduction of the City of Quangcheu, in the Province of Quangsi, which was taken on the 24. of November, 1650. have been possess'd of that vast Country, without any disturbance; rather through the cowardice of the Chineses, then by the number of their own Souldiery; in as much as it is impossible for any Army, how nu∣merous soever, to conquer so powerful a State as that of China; if the Inhabitants had ever so little courage to defend themselves. Xunchi, the Tartarian Emperour of China, married the daughter of the King of Taayu, in the Western Tartary, in the year of our Lord, one thousand six hundred forty and nine.

Notes

• * 1.1

  IANV∣ARY.
• * 1.2

  1639.
• * 1.3

  Mandelslo leaves Su∣rat.
• * 1.4

  Comes to Daman.
• * 1.5

  The way from Goa to Visia∣pour, Ditcauly.
• * 1.6

  Danda.
• * 1.7

  The Moun∣tain of Ba∣lagatta.
• * 1.8

  Herene∣kassi.
• * 1.9

  Berouly.
• * 1.10

  Werserée.
• * 1.11

  Outor.
• * 1.12

  Berapour.
• * 1.13

  Matoura.
• * 1.14

  Calingra.
• * 1.15

  Worry.
• * 1.16

  Attrowad.
• * 1.17

  Badaraly.
• * 1.18

  Kerwes.
• * 1.19

  Skeokory.
• * 1.20

  Rajebag.
• * 1.21

  Getteuy.
• * 1.22

  Graeen two Cities.
• * 1.23

  Ba••••ouw••▪
• * 1.24

  O••ren and Isselam∣pour.
• * 1.25

  Taffet.
• * 1.26

  Cassegam.
• * 1.27

  Calliar.
• * 1.28

  Galoure,
• * 1.29

  Winge.
• * 1.30

  Qualam∣pour.
• * 1.31

  Domo.
• * 1.32

  Tamba.
• * 1.33

  Werad▪
• * 1.34

  The City of Dabul de∣scrib'd.
• * 1.35

  Rasapour.
• * 1.36

  Venesars a people of Decam.
• * 1.37

  The money of Decam.
• * 1.38

  The weights.
• * 1.39

  The King of Decam tri∣butary to the Mogul.
• * 1.40

  The History of Chauas-Chan▪
• * 1.41

  He 〈…〉〈…〉 Regent of the King∣dom.
• * 1.42

  Engages the State 〈◊〉〈◊〉 war.
• * 1.43

  The King implores the assist∣ance of his Grandees against him.
• * 1.44

  He attempts the life of his Prince.
• * 1.45

  But is pre∣vented.
• * 1.46

  And kill'd.
• * 1.47

  His Friends would re∣venge his death.
• * 1.48

  Chauas's ingratitude towards his Benefactor.
• * 1.49

  The Mogul concerns himself in Mustafa's Fortunes.
• * 1.50

  The King of Decam a∣ble to raise 200000. men.
• * 1.51

  His Artil∣lery.
• * 1.52

  Bacim.
• * 1.53

  Rasiapour.
• * 1.54

  Come to Goa.
• * 1.55

  The Eng∣lish Presi∣dent visits the Viceroy.
• * 1.56

  The Jesuits of Goa treat him.
• * 1.57

  A feast at the profess∣ed house of the Jesuits.
• * 1.58

  Another Feast at the Jesuits Colledge.
• * 1.59

  The Sepul∣chro of Francis Xavier.
• * 1.60

  The Ho∣spital of Goa.
• * 1.61

  The Mona∣stery of the Augustines
• * 1.62

  The Vice∣roy's Pre∣sents to the President.
• * 1.63

  Mande ••lo lea••••es Goa.
• * 1.64

  Goa de∣scribed.
• * 1.65

  Goa hath no w••ll.
• * 1.66

  〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.67

  The Portu∣guez of Goa pr••u∣der then any other.
• * 1.68

  Winter be∣gins in June.
• * 1.69

  The Disea∣ses of those parts.
• * 1.70

  The Women go abroad.
• * 1.71

  The jealou∣sie of the Portuguez
• * 1.72

  The Portu∣guez Soul∣diers.
• * 1.73

  Their Mar∣riages and Christnings.
• * 1.74

  Their Slaves.
• * 1.75

  The Inhabi∣tants of the Country, and their houses.
• * 1.76

  The Deca∣nins excel∣lent Gra∣vers, &c.
• * 1.77

  Their wo∣men delive∣red wi••hout pain.
• * 1.78

  They live in perfect health to 100. years of age.
• * 1.79

  The Jews of Goa.
• * 1.80

  Their mo∣ney.
• * 1.81

  Customes upon For∣reign Com∣modities.
• * 1.82

  The Viceroy of Goa.
• * 1.83

  Mandels••c continues his Voyage.
• * 1.84

  Monte∣leone.
• * 1.85

  The Mala∣bars.
• * 1.86

  Zamori•• Emperour of Calicut•• and Cana∣nor.
• * 1.87

  The privi∣ledges of the Nayres
• * 1.88

  The wri∣ting of the Malabars.
• * 1.89

  The order of successi∣on in Ca∣licuth.
• * 1.90

  Cochim described.
• * 1.91

  The power of the King of Cochim A great Priviledge of the Bra∣mans.
• * 1.92

  The Zamo∣rin of Ca∣licuth was sometime Emperour of the Ma∣labars.
• * 1.93

  An Engage∣ment with the Mala∣bar Pirates.
• * 1.94

  Pass in sight of Cochim.
• * 1.95

  The Cope of Comory.
• * 1.96

  The Isle of Ceylon.
• * 1.97

  The ancient Tapro∣bane.
• * 1.98

  Its des••rip∣tion.
• * 1.99

  When dis¦covered by the Portu∣guez.
• * 1.100

  The History of Fimala Derma King of Candy.
• * 1.101

  Derma murthers his Father and three Brothers.
• * 1.102

  Fimala de∣clares a∣gainst the Portuguez
• * 1.103

  Gives Battle.
• * 1.104

  The second Battle given.
• * 1.105

  The trea∣chery of a Portuguez Renegado.
• * 1.106

  The Hol∣landers ill treated in the Isle of Zeilon.
• * 1.107

  The King∣dom of Candy.
• * 1.108

  The Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.109

  The Wo∣men.
• * 1.110

  Victuals cheap.
• * 1.111

  Their Re∣ligion.
• * 1.112

  Kings tri∣butary to the Portu∣guez.
• * 1.113

  Mines of Gold and Silver.
• * 1.114

  The Mal∣dives.
• * 1.115

  The Coast of Coro∣mandel.
• * 1.116

  The Inhabi∣tants on the Coast of Coroman∣del are Christians▪
• * 1.117

  A History of Saint Tho∣mas.
• * 1.118

  Saint Tho∣mas the Apostle martyr'd at Edessa.
• * 1.119

  The Town of Melia∣pour.
• * 1.120

  Orixa▪
• * 1.121

  Masulipa∣tam and Golcanda.
• * 1.122

  Bengala.
• * 1.123

  The Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.124

  Their su∣perstition.
• * 1.125

  Pegu.
• * 1.126

  Crocodiles in the Moat.
• * 1.127

  The Palace Royal.
• * 1.128

  The Guard.
• * 1.129

  The Kings Forces
• * 1.130

  He makes war upon his Vncle king of Auva.
• * 1.131

  A just exe∣cution, but too sev••••••.
• * 1.132

  A single Combat be∣twixt two Kings.
• * 1.133

  The Idols.
• * 1.134

  The Pegu∣ans Arms.
• * 1.135

  They are Pagans.
• * 1.136

  Adore the Devil.
• * 1.137

  Their Feasts.
• * 1.138

  How the Kings Corps are burnt.
• * 1.139

  The Church∣men.
• * 1.140

  A strange Souce.
• * 1.141

  Other pecu∣liar Cu∣stoms.
• * 1.142

  The third part of all real Estates falls to the King. Merchan∣dizes of Pegu▪
• * 1.143

  Siam.
• * 1.144

  Menam a River.
• * 1.145

  Overflows as Nile doth.
• * 1.146

  Siam very populous.
• * 1.147

  India.
• * 1.148

  Its houses.
• * 1.149

  The King of Siam of a very anci∣ent Family.
• * 1.150

  Is absolute.
• * 1.151

  His manne•• of life.
• * 1.152

  Hath but one Wife,
• * 1.153

  A magnifi∣cent Pre∣cession.
• * 1.154

  Procession upon the River.
• * 1.155

  The Reve∣nue.
• * 1.156

  His Ex∣pences.
• * 1.157

  Their pu∣nishments.
• * 1.158

  Manners of Iustificati∣on.
• * 1.159

  The Militi•• of Siam.
• * 1.160

  Their Arme••.
• * 1.161

  Both the Kings of Siam and Pegu pre∣tend to So∣veraignty.
• * 1.162

  The King of Siam friend to the Hollander••▪
• * 1.163

  Elephant hunting.
• * 1.164

  A white Elephant▪
• * 1.165

  The occasi∣on of the war be∣tween the Kings of Pegu and Siam.
• * 1.166

  Raja Hapi King of Siam.
• * 1.167

  The King a Pagan.
• * 1.168

  A Hierar∣chy.
• * 1.169

  Vow Cha∣stity, but may quit the priest∣hood.
• * 1.170

  Beguins.
• * 1.171

  Their belief
• * 1.172

  Lights in the Mos∣queys.
• * 1.173

  Prayers for the dead.
• * 1.174

  The Sia∣medes in∣voke the Devil.
• * 1.175

  Are well sh••p••d.
• * 1.176

  Their qua∣lities.
• * 1.177

  Their ha∣bits.
• * 1.178

  Their hou∣ses.
• * 1.179

  Their mar∣riages.
• * 1.180

  Education of Children.
• * 1.181

  The Traf∣fick of the City of In∣dia.
• * 1.182

  The King a Merchant.
• * 1.183

  The money of Siam.
• * 1.184

  M••ney of Shels.
• * 1.185

  The settle∣ment of the Hollanders at Siam
• * 1.186

  The Pal∣lace Royal.
• * 1.187

  The Lords of Cambo∣dia.
• * 1.188

  The Portu∣guez ••••¦cluded the Hollanders
• * 1.189

  Malacca.
• * 1.190

  When disco∣vered.
• * 1.191

  Patana.
• * 1.192

  Description of Patana▪
• * 1.193

  Its Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.194

  Swallows nests.
• * 1.195

  The Air of Patana.
• * 1.196

  Mahume∣tans.
• * 1.197

  Johor.
• * 1.198

  The soyl fertile.
• * 1.199

  Sumatra.
• * 1.200

  The Riches.
• * 1.201

  Contains many King∣doms.
• * 1.202

  King of Achim▪
• * 1.203

  The Town of Achim.
• * 1.204

  The Inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.205

  Religion.
• * 1.206

  Their Vi∣ctuals.
• * 1.207

  The mourn∣ful day-tree.
• * 1.208

  Cocoes.
• * 1.209

  Ships made of it, as also Sails, Ca∣bles, &c.
• * 1.210

  How they make Wine.
• * 1.211

  Paper of this Tree.
• * 1.212

  Bananas.
• * 1.213

  Pepper.
• * 1.214

  Java.
• * 1.215

  Inhabitant.
• * 1.216

  The King of Bantam.
• * 1.217

  A flaming Mount.
• * 1.218

  Joartam.
• * 1.219

  Gerrici.
• * 1.220

  Surabaia.
• * 1.221

  Cidaye.
• * 1.222

  Taboan.
• * 1.223

  Cajam.
• * 1.224

  Japara.
• * 1.225

  Matram or Matavam.
• * 1.226

  Pati and Dauma.
• * 1.227

  Taggal.
• * 1.228

  Monuca∣on.
• * 1.229

  Jacattra.
• * 1.230

  Bantam.
• * 1.231

  The Kings Palace.
• * 1.232

  A Drum for a Clock.
• * 1.233

  The Guard of the town.
• * 1.234

  Market places.
• * 1.235

  Armourers.
• * 1.236

  Tuban.
• * 1.237

  The Javi∣ans, Mahu∣metans.
• * 1.238

  Fasts.
• * 1.239

  Divers Wives.
• * 1.240

  Tourg ••••••∣riages.
• * 1.241

  Magistrate of Bantam.
• * 1.242

  The Kings Councel.
• * 1.243

  The train and state of the Nobility
• * 1.244

  The quali∣ties of the Javians.
• * 1.245

  Good Soul∣diers.
• * 1.246

  Javians Sophuticate their w••res.
• * 1.247

  How they imploy their Slaves.
• * 1.248

  Strongers commer••s there.
• * 1.249

  The trade of China.
• * 1.250

  Coin of Java.
• * 1.251

  The Portu∣guez Com∣merce.
• * 1.252

  Oysters of three hun∣dred weight
• * 1.253

  Crocodiles.
• * 1.254

  Civet
• * 1.255

  Hens.
• * 1.256

  Rhinocerot.
• * 1.257

  Ants.
• * 1.258

  Areca.
• * 1.259

  Mangas.
• * 1.260

  Ananas.
• * 1.261

  Samaca.
• * 1.262

  Tamarind••
• * 1.263

  Tabaxir.
• * 1.264

  Boats of Canes.
• * 1.265

  Duriaons.
• * 1.266

  Lantor.
• * 1.267

  Cubebs.
• * 1.268

  Mangost∣han.
• * 1.269

  Talasse.
• * 1.270

  Jaca.
• * 1.271

  Wild Cin∣namon.
• * 1.272

  Carcapuli.
• * 1.273

  Costus In∣dicus.
• * 1.274

  Zerumbet▪
• * 1.275

  Galanga▪
• * 1.276

  Benjamin▪
• * 1.277

  Sandale▪
• * 1.278

  Ginger.
• * 1.279

  Anacar∣dium.
• * 1.280

  Palo de cuebro.
• * 1.281

  Calamba.
• * 1.282

  Lacque.
• * 1.283

  Other Drugs in Java.
• * 1.284

  The Dutch fortifie in Jacatra.
• * 1.285

  Batavia.
• * 1.286

  Madura▪ place of no trading.
• * 1.287

  Baly.
• * 1.288

  Its s••itua∣tion.
• * 1.289

  〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.290

  Abounds in Rice.
• * 1.291

  Fowl.
• * 1.292

  Drugs.
• * 1.293

  Fish.
• * 1.294

  Gold Mines.
• * 1.295

  Pulo raza.
• * 1.296

  The Isle of Borneo.
• * 1.297

  Borneo the Town.
• * 1.298

  Bazar.
• * 1.299

  The Haven
• * 1.300

  The Hol∣landers treat with the King of Sambas.
• * 1.301

  Celebes Isl••.
• * 1.302

  Amboyna.
• * 1.303

  The inhabi∣tants.
• * 1.304

  The disco∣very.
• * 1.305

  The Hol∣landers take Am∣boyna Ca∣stle.
• * 1.306

  Religion.
• * 1.307

  Consult with the Devil.
• * 1.308

  Superstiti∣o••s.
• * 1.309

  Circumcisi∣on.
• * 1.310

  Marriage.
• * 1.311

  Oaths.
• * 1.312

  Sorcerers▪
• * 1.313

  Their qua∣lities.
• * 1.314

  I••dotible.
• * 1.315

  Profaneness
• * 1.316

  The Hol∣landers possess it intirely.
• * 1.317

  Banda.
• * 1.318

  Arms.
• * 1.319

  They live long.
• * 1.320

  Nutmegs.
• * 1.321

  Maces.
• * 1.322

  The Oyl of Nutmeg.
• * 1.323

  The Hol∣landers Forts in Banda.
• * 1.324

  Prodigio•••• Serpents.
• * 1.325

  Moluc∣ques.
• * 1.326

  Sagu a sort of bread.
• * 1.327

  How they make bread of it.
• * 1.328

  Wine from the same Tree.
• * 1.329

  The Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.330

  Partly Ma∣humetans.
• * 1.331

  A particular policy.
• * 1.332

  The Clove ••ade.
• * 1.333

  The Portu∣guez seize it.
• * 1.334

  Dispossest by the Hol∣landers.
• * 1.335

  A difference between the Castilians and the Portuguez for the Mo∣luccaes.
• * 1.336

  Grounded on a false supposition.
• * 1.337

  Magellan finds a new passage.
• * 1.338

  Ternate.
• * 1.339

  Gamma lamma.
• * 1.340

  Cloves.
• * 1.341

  The tree grows without planting.
• * 1.342

  Avicen∣na's errour.
• * 1.343

  What cloves the Moluc∣caes yields yearly.
• * 1.344

  The Moun∣tain of Ter∣nate.
• * 1.345

  But one season in the Moluc∣caes.
• * 1.346

  Cusos.
• * 1.347

  A Wood in∣combustible.
• * 1.348

  Leaves turn'd to Butterflyes.
• * 1.349

  Tidor.
• * 1.350

  Birds of Pa∣radise.
• * 1.351

  King of Bachiam.
• * 1.352

  Machiam.
• * 1.353

  Philippins.
• * 1.354

  Manille.
• * 1.355

  Hunting of Crocodiles.
• * 1.356

  The Com∣merce of the Chine∣ses and Spaniards in the Phi∣lippins.
• * 1.357

  The Arch∣bishop of Manilla is Viceroy.
• * 1.358

  The City of Manilla.
• * 1.359

  It is doubt∣ed whether it be on Island or Continent.
• * 1.360

  The names and reve∣nues of the Great Lords of Japan.
• * 1.361

  The Reve∣nues of the Ministers of St••te.
• * 1.362

  The Empe∣rour of Ja∣pan's poli∣cy.
• * 1.363

  The Lords have three names.
• * 1.364

  Slaves dye with their Masters.
• * 1.365

  Their man∣n••r of rip∣ping their bellies.
• * 1.366

  Their Mes∣quites.
• * 1.367

  The Cities of ••apan are not wall'd▪
• * 1.368

  No Imposi∣tions in Japan.
• * 1.369

  The powe•• of Masters over their Servants.
• * 1.370

  Gaming a Crime.
• * 1.371

  All the Re∣lations of Offenders die with them.
• * 1.372

  A particu∣lar Punish∣ment for The••t.
• * 1.373

  The Crimes for which all the Kin∣dred are put to death.
• * 1.374

  A horrid execution.
• * 1.375

  Lying pu∣nished with death.
• * 1.376

  The Empe∣rours ex∣pence.
• * 1.377

  Jedo Ca∣stle.
• * 1.378

  The Palaces of the Kings.
• * 1.379

  The Empe∣rours Reti∣nue.
• * 1.380

  The Dayro
• * 1.381

  The Empe∣rours mag∣nificence.
• * 1.382

  His Trea∣sures.
• * 1.383

  The Em∣perour of Japan is a vice-roy.
• * 1.384

  Con••ines hi•• Wife to a Ca∣stle,
• * 1.385

  How the Emperour of Japan came to th•• Crown.
• * 1.386

  Ceremonies at the choic of a Nurse for the Day∣ro's son.
• * 1.387

  A revoluti∣on in Japan
• * 1.388

  A Souldier of Fortune gets to be General of the Army.
• * 1.389

  And Sove∣raign.
• * 1.390

  I•• poyson'd.
• * 1.391

  Besto•• the Regency on one of the Lords.
• * 1.392

  Puts to death the Heir of the Cown.
• * 1.393

  The Empe∣rour of Ja∣pan raises h•••• Armies upon the charge of h Subjects
• * 1.394

  Can raise 368000. foot, and 38800. horse.
• * 1.395

  Their Arms.
• * 1.396

  Their Com∣panies and Regiments.
• * 1.397

  The Coun∣cil of State.
• * 1.398

  The expen∣ces of great Lords.
• * 1.399

  Provisions dear.
• * 1.400

  The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in their build∣ings.
• * 1.401

  Three years requisite to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 an entrance for the Empe∣rour.
• * 1.402

  The Empe∣rour marries all the great Lords.
• * 1.403

  The women kept in re∣straint.
• * 1.404

  Women ne∣ver talk of business.
• * 1.405

  The gene∣rosity of a ••aponnese Wife.
• * 1.406

  An example of modesty in a 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.407

  Another ex∣ample of mo∣destie.
• * 1.408

  The reser∣vedness of their con∣versotien.
• * 1.409

  They are jealous.
• * 1.410

  Adultery severely punished.
• * 1.411

  Fornication permitted.
• * 1.412

  They have no Devoti∣on.
• * 1.413

  Their Pa∣godes and Priests.
• * 1.414

  Distinguish∣ed into se∣veral Sects.
• * 1.415

  A cruel kind of death.
• * 1.416

  Their opi∣nion con∣cerning the Soul.
• * 1.417

  No disputes about Re∣ligion.
• * 1.418

  They ha••e Christians.
• * 1.419

  Diabolical inventions to put Christians to death.
• * 1.420

  Their Hou∣ses.
• * 1.421

  They are civil.
• * 1.422

  No drink∣ing houses in Japan.
• * 1.423

  Their Mu∣sick.
• * 1.424

  Their Wine.
• * 1.425

  Tsia, how prepared.
• * 1.426

  Their Mar∣riages.
• * 1.427

  Their edu∣cation of their Chil∣dren.
• * 1.428

  Go not to School till seven or eight years of age.
• * 1.429

  Not swath'd.
• * 1.430

  The Ja∣ponneses tender in point of ho∣nour.
• * 1.431

  An Exam∣ple of it.
• * 1.432

  Are good Friends.
• * 1.433

  What For∣raigners trade thi∣ther.
• * 1.434

  The occasi∣on of the rupture be∣tween the Chineses and the Ja∣ponneses.
• * 1.435

  Japan was not peopled by Chine∣ses.
• * 1.436

  No Custom paid in Ja∣pan.
• * 1.437

  No corre∣spondence between the Empe∣rour of Ja∣pan and other Prin∣ces.
• * 1.438

  Their A∣rithmetick.
• * 1.439

  The Day••∣ro writes the History of the Country.
• * 1.440

  The Money of Japan.
• * 1.441

  Japan well stored with Cottel and Fowl.
• * 1.442

  Their Phy∣sicians.
• * 1.443

  The riches of Japan.
• * 1.444

  A particular way of melti••g Iron.
• * 1.445

  The Ro∣man Ca∣thol•••••• Re∣ligion planted in Japan.
• * 1.446

  The Spani∣ards ba∣••ished it.
• * 1.447

  The Dutch established there.
• * 1.448

  The Air of Japan.
• * 1.449

  Have many good quali∣ties.
• * 1.450

  Are distin∣guished in∣to five Orders.
• * 1.451

  The princi∣pal Mini∣sters of Ja∣pan.
• * 1.452

  The Pro∣cession of the Dayro and Empe∣rour.
• * 1.453

  The Day∣ro's bag∣gage.
• * 1.454

  The Ladies of Honour.
• * 1.455

  27. Lords of the Day∣ro's Reti∣nue.
• * 1.456

  24. Gentle∣men.
• * 1.457

  The Day∣ro's three Wives.
• * 1.458

  The chief Servants of those La∣dies.
• * 1.459

  68. Gentle∣men.
• * 1.460

  The Empe∣rour and his Word.
• * 1.461

  The greatest Lords of Japan.
• * 1.462

  The Day∣ro's Con∣cubines.
• * 1.463

  He Sacre∣tary.
• * 1.464

  His Musick.
• * 1.465

  The Dayro
• * 1.466

  The Iss•• of Tayovang
• * 1.467

  The Dutch settle there.
• * 1.468

  And 〈◊〉〈◊〉 new Zea∣land, Fer∣mosa.
• * 1.469

  An Anarchy.
• * 1.470

  The places possessed by the Dutch.
• * 1.471

  The Inha∣bitants of Fermosa.
• * 1.472

  Are civil and good natured.
• * 1.473

  Are ingeni∣ous.
• * 1.474

  〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.475

  Their Wine.
• * 1.476

  Their wo∣men go a∣fishing.
• * 1.477

  How the 〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 1.478

  Their hunt∣••••g.
• * 1.479

  The manner of their 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.480

  〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.481

  The Island of Tugin.
• * 1.482

  Their Ma∣gistracy.
• * 1.483

  Its Authori∣ty.
• * 1.484

  Their pu∣nishments.
• * 1.485

  The Magi∣strate hath no power.
• * 1.486

  They have a respect for old Age.
• * 1.487

  The Age of the men in order to marriage.
• * 1.488

  Their mar∣riages
• * 1.489

  A pleasant married life.
• * 1.490

  The Women bear no children till 35. years of Age.
• * 1.491

  Divorce lawful a∣mong them.
• * 1.492

  Their houses
• * 1.493

  Their suste∣nance.
• * 1.494

  Have no Fe∣stivals.
• * 1.495

  Dogshair-stuffs.
• * 1.496

  Their Fune∣rals.
• * 1.497

  They nei∣ther bury nor burn the dead.
• * 1.498

  A mad ra∣medy a∣gainst pain∣ful diseases.
• * 1.499

  Their Reli∣gion.
• * 1.500

  Their Sins.
• * 1.501

  Their Gods.
• * 1.502

  Women only employed a∣bout their Mysteries.
• * 1.503

  Their de∣votion (〈◊〉〈◊〉 Quakerisin)
• * 1.504

  The King∣dom of China.
• * 1.505

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.506

  Its extent,
• * 1.507

  The Pro∣vinces whereof it consists.
• * 1.508

  The 〈◊〉〈◊〉
• * 1.509

  The Pro∣vince of Peking. Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.510

  Its Cities.
• * 1.511

  The number of its Fa∣milies.
• * 1.512

  Its Reve∣nues.
• * 1.513

  Xuntien described.
• * 1.514

  The Palace.
• * 1.515

  The Pro∣vince of Xansi.
• * 1.516

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.517

  Its Cities
• * 1.518

  Families Revenue.
• * 1.519

  The quali∣ties of the Country.
• * 1.520

  The Pro∣vince of Xensi.
• * 1.521

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.522

  The num∣ber of its Families.
• * 1.523

  Its Reve∣nues.
• * 1.524

  Gold Mines.
• * 1.525

  Rhubarb.
• * 1.526

  Musk.
• * 1.527

  The great Wall.
• * 1.528

  By whom built.
• * 1.529

  The Pro∣vince of Xantung. Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.530

  Silks.
• * 1.531

  Its Cities and Fami∣lies.
• * 1.532

  Its Reve∣nue.
• * 1.533

  The Pro∣vince of Honan.
• * 1.534

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.535

  Its Cities and Fami∣lies.
• * 1.536

  Its Reve∣nui.
• * 1.537

  The Pro∣vince of Suchuen. Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.538

  Its Cities and Fami∣lies.
• * 1.539

  Its Reve∣nue.
• * 1.540

  Radix Si∣na.
• * 1.541

  The Pro∣vince of Huquang. Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.542

  Its Fami∣lies.
• * 1.543

  Its Reve∣nue.
• * 1.544

  The Pro∣vince of Kiangsi: Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.545

  Its Cities and Families.
• * 1.546

  Its Reve∣nues.
• * 1.547

  Porcelane made in Kiangsi.
• * 1.548

  The Pro∣vince of Nanking.
• * 1.549

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.550

  Its Cities.
• * 1.551

  Its Fami∣lies and Revenue.
• * 1.552

  The prodi∣gious Re∣venue of one Pro∣vinc••.
• * 1.553

  The Pro∣vince of Chekiang. Cities.
• * 1.554

  Families.
• * 1.555

  Its Reve∣nue.
• * 1.556

  Its abun∣dance in Silk▪
• * 1.557

  The City of Quinsay.
• * 1.558

  Marc Pau∣lo justified.
• * 1.559

  The great∣ness of the City of Hangcke••.
• * 1.560

  The Pro∣vince of Fokien:
• * 1.561

  Its Fron∣tiers. Cities.
• * 1.562

  Families and Reve∣nues.
• * 1.563

  The Inha∣bitants of Fokien trade most out of the Kingdom.
• * 1.564

  The Pro∣vince of Quantung.
• * 1.565

  Its Fron∣tiers.
• * 1.566

  Cities.
• * 1.567

  Families. Revenue.
• * 1.568

  The richest Province of China.
• * 1.569

  The indu∣stry of the Inhabitants.
• * 1.570

  The Pro∣vince of Quangsi.
• * 1.571

  Its Cities.
• * 1.572

  Frontiers.
• * 1.573

  Families and Reve∣nue.
• * 1.574

  The Pro∣vince of Queicheu.
• * 1.575

  Its Cities.
• * 1.576

  Revenue.
• * 1.577

  Frontiers.
• * 1.578

  The Pro∣vince of Iunnan▪
• * 1.579

  Its Frontier▪
• * 1.580

  Its wealth.
• * 1.581

  Cities.
• * 1.582

  Families and Reve∣nue.
• * 1.583

  There are both black and white Chineses.
• * 1.584

  The diffe∣rence of Fruits in China.
• * 1.585

  The Chi∣neses hate idleness.
• * 1.586

  China Fruits bet∣ter then ours.
• * 1.587

  Wax and Honey.
• * 1.588

  Sugar.
• * 1.589

  Flesh very cheap.
• * 1.590

  Spice.
• * 1.591

  Their fish∣ing.
• * 1.592

  How they breed Ducks.
• * 1.593

  How hatched.
• * 1.594

  The Inha∣bitants.
• * 1.595

  Their cloathing▪
• * 1.596

  Their Wo∣men.
• * 1.597

  Are ingenious.
• * 1.598

  Their Mo∣ney.
• * 1.599

  The provi∣sion for the subsistance of the poor.
• * 1.600

  Printing in China be∣fore we had it.
• * 1.601

  Their way of writing.
• * 1.602

  Their Pa∣per.
• * 1.603

  The dignity of Loytia.
• * 1.604

  The Chi∣neses very cere∣monious.
• * 1.605

  Their Feast▪
• * 1.606

  Plate.
• * 1.607

  Their new∣years day.
• * 1.608

  The honour they do Em∣bassadours.
• * 1.609

  Their wed∣dings.
• * 1.610

  Polygamy lawful.
• * 1.611

  The Go∣vernment of China Mo∣narchical.
• * 1.612

  Offensive Warr be∣come defen∣sive by a Fundamen∣tal Law.
• * 1.613

  Their King called Son of Heaven.
• * 1.614

  The Crown hereditary.
• * 1.615

  The Coun∣cel of State.
• * 1.616

  Astrology requisue in Councellors of State.
• * 1.617

  Viceroys & Governours
• * 1.618

  Other Offi∣cers of Pro∣vinces.
• * 1.619

  Officers of the Crown.
• * 1.620

  〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.621

  Debtors 〈◊〉〈◊〉 treated.
• * 1.622

  An admira∣ble order.
• * 1.623

  Their To••∣tures.
• * 1.624

  Prisons.
• * 1.625

  Their pu∣nishments.
• * 1.626

  That of Thieves.
• * 1.627

  The Visitors
• * 1.628

  The Reli∣gion of the chineses.
• * 1.629

  Their Divi∣nities.
• * 1.630

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 Chi∣na Saints.
• * 1.631

  The Fabl•• of Quanina
• * 1.632

  The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Neoma.
• * 1.633

  The Chi∣neses use inc••ntations
• * 1.634

  How they do it.
• * 1.635

  They in∣voke the Devil.
• * 1.636

  Their be∣li••f concer∣ning the Creation.
• * 1.637

  They be∣lieve the Immortality of the Soul.
• * 1.638

  And Me∣tempsy∣chosis.
• * 1.639

  Their Re∣ligious men
• * 1.640

  Vse Beads.
• * 1.641

  Funeral Ce∣remonies.
• * 1.642

  Their mourning.
• * 1.643

  The present State of China.
• * 1.644

  The Tartars possessed of China.
• * 1.645

  And forced thence.
• * 1.646

  The origine of the Roy∣al house of Teyming.
• * 1.647

  The begin∣ning of the Tartarian War.
• * 1.648

  Take the Metropolis of Leatung
• * 1.649

  Vanlie dies and suc∣ceeded by Tayohang He by Thi∣enki.
• * 1.650

  Wh•• forces ••way the Tartars.
• * 1.651

  But they re-enter Leaotung.
• * 1.652

  Take the Isle of Thaoyuen
• * 1.653

  The Kings of China, and Tarta∣ry dye.
• * 1.654

  The Chi∣neses be∣tray their Country.
• * 1.655

  Thien∣zung King of Tartary dies.
• * 1.656

  Lizungzo enters the Province of Xansi.
• * 1.657

  Takes the City of Pe∣king.
• * 1.658

  A Chinese calls the Tartar••te his relief against the Rebels.
• * 1.659

  Lizungzo flies
• * 1.660

  The Tar∣tars will not go out of China.
• * 1.661

  And pro∣claio•• their King Em∣perour of China.
• * 1.662

  Usanguei made King.
• * 1.663

  The Sou∣therly Pro∣vinces chuse ano∣ther Empe∣rour.
• * 1.664

  A Son of Zung∣chini'••.
• * 1.665

  The Tar∣tars enter the Pro∣vince of Nanking.
• * 1.666

  Hung∣quang strangled.
• * 1.667

  Several Chinese Lords retire to Han∣eheu. Another Emperour. Who is also strangled.
• * 1.668

  Another Prince in the Pro∣vince of Chekiang.
• * 1.669

  Another in that of Fo∣kien.
• * 1.670

  This divi∣sion proves the ruine of China.
• * 1.671

  The Tar∣tars reduce the Pro∣vince of Fokien.
• * 1.672

  The trea∣chery of a Chinese Pirat.
• * 1.673

  An Empe∣rour chosen in Quangsi